FRONTIER MINILAB 330 Service Manual

www.minilablaser.
com
SERVICE MANUAL
DIGITAL MINILAB
FRONTIER 330
FUJIFILM SCANNER AND LASER PRINTER
FRONTIER SLP-800SC
Servicing and Electrical Circuit Diagrams
System Disk Ver.1.0
First Edition
PP3-C917E
www.minilablaser.com
MENU
MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION
MESSAGES AND ACTIONS
SOFTWARE INSTALLATION
MAINTENANCE MENU
TROUBLESHOOTING FOR ABNORMAL IMAGES
OPERATION SECTION
FILM CARRIER SECTION
SCANNER SECTION
10
PAPER SUPPLY SECTION
11
PAPER FEED SECTION
12
REGISTRATION AND EXPOSURE SECTIONS
13
PRINTER EXIT SECTION
14
PROCESSOR SECTION
15
PROCESSING SOLUTION CIRCULATION SYSTEM
16
PROCESSING SOLUTION REPLENISHMENT SYSTEM
17
DRYER/SORTER SECTION
18
ELECTRICAL SECTION
19
ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
20
APPENDIX
INTRODUCTION
This Servicing Manual outlines the maintenance and servicing procedures for the Fujifilm Digital Minilab
FRONTIER 330 SLP-800SC.
This manual is a professional publication provided for qualified service personnel or persons fully trained in
equipment service procedures. All other personnel and operators are restricted from servicing the SLP-800SC.
When maintenance service is needed, be sure to contact qualified service personnel.
Precautions Generally Applying to All Serving Operations
! WARNING
When servicing internal machine parts, make sure the built-in circuit breaker and the main power supply on the power
distribution board are both set to the OFF position.
If the main power is left ON, electricity will flow as far as the power supply section, and this can cause electric shocks and/or
short-circuiting.
If the power is left on, there is also the possibility for the machine to maybe accidentally activated causing damage to the
machine and/or bodily injury.
! CAUTION
The light source section and dryer will be hot to the touch. Wait 15 minutes after turning off the power before commencing
with servicing procedures.
Wear gloves when handling the optical system parts to keep the parts free from fingerprints.
When mounting machine parts, take care not to sandwich any of the wires.
Each of the connectors is provided with a symbol indicating what it is to be connected to. Make sure the connectors are
connected to the connectors, harness ends or parts bearing the corresponding symbols.
The plastic connectors have a locking catch on the plug (male) end. To disconnect one of these connectors, loosen the
catch first; to connect, make sure the catch engages (locks).
Service Manual Appropriations

1. All rights are reserved by the Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd. (FUJIFILM).
2. Manual usage is restricted to FUJIFILM equipment related technical and service
personnel.
3. This manual contains information relating to FUJIFILM equipment and is therefore
proprietary. Unauthorized disclosure is prohibited.
4. FUJIFILMs prior consent is required in regard to the following.
K Manual copying in whole or in part.
K Disclosure of manual contents to unauthorized personnel.
K Manual uses for purposes other than technical service.
1. MENU
1.1 Menu Table
1.1 Menu Table

User (Password)
Classification
No.
Screen
Main Menu
Pre-operational
Check
Operator
Laboratory
Manager
SE1
SE2
0000
6666
7777
12 Check Item
Display
13 Scanner
Correction
14 Processor
Temperature
Check
15 Control Strip
Processing
16 Print Condition
Upkeep
(1) Quit
135
IX240
135/120
IX240
Back Print of
Custom Setting
(Display)
No.
Display Menu
(2) Printing
No.
(1)
(2)
Index Print
Back Print
Sub Menu
(3)
Front Print
(4)
P.SET Initial Setting
(5)
Special Film CH Select
(6)
Print Mode Selection
Normal Print
Mounted Print
Frame/Character
Print
Red-eye/Soft/
Cross
Digital Image
Import (sRGB)
Digital Image
Import
(No convert)
Digital Image
Export
Digital Image
Export and Print
Center Cropping
Free Cropping
(7)
(3) Scanner Op.
Pull-down Menu
Cropping
(8)
Preview
(9)
Exposure Condition
Retrieve
(1)
Original Select
(2)
Reorder1st Print
(3)
P.Size in Mixed Process
(4)
Frame Display Switch
61
(5)
Sort Data Display/Setting
(6)
FrameFeed
(7)
AF
1.1 Menu Table

User (Password)
Classification
No.
Screen
No.
Display Menu
(4) Image Correction
(5) Printer Op.

3
Postoperational
Check
No.
Pull-down Menu
Sub Menu
Setup and
Maintenance
SE2
0000
6666
7777
(2)
Sharpness
(3)
Monotone Correction
(4)
RP-tone Correction
(5)
Auto Correction ON/OFF
(6)
Custom Setting Number

Selection
(7)
Frame/Character Print
(8)
Retouch
(1)
Processor StartStop
412 Production Information 2
414 Timer Setup
415 Error log

information
41C Accumulated
error information
416 Installation Information

Reference
417 Data Backup
411 Product
Information 1
411 Production Information 1
415 Error Information Check
42 Print Condition
Setup and Check
SE1
Tone Adjustment
31 Check Item
Display
41 System Operation
Setup and Check
Laboratory
Manager
(1)
35 Next Timer ON
Date/Time
Confirmation
4
Operator
41E Clear Error Log
41F Installation Information

Setup
41G Shipping Information

Reference
41I DI Manager
Administrative Setting
41J Timer Waiting Time Setup
421 Paper Condition Setup
422 Processor Temperature

Check
423 Control Strip Processing
424 Print Size Setup
426 Monitor Adjustment
42C Image Correction Setup
42D Fine Adjustment of the

Print Mag. Setting
42E Special Film Channel

Setting
42G Monotone Correction

Setting
42J Paper Condition Method

Setup
42K Shop Logo Registration/
Delete
K
K
1.1 Menu Table

Classification
No.
Screen
No.
Display Menu
43 Scanner
Adjustment/
Maintenance
User (Password)
Operator
Laboratory
Manager
SE1
SE2
0000
6666
7777
42L Template Registration/

Delete
42M Custom Setting

Registration/Delete
42N Holiday File Registration/

Delete
431 Input Check
432 Focus Calibration
433 Focus Position

Adjustment
434 Operation Information

Display
No.
Pull-down Menu
Sub Menu
43A I/O Check
43B Carrier Inclination Display
43C CCD Data Display
43D Lens Registration
43E Optical Axis Adjustment
43F Optical Magnification

Calibration
43G Bright Correction
43H Dark Correction

43J Spectral Calibration
43K DC Offset Cancel
43L LED Light Amount

Adjustment
441 Mask Position Adjustment
442 NC100AC Input Check
448 Monitor Frame Ratio

Setup
44A NC100AC Sensor

Calibration
44C NC100AC Sensor

Calibration Information
43U Unexposed Frame Detect

Level
44 Carrier
Adjustment/
Maintenance
44D NC100AC Installation

Information Display
44E NC100AC Installation

Information Setup
44F NC100AC I/O Check
44K NC100AC Machine Data

Setup
44M NC100AC Magnetic

Information Reading
44N NC100AC Magnetic Verify
44R NC100AC Fixed Feeding

Setup
45 Printer
Adjustment/
Maintenance
451 Paper Magazine

Registration
452 Paper Feed Length

Adjustment
453 Test Pattern Printing
1.1 Menu Table

Classification
No.
Screen
No.
Display Menu
User (Password)
Operator
Laboratory
Manager
SE1
SE2
0000
6666
7777
454 G, B Laser (SHG) Optimal

Temperature Setup
455 Paper Feed
456 Printer Temperature

Display
457 Printer Input Check
458 Image Position Fine

Adjustment
No.
Pull-down Menu
45A Printer I/O Check
45B Filter Replacement

History
45C Laser Exposure Check
45D R Laser (R-LD) Data
45E G Laser (G-SHG) Data
45F B Laser (B-SHG) Data
45G Scanning Position/

Scanning Home Position
Parameter Setup
45H Main Scanning Position

Adjustment/Laser Beam
Sync. Rough Adjustment
45J Laser Beam Sync. Fine

Adjustment Print
45K Laser History Display
45L Paper Condition Setup

Table (LUT) Copy
45M Printer Mechanism Fine

Adjustment
45N Back Printer Test
45P Printer Operation Data

Display
45Q Clearing Selected Printer

Operation Data
45R Clearing All Operation

Data
45S Side Register Calibration
45T Data Saving
45U Data Download
45V Precut Length Setting

46 Processor
Adjustment/
Maintenance
Sub Menu
461 Pump Output

Measurement/Setting
462 Auto Cleaning Output

Measurement/Setting
463 Processing Temperature

Setting
464 Replenisher Rate Setting
465 Evaporation Correction

Rate Setting
466 Low Volume Setup
467 Processor Temperature

Calibration
468 Processor Input Check
46A Processor I/O Check
1.1 Menu Table

Classification
No.
Screen
No.
Display Menu
No.
User (Password)
Pull-down Menu
46B Processor Operating

Condition Setup
49 Self-Diagnostic
Sub Menu
Operator
Laboratory
Manager
SE1
SE2
0000
6666
7777
46C Processor Operation Data

Display
46D Clearing Selected

Processor Operation Data
46E Processor Operation Data

Display 2
46F Installation
491 Trouble Help
492 Help Update
493 Abnormal Image Check
494 Paper Feed Check
410 Special Operations 410A Paint
410B Explorer
410C Command
2. MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION

2.1 Maintenance Schedule
2.2 Regular Maintenance and
Inspection Table
2.3 Maintenance and Inspection
2.3.1
2.3.2
2.3.3
2.3.4
2.3.5
2.3.6
2.3.7
2.3.8
Laser Unit Air Filter Replacement

Cutter Inspection
Dryer Rack Roller Inspection/Cleaning
Processing Solution Level Sensor Inspection
Waste Solution Level Sensor Inspection
Processing Rack Drive Gear Lubrication
Processor Drive Chain Lubrication
Replenisher Cartridge Washing Nozzle
Cleaning
2.3.9
Circulation Pump Inspection
2.3.10 Processing Rack Roller Inspection
2.3.11 Processing Tank Heater Inspection
2.3.12 Dryer Rack Drive Chain Lubrication
2.1 Maintenance Schedule
Schedule (Every)
Item
Diffusion Box
Auto Film Carrier NC100AC
Control Strip
Magnetic Heads of Auto Film Carrier NC100AC
No.6 Crossover Rack
Light Source Cooling Air Filter
Day
Pre-operational Post-operational
Check
Check
Clean
Clean
Process/Check
Clean
Wash
Week
Month
3 Months
Year
Clean
Printer Section Cooling Air Filters

Clean
Power Supply Section Cooling Air Filter
Clean
Control Section Cooling Air Filter
Clean
Solution Heater Cooling Air Filters
Clean
Dryer Air Filter
Clean
Crossover Racks
Wash
Dryer Entrance Guide/Roller
Clean
Circulation Filters
Replace
Processing Racks
Wash
Laser Unit Cooling Air filter
Replace
Densitometer Whiteboard
Clean
Auto Washing Nozzle Joint Rubbers
Replace
G, B Laser (SHG) Optimal Temperature Setup
Execute*
*: Message to indicate execution will appear on the screen one month after initial installation and every three months thereafter.
2.2 Regular Maintenance and Inspection Table
Implementation Period (Every)

Item
Scanner
Printer
Main Scanning Position/Laser Beam

Synchronous Adjustment
Laser Unit Air Filter
Cutter
Sub-scanning Steel Belt
Replenisher Pump Output
Auto Cleaning Output
Dryer Rack Rollers

Processing Solution Lever Sensors
Waste Solution Level Sensor
Processing Rack Drive Gears
Processor Drive Chain
Processor
Replenisher Cartridge Washing Nozzles
Circulation Pumps
Processing Rack Rollers
Processing Tank Heaters
Processing Solution Temperature Sensors
Hose Clamps
Dryer Rack Drive Chain
6 Months
Year
2 Years
Inspect
Replace
Inspect
Replace
Measure/Set up
Measure/Set up
Inspect/Clean
Inspect
Inspect
Lubricate
Lubricate
Clean
Inspect
Inspect
Inspect
Inspect/Calibrate
Inspect
Lubricate
Refer to
Subsection:
5.6.15/
5.6.16
2.3.1
Replace 2.3.2/10.4.2
12.3.2
5.7.1
5.7.2
3 Years
2.3.3
2.3.4
2.3.5
2.3.6
2.3.7
2.3.8
2.3.9
2.3.10
2.3.11
5.7.7
15.2.8
2.3.12

2.3.1 Laser Unit Air Filter Replacement
Removal
1. Shut OFF the system after performing the
post-operational checks and turn OFF the
built-in circuit breaker and the main power
supply.
2. Open the magazine door and remove the
front upper cover.
Front Upper Cover
Magazine Door
CD006
3. Loosen the screw, remove the screw and

then the filter section cover.
Screw (Remove)
Screw (Loosen)
Filter Section Cover
CD708
4. Loosen the screw and remove the air filter.
Air Filter
Installation
Install the air filter in the reverse order of
removal.
After installation, click [Replace] in the menu
45B Filter Replacement History screen.
Screw (Loosen)
CD709
2.3.2 Cutter Inspection

1. In menu 452 Paper Feed Length
Adjustment, enter 82.5 in Small Size
boxes and 254.0 in Large Size boxes for
both Feed length set value and Actual
measured value.
2. In menu 453 Test Pattern Printing, print

Grid patterns with 254.0 and 82.5
lengths for all paper magazines to be used.
3. Check the edges of the prints. If they are
rough, replace the cutter with a new one
(see subsection 10.4.2).
4. Measure and record the length of the grid
test pattern prints.
5. In menu 452 Paper Feed Length

Adjustment, enter actual measured lengths
in Actual measured value boxes.
6. Click [OK].
2.3.3 Dryer Rack Roller Inspection/Cleaning

1. Remove the dryer section
cover (see subsection 17.1.1).
2. Inspect the dryer rollers for:
Spring (No Mark)

Spring (Black Mark)
smooth rotation by turning them

by hand.
Spring (Red Mark)
paper passage without deflection

by turning the knob by hand.
surface damage.
nip coil spring deterioration.
3. Clean or replace the parts if
necessary.
4. Reinstall the dryer section
cover.
Black soft (32)

Black hard (20)
Black soft (20)
White hard (20)
White hard (20)
White hard (20)
White hard (20)
Brown hard (20)
White soft (20)
Black hard (22)
Black hard (20)
Black hard (16)
CD226
2.3.4 Processing Solution Level Sensor Inspection

1. Open the menu 468 Processor Section
Input Check screen.
2. Remove the circulation filter section cover.

3. Remove the screw and then the level sensor.
Screw
Level Sensor
CD348
4. Immerse the tip of the sensor in water and

move it up and down. The sensor is normal if
it matches the screen display.
Level Sensor
5. Reinstall the level sensor and circulation

filter section cover.
Water
EZ243
2.3.5 Waste Solution Level Sensor Inspection

1. Open the circuit board bracket
2. Remove the waste solution tank cap.
Waste Solution Tank Cap

CD330
3. Turn ON the main power supply and the

built-in circuit breaker and start the system
up by pressing the START switch.
4. Open the menu 468 Processor Section
Input Check screen.
5. Immerse the tip of the sensor in water and

move it up and down. The sensor is normal if
it matches the screen display.
6. Reinstall the level sensor and removed
parts.
Water
Sensor
CD1088
2.3.6 Processing Rack Drive Gear Lubrication

supply.
2. Remove the No.1 to No.6 crossover racks.
Drive Gears
3. Apply the recommended grease to the drive

gears.
Recommended Grease:
FUJI MINILAB GREASE FOR CHAIN AND
GEAR
(P/N 891G02003) or equivalent
4. Reinstall the No.1 to No.6 crossover racks.
E116
2.3.7 Processor Drive Chain Lubrication

supply.
2. Remove the No.1 to No.6 crossover racks.
Drive Chain
3. Wipe off grease from the drive chain and

sprockets.
chain.
Recommended Grease:
GEAR
5. Reinstall the crossover racks.
E116
2.3.8 Replenisher Cartridge Washing Nozzle Cleaning

1. Open the replenisher box door and remove
the replenisher cartridge.
2. Clean the washing nozzles using a
toothbrush.
3. Install the replenisher cartridge and close
the door.
Toothbrush
Washing Nozzles
EZ758
2.3.9 Circulation Pump Inspection

1. Remove the circulation pump section cover
2. Turn ON the main power supply and the
built-in circuit breaker and start the system
up by pressing the START switch.
3. Open the menu 46A Processor Section I/O
Check screen.
4. Check the pumps for proper operation by
clicking [ON] and [OFF] for PU401 to PU406
Circulation Pumps.
5. Reinstall the circulation pump section cover.
2.3.10 Processing Rack Roller Inspection

1. Remove the No.1 to No.6 crossover racks
and wash them with warm water
(30C to 40C/86F to 104F).
2. Remove the P1 processing rack and wash it
with warm water.
3. Check for:
smooth rotation by turning the rollers by hand.
paper passage without deflection by turning
the knob by hand.
damage on the roller surface.
deterioration of the roller nip coil spring.
CD225
4. Return the P1 processing rack and install the

contamination prevention cover over the P1
tank.
5. Install the splash cover over the dryer fan
section.
6. Remove the P2 to PS4 processing rack and
perform step 3.
Splash Prevention Cover
IMPORTANT:
Take special care to prevent overflow of the P2
solution into the P1 solution.
7. If the soft rollers on the racks are slimy, wipe
them clean with a cloth moistened with warm
water.
8. Replace the parts if necessary.
9. Remove the contamination prevention cover
and splash prevention cover.
10. Reinstall the No.1 to No.6 crossover racks.
Contamination
Prevention Cover
CD117
2.3.11 Processing Tank Heater Inspection

1. Start the system up and open the menu 422
Processor Temperature Check screen.
2. Check that the temperatures increase
properly.
3. If the temperature increases slowly or does
not rise, the circulation filters are clogged or
the safety thermostat or heater may
malfunction.
Safety Thermostat Replacement:
See subsection 15.2.5.
Processing Tank Heater Replacement:
See subsection 15.2.6.
2.3.12 Dryer Rack Drive Chain Lubrication

supply.
2. Remove the dryer section cover
Drive Chain
3. Wipe grease off the dryer rack drive chain

and sprockets.
chain.
Recommended Grease:
GEAR
5. Reinstall the dryer section cover.
E117
3. MESSAGES AND ACTIONS

3.1 Error Indication Rule
3.1.1
3.1.2
3.1.3
Message Number
Message Icon
X-#### Actions
3.2 Messages and Actions
3.1 Error Indication Rule

3.1.1 Message Number
The messages are identified by the following four codes.
Symbol
Error
Trouble (Error requires action of the service representative.)
Mismatching of condition (Error can be corrected by the operator.)
Information
Software trouble
The first two digits indicate the location or operation of the error occurred.
No.
Error Location
11XX
Scanner
12XX
CTC22 circuit board
13XX
Scanner image processing
14XX
Film carrier
15XX
Operation
21XX
Scanner to printer interface
22XX
Printer operation
23XX
Printer control
24XX
Paper feed
25XX
Laser printer
26XX
Processor
3.1.2 Message Icon

Icon
Error
Errors with code E (Take measures after turning OFF the power
supply.)
Errors with code E , W or X (Error can be recovered.)
For code I (Informations)
3.1.3 X-#### Actions

X-#### errors (software error)
Take the following actions.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Write down the error number.

Restart the system.
Reinstall the software if the problem persists.
Create the report in the specified format.

No.
W-1101
Message
Film or mask not installed.
Install film or mask.
E-1102
I-1103
Factor
(Causes of the error message)
1. A film or mask is not installed.
2. Film leading end sensor/mask sensor -toCYS22 circuit board -toplug-in connector
-to- CTC22 circuit board, poorly connected
or broken harness
3. Faulty CYS22 circuit board
4. Faulty CTC22 circuit board
Actions
1. Install the film or mask correctly.
2. Reconnect the connector or repair/
replace the harness.
3. Replace the CYS22 circuit board.

4. Replace the CTC22 circuit board.
No optical magnification
calibration data.
Optical magnification calibration
not done.
Consult your technical
representative.
An operation such as scanning was

attempted without first performing the optical
magnification calibration.
1. The calibration that was registered after
the lens was exchanged has not been
performed.
Carrier installation data will be

written into the carrier
EEPROM.
Confirmation message before writing data to

the EEPROM
A scanning operation was attempted without

first performing the scanner adjustment/
maintenance.
Perform the scanner correction at the

pre-operational check.
1. Perform Optical Magnification

Calibration (43F).
Do not remove the carrier.

W-1104
Scanner correction not

performed.
Perform the scanner correction
in 1. Pre-operational Check .
W-1105
Carrier not installed correctly or

no carrier installed.
Install carrier correctly.
W-1107
Carrier upper cover opened.

Remove carrier and then close
carrier cover.
W-1109
Scanner correction not started

because the film or mask exists.

attempted while the carrier was not installed.
1. The carrier is not installed.
2. Plug-in connector -to- CTC22 circuit
board, poorly connected or broken
harness
attempted while the carrier cover was open.
1. The carrier pressure cover was opened
after the carrier was installed.
2. Upper cover open/close sensor (D120) to- CYS22 circuit board -toplug-in
connector -to- CTC22 circuit board, poorly
connected or broken harness
3. Faulty D120
Scanner correction was attempted with film
or mask left installed.
1. Install the carrier.

1. Remove the carrier and close the

pressure cover.
3. Replace the sensor.

NC100AC: Remove film.
M69D: Install the calibration mask.
Remove film or mask.

W-1110
Diffusion box not installed.

Install it.
Scanning was attempted without the diffusion

box installed.
1. The diffusion box is not set correctly.
2. Faulty diffusion box sensor
3. Poorly connected or broken harness
between the diffusion box sensor and
CTP22 circuit board
4. Faulty CTP22 circuit board
1. Install the diffusion box correctly.

3. Reconnect the harness or repair/
4. Replace the CTP22 circuit board.

No.
Message
W-1111
No data for focus calibration.

Focus calibration not performed.
Perform the focus calibration in
3. Scanner Adjustment /
Maintenance in 4. Setup and
Maintenance .

attempted without first performing the focus
calibration.
1. The necessary data set has not been
created.
2. The necessary data set was deleted by
mistake.
Perform Focus Calibration (432).
W-1112
No focus position adjustment

data for each carrier.
Focus position adjustment for
each carrier not performed.
Perform the focus position
adjustment in 3. Scanner
Adjustment / Maintenance in
4. Setup and Maintenance .

attempted without first performing the focus
position adjustment.
1. The necessary data set has not been
created.
mistake.
Install the correct carrier/mask and

perform Focus Position Adjustment
(433).
I-1114
Measuring.
An operation such as the optical

magnification calibration, focus calibration, or
LED light amount adjustment is in progress.
Wait until the operation is completed.
Please wait.
E-1117
E-1118
W-1120
No lens data registered.

Lens registration not performed.
Call technical representative.

attempted without the lens data registered.
mistake.
No optical magnification
calibration data.
not performed.

attempted without first performing the optical
1. The calibration that was registered after
the lens was exchanged has not been
performed.
Wrong combination of carrier,

mask and diffusion box.
The film carrier and diffusion box do not

match.
1. 135 diffusion box is installed.
2. Incorrect wiring to the diffusion box sensor
(D201, D202)
Install the carrier and diffusion

box in a correct combination.
W-1121
Factor
Carrier not installed correctly or

no carrier installed.
Install carrier correctly.

attempted without the carrier installed.
1. The carrier pressure cover was opened
after the carrier was installed.
2. Upper cover open/close sensor (D120) to- CYS22 circuit board -toplug-in
3. Faulty D120
Actions
1. Register Lens ID No. and Lens focal

distance in Lens Register (43D).
1. Perform Optical Magnification

Calibration (43F).
1. Install the 120 diffusion box.

2. Repair or replace the sensor.

pressure cover.


No.
W-1122
Message
Film or cartridge remains.
Remove the carrier and then
take out the film or cartridge.
W-1123
No film.
Insert film.
E-1126
DC offset cancel failed.

Even in the minimum setting the
DC level was beyond the aim
range.
Factor
attempted with film remaining.
1. The cartridge was left in the carrier.
2. Cartridge sensor (D115) -to- CYS22
circuit board -toplug-in connector -toCTC22 circuit board, poorly connected or
broken harness
3. Faulty D115
1. Scanning was attempted without the film
installed.
2. Film leading end sensor (D101/D104) -toCYS22 circuit board -toplug-in connector
-to- CTP22 circuit board, poorly connected
or broken harness
3. Faulty D101/D104
The level is not within the specified range
even if the DC level is set to the lower limit.
1. Faulty CCD, ADC, and image processing
section circuit boards
2. Faulty harness between the image
processing section and the CCD circuit
board
3. Faulty power supply unit
Actions
1. Remove the cartridge.


1. Set the film.

1. Perform Abnormal Image Check

(493) and follow the instruction found
in this menu 493.
2. Repair or replace the harness.
3. Replace the PWR22 circuit board.
*The light source and CTC22 circuit board do

not cause this problem.
E-1127

Restart the system. If problems
persist, consult your technical
representative.
The DC offset could not be adjusted normally.

2. Blown fuse (FE5, FE7) in the CTC22
circuit board
3. Blown fuse (FH3, FH32, FH38, or FH39) in
the PWR22 circuit board
W-1130
The auto light amount

adjustment failed because the
output in the scanner section is
too much.
Check the light source, scanner
and carrier sections, and then
film.
E-1131

The auto light amount adjustment could not

be completed in the auto focus mode or
during brightness correction.
1. Faulty CCD, light source, and image
processing section circuit boards
The level is not within the specified range
even if the DC level is set to the upper limit.

in this menu 493.
2. Replace the fuse.

in this menu 493.

in this menu 493.

No.
W-1132
Message
Auto focus failed.
Check if carrier, film and mask
are set correctly.
Factor
The auto focus function could not achieve
proper focus.
1. The carrier is not firmly pressed against
the carrier base.
2. The film is not firmly pressed.
3. Faulty scanner drive section (Lens/

Conjugate length variable motor)
4. There is an obstacle in the optical path
(between the original negative and the
lens).
5. The original negative is not set, or the
current process focused the optical
system on an unexposed part of a film.
W-1133
Incorrect carrier ID.
Incorrect carrier is going to be used to

perform adjustment/maintenance.
Actions
1. Install the carrier correctly.

2. Check the carrier upper mask for the
state, or perform NC100AC Input/
Output Check (44F) to check mask
pressing operation.
3. Repair the drive section.
4. Remove the obstacle.
5. Set the original negative or check it for

the state.
Install the correct carrier.
Install correct carrier.

W-1135
Incorrect diffusion box.

Install the correct diffusion box.
W-1140
Mask not installed.

Install mask.
W-1143
The display data will be cleared.

1. Adjustment was attempted with an
incorrect diffusion box.
2. Faulty diffusion box sensor
between the diffusion box sensor and the
CTC22 circuit board
1. Install the correct diffusion box.

A mask specially designed for the brightness

correction is not installed for the spectral
calibration, focus position adjustment, or
brightness correction.
Install a mask specially designed for the

brightness correction.
Data clear confirmation message on

operational information data
Press [OK] or [Cancel].
The mechanism is being initialized after the

maintenance on a carrier or other parts has
been performed.
Wait until the initialization is completed.
The brightness correction for the spectral

calibration is going to start.
Install the manual film carrier with the

calibration mask and then press [OK].
OK?
I-1144
Initializing.
Please wait.
I-1145
Perform the bright correction.

Install the carrier.
I-1146
Measurement was completed

correctly.
The spectral calibration is now completed.
Press [OK].
I-1147
Sensor calibration data will be

written into carrier EEPROM.
Confirmation message on writing data into

the EEPROM
Confirmation message on writing data into

the EEPROM

I-1148
Correction data will be written

into the carrier EEPROM.

No.
Message
Factor
E-1152
Communication error occurred.
Timeout occurred between the scanner PC

and SH.
1. Communication error due to the SCSI
cable between the main control unit and
the GHT22 circuit board
2. Faulty GMB22 circuit board
3. The GHT22 circuit board is faulty or the
board is not installed correctly.
4. Faulty SCSI board in the main control unit.

representative.
W-1153
Auto-focus failure.
are installed correctly.
During the auto focus operation, the peak

was always at the highest position even
though the same operation was tried again.
1. The carrier is off the surface.
2. The manual film carrier mask is not
installed correctly.
3. The film is not pressed correctly against
the surface or film curling is excessive.
4. Focus position maladjustment
5. Home position detection failure of the
scanner-related mechanism drive section,
or other drive system failure
W-1156
Auto-focus failure.
are installed correctly.
During the auto focus operation, the peak

was always at the lowest position even
though the same operation was tried again.
1. The carrier is off the surface.
2. The manual film carrier mask is not
installed correctly.
3. The film is not pressed correctly against
the surface or film curling is excessive.
4. Focus position maladjustment
5. Home position detection failure of the
scanner-related mechanism drive section,
or other drive system failure
W-1157
No FD or wrong FD inserted.
Insert the calibration FD into the
drive.
W-1159
Image data judge error

occurred.
Insert film again.
Actions
1. Reconnect or replace the cable.
2. Replace the GMB22 circuit board.

3. Reconnect or replace the CHT22
circuit board.
4. Replace the SCSI board in the main
control unit.

2. Install the mask correctly.
3. Confirm whether or not the film is
installed.
4. Perform Focus Position Adjustment
(433).
5. Replace the CCD unit.

2. Install the mask correctly.
3. Confirm whether or not the film is
installed.
4. Perform Focus Position Adjustment
(433).
A floppy disk insertion error occurred during

the spectral calibration.
1. The floppy disk used for the spectral
calibration is not inserted.
2. The data on the floppy disk is corrupted.
3. The FDD in the main control unit is faulty.
1. Insert the correct floppy disk.
Image data criterion error occurred during the

spectral calibration.
1. The spectral calibration chart is upside
down, inverted or out of sequence.
2. Film type is incorrectly exchanged
between the positive and negative films
when writing data into a floppy disk.
3. Incorrect chart
4. Incorrect shade
1. Try the operation again after checking

the procedure and original used.
the original used.
2. Use an error-free floppy disk.

3. Replace the main control unit.
3. Replace or clean the chart.

4. Check whether or not the shield mask
and external light satisfy the required
conditions.

No.
W-1160
Message
Calculating of adjustment
parameter failed.
Measurement cancelled.
W-1164
An error occurred during the

pre-scan.
Factor
A calculation error occurred with a spectral
adjustment parameter during the spectral
calibration.
1. The spectral calibration chart is upside
down, inverted or out of sequence.
2. Film type is incorrectly exchanged
between the positive and negative films
when writing data into a floppy disk.
3. Incorrect chart
4. Incorrect shade
An error occurred during the pre-scanning

process used with the spectral calibration.
1. Faulty system software
2. Faulty hardware
W-1165

fine-scan.
W-1166

fine-scan.
An error occurred while executing a finescanning used with the spectral calibration.
1. The original and floppy disk do not match.
2. The original is upside down, inverted or
out of sequence.
3. The position verification cursor is out of
place.
4. Abnormality in the CCD unit
5. Abnormality in the light source
An error occurred during the fine-scanning
process used with the spectral calibration.
2. Faulty hardware
W-1169
Wrong mask.
Install the mask again.
W-1176
Adjusting of LED light amount

failed.
Check if the carrier and mask
are set correctly.
The 135M mask is not installed when the

spectral calibration is performed.
1. A mask other than the specified one is
installed.
2. Faulty mask sensor
3. Mask Sensor -to- CYS22 circuit board -toplug-in connector -to- CTC22 circuit
harness
1. Foreign matter is caught in the carrier.
2. LED is not lit due to poorly connected or
broken harness.
3. Faulty LED
5. Faulty CCD unit
Actions

the procedure and original used.
the original used.
3. Replace or clean the chart.
4. Check whether or not the shield mask
and external light satisfy the required
conditions.
1. Restart the system software. If the

error occurs again, reinstall the
system software.
in this menu 493.
Confirm that the order and contents of
the procedure are correct.
Perform Abnormal Image Check (493) if
the hardware is suspected.
1. Restart the system. If the error occurs

again, reinstall the system software.
in this menu 493.
1. Install the correct mask.


1. Remove the foreign matter.
3. Replace the LED.

No.
W-1182
Message
Couldnt perform the scanner
correction for this carrier.
Install the auto film carrier.
W-1183

correction for this mask.
Install the 135F mask in the auto
film carrier.
W-1184
Couldnt do the scanner

correction with this mask.
Install the calibration mask.
W-1185

correction for this lane.
Factor
1. The pre-operational check was attempted
using the SC135A.
2. Faulty carrier position sensor (D121,
D122)
The 135F mask is not installed in the auto
film carrier NC100AC.
1. The 135H mask is installed, or no mask is
installed.
2. Faulty mask sensor (D118, D119)
1. The scanner correction was attempted
without using the calibration mask for the
manual film carrier.
2. Faulty mask sensor (D118, D119)
The scanner correction was attempted in the
auto film carrier(NC100AC) IX240 feed lane.
Actions
1. Install the NC100AC and re-execute
this operation in the 135 feed lane.
1. Install the 135F mask and try the

operation again.
1. Install the calibration mask.

Switch the feed lane to the 135 feed lane.
Switch to 135 lane.

W-1188
Wrong diffusion box.

Install the 135 diffusion box or
below.
E-1189
I-1190
The scanner correction was attempted using

the 120 diffusion box.
1. The combination of the carrier and the
diffusion box is inappropriate.
2. Faulty diffusion box sensor (D201, D202)
1. Install the correct diffusion box.

A communication error occurred

between the input mechanical
control CB and image
processing CB.
(CTC22-GHT22)
representative.

1. Poorly connected or broken
communication cable
Reading image.
The spectral calibration is in process.
Wait until the spectral calibration is

completed.

2. Restart the system software. Reinstall
it if the problem occurs again.
Please wait.
I-1191
Cancel measurement?
The spectral calibration is canceled.
Select [OK] or [Cancel].
I-1192
Insert the next film.

No.%NUM%
Message that prompts the operator to set the

film used for the spectral calibration.
Set the next film for the spectral

calibration.
W-1193
Auto light amount adjustment

failed due to the lack of light
amount.
The auto light amount adjustment, which is

used in the auto focus and brightness
correction, failed because the LED is not lit,
or the light source section failed
mechanically.
1. An obstacle is on the diffusion box or in
the carrier.
2. The original is too dark (such as an
unexposed positive film).
3. The LED is not lit (faulty LED circuit board,
harness, and CTC22 circuit board)
4. Abnormality in the image processing
section and the circuit boards related to
the CCD

film.
1. Remove the obstacle.

2. Check the film.
3. Replace the LED circuit board, the
harness, or the CTC22 circuit board.
in this menu 493.

No.
W-1202
Message
The pixel sensitivity correction
not done.
Perform the correction using the
135 lane for auto film carrier.
When using the manual film
carrier, perform the correction
with the calibration mask.
Factor
Actions
When the brightness correction is performed

as the scanner maintenance, the light source
shading cannot be performed because the
pixel sensitivity correction has not been
conducted.
Perform the scanner correction in the

pre-operational check or the Pixel
Sensitivity Correction in Bright
Correction (43G).
I-1203
The correction value registered.
Registration confirmation message displayed

when the mask opening position correction is
performed.
Press [OK].
I-1204
The setting value stored.
Confirmation display used when setting the

monitor frame ratio
Press [OK].
W-1205
Wrong carrier.
A carrier other than the specified one is

installed during maintenance or adjustment.
1. A carrier type other than the specified type
is used.
between the plug-in connector and CTC22
circuit board
Install the correct carrier.
W-1206
Chart pattern not detected.
An error occurred while executing the optical

1. The reference chart is not installed.
2. The carrier base is out of place.
W-1219
Wrong character type of lens ID.
1. Set the correct carrier.

1. Install the reference chart and execute

the operation.
2. Perform Optical Axis Adjustment
(43E) and then Optical Magnification
Adjustment (43F).
Inappropriate characters are entered.
Enter the lens ID as shown in the label on

the lens cone.
Seven or more characters were entered as

the lens ID in Lens Registration (43D).
Enter the lens ID as shown in the label on

the lens cone.
The focal length is outside of the specified

range.
Enter as shown in the label on the lens

cone.
Enter the correct lens ID.

W-1220
Lens ID digit out of range.

Enter the correct lens ID.
W-1221
Lens focal point distance out of

range.
Enter the correct focal point
distance.
I-1222
Following adjustment data will

be deleted.
Perform the following menu
again. To start adjustment, set
the dedicated chart.
Optical Magnification
Calibration - Focus
Calibration - Focus Position
Adjustment
Registration data to be updated when

replacing the lens unit
Re-execute Optical Magnification

Calibration (43F), Focus Calibration
(432), and Focus Position Adjustment
(433).
I-1223

be deleted.
again.
Focus Calibration - Focus
Position Adjustment
The operator attempted to register data after

executing Optical Magnification Calibration
(43F).
Re-execute Focus Calibration (432)

and Focus Position Adjustment (433).

No.
I-1226
Message
Focus calibration is in progress.
Factor
Actions
The focus calibration is being performed as

the scanner maintenance.
The operator attempted to register data after

executing Focus Calibration (432).
Re-execute Focus Position Adjustment

(433).
Press [OK].
Please wait.
I-1227

be deleted.
again.
Focus Position Adjustment
I-1228
DC offset cancel completed

normally.
Normal completion message for the DC

offset adjustment.
W-1232
The focus position adjustment

for this carrier not done.
Message that confirms that the operator has

not adjusted the MFC mask
1. The necessary data has not been created.
Perform the focus position

1. Install the correct carrier and mask

and perform Focus Position
Adjustment (433).
I-1234
Insert film.
The operator is requested to insert a film to

be used for the focus position adjustment as
the scanner maintenance.
Insert film.
I-1235
Focus position adjustment is in

progress.
The focus position adjustment is being

performed as the scanner maintenance.
Wait until the adjustment is completed.
The warm-up for the LED is not completed 10

minutes after the system startup.
Check the warm-up for the LED as per Input
Check (431).
When the temperature cannot be measured:
1) Poorly connected or broken harness
between the LTC22 circuit board and the
LED
2) Faulty LTC22 circuit board
3) Faulty LED
When the temperature cannot be

measured:
When the Peltier element is faulty:

1) Abnormality with the Peltier element
When the Peltier element is faulty:

1) Replace the LED.
When the power is faulty:

1) Blown fuse in the PWR22 circuit board
between the PWR22 circuit board and the
LTC22 circuit board
3) Faulty LTC22 circuit board
When the power is faulty:

1) Replace the fuse.
2) Reconnect the connecter, or repair/
Please wait.
E-1238
Warming-up of the light source

not completed.
representative.
W-1242
Auto-exposure adjustment
failure.
film.
The auto light amount adjustment failed

because the light amount was unstable
during the auto focus, brightness correction,
and so on.
1. Faulty light source section (such as the
light source not lit or there is an obstacle)
2. External light is detected.
3. Abnormality in the CCD circuit board, ADC
circuit board, or image processing section
1) Reconnect the connecter, or repair/

2) Replace the LTC22 circuit board.
3) Replace the LED.
3) Replace the LTC22 circuit board.
1.Remove the obstacle or replace the

LED, harness, or CTC22 circuit board.
2. Install the shade mask.
(493).

No.
E-1244
Message
OFD auto adjustment failure.
Try again or restart the system.
If problems persist, consult your
technical representative.
Factor
The OFD auto adjustment level is not within
the target range.
1. The AD timing adjustment has not been
performed.
2. Faulty CCD circuit board and the related
places
3. Faulty light source section (not lit or dark)
W-1245
Too many gray pixels.

Check and clean the optical
system.
W-1246
Too large gray pixel.

Check and clean the optical
system.

1. There is dust or an obstacle in the
diffusion box or scanner optical system.
2. Vignetting is produced during readout and
light is not sensed evenly over the whole
surface of CCD.
3. Faulty CCD
1. There is dust, dirt or an obstacle in the
diffusion box or scanner optical system.
2. There is vignetting.
3. Faulty CCD
Actions
1. Perform the AD timing adjustment

(493).
3. Replace the LED unit, harness,
CTC22 circuit board, or diffusion box.
1. Clean the dust or remove the
obstacle.
2. Remove the cause of the vignetting.

1. Clean the dust or remove the
obstacle.
2. Remove the cause of the vignetting.
E-1253
Image processing CB failure.

(GIA22)
representative.
Writing data to or reading data from the GIA

circuit board has detected a failure.
1. Faulty GIA22 circuit board
2. Faulty GHT22 circuit board (if an error
related to another image processing circuit
board is included)
3. Faulty GMB22 circuit board (if an error
related to another image processing circuit
board is included)
Perform Abnormal Image Check (493)

and then follow the instructions in this
self-diagnostic test.
W-1258
Couldnt perform because the

carrier is installed.
Remove the carrier and perform
it again.
An adjustment such as the OFD auto

adjustment was attempted while the carrier
was installed.
Remove the carrier and re-execute the

operation.
W-1259
Wrong diffusion box.

1. The operator attempted to perform
maintenance using the 135 diffusion box.
2. Incorrect wiring to the diffusion box sensor
(D201, D202)
Install the diffusion box for 120

carrier.
W-1263
Wrong value.
1. Install the 120 diffusion box.

2.Repair or replace the sensor.
Correct the value.
Set the correct value again.
A value outside of the specified range was

entered during scanner or carrier
maintenance.
I-1265
Writing of data into the carrier

EEPROM completed.
Writing data into the EEPROM is now

completed.
W-1266
Wrong carrier type.
NC100AC-specific maintenance or
adjustment was attempted using a carrier
other than NC100AC.
1. NC100AC is not set.
between the plug-in connector and CTC22
circuit board.
1. Install NC100AC.

No.
W-1267
Message
Wrong feeding lane.
Switch to IX240 lane.
W-1268
Carrier or feeding lane changed.

Press the [OK] button to exit,
and try again.
E-1269
I-1270
Detecting of leading frame

failed.
Light source temperature not

stable yet. Do the scanner
correction after the temperature
is stabled.
Press the [END] button to exit
the scanner correction.
Press the [Run] button to start
the scanner correction ignoring
the stabilization of the light
source temperature.
I-1275
Correcting the scanner.
Factor
An operation such as magnetic information
readout was attempted while NC100AC is not
at the IX240 feed lane.
1. NC100AC is not at the IX240 feed lane.
between the IX240 carrier position sensor
(D121) and CTP22 circuit board
3. Faulty D121
The manual film carrier was exchanged to the
other type of carrier during spectral
calibration.
1. The manual film carrier was exchanged
with another type of carrier.
2. The feed lane is changed.
3. Poorly connected plug-in connector or
broken harness
1. A film that has not been exposed was
used.
between the unexposed frame sensor
(D108, D109) and CTP22 circuit board.
3. Faulty sensor (D108, D109)
The scanner correction was attempted while
the LED temperature control was not
completed.
1. The optical source stays without the
temperature control for longer time than
usual because the room temperature is
low.
2. Faulty LTC22 circuit board
The scanner correction is in progress.
Actions
1. Set the carrier in the IX240 feed lane.

1. Install the manual film carrier.

1. Check the film for exposure.
1. Try it again after a while.
2. Replace the LTC22 circuit board.
Wait until the scanner correction is

completed.
Please wait.
W-1276
Light source shading not done.

Perform the scanner correction
in 1. Pre-operational Check .
W-1277
LED light amount adjustment

not done.
Perform the LED light amount
The light source shading correction table

does not exist.
1. While the auto film carrier was used, the
film was inserted by suspending the light
source shading on the print screen.
The table used to adjust the LED light
amount is unavailable.
1.The LED light amount is not adjusted.
2. Foreign matter is caught in the carrier.

3. Faulty LED
4. Malfunction of the CCD shutter
1. Switch the film feed lane or perform

the pre-operational check.
1. Perform the adjustments in the order

of LED Light Amount Adjustment
(43L) and Spectral Calibration (43J).
3. Replace the LED.

No.
W-1278
Message
Mask removed.
Processing cancelled.
W-1279
Diffusion box removed.
Factor
The mask is out of place.
1. The mask was removed while the scanner
was being corrected.
2. Mask sensor -to- CYS22 circuit board -toplug-in connector -to- CTC22 circuit
harness
The diffusion box was out of place.

1. The diffusion box was removed.
3. Faulty diffusion box
W-1280
Film inserted.
Install the carrier again.
The carrier needs to be removed because the

film was installed during a scanner
correction.
W-1283
Scanner correction not

performed.
The pixel sensitivity correction table does not

exist.
1. The operator attempted to perform
scanning without first performing the
scanner correction.
Perform the correction using the

135 lane for auto film carrier.
When using the manual film
carrier, perform the correction
with the calibration mask.
W-1289
No film in the mask opening.
E-1301
E-1302
E-1303
1. Install the mask and try it again.


1. Install the diffusion box.

3. Repair or replace the diffusion box.
Remove the film, release the lock lever,
and then lock it again.
1. Perform the pre-operational check, or

Bright Correction (43G).

1. The leading frame was set while there was
no film at the mask opening section.
2. Faulty film sensor
1. Take the film out and try the operation

again.
Image processing CB not

detected.
(GIA22)
representative.

1. The GIA22 circuit board is not installed
correctly.
2. The GHT22 circuit board is not installed
correctly.
1. Correctly install the GIA22 circuit

board.
2. Correctly install the GHT22 circuit
board.
Image processing section

failure. Image processing not
completed.
(GPA22)
representative.
Errors in the GPA22 DSP processing

Image processing not completed

within the time.
(GPA22)
representative.
Timeout in the GPA22-DSP processing

Communication error occurred

in image processing.
(GPA22)
representative.
Abnormal end in the GPA22-DSP processing

Insert it again.
E-1295
Actions
2. Faulty GPA22 circuit board

4. Faulty GHT22 circuit board



2. Replace the GPA22 circuit board.
4. Replace the GHT22 circuit board.



No.
W-1406
Message
%MAGAZINE% not installed or
paper end processing in
progress.
Install the magazine, and then
start printing.
W-1407
W-1408

in image processing.
(GPA22)
representative.
Back print cannot be performed

with specified paper.
Press [Continue] to perform
printing without back print.
Factor
The magazine is not installed.
1. The magazine is not set.
2. Faulty magazine ID sensor
between the magazine ID sensor and the
CTP22 circuit board
The widths of the print size and the magazine
paper do not match.
1. A magazine whose size does not match
the print size is installed.
CTP22 circuit board
Back printing is specified with medium weight
paper.
1. Incorrect magazine or incorrect print mode
CTP22 circuit board
W-1410

auto correction.
Do the pre-scan again.
An error occurred during the auto setup for a

roll of film.
2. Faulty main control unit
W-1411

auto correction.
An error occurred during the auto setup for a

frame.
W-1417
An error occurred during

creating of image.
An error occurred during the auto setup.


W-1418
%MAGAZINE% not installed or

paper end processing in
progress.
Install the magazine, and then
start printing.
The index format consistency check detected

absence of the magazine.
1. The magazine is not installed.
CTP22 circuit board
Actions
1. Set the magazine.

1. Set an appropriate magazine.

3. Reconnect the connector, or repair/
1. Set an appropriate magazine, or

change the print size.


it if the same problem occurs again.

1. Set an appropriate magazine.


No.
Message
Factor
W-1419
Selected paper width and index

print size mismatched.
The paper size does not match in the index

format consistency check.
1. The magazine currently installed does not
match the print size.
CTP22 circuit board
Press the [OK] button and

replace magazine, or change
the index format.
If you press [Output], an
incorrect index print will be
outputted.
I-1420
I-1421
Printer processor is busy, so

post-operational check not
performed.

1. The output section was busy printing when
the post-operational check started.
Upon completion of printing,

perform 3. Post-operational
check.
Printer processor is busy.

1. An incorrect operating message (printing
is in process, jammed paper is being run
out, warm-up is in process)
Please wait a moment, and then

perform 3. Post-operational
check.

W-1422

between the main control
section and printer processor.
A message saying that the output section did

not respond is received when the postoperational check started.
1. Poorly connected or broken SCSI cable
between the main control unit and the
GHT22 circuit board
E-1425
Initializing of printer processor

failed. Consult your technical
representative.
Press [End] to shut down the
system.
Press the [Stand-alone] button
to start up the scanner only at
the next start-up.
W-1427

Check the connection, and then
press the [Retry] button.
The output device initialization failed when

the system started (interface or
communication error)
1. Communication error between the main
control unit and the GHT circuit board
3.
4.
5.
6.
Blown fuse (FH12, FH24, FH25, FH27)

Faulty GHT22 circuit board
Faulty CTP22 circuit board
Faulty main control unit
A magazine status acquisition error occurred

during the system startup.
2. A SCSI cable breakage or poorly
contacting connector between the main
control unit and the GHT22 circuit board
5. Blown fuse (FH11, FH24, FH25, FH27,
FH29, or FH30) in the PWR22 circuit
board
Actions
1. Install the correct magazine.

3. Reconnect the connecter, or repair/
1. Perform the post-operational check
after the print process has been
completed.
2.Restart the system software. Reinstall
1. Perform the post-operational check
when the printer finishes printing.
1. Connect the cable correctly or replace

it.
1. Connect the SCSI cable correctly or

replace it.
system software.



No.
Message
W-1428

Check the connection, and then
press the [Retry] button.
E-1432

between main controller and
image processor.
(Sending parameter failed)
representative.
Factor
Failed to acquire the magazine status when
the system was started.
between the main control unit and the
GHT22 circuit board
3. Poorly connected or broken serial cable
between the GHT22 circuit board and the
GTP22 circuit board
6. Blown fuse (FH11, FH24, FH25, FH27,
FH29, or FH30) in the PWR22 circuit
board
A SCSI communication error occurred when
image processing conditions for a frame were
transferred to the GMB22 circuit board.
E-1433
E-1434
W-1436

image processor.
(Image processing control
failure)
representative.
An error occurred when the JOB list (Do

FineIp_xxx) started.

section and image processing
section.
(Image processing CB failure)
representative.
The JOB list failed.

Software error.
An index frame image could not be edited

correctly.
Restart the system.
3. Poorly connected or faulty GHT22 circuit

board
4. Poorly connected or faulty GPA22 circuit
board
5. Poorly connected or faulty GMB22 circuit
board

board
board
board
6. Faulty main control unit.
Actions




3. Check the GHT22 circuit board for
good contact or replace it.
4. Check the GPA22 circuit board for
5. Check the GMB22 circuit board for



No.
W-1438
Message
Software error.
Restart the system.
Factor
The HW parameters could not be acquired
correctly from SIP.
W-1439
Software error.
Restart the system.
SIP index print image could not be processed

correctly.
W-1440
Software error.
Restart the system.
SIP index print image could not be obtained

correctly.
W-1442
Software error.
Restart the system.
E-1443

image processor.
(Parameter setting error)
representative.
An error (DoFinelp_xxx) occurred when a

JOB list started.
Reading of parameter from the

image-processing module failed.

A SCSI error occurred when transferring the

image process condition and image process
start commands into the GMB22 circuit board
during file print such as index or DSC print.
An error occurred in GMB22 circuit board

during pre-scanning.
1. Faulty power supply to GMB22 circuit
board
W-1446


board
board
board
Pre-scan not done correctly.


W-1445
Actions
A scan data parameter error from SIP

occurred during the consistency check.

1. Inspect or repair the power supply

system for the GMB22 circuit board..


No.
W-1447
Message
FID cannot be read.
Press the [Cancel] button to
rewind the film. Check CID and
then insert the film again.
Factor
An error occurred while reading FID.
1. Dusty film transfer path
2. The mask position is out of adjustment.
3. The optical axis is out of adjustment.

W-1448
Back printer unit not installed.

Install back printer properly.
W-1449
No valid frame detected during

frame detection.
W-1450
Error occurred while reading

magnetic information.
Clean the magnetic head and
then try pre-scan again.
I-1451
Film reversed.
The back printer is not set up correctly.

1. Incorrect back printer setup position.
between the back printing set sensor and
the CTP22 circuit board.
3. Faulty back printing set sensor
The number of detected frames was zero.
1. The optical path is obstructed during the
brightness correction while the preoperational check is being conducted.
2. Faulty LED
3. Faulty CCD unit
Magnetic information read error
1. Magnetic information on the film is
corrupted.
2. Dirty magnetic head
3. Faulty magnetic head
The 135 film was reversely loaded.
Actions
1. Clean the film feed path.

2. Perform the mask position correction
as per Mask Position Adjustment
(441).
3. Perform the optical axis adjustment as
per Optical Axis Adjustment (43E).
1. Correctly set up the back printer.

2. Reconnect the connector. Repair or
1. Perform the scanner correction at the

pre-operational check.
2. Replace the LED.
3. Replace CCD unit.
1. Check the film for this problem.

2. Clean the magnetic head.
3. Replace the magnetic head.
Load the film correctly.
Press the [Scan Cancel] key to

eject the film, and insert it again.
I-1453
Film bar code cannot be read.

Process continued.
Illegible 135 barcode

1. The mask position is out of adjustment.
2. Dusty 135 film feed path

3. A film with notch was inserted.
4. Blown fuse (FH3) in the PWR22 circuit
board
I-1455
Magnetic data registered on film

failure.
Continue the process ignoring
the magnetic information.
W-1461
Reading of image file failed.
Magnetic information data error

corrupted.
Mask type not recognized

correctly.
Install the mask again.

File print image cannot be obtained from the

DI Controller.
1. Check the image file and the file

format.
2. Restart the DI Controller.
The carrier mask type sent from the scanner

SS is incorrect.
Set the mask correctly.
Image import printing cancelled.

W-1468
1. Perform the mask position correction

as per Mask Position Correction
(441).
2. Clean the 135 film feed path.
3. Continue the process.

No.
Message
W-1471
Image file cannot be generated.

Image export printing cancelled.
Factor
An image file used for digital image export
cannot be created. (Disk FULL, etc.)
1. The hard disk in the DI Controller is full.
2. Communication errors with the DI
Controller.
W-1473
Incorrect template.
Delete all templates stored in
HD and register them again.
Composite formats to be sent to the extended

SIP cannot be set.
1. The hard disk in the Frontier is full.
2. Faulty hard disk in the Frontier.
W-1475
Template and paper widths

mismatched.
Press the [OK] button, and then
replace magazine.
I-1476
Film with FTPM loaded.
The template width and the magazine paper

do not match.
1. A magazine that matches the print size is
not set.
CTP22 circuit board
Actions
1. Delete the unnecessary files and reexecute it again.

2. Perform the pre-operational check.
1. Delete all templates and re-register

them.
1. Set the correct magazine.

A film with FTPM specified is loaded.
Perform printing with FTPM.

I-1477
Series Scene film loaded.
A film with Series Scene specified is loaded.
W-1478
Series Scene magnetic

information failure.
Continue process.
The Series Scene magnetic information does

not comply with the RedBook.
corrupted.
Template and print sizes specified in frame/

character print do not match.
Change the print size or template so that

both sizes match.
The specified cropping area is out of the

range.
Set the cropping area so that it is within

the range.
W-1479
Template image size does not

match print size.

Confirm print size and template

size.
W-1480
Cannot be printed with this

cropping.
Re-crop within the image area.
E-1481
Hard disk failure occurred during

the data copy.
Data copy cancelled.
representative.
A hard disk error occurred when data was

copied during the post-operational check.
E-1482
Hard disk failure occurred.

Consult technical
representative.
A hard disk error was detected when file was

imported from or exported to the imaging
controller.



No.
E-1483
Message
Index image data cannot be
read.
Consult technical
representative.
Factor
An image data file used for the index edition
cannot be read.
W-1484
Initializing of printer processor

failed.
Press the [Stand-alone] button,
and only the film scanner will be
started up.
The output device initialization failed during

the system startup.
3. Blown fuse (FH12, FH24, FH25, or FH27)
in the PWR22 circuit board
W-1485
Couldnt generate image file due

to insufficient disk space.
Please wait a moment and then
press the [Retry] button. If
problems persist, consult your
An image file used for digital image export

cannot be created. (The hard disk on the DI
Controller is full, and so on.) (FDi)
1. The hard disk in the DI Controller has
insufficient space.
3. Faulty DI Controller software
4. Faulty hard disk in the DI Controller
W-1486
Writing image file failed.

Check the network connections
and press the [Retry] button. If
W-1487
Selected print size and paper

width mismatched.
Press [OK] to change magazine,
or change print size.
Press [Output] to output forcibly.
W-1488
Template and paper widths

mismatched.
Press [OK] and replace
magazine.
An image file failed to be output because the

network is open.
1. Poorly connected communication cables
2. Communication network failure
1. The widths of the print size and the paper
in the magazine do not match.
CTP22circuit board
4. Faulty CTP22circuit board
1. The widths of the template and the paper
in the magazine do not match.
CTP22 circuit board
Actions


1. Re-execute it after a while or delete

the unnecessary files from the DI
Controller.
2. Restart the system software.
3. Restart the DI Controller. Reinstall the
software if the problem occurs again.
4. Replace the hard disk in the DI
Controller.
1. Reconnect the cable.

2. Repair or replace the communication
network.
1. Set the widths of the print size and the
paper in the magazine correctly.
3. Reconnect the connector or repair or
4. Replace the CTP22circuit board.
1. Set the widths of the template and the
paper in the magazine correctly.
3. Reconnect the connector or repair or
4. Replace the CTP22circuit board.

No.
W-1492
Message
Carrier not installed.
Install carrier and press [OK].
W-1494
An error occurred in calling the

exposure condition retrieve.
Return to the state just after the
pre-scan.
Factor
attempted without a carrier installed.
1. A carrier is not installed.
between the plug-in connector and the
CTC22circuit board
3. Faulty carrier
board
An error occurred when the exposure
conditions were retrieved.
W-1495
Select the correct magazine

paper type.
The magazine paper type (surface type or

emulsion type) does not match.
1. The magazine does not match the print
size.
CTP22 board
Actions
1. Install a carrier.
3. Replace the carrier

1. Set the correct magazine.

I-1501
Selected function cannot be

used.
The function currently not available was

selected.
I-1502
Insert the floppy disk into the FD

drive.
A message that requests the operator to

exchange the floppy disk during data backup
Insert a floppy disk and then press [OK].
W-1503
The floppy disk not inserted, so

writing not performed.
A floppy disk is not inserted during data

backup to floppy disk.
1. A floppy disk is not inserted.
2. Faulty floppy disk drive
Insert the correct floppy disk into

the FD drive.
I-1504
Insert the next floppy disk into

the FD drive.
Message that prompts the operator to insert

the next floppy disk when backing up data to
more than one floppy disk.
W-1505
Incorrect floppy disk. Couldnt

perform writing.
The inserted floppy disk was inappropriate.

1. Faulty floppy disk
2. The inserted floppy disk is set to the read
only mode.

the FD drive.
E-1506
Reading of control information

file failed.
Couldnt display the selected
screen.
To use this function, consult your
The file necessary to display data on the

screen could not be read.

I-1507
Data backup completed

abnormally.
Failed to back up data.

1. The FD is faulty.
2. The FD is set to the read only mode.
3. There is an insufficient disk space in the
hard disk in the main control unit.
1. Insert a floppy disk.

Insert the next floppy disk and then press
[OK].
1. Insert an error free floppy disk.

2. Set the floppy to the write enable
mode.

system software.
1. Use a new FD.

2. Set the FD to the write enable mode.
3. Delete the unnecessary files.

No.
Message
Factor
I-1508
Data backup is canceled.
The process used to stop backing up data

through an operator request.
W-1510
Date value exceeds the limit.

(1998/01/01 00:00:00 - 2040/12/
31 23:59:59)
Set the correct date.
The date entered exceeds the limit value.

1. Incorrectly entered date

W-1511
W-1512
Next timer-ON time exceeds the

limit.
(1998/01/01 00:00:00 - 2040/12/
31 23:59:59)
Confirm the present time.
The FD free space insufficient.

the FD drive.
W-1513
Unsorted print remains.
The next system startup time exceeds the

limit value. Check the present time.
1. Incorrect present time
Actions
1. Enter the current date correctly.

system software.
1. Enter the present date correctly.

system software.
The FD currently being used has no disk

space available.
1. The floppy disk is full.
1. Insert an empty FD.

The data was not sorted when the job was

completed.
Press the [Sort] key.
Perform sorting.
W-1521
PU800B is not turned ON or is

disconnected.
Check the connection with
PU800B, press the [Retry]
button.
W-1522

disconnected.
PU800B, press the [Retry]
button.
W-1523

disconnected.
PU800B, press [Retry] to retry.
To stop printing of the price
table, press the [Stop] button.
W-1524
Couldnt read the backup data

for PU800B.
PU800B.
Communication error occurred when

downloading data from the PU800B.
1. The power for PU800B is turned off.
2. Poorly connected or broken harness of the
PU800B communication cable
1. Turn the PU800B power on.

the cable.
Communication error occurred when

uploading data to the PU800B.

the cable.
Communication error occurred when sending

the bill of charges for the PU800B.

the cable.
A file read error occurred when downloading

data from the PU800B.

W-1525
Couldnt write to the backup

data for PU800B.
PU800B.
A file write error occurred when uploading

data to the PU800B.

system software.

system software.

No.
Message
Factor
I-1526
Production information log file

not found.
A new file will be created.
A read error occurred while reading data

from the production information log file.
W-1527
Production information cannot

be written into file.
An error occurred while writing data on the

production information log file.


W-1531
FDi device registration failed.

Check the network connections,
and then press the [Retry]
button.
W-1532
Registering with FDi not done.

To register it, perform the 1.
Pre-operational Check.
W-1533
The image file output is stopped.
An error occurred while registering the FDIA

logical output device (This problem can be
recovered).
1. The DI controller power is turned off.
2. Poorly connected LAN cable
3. Faulty software on the DI controller
4. Faulty main control unit on the DI
controller side.
Actions

system software.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Start the DI controller.

Connect the LAN cable correctly.
Reinstall the software.
Replace the main control unit.
An error occurred while registering the FDIA

logical output device with the external input
enabled.
Perform the pre-operational check.
Failed to print the external input data.
Try to input data from the external source

again.
Resume printing by selecting

Digital Image as Input
Device.
W-1534
Order not unlocked.

button.
A communication error occurred on the DI

controller side while the Frontier was
processing an order.
W-1535
Couldnt provide the service.

button.

E-1536
Error occurred during the order

completion.
Incorrect order status.
An inappropriate status was detected

because there was no device authority.
Change the status in the DI

Controller.
E-1537
An error occurred in the DI

Controller.
Consult technical
representative.
Other errors in the FDIA

1. Connect the LAN cable correctly.

2. Restart the DI controller. If the error
occurs again, reinstall the software.




No.
W-1538
Message
Registering with FDi not done.
To register it, perform the 1.
Pre-operational Check.
E-1539
Error occurred during the order

end process.
The status shows Wait to
delete.
Factor
The FDIA logical output device is not
registered.
1. The pre-operational check has not been
conducted.
The order was already queued to be deleted.
Actions
1. Perform the pre-operational check.

Change the status in the DI

Controller.
I-1540
No order of the selected paper

width.
Any order cannot be printed with the lab-in.
W-1541


button.

W-1542

button.
An error occurred due to the status changes

during normal printing.
W-1543

button.
An error occurred due to the status changes

during abnormal printing.
W-1544

button.
W-1545

button.
W-1546

button.
An error occurred when the message

informing that one order had finished was
received.
An error occurred while the order was being
deleted.
An error occurred when the status changed
while no orders were registered.
Change the paper magazine appropriate

for the external input.







No.
W-1547
Message
button.
W-1548
Printer processor not in standby.

button.
To cancel the image import,
press the [Cancel] button.
E-1549
E-1551
E-1552
E-1553
E-1554
W-1556
Factor
An error occurred while an order was being
read.
An error occurred when an image file was
printed (while the external input was
selected).
1. The printer section was not in the standby
mode while the external input was
selected.
Actions

1. Set the printer to the standby mode

and press [Retry].
Error occurred while deleting the

order.
The status of the order to be
deleted does not become
Creating.
Change the status on the DI
Controller.
Every order except for the one currently being

registered is deleted.
Dialog cannot be displayed.

Message definition file not found
or defective.
The function used to manage character string

resource returned an error while a dialog was
being generated.
1. The message file is corrupted.
2. Faulty hard disk
1. Reinstall the system software.

Could not start up the Red-eye/

Soft/Cross plug-in.
The Red-eye/Soft/Cross plug-in
not installed or the file may be
corrupted.
An error occurred when starting Red Eye/

Soft/Cross plug-in.
1. Faulty system software (A1)
2. Faulty Variety Print software (B1)
3. Faulty hard disk

2. Reinstall the software.
Couldnt continue the Red-eye/

Soft/Cross.
Could not find the file that was
required for the Red-eye/Soft/
Cross plug-in or the file may be
corrupted.
A read error occurred while Red Eye/Soft/

Cross plug-in was being read.
3. Faulty hard disk


Soft/Cross.
Could not create the file that
was required for the Red-eye/
Soft/Cross plug-in.
Could not create the file that
was required for the Red-eye/
Soft/Cross plug-in.
A write error occurred while Red Eye/Soft/

Cross plug-in was being written.
3. Faulty hard disk

This frame cannot be selected.
A mounted print frame number does not

match the specified one.
1. Large index or template frame number
does not match the specified one.
2. A frame number could not be read.
1. Specify the frame number that

matches the template.
2. Reinstall the film.
Frame No. to specify template

not matched.
Select another frame again.


No.
Message
Factor
Actions
W-1566
Printing the image file. Couldnt

perform the pre-scan.
Eject film.
After printing of the image file,
insert the film.
Pre-scanning was attempted while an image

file was being exported.
Install the film after the process has been

completed.
E-1571
Message definition file not found

or defective.
An error occurred while reading the character

string resource.
2. Faulty hard disk

Check message definition file.

W-1574
Frame with selected No. already

mounted.
Frame overwritten.
A frame was overwritten although the

numbered frame was already mounted.
W-1580
Editing error log info failed.
An error occurred while editing error log

information.
1. Poorly connected communication cable
3. Faulty hard disk
1. Connect the cable correctly.

An error occurred while editing working

information.
3. Faulty hard disk

An error occurred while editing the system

configuration information.
3. Faulty hard disk

An error occurred while editing quality

information.
3. Faulty hard disk

An error occurred while acquiring premaintenance data.

3. Faulty hard disk

Data is being loaded from the registry.
Wait until the process is completed.
Data is being saved to the registry.
The frame specified by an invoice cannot be

detected.
Confirm whether or not the film is

installed.
W-1581
W-1583
W-1584
W-1585
I-1587
Editing working information

failed.
Editing system information

failed.
Editing quality information failed.
Reading of received data failed.

Sending of the MI NETWORK
mail canceled.
Reading print mag. fine adjust

data.
Please wait.
I-1588
Saving print mag. fine adjust

data.
Please wait.
W-1591
Frame specified on invoice not

detected.
Check the film.

No.
I-1593
Message
%TEMPLATE%.
Factor
Actions
The template is being set.
Please wait.
This message is displayed while reading the

service name list used for image file export/
import.
Start the connection with DI

Controller, and update the data.
This message is displayed while registering

the logical device.
Please wait.
I-1594
I-1595
Reading service name list.
Press [OK] to start.

E-1596

Check the network connections.
W-1597
I-1598
A FDi error occurred while reading a service

name list.
The service type is not selected,

so pre-scan not performed.
Film is ejected.
Select the service type, and
then insert the film.
Pre-scanning was performed in a mode other

than the image file export while the scanner
was set to the stand-alone mode.
1. Digital image export has not been
selected.
Processing Red-eye/Soft/Cross
%HQ%.
Red eye/Soft/Cross startup is in progress.

1. Select the external output.
Please wait.
E-1599
An error occurred.
Soft/Cross.
Complete the Red-eye/Soft/
Cross plug-in.
W-1701
This is the last frame.

Press [OK] to feed out film.
Red eye/Soft/Cross failed to start up.

1. The carrier or mask is removed during
Red eye/Soft/Cross startup.
4. Faulty hard disk
1. Restart Red eye/Soft/Cross plug-in.

When the film mode is Manual, the [START/

ENTER] key was pressed at the last frame of
the film.
Press [OK] to terminate the operation or

press the frame return key to return to the
previous frame.
W-1702
The carrier or mask removed, so

the custom setting information is
not displayed correctly.
The related dialog(s) closed.
Install the carrier or mask, and
then try again.
The carrier or mask was removed while the

dialog box related to the custom setting was
displayed.
Correctly install the carrier or mask and

then perform the custom setting again.
W-1703
Invalid custom setting.

Changed to master settings.
The selected custom setting number is

invalid.
Print with the master settings or select a

correct custom setting number.
E-1710
Templates are not available for

the bordered print.
When Mounted print/Frame characters is

selected , and when a print size for Bordered
print is selected
1. A print size with Bordered print is
selected.
Select the borderless print size.
1. Change the print size to Borderless.

No.
W-1751
W-1752
Message
%REALTIME_START%
Could not start displaying the
image. Film is ejected.
%REALTIME_OKEND%
Could not adjust determine the
image position.
Factor
The real-time display is unavailable.
1. A template used for mounted print or
frame/character is being installed.
2. The Output destination selection screen
is being displayed for exporting image file.
3. The Original selection screen is being
displayed.
4. The template selection screen for
mounted print or frame/character is being
displayed.
5. Exporting image files is in progress.
6. The manual film carrier is installed during
the single scan digitizing.
7. The carrier or mask type does not fit for
the composite type.
8. The Image preview screen used for
displayed.
9. The batch retrieval of exposure conditions
is in progress.
displayed.
displayed.
the composite type.
displayed.
is in progress.
Actions
1. Wait until the template setting finishes.

2. Select the output destination using the
Output destination selection screen.
3. Close the Original selection screen.
4. Select the template using the template
selection screen, and then wait until it
is set.
5. Wait until the file is output.
6. Set the auto film carrier.
7. Install the carrier or mask
corresponding to the composite type.
8. Close the Image preview screen.
9. Close the Exposure condition retrieve

setup screen.
is set.

setup screen.

No.
W-1753
W-1754
W-1762
Message
%REALTIME_START%
Couldnt start pre-scan. Film is
ejected.
Factor
The pre-scanning cannot be performed.
The film was inserted under the condition that
the wait time for the leading frame position
determination is 0 second.
displayed.
displayed.
the composite type.
displayed.
is in progress.
Actions

is set.

setup screen.

Check the network connections.
If the network connections are
correct, consult your technical
representative.
An error occurred while a service name list

was being read.
1. The DI controller power is turned off.
4. Faulty main control unit on the DI
controller side
Print Mode Select cannot be

done while the scanned image is
mounted.
A different type of service was requested

while a mounted or frame/character printing
was in progress.
Wait until one sheet of mounted print is

completed, or select [Print] or [Cancel] on
the image preview screen.
The process in progress was forcibly

terminated while a mounted or frame/
character printing was in progress.
Wait until one sheet of mounted print is

completed, or select [Print] or [Cancel] on
the image preview screen.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Start the DI controller.

Connect the LAN cable correctly.
Reinstall the software.
Replace the main control unit.
Complete a mounted print, or

press the [Print] or the [Cancel]
in the Image Preview screen,
and then select it again.
W-1763
The printing operation cannot be

canceled while the image is
mounted.
Complete a mounted print, or
press the [Print] or the [Cancel]
button in the Image Preview
screen, and then try it.
E-1801
Conjugate length variable upper

limit sensor (D212) failure.
representative.
Conjugate length variable upper limit sensor

(D212) failure
1. Disconnected conjugate length variable
home position sensor (D211) connector
2. Faulty D211
3. Disconnected D212 connector
4. Faulty D212
5. Faulty conjugate length drive system
1. Reconnect the connector.

2.
3.
4.
5.
Replace the sensor.

Reconnect the connector.
Replace the sensor.
Replace the drive section (gear ASSY,
etc.).
*This error may be recovered by

performing I/O Check (43A).

No.
Message
E-1802
Conjugate length variable lower

limit sensor (D213) failure.
representative.
E-1803
Conjugate length variable home

position sensor (D211) failure.
representative.
Factor
Conjugate length variable lower limit sensor
(D212) failure
2. Foreign matter is caught in D121.
3. Blown fuse (FE2) in the CTC22 circuit
board
Conjugate length variable home position
sensor (D211) failure
1. Disconnected D211 connector
2. Faulty D211
4. Faulty conjugate length variable motor
(M201)
5. Shipping fixture remains in the scanner
section.
board
board
E-1804
Conjugate length variable home

position sensor (D211) failure.
representative.
Conjugate length variable home position

sensor (D211) failure
1. Disconnected conjugate length variable
motor (M201) connector
2. Faulty M201
3. Faulty drive gear
E-1805
Lens home position sensor

(D214) failure.
representative.
E-1806

(D214) failure.
representative.
E-1807
Shutter home position sensor

(D215) failure.
representative.
Lens home position detecting error

1. Disconnected lens drive motor (M202)
connector
2. M202 meshing error
3. Disconnected lens home position sensor
(D214) connector
4. Faulty D214
board
board
Lens home position clearing error
1. Disconnected lens drive motor (M202)
connector
2. M202 meshing error
Shutter home position detecting error
1. Disconnected shutter home position
sensor (D215) connector
2. Faulty D215
3. Disconnected shutter motor (M203)
connector
4. Faulty M203
board
board
Actions


3. Replace the drive section (gear ASSY,
etc.).
4. Replace the motor.
5. Remove the shipping fixture.
1. Remove the scanner cover and

reconnect the motor connector if
disconnected.
3. Replace the drive gear ASSY.

2. Replace the lens unit.

2. Replace the lens unit.


No.
E-1808
Message
(D215) failure.
representative.
E-1811
Scanner cooling fan (F202)

stopped.
representative.
E-1812
Light source cooling fan (F201)

stopped.
representative.
E-1825
The temperature of the light

source controller out of the
range.
representative.
E-1826
Carrier motor driver temperature

beyond the specified
temperature range.
representative.
E-1827
Scanner motor driver

temperature beyond the
specified temperature range.
representative.
E-1828
An error occurred in the 3.3V

power supply (PERR_3V) in the
light source section.
representative.
Factor
Shutter home position clearing error
1. Disconnected shutter motor (M203)
connector
2. Disconnected shutter home position
sensor (D215) connector
3. Faulty D215
4. Faulty M203
Scanner cooling fan failure
1. Disconnected scanner cooling fan (F216)
connector
2. Faulty F216
board
board
Light source cooling fan failure
1. Disconnected light source cooling fan
(F201) connector
2. Faulty F201
board
board
Abnormal temperature of the LED controller
1. Faulty light source
between the CTC22 circuit board and LED
Abnormal temperature of the carrier motor
driver
1. Faulty feed motor in the carrier
2. Feed motor -toplug-in connector -toCTC22 circuit board, short-circuited
harness
Abnormal temperature of the scanner motor
driver
1. Short-circuited conjugate length variable
motor
2. Conjugate length variable motor -to- plugin connector -to- CTC22 circuit board,
poorly connected or broken harness
3.3 V power supply failure
board
Actions


reconnect the fan connector if
disconnected.
2. Replace the fan.

reconnect the fan connector if
disconnected.
2. Replace the fan.
1. Replace the LED.


2. Replace the harness.



No.
Message
E-1829
An error occurred in the P5V

power supply (PERR_5V) in the
scanner section.
representative.
E-1831
E-1833
LED connector was disconnected.

1. Disconnected connector (CTC6, CTC7,
CTC8, CTC9) in the CTC22 circuit board
board
An error occurred in the

piezoelectric actuator power unit
(ZERRPZR) in the scanner
section.
An error occurred in the piezoelectric

actuator power unit.
between the PZR22 circuit board and the
CTC22 circuit board
board
3. Faulty PZR22 circuit board
An error occurred in the motor

power supply (PERR_24V1) in
the scanner section.
representative.
E-1835
An error occurred in the carrier

motor power supply
(PERR_24V2).
representative.
E-1836
E-1841
P5V power supply failure

board
The connector between the

input mechanical control CB and
the light source section
disconnected.
(CTC22-LED)
representative.

representative.
E-1834
Factor
An error occurred in the power

supply CB in the scanner
section.
(PZR22)
representative.
Warming of light source section

failed.
representative.
24V1 motor power supply failure

between the scanner and the CTC22
circuit board
board
24V2 motor power supply failure
1. Faulty motor or solenoid (M101, M102,
M103, M104, S101) in the carrier
board
board
Excessive current control error
1. Short-circuited piezoelectric actuator
2. Broken harness between the PWR22
circuit board and the PZR22 circuit board
board
board
Temperature control error (Temperature could
not be measured.)
2. Faulty PWR22 circuit board
between the LTC22 circuit board and the
CTC22 circuit board
Actions




1. Replace the motor or solenoid.


2. Replace the harness.


No.
Message
Factor
E-1842

failed.
Temperature control error (Peltier element is

faulty.)
1. Faulty peltier element or broken harness
4. Poorly connected or broken harness to the
light source temperature sensor (D203)

representative.
E-1843

failed.
representative.
W-1857
Diffusion box removed.

Remove carrier, and then install
diffusion box.
W-1901
An error occurred during storing

of exposure conditions.
Storing of exposure conditions
will not be done from the next
time.
Temperature control error (LTC power supply

failure)
3. Poorly connected or broken harness to the
light source temperature sensor (D203)
No diffusion box was found just before driving
the piezoelectric actuator.
1. Diffusion box is not installed, or incorrectly
installed.
An error occurred while exposure conditions
were being stored to a data file.
W-1902
Memory full. Couldnt printing.

Wait until the memory space is
available, and then start printing.
W-1903
Image data full. Couldnt

printing.
Actions
1.
2.
3.
4.
Replace the light source section.

Replace the LTC22 circuit board.
Replace the PWR22 circuit board.
Reconnect the connector, or repair/

1. Install the diffusion box.


Data could not be output to the DI Controller

because digitizing process continued, thus
causing insufficient memory space.
Wait until the DI Controller outputs image

data.
Data could not be output to the DI Controller

because digitizing process continued, thus
causing insufficient memory space.
Wait until the DI Controller outputs image

data.
Please wait a moment, and start

printing.
E-1904
E-1905
Image processing CB failure.

(GPA22)
Image processing CB printing

function failure.
(GPA22)
The DSP is unavailable due to the problem.

between the GMB22 and the GPA22circuit
boards
2. Faulty GPA22circuit board
The DSP is unavailable due to a problem.
E-1906
Image processing CB pre-scan

function failure.
(GPA22)
The DSP is unavailable due to the problem.

3. Faulty GPA22circuit board

2. Replace the GPA22circuit board.


3. Replace the GPA22circuit board.

No.
I-1907
Message
Printing.
Factor
Animation scanning cannot be started
because the DSP is busy.
Actions
Re-execute it after a while.
Please wait.
I-1908
I-1909
Available frame not detected.

Eject film.
Light source not stabilized. After

the stabilization, positioning of
image will be displayed.
Press the [End] to exit the image
position adjustment.
Press the [Run] button to start
the image position adjustment
ignoring the stabilization of the
light source temperature.
W-1910

Install the carrier and then start
pre-scan.
W-1911
Mask for MFC not installed.

Install the mask and then start
pre-scan.
W-1912

Close it and then start pre-scan.
W-1914
Image not read correctly.

No frame is detected during animation

scanning. (All the frames are unexposed.)
1. All the frames of the installed film are
unexposed.
2. Faulty unexposed frame sensor in the
carrier
The scanner LED is not stabilized.
1. Faulty LED
2. Faulty LED22 circuit board

1. A carrier is not installed.
CTC22 circuit board
The mask sensor in the manual film carrier
does not function.
1. The mask is installed incorrectly floating
above the target surface.
3. Faulty MFC circuit board
CTC22 circuit board
A scanning was attempted while the pressure
cover was open.
1. The pressure cover is open.
2. Faulty cover sensor
3. Faulty AFC circuit board
CTC22 circuit board
An image acquisition error occurred during
animation scanning.
W-1915
Image not read correctly.

A read error occurred during animation

scanning.
I-1916
Printing.
Please wait.
The scanner cannot be corrected because

DSP is busy.
1. Check the film.

1. Replace the LED.

2. Replace the LED22 circuit board.
1. Install the carrier.

1. Correctly install the mask.

3. Replace the circuit board.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Correctly install the mask.

Replace the sensor.
Replace the circuit board.
Reconnect the connector, or repair/


Re-execute it after a while.

No.
Message
E-1998
Error table item( %TableItem% )

cannot be omitted.
Sub-system:%SubSystemID%
( %TableFileName% )
Error No.:%NUM%
Factor
The item(s) required for the error table file
is(are) not written.
E-1999
Error table items ( %TableItem% )

are incorrect.
Sub-system:%SubSystemID%
( %TableFileName% )
Error No.:%NUM%
Incorrect values are written in the error table

file.
E-2102
W-2106

between the film scanner and
the printer processor.
(Command time-out)
representative.
A communication timeout occurred.

1. Poorly connected SCSI cable
Printer setup and maintenance

is in progress.
An uncalibrated magazine was installed

during printer maintenance.

4. Blown fuse due to a broken harness in the
PWR22 circuit board or the LDD22 circuit
board
Actions



replace it.
Quit Setup and Maintenance screen,

and perform paper condition setup.
Perform the paper condition

setup after the operation.
E-2107
E-2109
Data file not opened.

This message appears when
performing the new intallation. It
is not an error message.
In case of the installation other
than new installation, consult
your technical representative.
The file could not be opened when saving/

loading data.
1. The file used to save or load data is
corrupted.

(SCSI sending error: Code
No.=%NUM%)
If problems persist after the
restart, consult your technical
representative.
Data cannot be sent to the printer processor.

1. GMB22 circuit board power supply failure


1. Check or repair the power system

related to the GMB22 circuit board.
replace it.
system software.
*: Open the main control unit, and
disconnect/connect each circuit board
(especially memory board).
Sometimes this method solves the
problem.
W-2110

(Sending error: Code
No.=%NUM%)
Do countermeasures referring to
the manual.
Data cannot be sent to the printer processor.

2.Faulty system software
1. Correctly connect the SCSI cable or

replace it.
system software.

No.
E-2202
Message
CB failure detected in printer
processor.
(Error code:%NUM%)
representative.
Factor
When the circuit board diagnostic test detects
an error
1. CTP22 circuit board power supply failure
2. Blown fuse in the PWR22 circuit board
E-2305
E-2306
The backup memory of the

printer processor failure.
This message does not mean
abnormality when the software
version is updated.
For other than the version-up,
consult your technical
representative.
SRAM information key is not found.

1. When the software upgrade is performed
Current time of printer processor

was changed to the time of film
scanner.
During the first initialization after the power

ON, time data read from the timer IC is
abnormal.
If this error persists, consult your

I-2307
The laser warm-up in the

exposure section not completed.
Please wait.
I-2308
Warming up the processing

tanks.
2. Insufficiently recharged backup battery

3. Faulty backup battery
4. Faulty backup circuit

1. When the print command was received
while the laser temperature control was
not completed
2. Blown fuse in the LDD22 circuit board
3. Faulty LDD22 circuit board
Actions
1. Check or repair the power system

related to the GMB22 circuit board.
1. This message does not mean an

abnormality exists.
2. Recharge the battery for 1 or 2 days.

1. Wait until the temperature control
finishes.
3. Replace the LDD22 circuit board.
When the print command was received while

the solution temperatures had not reached
the setting values
Wait until the temperature control

finishes.
Please wait.
I-2311
Printing.
If processing stopped, paper will
remain in processor.
Shut down the processor?
When the processor shutdown was

attempted with the processor in operation
I-2312
The dryer unit or the dryer

section cover opened.
The processor cover is open when driving/

stopping the processing rack.
between the dryer unit detecting interlock
switch (D416) and PAC22 circuit board
2. Faulty D416
3. Faulty PAC22 circuit board
Close it.

3. Replace the PAC22 circuit board.

No.
W-2407
Message
Auto-loading of paper failed.
Refer to manual for guidance.
Factor
The paper end sensor and splice sensor do
not change their state even if the film leading
end is pulled out by a preset length.
1. Paper supply motor (M301) does not
rotate, or the drive system is faulty.
between M301 and the PDC22 circuit
board
2) Faulty M301
3) Faulty PDC22 circuit board
4) Disengaged or worn timing belt in the
paper supply section
5) Disengaged or worn timing pulley in the
6) Increased load in the drive section
2. Paper splice sensor (D301) does not
detect paper.
between D301 and the CTP22 circuit
board
2) Faulty D301
3) Faulty CTP22 circuit board
3. Paper cannot be rewound.
1) Broken magazine drive pulley
2) Paper slippage due to dirty rollers
3) Broken or disengaged magazine nip
spring
4) Reverse-prevention lock in the magazine
cannot be unlocked (broken cutter guide
pin, bent or scuffed magazine lock pin)
4. Paper does not reach the sensor.
1) D301 cannot detect paper because the
papers leading end is cut aslant.
2) Paper protrudes too much when setting it.
3) Paper hit the magazine nip roller.
4) Paper is set aslant.
5) Magazine table is incorrectly set.
6) Magazine shutter malfunction (broken
cutter guide pin, faulty magazine shutter
section)
7) Faulty magazine end detecting plate
board
Actions
1.
1) Reconnect the connector, or repair/
2) Replace the motor.
3) Replace the PDC22 circuit board.
4) Reinstall or replace the belt.
5) Reinstall or replace the pulley.
6) Inspect or repair the drive section.
2.
2)
3)
3.
1)
2)
3)
Replace the sensor.

Replace the CTP22 circuit board.
Replace the pulley.
Clean the roller.
Repair or replace the spring.
4) Replace the cutter guide or magazine.
4.
1) Cut the papers leading end straight.
2) Adjust the length of the paper that
protrudes from the magazine.
3) Inspect or replace the magazine nip
roller section guide.
4) Set the paper correctly.
5) Inspect or repair the table.
7) Replace the magazine end detecting

plate or magazine.

No.
W-2409
Message
Auto-rewinding of paper failed.
W-2411
Paper remains in printer section.

Remove paper.
E-2412
The cutter malfunctions.

Factor
not change their state even if the film leading
end is rewound by a preset length.
board
2) Faulty M301
detect paper.
board
2) Faulty D301
spring
1. The magazine door was opened while the
paper was being fed.
between the interlock switch (D322) and
the CTP22 circuit board
3. Faulty D322
The outputs of the home position and closing
sensors did not change during operation.
1. Cutter drive motor (M307) does not rotate.
board
2) Faulty M307
2. Cutter home position sensor (D312) does
not change the state.
board
2) Faulty D312
4) Deformed detecting plate
3. Cutter blade does not function
1) Broken drive gear
2) Paper is caught in the cutter section.
3) Faulty cutter blade sliding section
Actions
1.
2.
2)
3)
3.
1)
2)
3)
Replace the sensor.

Replace the pulley.
Clean the roller.
1. Remove the paper.

3. Replace the interlock switch.
1.
2.
2)
3)
4)
3.
1)
2)
3)
Replace the sensor.

Repair the detecting plate.
Replace the motor.
Remove paper.
Replace the cutter unit.

No.
W-2421
Message
Paper end processing
completed.
Install the paper in the
magazine, or replace with the
magazine containing same
width paper.
W-2423
Unknown magazine ID is set.

Set correct magazine ID.
Factor
The paper end sensor detected the paper
end.
1. The feed section stopped when the paper
end process stopped.
between the paper end sensor (D311) and
3. Faulty D311
5. Paper end detecting plate on the
magazine side that is deformed or out of
place.
A magazine replaced at the time of paper end
had a different ID from the one used before
the replacement.
1. Magazine has been changed.
1) A magazine that was different from the
one used before the replacement was
installed.
2) The ID chip has been changed.
2. Magazine ID sensor (D306 to D310) does
not detect the magazine ID.
CTP22 circuit board
2) Faulty magazine ID sensor
3. The magazine is incorrectly installed.
1) The ID chip is not installed.
2) The magazine table is out of place or
broken.
3) The sensor bracket is deformed or out of
place.
W-2424
Magazine ID not registered.

Set the paper magazine in the
4.Setup and Maintenance - 5.
Printer Adj./Maintenance menu.
When a magazine whose ID is not registered

is installed
1. The ID of the currently installed magazine
is not registered.
CTP22 circuit board
broken.
place.
Actions
1. Set a new roll of paper or replace the

magazine.
5. Repair the detecting plate, or replace
the magazine.
1.
1) Change the print size or install the
original magazine.
2) Install the original ID chip or register
the ID.
2.
2)
3)
3.
1)
2)
Replace the sensor.

Install the ID chip.
Inspect or repair the magazine table.
3) Inspect or repair the bracket.

2.
2)
3)
3.
1)
2)
Replace the sensor.


No.
W-2426
Message
Identifying of magazine failed.
Check magazine, and then
reinstall it.
If problems persist when it is
correctly installed, consult your
W-2427
Paper width and print size

mismatched.
Install the correct magazine.
W-2432
Back printer unit not installed.

the manual.
I-2435
Magazine installed.
Factor
The magazine is not installed in the specified
position.
CTP22 circuit board
broken.
place.
When a magazine that has a different paper
width is installed
1. The size of the magazine does not match
the paper size.
CTP22 circuit board
broken.
place.
Back printer is not installed when starting
printing.
1. Back printer is not installed.
between the back printer set sensor
(D320) and the CTP22 circuit board
3. Faulty D320
Paper magazine whose paper condition
setup is already performed is installed.
Actions
1.
2)
3)
2.
1)
2)
Replace the sensor.


2.
2)
3)
3.
1)
2)
Replace the sensor.

1. Correctly install the back printer unit.

Press [OK] to resume printing.
Printing resumed.
W-2435
Magazine door opened.

Close it.

1. The magazine door is open.
between the magazine door detecting
interlock switch (D322) and the PDC22
circuit board
3. Faulty D322
4. Faulty PDC22 circuit board
1. Close the magazine door.


4. Replace the PDC22 circuit board.

No.
W-2436
Message
Front upper cover or feeding
section upper/lower cover
opened.
Close it.
W-2441
Magazine with wrong ID

specified.
Factor
1. The cover is open.
between the sensor (D323, D324, D325)
and the PDC22 circuit board
3. Faulty sensor (D323, D324, D325)
4. Faulty PDC22 circuit board
The ID of the installed magazine does not
match the specified one.
Actions
1. Close the cover.
4. Replace the PDC22 circuit board.
Set the magazine that was installed
during scanning.
Install magazine with

ID=%NUM%.
W-2450
W-2451
W-2452
W-2453
W-2454

(Paper supply section)
Remove paper.

(Paper supply section or back
printer section)
Remove paper.

(Back printer section)
Remove paper.

(Register section)
Remove paper.

(Sub-scanning section)
Remove paper.

1. A sheet of paper is left in the print section.
between the magazine ID sensor (D306 to
D310) and the CTP22 circuit board
3. Faulty sensors (D306 to D310)
Back printer entrance sensor detects paper
when the initialization finishes.
1. Back printer entrance sensor (D302)
detects paper.
board
3. Faulty D302


The registration sensor detects a sheet of

paper when the initialization finishes.
1. Registration sensor (D303) detects paper.
board
3. Faulty D303

The registration sensor detects a sheet of

paper when the initialization finishes.
1. Registration sensor (D303) detects paper.
board
3. Faulty D303

The pre-exposure sensor detects a sheet of

paper when the initialization finishes
1. Pre-exposure sensor (D304) detects
paper.
board
3. Faulty sensor D304




No.
Message
Factor
W-2455

(Exit section)
Remove paper.
The processor entry sensor detects a sheet

of paper when the initialization finishes
1. A piece of paper is left in the feed section.
between the processor entry sensor
(D305) and CTP22 circuit board
3. Faulty sensor (D305)
E-2460
The registration nip motor

(M309) malfunctions.
representative.
E-2461
Width detecting drive motor

(M310) failure.
representative.
When the mechanical section fails during the

initialization
1. Registration nip motor (M309) does not
rotate.
1) Poorly connected or broken harness to
M309
2) Faulty M309
2. Registration nip roller stops at the home
position.
between the registration nip home position
sensor (D316) and CTP22 circuit board
2) Faulty D316
3. Faulty nip release mechanism
1) Broken cam
2) Broken bearing
3) Disengaged or worn gear
4) Foreign matter is caught in the nip release
mechanism.
board
initialization
1. Width detecting drive motor (M310) does
not rotate.
board
2) Faulty M310
2. Width detecting home position is not
detected.
between the width detecting home
position sensor (D315) and CTP22 circuit
board
2) Faulty D315
3. Faulty width detecting slide mechanism.
1) Deformed home position detecting plate
2) Disengaged or worn timing belt
3) Disengaged or worn timing pulley
4) Increased load in the slide bearing
5) Foreign matter is caught in the slide

mechanism.
board
Actions

1.
2.
2)
3)
3.
1)
2)
3)
4)
Replace the sensor.

Replace the cam.
Replace the bearing.
Reinstall or replace the gear.
Remove the foreign matter.
5) Inspect/repair the drive section.

1.
2.
2)
3)
3.
1)
2)
3)
4)
Replace the sensor.

Repair the plate.

Reinstall or replace the belt.
Reinstall or replace the pulley.
Clean/replace the slide shaft, or
inspect/replace the width detecting
guide
5) Remove the foreign matter.

No.
Message
Factor
E-2462
Sub-scanning nip motor (M311)

failure.

initialization
1. Sub-scanning nip motor (M311) does not
rotate.
board
2) Faulty M311
2. Sub-scanning nip home position sensor
(D317) does not detect the nip home
position.
between D317 and CTP22 circuit board
2) Faulty D317
1) Broken cam (deformed detecting plate/
broken stopper)
2) Broken bearing
mechanism.

representative.
E-2464
Feed nip motor (M313) failure.

representative.

initialization
1. Feed nip motor (M313) does not rotate.
board
2) Faulty M313
2. Feed nip home position sensor (D319)
does not detect the nip home position.
2) Faulty D319
broken stopper)
2) Broken bearing
mechanism.
Actions
1.
2.

2) Replace the sensor.
3) Replace the CTP22 circuit board.
3.
1) Replace the cam.
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
Replace the bearing.

Remove the foreign matter.
1.
2.
3.
1) Replace the cam.
2) Replace the bearing.
3) Reinstall or replace the gear.

No.
Message
Factor
E-2465
Exit section up/down belt motor

(M314) failure.

initialization
1. Exit section up/down motor (M314) does
not rotate.
board
2) Faulty M314
2. Feed nip home position sensor (D319)
does not detect the home position.
board
2) Faulty D319
3. Faulty up/down release mechanism
broken stopper)
2) Broken bearing
mechanism.
board

representative.
Actions
1.
2.
3.
1) Replace the cam.
2) Replace the bearing.

No.
W-2466
Message
An error occurred during
measuring of the side
registration.
the manual.
Factor
1. Width detecting waiting position is
incorrect.
1) Side registration calibration has not been
performed.
4) Increased load in the slide bearing
5) The magazine ID does not match the

paper width.
between the magazine ID sensor (D306 to
7) Faulty sensor (D306 to D310)
2. Paper feed position is incorrect.
1) Paper width guide in the magazine is
incorrectly set.
2) Flanges in the magazine is incorrectly set.
3) Positioning pin in the magazine is
incorrectly set.
4) Broken cutter guide positioning hole
5) Faulty magazine table
6) Disengaged feed roller or nip spring in the
magazine
7) Disengaged feed roller or nip spring in the
feed section
8) Paper is incorrectly set (aslant) in the
magazine
9) Paper skewing due to dirty roller
3. Width detecting sensor (D314)
malfunction
1) LED in D314 is not lit.
board
3) Deformed or broken width detecting guide
W-2467
Cant rewind because paper is

being fed.
Try again after the completion of
feeding paper.
The rewind request from the PC was received

while paper was being fed
Actions
1.
1) Perform Side Register Calibration
(45S).
3) Reinstall or replace the pulley
4) Clean/replace the slide shaft, or
inspect/replace the width detecting
guide.
5) Replace with the correct ID chip, or
correct the setting.
2.
1) Correct the width guide position.
2) Correct the flange position.
3) Replace the magazine.
4) Replace the cutter guide.
5) Inspect/repair the magazine table.
6) Inspect/repair the nip roller/spring.
7) Inspect/repair the nip roller/spring.
8) Correctly set the paper.
9) Clean the roller.
3.
3) Replace the width detecting guide.
Try the operation again after the paper
feed is completed.

No.
W-2470
Message
Paper jam occurred in printer.
(Paper supply section)
Remove paper.
Factor
not change the state even if the film leading
end is pulled out by a preset length.
board
2) Faulty M301
detect paper.
board
2) Faulty D301
spring
4. Paper does not reach the sensor.
1) D301 cannot detect paper because the
papers leading end is cut aslant.
2) Paper protrudes too much when setting it.
3) Paper hit the magazine nip roller.
4) Paper is set aslant.
5) Magazine table is incorrectly set.
6) Magazine shutter malfunction (broken
cutter guide pin, faulty magazine shutter
section)
7) Faulty magazine end detecting plate
board
Actions
1.
2.
2)
3)
3.
1)
2)
3)
Replace the sensor.

Replace the pulley.
Clean the roller.
4.
1) Cut the papers leading end straight.
2) Adjust the length of the paper that
protrudes from the magazine.
3) Inspect or replace the magazine nip
roller section guide.
4) Set the paper correctly.
5) Inspect or repair the table.
7) Replace the magazine end detecting

plate or magazine.

No.
Message
Factor
W-2471

(Paper supply section - Feeding
section)
Remove paper.
Paper feed error

1. Paper jamming occurred.
1) The nip roller or spring is out of place.
2) Paper remains in the printer.
3) Deformed or incorrectly installed guide
plate
4) The curl of the paper is excessive.
2. Feed drive motor 1 (M302) does not
board
2) Faulty M302
4) Disengaged or worn feed drive gear
5) Increased lode in the drive section
3. Back printer entrance sensor (D302) does
not detect paper.
board
2) Faulty D302
W-2472

(Feeding section - Back printer
section)
Remove paper.
Paper feed error

1) Back printer clearance is incorrectly
adjusted.
plate
board
2) Faulty M303
3. Back printer entrance sensor (D302) does
not detect paper.
board
2) Faulty D302
Actions
1.
1) Inspect/repair the nip roller and spring.
2) Remove the paper.
3) Check/repair the guide plate.
4) Replace the paper.
2.
2)
3)
4)
5)
3.
Replace the motor.

Replace the PDC22 circuit board.
Inspect/repair the drive section.

1.
1) Adjust the clearance correctly.
2.
2)
3)
4)
5)
3.
Replace the motor.



No.
W-2473
Message
(Back printer section - Register
section)
Remove paper.
Factor
Paper feed error
1) Back printer clearance is incorrectly
adjusted.
plate
board
2) Faulty M303
3. Registration sensor (D303) does not
detect paper.
board
2) Faulty D303
4. Faulty feed roller nip or pre-registration
roller nip mechanism (The rollers do not
nip paper.)
1) Broken nip release cam
2) Broken nip release arm
3) Faulty mechanism fine adjustment
Actions
1.
1) Adjust the clearance correctly.
2.
2)
3)
4)
5)
3.
Replace the motor.


4.
1) Replace the cam.

2) Reinstall or replace the arm.
3) Perform fine adjustment again.

No.
W-2474
Message
(Register section - Subscanning section)
Remove paper.
Factor
Paper feed error
1) Abnormal width detecting operation
2) The magazine ID does not match the
paper width.
3) Abnormal magazine ID detection
5) Disengaged nip roller or spring

6) Width detecting section is incorrectly
installed, deformed or broken.
7) Paper slippage due to dirty roller
9) Heavily curled paper
2. Registration drive motor (M304) does not
board
2) Faulty M304
3) Disengaged or worn drive gear
3. Registration sensor (D303) or Preexposure sensor (D304) does not detect
paper.
between D303/D304 and the CTP22
circuit board
2) Faulty D303/D304
4. Faulty registration nip or first sub-scanning
roller nip (The rollers do not nip paper.)
1) Broken nip release cam
2) Broken nip release arm
5. Sub-scanning drive motor (M305) does
not rotate, or the drive system is faulty.
board
2) Faulty M305
3) Faulty motor driver
4) Disengaged or broken steel belt
5) Abnormal steel belt tension
6. Exit section up/down belt malfunction
1) Broken cam
Actions
1.
1) Refer to E-2466.)
2) Replace with the correct ID chip, or
correct the setting.
3) (Refer to W-2426.)
4) Inspect or repair the width detecting
section.
5) Inspect, repair or replace the nip roller
or spring.
6) Inspect, repair or replace the guide
plate.
2.
3.

4.
1) Replace the cam.
2) Reinstall or replace the arm.
3) Perform the fine adjustment again.
5.
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
6.
1)
2)
3)
Replace the motor.

Replace the motor driver.
Reinstall or replace the steel belt.
Adjust the belt tension again.
Inspect or repair the drive system.
Replace the cam.
Perform the fine adjustment again.
Inspect or repair the drive section.

No.
W-2475
Message
(Exit section)
Remove paper.
Factor
Paper feed error
1) The feed roller or spring is out of place.
2) Deformed, incorrectly installed or broken
feed belt
plate
2. Exit drive motor (M306) does not rotate, or
the drive system is faulty.
board
2) Faulty M306
3) Disengaged or worn exit drive motor drive
gear
4) Disengaged or worn exit drive timing belt
5) Disengaged or worn exit drive pulley
3. Processor entry sensor (D305) does not
detect paper.
2) Faulty D305
1) Broken cam
W-2476
The error recovery process used to cope with

a jam is in progress.
Actions
1.
1) Inspect or repair the nip roller and
spring.
2) Repair or replace the feed belt.
3) Inspect or repair the guide plate.
2.
4)
5)
6)
7)
3.


4.
1) Replace the cam.
2) Adjust the lowest position of the up/
down belt.
The error recovery process is in

progress. Please wait.
I-2477
Loading paper.
Please wait.

1. The feed section initialization is in
progress during the system startup or after
a cover is closed.
board
1. Wait until the auto load operation is

complete.

No.
Message
W-2478
Paper jam occurred in printer or

processor section.
(Exit section - Processor
section)
Remove paper.
Factor
Paper feed error
1) The feed roller or spring is out of place.
2) Deformed, incorrectly installed or broken
feed belt
plate
2. Exit drive motor (M306) does not rotate, or
the drive system is faulty.
board
2) Faulty M306
3) Disengaged or worn exit drive motor drive
gear
4) Disengaged or worn exit drive timing belt
5) Disengaged or worn exit drive pulley
3. Processor entry sensor (D305) does not
detect paper.
2) Faulty D305
1) Broken cam
board
I-2479
Paper-end processing.
Actions
1.
1) Inspect or repair the nip roller and
spring.
2) Repair or replace the feed belt.
3) Inspect or repair the guide plate.
2.
4)
5)
6)
7)
3.


4.
1) Replace the cam.
2) Adjust the lowest position of the up/
down belt.
The paper end process is in progress.
The mechanical shutter linked to the optical

system did not function. (The shutter-open
signal could not be detected by the shutteropen sensor.)
1. Blown fuse (FC07) in the LDD22 circuit
board
2. Poorly connected or broken harness that
includes the connector in the laser unit
4. Faulty laser unit
Please wait.
E-2501
ROS shutter malfunctions.

representative.

4. Replace the laser unit.

No.
E-2502
Message
ROS fan malfunctions.
representative.
E-2503
The polygon malfunctions.

representative.
E-2506
The exposure section cooling

fan malfunctions.
representative.
W-2507
The paper condition setup of the

magazine not performed.
Perform the paper condition
setup.
E-2508
E-2509
The communication error

occurred in the printer
processor.
(GHT22-LDA22)
representative.
R-laser information (R-LD)

information failure.
Factor
The mechanical shutter linked to the optical
system did not function. (The rotation sensor
did not function.)
includes the connector (JROS) in the laser
unit
2. Poorly connected fan connector
board
The mechanical polygon did not function.
(The rotation sensor did not function.)
includes the connector (JROS) in the laser
unit
2. Poorly connected connector (JPLG) at the
bottom of the laser unit
board
board
The fan in the exposure section did not
function. (The rotation sensor did not
function.)
1. Poorly contacting connector for the cooling
fan
board
3. Faulty cooling fan
4. Faulty LDD22
When a magazine is installed, a message
indicating that the density measurement has
not been performed is displayed.
1. The magazine has been replaced.
A timeout with the optical section (LDA22)
occurred.
between the GHT22 and LDA22 circuit
boards
3. Faulty LDA22 circuit board
Incorrect data read from the EEPROM in the
laser unit during the system startup.
1. Incorrect data in the laser unit
2. Poorly contacting connector (JML1 or
JML2) or broken harness between the
laser unit and the JML22 circuit board
board
4. Abnormal system software
Actions

1. Reconnect the connector, or replace/

repair the harness.

3. Replace the fan.
1. Perform the paper condition setup.

3. Replace the LDA22 circuit board.

4. Restart the system. Reinstall it if the
problem occurs again.

No.
E-2510
Message
G-laser (G-SHG) information
failure.
Factor
2. Poorly contacting connector (JML6) or
broken harness between the laser unit and
the JML22 circuit board
board
E-2511
B-laser (B-SHG) information

failure.

2. Poorly contacting connector (JML1 or
JML2) or broken harness between the
laser unit and the JML22 circuit board
board
E-2512
E-2513
E-2514
E-2515
R laser (R-LD) temperature

outside specified range.
Warming-up of laser stopped.
representative.
G laser (G-SHG) temperature

representative.
B laser (B-SHG) temperature

representative.
R-laser (R-LD) temperature
error occurred.
representative.
Laser temperature is outside of the specified

range during the initialization.
1. Blown fuse (FC01 or FC02) in the LDD22
circuit board
2. Poorly contacting connector or broken
harness between the laser unit and the
LDD22 circuit board
the JML circuit board
circuit board
the JML circuit board
When laser temperature is outside of the
specified range
circuit board
2. Broken wire in the laser unit
Actions







No.
E-2516
E-2517
W-2518
Message
Factor
G-laser (G-SHG) temperature

error occurred.
representative.

specified range
circuit board
B-laser (B-SHG) temperature

error occurred.
representative.

specified range
circuit board
A temperature error detected in

the printer.
Check it referring to the manual.
When the ambient temperature is outside of

the specified range
1. The current temperature is above (or
below) the specified range.

temperature sensor
3. Blown fuse (FC01, FC02, or FC03) in the
LDD22 circuit board
5. Faulty temperature sensor
E-2519
AOM temperature error

occurred.
representative.
E-2520
Excessive R laser (R-LD)

current detected.
representative.
E-2521
Excessive G laser (G-SHG)

current detected.
representative.
E-2522
Excessive B laser (B-SHG)

current detected.
representative.
An abnormal temperature was observed at

the AOM immediately before the exposure.
between the LDD22 circuit board and the
AOM driver
2. Blown fuse in the LDD22 circuit board
3. Faulty AOM driver
The LD current limiter detected an excessive
current.
LDD22 circuit board
current.
LDD22 circuit board
current.
LDD22 circuit board
Actions


1. Measure the internal temperature, and

adjust it (using an airconditioner) to
within 5 to 45 degrees centigrade as
per Printer Temperature Display
(456).
4. Replace the LDD22 circuit board

3. Replace the AOM driver.




No.
E-2523
Message
R laser (R-LD) current
measurement value outside
specified range.
representative.
E-2524
G laser (G-SHG) current

specified of range.
representative.
E-2525
B laser (B-SHG) current

specified range.
representative.
W-2526
R laser (R-LD) is about to its

lifetime.
No problem for the moment, but
consult technical representative.
W-2527
G laser (G-SHG) is about to its

lifetime.
Factor
The PD current is not within the specified
range.
LDD22 circuit board
range.
LDD22 circuit board
2. Blown fuse (FH12 or FH14) in the PWR22
circuit board
range.
LDD22 circuit board
2. Blown fuse (FH12 or FH15) in the PWR22
circuit board
Laser deterioration was detected in the last
post-operational check.
2. Deteriorated laser
2. The temperature has not been periodically
set to an optimum value.
W-2528
B laser (B-SHG) is about to its

lifetime.

2. The temperature has not been periodically
set to an optimum value.
E-2529
SOS detection failed.

representative.
When SOS cannot be detected

1. Cable to the AOM driver is not connected
or the wires are incorrectly swapped
(check them for the correct colors).
LDD22 circuit board
Actions





2. Perform temperature optimization by
referring to B, G Laser (SHG) Optimal
Temperature Setup (454).

1. Confirm that the AOM driver is

properly connected.

No.
Message
Factor
E-2530
Electrical failure occurred in the

exposure section.
The power supply voltages are outside of the

specified range.
1. The cable between the LDD22 and
PWR22 circuit boards is not connected.
3. Blown fuse(s) (FH9 to FH15) in the LDD22
circuit board
If problems persist, call technical

representative.
W-2532
G laser (SHG) temperature

adjustment required.
Perform the G, B-laser (SHG)
optimal temperature setup in the
4. Setup and Maintenance - 5.
W-2533
10 days passed since the last

paper condition setup.
SHG needs to be set.

1. Three months have passed since the
setting was performed last.
The paper condition setup for the master

magazine has not been performed for 10
days.
Actions
1. Connect the cable properly.


Perform the paper condition setup.
We recommend paper condition

setup.
E-2534
An error detected by R-laser(RLD) sensor.

representative.
E-2535
An error detected by G-laser(GSHG) sensor.

representative.
E-2536
An error detected by B-laser(BSHG) sensor.

representative.
W-2537
Laser temperature adjustment

not started because the ambient
temperature is too low(high).
Adjust the ambient temp.
between 15 to 30-C. (Laser
temp. adjustment will be started
when the ambient temp.
exceeds 5-C.)
Laser Thermistor detects an error.

between the laser unit and the JML22
circuit board
2. Faulty JML22 circuit board
circuit board
circuit board
After the initialization, the ambient
temperature has been outside of the
specified range for more than the specified
period.

temperature sensor.
LDD22 circuit board

2. Replace the JML22 circuit board.



per Printer Temperature Display
(456).

No.
W-2538
Message
Time to replace ROS filter.
Replace ROS filter.
E-2539
Time to replace ROS filter.

Replace ROS filter.
W-2540
Ambient temperature too low

(high).
Adjust the ambient temperature
between 15 to 30-C.
Factor
The air filter has not been replaced during the
specified period.
1. The specified time has elapsed since the
filter was replaced last.
The air filter has not been replaced during the
specified period.
1. The specified time has elapsed since the
filter was replaced last.
The ambient temperature is outside of the
range between 10 to 42 degrees centigrade
(by default).

temperature sensor
LDD22 circuit board
E-2541
R-laser (R-LD) CB temperature

error occurred.
representative.
W-2541
Periodic time to set the optimal

temperatures of B laser (SHG).
Perform the G, B-laser (SHG)
optimal temperature setup in the
4. Setup and Maintenance - 5.
W-2601
W-2602
Paper jam occurred in the

processor section.
%NUM% papers remain in
processor.
Remove paper.
Paper remains in the processor

section.
Remove paper.
R-laser (R-LD) CB temperature is outside of

the specified range.
1. Disconnected connector (JML1, JML2)
2. Broken harness between the laser unit
and the JML22 circuit board
3. Faulty JML22circuit board
SHG needs to be set.
1. Three months have passed since the
setting was last performed.
Paper is not fed out after the specified time

has passed.
1. Incorrectly installed unit (processing rack,
crossover rack, dryer rack, etc.)
2. Paper remains in the processor due to a
power failure during paper feed.
3. Poorly connected connector (CTP19) or
broken harness between the Dryer section
exit sensor (D411) and the CTP22 circuit
board
4. Faulty D411
5. Faulty processing rack or crossover rack
The power is turned OFF while paper is in the
processor.
Actions
1. Replace the filter and press the

[Replace] button in Filter
Replacement History (45B).
1. Replace the filter and press the

[Replace] button in Filter
Replacement History (45B).

per Displaying the Internal Printer
Temperature (456).
4. Replace the LDD22 circuit board

2. Repair/replace the harness.
3. Replace the JML22circuit board.

1. Reinstall each unit.

2. Remove paper.

5. Clean or replace the parts or unit.
Remove the paper in the processor or
dryer section.

No.
E-2606
Message
Replenisher cartridge opening
drive motor (M402) failure.
representative.
W-2607
PSR replenisher nearly empty.

Mix the replenisher.
W-2609
W-2611
The dryer unit or the dryer cover

opened.
Remove paper, and then start
processing.
The dryer unit or the dryer

section cover opened.
Close the cover.
Factor
Replenisher cartridge section is faulty.
between the replenisher cartridge opening
drive motor (M402) and the CTP22 circuit
board
2. Faulty M402
between the cartridge box sensor (D408,
4. Faulty D408 or D409
between the replenisher door detecting
interlock switch(D410) and the PAC22
circuit board
6. Faulty D410
When the PSR lower limit sensor sensed
solution low during the FA process
1. The PSR tank is empty.
between the PSR external replenisher
solution level sensor (FS418) and the
CTP16 in the CTP22 circuit board
3. Faulty FS418
Dryer unit or dryer section cover is opened
while paper is processed in the processor.
1. Incorrectly installed dryer unit
2. Incorrectly installed dryer cover
(incorrectly tightened thumbscrews)
switch (D416) and the PWR22 circuit
board
4. Blown fuse related to the interlock switch
Dryer unit or dryer section cover is opened
while paper is processed in the processor.
1. Incorrectly installed dryer unit
2. Incorrectly installed dryer cover
(incorrectly tightened thumbscrews)
3. Deformed interlock detecting plate
switch (D416) and the PWR22 circuit
board
5. Faulty D416
Actions


6. Replace the interlock switch.
1. Add two liters of water.

2. Correctly connect, repair, or replace
the harness.

1. Correctly install the dryer unit.

2. Correctly install the dryer cover.

5. Replace the PWR22 circuit board
1. Correctly install the dryer unit.

2. Correctly install the dryer cover.
3. Repair/replace the detecting plate.

No.
Message
Factor
E-2614
P1 processing tank temperature

not rising.
Processing tank heaters (H401)
turned off.
representative.
Solution temperature does not rise more than

1C within 30 minutes.
between the P1 solution heater (H401)
and the PAC6 in the PAC22 circuit board
2. Faulty electrical section
3. Faulty H401
4. Clogged hose, nozzle or circulation filter
between the P1 circulation pump (PU401)
and the PAC22 circuit board
6. Faulty P1 solution temperature sensor
(TS401)
E-2615
P2 processing tank temperature

not rising.
turned off.
representative.

3. Faulty H402
(TS402)
E-2616
PS1, 2 processing tank

temperatures not rising.
turned off.
representative.

between the PS1/2 solution heater (H403)
3. Faulty H403
between the PS1/2 circulation pump
(PU403/PU404) and the PAC22 circuit
board
6. Faulty PS1/2 solution temperature sensor
(TS403)
Actions

2. Repair the electrical section.
3. Replace the heater.
4. Clean the hose or nozzle, or replace
the circulation filter.




No.
Message
Factor
E-2617
PS3, 4 processing tank

temperatures not rising.
turned off.
representative.

3. Faulty H404
board
(TS404)
7. Blown fuse in the CTP22 circuit board
E-2618
E-2619
E-2620
Dryer section temperature not

rising.
Dryer section heaters (H406)
turned off.
representative.

1C within 1 minute during heat-up.
between the dryer heater (H406) and the
PAC22 circuit board
3. Faulty H406
Temperature of P1 processing
tank outside the specified
temperature range.
Heater (H401) turned off.
representative.
Abnormal P1 solution temperature

3. Faulty H401
(TS401)
Temperature of P2 processing
tank outside the specified
temperature range.
representative.
Abnormal P2 solution temperature

3. Faulty H402
(TS402)
Actions






No.
E-2621
Message
Temperature of PS 1,2
processing tank outside the
representative.
Factor
Abnormal PS1/PS2 solution temperature
3. Faulty H403
board
(TS403)
E-2622
Temperature of PS 3,4
processing tank outside the
representative.
Abnormal PS3/PS4 solution temperature

3. Faulty H404
board
(TS404)
E-2623
E-2624
E-2625
Temperature of dryer section

outside the specified
temperature range.
representative.
Abnormal dryer temperature

between the dryer heater (H406) and the
PAC22 circuit board
3. Faulty H406
P1 safety thermostat (D401)

activated.
representative.
Safety thermostat in P1 processing tank is

activated.
P2 safety thermostat (D402)

activated.
representative.

(TS401)
Safety thermostat in P2 processing tank is
activated.
(TS402)
Actions








No.
Message
Factor
E-2626
PS1/2 safety thermostat (D403)

activated.
Heaters (H403) turned off.
representative.
Safety thermostat in PS1/2 processing tank is

activated.
E-2627
E-2628
W-2629
W-2630
PS3/4 safety thermostat (D404)

activated.
Heaters (H404) turned off.
representative.
Safety thermostat in dryer

section (D406) activated.
representative.
P1 solution level has fallen.

Temperature adjustment
stopped.
P2 solution level has fallen.

stopped.

between the PS2 circulation pump
(PU404) and the PAC22 circuit board
(TS403)
Safety thermostat in PS3/4 processing tank is
activated.
between the PS4 circulation pump
(PU406) and the PAC22 circuit board
(TS404)
Safety thermostat in the dryer section is
activated.
1. Faulty dryer fan (F405)
between the dryer air temperature sensor
(TS406) and the CTP13 in the CTP22
circuit board
3. Faulty TS406
4. Foreign matter is caught in the dryer duct.
The solution level of the P1 processing tank
is low.
1. Solution leak
between the P1R replenisher pump
(PU408) and PAC3 in the PAC22 circuit
board
between the P1 solution level sensor
(FS401) and the CTP15 in the CTP22
circuit board
4. Faulty PU408
5. Faulty FS401
7. Faulty PAC22 circuit board
The solution level of the P2 processing tank
is low.
1. Solution leak
between the P2 solution level sensor
circuit board
3. Faulty FS402
Actions




1. Repair the solution leak.


4.
5.
6.
7.
Replace the pump.

Replace the sensor.
Replace the PAC22 circuit board.



No.
W-2631
W-2632
W-2633
W-2634
W-2635
Message
PS1 solution level has fallen.
stopped.

stopped.

stopped.

stopped.
P1R replenisher solution level

has fallen.
W-2638
P1R replenisher empty.

Add replenisher.
Factor
The solution level of the PS1 processing tank
is low.
1. Solution leak
between the PS1 solution level sensor
circuit board
3. Faulty sensor (FS403)
is low.
1. Solution leak
circuit board
3. Safety FS404
is low.
1. Solution leak
circuit board
3. Faulty FS405
is low.
1. Solution leak
between the sensor (FS406) and the
3. Faulty FS406
When the P1R lower limit sensor detects
1. P1R solution level is low.
between the P1R external replenisher
sensor (FS416) and the CTP16 in the
CTP22 circuit board
3. Faulty FS416
Completely no solution
1. No solution is in the P1R tank.
level sensor (FS416) and the CTP16 in the
CTP22 circuit board
3. Faulty FS416
Actions







1. Replenish the P1R.


1. Replenish the P1R.



No.
W-2644
Message
W2 waste tank nearly full.
Collect it in the recovery tank.
W-2645
W2 waste tank full.

W-2648
PSR replenisher nearly empty.

Replenish 4L of replenisher.
W-2649
PSR replenisher empty.

Replenish 8L of replenisher.
Factor
When the external waste solution sensor
detects solution exists
1. The external waste solution level sensor
(FS420) detected Solution exists.
between FS420 and the CTP16 in the
CTP22 circuit board
3. Faulty FS420
detected solution completely full
1. The external waste solution level sensor
(FS420) detected Solution exists.
CTP22 circuit board
3. Faulty FS420
When the PSR upper limit sensor detects
solution low
1. PSR solution level is low.
between the PSR upper level sensor
circuit board
3. Faulty FS410
When the PSR lower limit sensor detects
solution low
between the PSR lower level sensor
circuit board
3. Faulty FS414
W-2650
W1 waste tank nearly full.

When the internal waste solution sensor

detects Solution exists.
1. The waste solution level sensor (FS415)
indicates Solution exists.
CTP22 circuit board
3. Faulty FS415
Actions
1. Collect the waste solution.


1. Add one FSC and four liters of FRSS.

the harness.

1. Add two FSCs and eight liters of

FRSS.
the harness.


the harness.
4. Replace the CTP22 circuit board

No.
W-2651
Message
W1 waste tank full.
E-2657
P1R replenishment pump

(PU408) or P1R replenisher
stirring valve (S410)
malfunctions.
E-2658
P2RA replenishment pump

(PU409) or P2RA replenisher
cartridge washing valve (S408)
malfunctions.
Factor
detects solution completely full
1. The waste solution level sensor (FS415)
indicates Solution exists.
CTP22 circuit board
3. Faulty FS415
When the integrated discharge up to the P1R
upper limit sensor exceeds the specified
value (1998 ml)
between P1R replenisher pump (PU408)
2. Faulty PU408
between P1R stirring valve (S410) and the
PDC12 in the PDC22 circuit board
4. Faulty S410
between P1R cartridge washing valve
(S407) and the PDC12 in the PDC22
circuit board
6. Faulty S407
between P1R upper level sensor (FS407)
and the CTP16 in the CTP22 circuit board
8. Faulty FS407
When the integrated discharge up to the
P2RA upper limit sensor exceeds the
specified value (777 ml)
between the P2RA replenisher pump
(PU409) and the PAC3 in the PAC22
circuit board
2. Faulty PU409
between the P2RA cartridge washing
valve (S408) and the PDC12 in the PDC22
circuit board
4. Faulty S408
between the P2RB upper level sensor
circuit board
6. Faulty FS408
Actions

the harness.
4. Replace the CTP22 circuit board

2. Replace the pump.
4. Replace the stirring valve.
6. Replace the washing valve.





No.
E-2659
Message
P2RB replenishment pump
(PU410) or P2RB replenisher
cartridge washing valve (S409)
malfunctions.
W-2660

Factor
When the integrated discharge up to the
P2RB upper limit sensor exceeds the
specified value (777 ml)
between the P2RB replenisher pump
circuit board
2. Faulty PU410
between the P2RB cartridge washing
circuit board
4. Faulty S409
circuit board
6. Faulty FS409
When the PSR lower limit sensor detects
between the PSR external replenisher
CTP22 circuit board
3. Faulty FS418
I-2662
Performing the evaporation

correction.
Warming-up will be started after
the evaporation correction.
Please wait.
Evaporation replenishment is in progress.
E-2663
P1R replenisher pump (PU408)

malfunctions.
When the integrated discharge between the

P1R upper and lower limit sensors exceeds
the specified value
between the P1R replenisher pump
circuit board
2. Faulty PU408
between the P1R lower level sensor
circuit board
4. Faulty FS411
Actions



1. Add eight liters of water into the

FRSS.
the harness.




No.
E-2664
Message
P2RA replenisher pump
(PU409) malfunctions.
E-2665
P2RB replenisher pump

(PU410) malfunctions.
W-2666
P2R replenisher nearly empty.

W-2667
P2R replenisher empty.

W-2670
Replenisher cartridge not

loaded.
Install new replenisher cartridge.
Factor
P2RA upper and lower limit sensors exceeds
the specified value
between the P2RA replenisher pump
circuit board
2. Faulty PU409
between the P2RA lower level sensor
circuit board
4. Faulty FS412
P2RB upper and lower limit sensors exceeds
the specified value
between the P2RB replenisher pump
circuit board
2. Faulty PU410
4. Faulty FS413
1. The replenisher solution level is low.
between the external replenisher level
sensor (FS417) and the CTP16 in the
CTP22 circuit board
3. Faulty FS417
solution completely empty during the FA
process
1. The P2R tank is empty.
CTP22 circuit board
3. Faulty FS417
1. The replenisher cartridge is not installed.
between the sensor (D407) and the
3. Faulty D407
Actions




1. Replenish the P2R tank.


1. Replenish the P2R tank.


1. Install a new replenisher cartridge.

No.
W-2671
Message
Replenisher door open.
Close it.
W-2672
PSR lowered.
Continue to replenish PSR until
this message disappears.
Factor
The replenisher box door is open.
1. The replenisher box door is open.
between the replenisher door detecting
interlock switch (D410) and the PWR4 in
the PWR22 circuit board
3. Faulty D410
When the PSR upper limit level sensor
detects solution low
1. The replenisher solution level is low.
between the PSR upper level sensor
circuit board
3. Faulty FS410
E-2673
Opening of replenisher cartridge

failed.
When the lower limit sensor does not detect

solution exists within a specific time after
the cartridge is opened.
1. Faulty replenisher cartridge opening
2. Clogged replenishment pipe(s)
3. Faulty replenisher tank lower level sensor

W-2674
The replenisher cartridge that is

currently used is empty.
Insert a new replenisher
cartridge.
When the lower limit sensor detected

solution low in all tanks a preset time after
the valve was opened
1. An empty replenisher cartridge is
installed.
2. The replenisher cartridge is not installed.
between the lower level sensor
(FS411,FS412,FS413) and the CTP16 in
4. Faulty sensor (FS411,FS412,FS413)
between the cartridge setting sensor
(D407) and the CTP17 in the CTP22
circuit board
6. Faulty D407
Actions
1. Close the replenisher box door.


1. Add FRSS until the message

disappears.

1. - Check whether or not if any solution

remains in the cartridge due to
opening failure. If an opening error
occurred, also check whether or not
the opening section is broken.
- If an opening error occurred but no
abnormality was found, drain off the
P1R,P2RA,P2RB replenisher tanks,
set a new replenisher cartridge and
resume operation.
2. Check whether or not foreign matter is
caught in the hopper section, the hose
of the replenisher tank is clogged, or
solution has leaked from the hopper
section. If any abnormality is found,
clean it.




No.
Message
Factor
E-2675
P1R replenisher cartridge

washing valve (S407) or P1R
replenisher stirring valve (S410)
malfunctions.
When the P1R replenisher upper limit sensor

between the P1R stirring valve (S410) and
the PDC12 in the PDC22 circuit board
2. Faulty S410
between the P1R cartridge washing valve
(S407) and the PDC12 in the PDC22
circuit board
4. Faulty S407
between the auto washing pump (PU407)
and the PDC9 in the PDC22 circuit board
6. Faulty PU407
between the P1R upper level sensor
circuit board
8. Faulty FS407
E-2676
P2RA replenisher cartridge

washing valve (S408)
malfunctions.
E-2677
P2RB replenisher cartridge

washing valve (S409)
malfunctions.
W-2680
Number of prints exceeds limit.

Cancel printing.
When the P2RA upper limit sensor detects

solution low
between the P2RA cartridge washing
circuit board
2. Faulty S408
4. Faulty PU407
6. Faulty FS408
When the P2RB replenisher upper limit
sensor detects solution low
between the P2RB cartridge washing
circuit board
2. Faulty S409
4. Faulty PU407
circuit board
6. Faulty FS409
The integrated replenishment into the P1R
exceeded the specified value.
Actions

2. Replace the stirring valve.

6. Replace the washing pump.





Clear the error previously displayed.

No.
I-2681
Message
Mixing replenisher.
Please wait.
W-2686
Washing solution nearly empty.

Replenish the cleaning water.
W-2688
Washing solution empty.

Replenish the cleaning water.
I-2689
The replenisher is mixed.
Factor
Replenisher box door opening is designated
during replenisher mixing.
1. When replenisher mixing is in progress
during system start-up.
2. When installation opening is specified
during opening
3. When the solution exceeds the specified
amount
When the washing solution level sensor
1. Low solution level
between the external washing solution
CTP22 circuit board
3. Faulty FS419
detects solution completely empty
between the external washing solution
CTP22 circuit board
3. Faulty FS419
The previous opening conditions were
detected.
Actions
1. Add eight liters of water into the tank.

the harness.

1. Add eight liters of water into the tank.

the harness.

Replace the replenisher cartridge.
Replace the replenisher

cartridge.
I-2691
Solution remains in the

replenisher tank.
representative.
I-2692
Intermittent operation.
When the replenisher lower limit sensor

detects solution exists
1. The solution is left in the replenisher tank.
between the lower level sensor (FS411,
FS412, FS413) and the CTP16 in the
CTP22 circuit board
3. Faulty lower level sensor (FS411, FS412,
FS413)
1. Drain the solution.

the harness.

While in the auto intermittent operation
The auto washing was attempted while the

processor section was processing.
Please wait.
I-2693
Processing...
Please wait.
W-2701
Sort position error occurred.

Check the number of prints that
were outputted in the sorter.
Paper overlapping occurred when sorting.

1. The next paper caught up with the paper
in the processor.
2. Paper jamming occurred at the dryer exit.
3. The actuator of the dryer section exit
sensor (D411) was stuck.
1. Clean the processing rack.

2. Remove paper.
3. Release the actuator.

No.
Message
E-2702
An error occurred in the solution

temperature sensors (TS401 to
TS405).
The connectors of the solution
temperature sensors may be
disconnected.
representative.
The thermistor connector is out of place.

1. Poorly connected or broken harness at
the temperature sensor (TS401, TS402,
TS403, TS404, TS406)
2. Faulty temperature sensor (TS401,
TS402, TS403, TS404, TS406)
An error occurred in the solution

temperature sensors (TS401 to
TS405).
The solution temperature
sensors may be shorted.
representative.
Short-circuited thermistor
1. Temperature sensor (TS401, TS402,
TS403, TS404, TS406) is short-circuited.
3.5 liters of solution has been used after the

PSR upper level sensor detects solution
empty.
E-2703
W-2704
Pour 4L of FRSS, and then put

one FSC tablet into the port.
W-2705
PSR lowered.
Pour FRSS until this message
disappears, and then put one
FSC tablet into the port.
Factor

between the PSR lower level sensor
(FS414) and the CTP22 circuit board
3. Faulty FS414
W-5001
Perforation rupture exists.

Frame position may not detected
correctly. Remove carrier and
then film, and mend the rupture.
Torn perforations were found while the film

was being inserted when using the AFC135.
1. Film with torn perforation(s)
2. Film jamming
4. D102 -to- CYS22 circuit board -toplug-in
W-5002
Perforation rupture exists.

Frame position may not detected
correctly. Remove carrier and
then film, and mend the rupture.
Torn perforations were found while the film

was being ejected when using the AFC135.
1. Film with torn perforation(s)
2. Film jamming
Actions

Add one FSC and 4 liters of FRSS.
1. Add FRSS until the message

disappears, and the add one FSC.
the harness.
1. Repair the tearing, or print with the

2. Repair the leading end of the film.
1. Repair the tearing, or print with the

2. Repair the leading end of the film.

No.
W-5004
Message
Too long film.
Remove carrier and then film.
Factor
The film is too long when using the AFC135.
1. A film length of 2 m or more was used.
2. Dirty or faulty 135 frame sensor (D107)
3. Sensor -to- CYS22 circuit board -to- plugin connector -to- CTC22 circuit board,
E-5005
An error detected by mask

motor home position sensor
(D117).
Install the carrier again. If
E-5006
An error detected by mask

motor home position sensor
(D117).
W-5007
Too short film.

The LHP motor home position detection error

occurred when using the AFC135.
1. The mask motor home position sensor
(D117) is not connected.
2. The mask motor (M103) is not connected.
3. Faulty D117
4. Faulty M103
board
6. Blown fuse (FH5) in the CTC22 circuit
board
The LHP motor home position detection error
occurred when using the AFC135.
1. The mask motor home position sensor
(D117) is not connected.
2. The mask motor (M103) is not connected.
3. Faulty D117
4. Faulty M103
board
6. Blown fuse (FH5) in the CTC22 circuit
board
A film length of 67 mm or less was used
when using the AFC135.
1. A film length of 76 mm or less was used.
2. Faulty 135 frame sensor (D107)
Actions
1. Use the manual film carrier or cut the

film.
2. Clean or replace the sensor.
1. Connect it properly to the connector.

2.
3.
4.
5.
Connect it properly to the connector.

Replace the sensor.
Replace the motor.
Replace the fuse.


2.
3.
4.
5.
Connect it properly to the connector.

Replace the sensor.
Replace the motor.
Replace the fuse.

1. Use the manual film carrier.

4. Replace the CYS22 circuit board
5. Replace the CTC22 circuit board

No.
W-5010
Message
Film sensors (D101 to D111)
deteriorated.
Factor
CTC sensor calibration error
1. Dirty sensor glass (D101 to D111)
Remove the carrier, clean the

sensor and install the carrier
again. If problems persist,
representative.
2. Faulty sensor (D101 to D111)
3. Sensor (D101 to D111) -to- CYS22 circuit
board -toplug-in connector -to- CTC22
circuit board, poorly connected or broken
harness
W-5016
135 film not inserted.

W-5018
Feeding of film failed.

More than the specified number
of perforations detected.
Remove carrier and then clean
135 feeding lane.
A 135 film was installed while not in the feed

lane control sequence.
1. The carrier is not at the 135 feed position.
3. Sensor (D101, D122) -to- CYS22 circuit
harness
Incorrect number of perforation holes were
detected while the AFC135 was used:
Upstream perforation suffer overflow
1. Dirty glass of the upstream perforation
sensor (D102)
2. Slips caused by a dirty feed roller
3. D102 calibration failure
4. Faulty D102
W-5022

Film feed error while using the AFC135. A

perforation obstruction of 8.2 mm occurred in
both directions.
sensor (D102)
4. Faulty D102
Actions
1.
1) Clean the glass surface.
2) First load data to the EPROM as per
NC100A Sensor Calibration
Information (44C) and then write data
to the EPROM.

1. Set the carrier in the 135 feed lane.


1. Clean the sensor glass.

2. Clean the feed roller.
3. Perform the sensor calibration as per
NC100AC Sensor Calibration (44A).


No.
W-5023
Message
Factor
Film feed error occurred while using the
AFC135: the load correction is outside of the
5-mm tolerance.
sensor (D102) or downstream perforation
sensor (D103)
3. Sensor (D102, D103) calibration failure
W-5024

A film feed error occurred while using the

AFC135: the unload correction is outside of
the 5-mm tolerance.
sensor (D103)
W-5029

Film feed error while using the AFC135

1. Dirty glass of the downstream perforation
sensor (D103)
4. Faulty D103
W-5030

Film feed error while using the AFC135

sensor (D102)
4. Faulty D102
Actions





No.
W-5031
Message
Film remains in 135 feeding
lane.
Factor
A switching error occurred when a film was
still loaded while using the AFC.
Actions
Remove the carrier, remove the film, and
reinstall the carrier.

W-5032
W-5033
W-5034
W-5035

lane.
(Around 135 upstream
perforation sensor (D102))

lane.
(Around 135 downstream
perforation sensor (D103))

lane.
(Around 135 leading end sensor
(D101))
Carrier not locked.

Lock it.
A switching error occurred near the upstream

perforation sensor when a film was still
loaded while using the AFC.
1. The film remains in the 135 feed lane.
sensor (D102)
3. Poorly connected or broken harness of
D102
4. Faulty D102
A switching error occurred at around the
downstream perforation sensor when a film
was still loaded while using the AFC.
1. The film remains in the 135 feed lane.
2. Dirty glass of the downstream perforation
sensor (D103)
3. Poorly connected or broken harness at the
sensor (D103)
4. Faulty D103
A switching error occurred at around the
leading end sensor when a film was still
loaded while using the AFC.
board
2. Dirty glass of the 135 leading end sensor
(D101)
The carrier was not locked in five seconds
after it was loaded. Warning against a
unlocked carrier
1. Unlocked carrier
2. Faulty carrier sensor (D123)
1. Remove the film.

1. Remove the film.


1. Lock the carrier.


No.
W-5036
Message
Factor
sensor (D103)
harness
W-5053

Install carrier.
W-5054

carrier cover.
A carrier is not detected: a timeout of 2

seconds occurred in CYS communication.
board
The pressure cover was open when the
carrier was going to be installed.
2. Dirty or faulty upper cover open/close
sensor (D120)
E-5055
Carrier EEPROM data failure.

representative.
W-5056
Carrier EEPROM data failure.

representative.
W-5057
Carrier installing error occurred.

Install the carrier again.
E-5059
An error detected by 135, IX240

carrier position sensor (D121,
D122).
representative.
Abnormal EEPROM data in the carrier.

checksum discrepancy
1. The carrier was removed during carrier
initialization.
2. The carrier was removed while pushing
the carrier lock lever.
1. The EEPROM software version stored in
the carrier does not comply with the
specifications.
Abnormal carrier installation process, or
abnormal IPL process of CYS
board
Both carrier position sensors failed to detect
the feed lane when it is switched.
1. Carrier position sensor (D121, D122) is
not connected.
between the sensor (D121, D122) and the
CTC22 circuit board,
Actions



2. Replace the carrier.

carrier pressure cover.

1. Properly connect it to the connector.


No.
Message
Factor
E-5063
An error detected by 135, IX240

carrier position sensor (D121,
D122).
Both carrier position sensors incorrectly

detects the feed lane simultaneously.
1. Carrier position sensor (D121, D122) is
not connected.
between the sensor (D121, D122) and the
CTC22 circuit board

representative.
W-5064
Too long film.

W-5065
Too many piece of tape.

E-5066
Too many frames.

Remove carrier and then
remove film.
Inserting of film failed.

the feed rollers.

Buffer error: the sampling count exceeded

21000.
1. A film of two meters in length or more was
used.
1. Continue processing it using the

manual film carrier, or cut the film.
Incorrect number of tapes: the detected value

exceeded 20.
1. Dirty or faulty check tape sensor (D106)

Incorrect number of frames: the detected

value exceeded 80.
1. A film with 80 or more frames was used.
W-5067
Actions
Film load error: Ten unsuccessful attempts

were made to load the film while using the
AFC135.
1. Dirty feed roller
2. A film with the bent leading end
3. Faulty feed motor (M101)
4. Faulty film sensor (D101, D102)
harness


1. Continue processing it using the

manual film carrier, or cut the film.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Clean the feed roller.

Repair or reshape the leading end.
Replace the motor.
Replace the sensor.
Reconnect the connector or repair/


No.
W-5068
Message
carrier cover.
E-5069
Writing EEPROM data into

carrier failed.
Factor
2. Dirty or faulty upper cover open/close
sensor (D120)
Carrier EEPROM data writing failure
1. Abnormal carrier EEPROM data

representative.
E-5072
W-5083
Communication error between

input mechanism control CB and
carrier.
(CTC22-CYS22)
CYS communication error

between the carrier and the plug-in
connector
2. Faulty carrier
The lock of the carrier is

released.

1. Five or more seconds elapsed from when
the carrier was unlocked to when the
carrier was removed.
2. Carrier sensor (D123) -to- CYS22 circuit
harness
3. Faulty D123
Remove the carrier or lock it.
W-5084
The lock of the carrier is

released.
W-5085
The lock was released during

the initialization of the carrier.
Remove the carrier or lock it
again.
The carrier was unlocked although paper

jamming did not occur and a film was present
along the film feed lane.
1. The carrier was unlocked while a film was
in the carrier.
harness
3. Faulty D123
1. The carrier was removed during carrier
initialization.
harness
3. Faulty D123
Actions
carrier pressure cover.
1. Perform data writing again. If the error

recurs, replace the carrier.

1. Remove the film, lock the carrier, and

unlock the carrier.

1. Remove the film, lock the carrier, and

unlock the carrier.

1. Lock the carrier again.


No.
W-5086
Message
The auto film carrier not
installed.
W-5101
Cartridge remains in carrier.

cartridge.
W-5102

Factor
1. The auto film carrier is not installed.
CTC22 circuit board
Cartridge present error when using the
AFC240
1. A cartridge is in the carrier.
2. The cartridge set lever is in the operating
position .
3. Faulty cartridge sensor (D115)
A film load jam occurred while using the
AFC240: the load correction is outside of the
5-mm tolerance.
1. Dirty glass of the IX240 perforation sensor
(D105)
4. Faulty D105
W-5103

Film load jam while using the AFC240: a

perforation interval exceeding 29 and a
perforation length exceeding 8 mm were
detected during the fine scanning.
1. Dirty glass of the IX240 perforation sensor
(D105)
4. Faulty D105
Actions
1. Install the auto film the carrier.

2. Return the cartridge set lever to the
cartridge setting position.
1. Clean the glass of the sensor.



No.
W-5104
Message
Factor
Film load jam while using the AFC240: a
perforation interval exceeding 9 mm and a
detected during the fine scanning.
1. Dirty IX240 perforation sensor (D105)
4. Faulty D105
W-5105

Film load jam while using the AFC240: the

film was fed with a distance of 11 mm after
the DTP perforation during film feed.
1. Dirty glass of the leading end sensor
(D104)
4. Faulty D104
W-5106

Film load jam while using the using the

AFC240: the film was fed with a distance of 8
mm after the DTP perforation during film
feed.
(D104)
4. Faulty D104
Actions




No.
W-5107
Message
Factor
Film rewind jam while using the AFC240: the
hole count detected while rewinding
exceeded the hole count detected while
loading.
(D104)
4. Faulty D104
W-5108

Film rewind jam while using the AFC240.The

rewind direction correction is outside of the 5mm tolerance.
1. Dirty perforation sensor (D105)
4. Faulty D105
W-5109

Film rewind jam while using the AFC240: a

detected during the fine rewind scanning.
4. Faulty D105
W-5110

Film rewind jam while using the AFC240: a

detected during the fine rewind scanning.
1. Dirty glass perforation sensor (D105)
4. Faulty D105
Actions





No.
W-5111
Message
Factor
Film rewind jam while using the AFC240:
Perforation was detected in TAP or MTP
during the FID scanning.
(D104) or perforation sensor (D105)
harness
W-5112

Film rewind jam while using the AFC240: TAP

hole length exceeding 8 mm was detected.
(D104)
4. Faulty D104
W-5113
Unsupported perforation type

detected, so film not fed
correctly.
Perforation width error while using the

AFC240: a perforation interval exceeding 9
mm was detected during the pre-feed.
4. Faulty D105
W-5114

correctly.

4. Faulty D105
Actions






No.
W-5115
Message
correctly.
Factor
4. Faulty D105
W-5116

correctly.

4. Faulty D105
E-5117

correctly.

AFC240: a TAP was not detected at the last
frame.
(D104)
4. Faulty D104
W-5118

correctly.

AFC240: a TAP perforation exceeding 8 mm
was detected during the feed.
(D104)
4. Faulty D104
Actions





No.
W-5119
Message
correctly.
Factor
AFC240: a TAP (DTP) perforation exceeding
8 mm was detected during the feed.
(D104)
4. Faulty D104
W-5121
Unprocessed cartridge.
Not used.
If it is a processed cartridge, fold
IPI. When IPI is damaged,
representative.
IPI error while using the AFC240

1. The film is not processed.
2. The cartridge cannot be set in the feed
position.
3. Faulty IPI detection pin
4. Faulty IPI sensor (D113)
W-5122
Film inserted in reverse.

Check right direction and
surface, and then insert it again.
Installed film direction error while using the

AFC240
1. Dirty film sensor (D104, D105)
harness
E-5123

correctly.
Home position detection by the spool motor is

incorrect while using the AFC240.
1. Supply motor home position sensor
(D114) or supply motor (M102) is not
connected.
2. Faulty D114
3. Faulty M102
board
Actions

1. Replace the cartridge with the one

already processed.
2. Check whether or not the cartridge is
in the installation position.
3. Check whether or not the detection pin
functions correctly.




No.
W-5124
Message
Cartridge not inserted.
cartridge.
W-5125
IX240 film not inserted.

W-5126
Film perforation error.

Factor
Cartridge was tried to be installed while not in
the 240 feed lane control sequence.
1. The carrier is not in the IX240 feed
position.
2. Faulty carrier position sensor (D121) or
cartridge sensor (D115)
An attempt was made to install the cartridge
while not in the 240 feed lane control
sequence.
1. The carrier is not in the IX240 feed
position.
2. Faulty carrier position sensor (D121) or
leading end sensor (D104)
harness
DTP detection error while using the AFC240:
the DTP was detected within 66 mm after the
TAP was detected.
(D104)
4. Faulty D104
W-5127
Film perforation error.

Holes were detected in the film while using

the AFC240: the number of perforations are
larger than the specified value. during the
TAP.
(D104)
4. Faulty D104
Actions
1. Install the carrier in the IX240 feed

position.
1. Install the carrier in the IX240 feed

position.




No.
W-5128
Message
Film remains in IX240 feeding
lane.
Factor
Feed lane switching error while using the
AFC240: Attempt was made to switch the
feed lane while a film remained in the 240
feed lane.
1. Dirty leading end sensor (D104) or
perforation sensor (D105)
harness
W-5129
Inserting of film failed.

Film load error while using the AFC240:

1. Dirty feed roller
2. The leading end is bent or other problems
3.
4.
5.
6.
W-5130
Film rupture.
Faulty feed motor (M101)

Faulty CYS22 circuit board
Faulty CTC22 circuit board
Blown fuse (FH32) in the PWR22 circuit
board
Holes were detected in the film while using

the AFC240: the number of perforations are
larger than the specified value during the
MTP.
4. Faulty D105
W-5131

lane.
(Around IX240 TAP and leading
end sensor (D104))
Film remains in the 240 feed lane while using

the AFC240 (TAP sensor )
(D104)
4. Faulty D104
Actions


2. Repair or reshape the film leading
end.



No.
W-5132
Message
lane.
(Around IX240 perforation
sensor (D105))
Factor
Film remains in the 240 feed lane while using
the AFC240 (MTP sensor )
4. Faulty D105
E-5133
An error occurred in cartridge

door.
E-5134
An error occurred in cartridge

door.
remove film. If problems persist,
representative.
W-5135
Film not drawn from cartridge.

cartridge.
Door motor initialization error

1. The door open/close sensor (D112) or
door motor (M104) is not connected.
2. Faulty D112
3. Faulty M104
7. Faulty door open/close mechanism
Door motor drive error while using the
AFC240
1. The door open/close sensor (D112) is not
connected.
2. The connector of the door motor (M104) is
not connected.
3. Faulty D112
4. Faulty M104
6. Faulty door open/close mechanism
Leading end load error while using the
AFC240: Inconsistency in the motor drive.
1. The cartridge does not contain a film.
2. The connector of the leading end sensor
(D104) or feed motor (M102) is not
connected.
3. Dirty or faulty D104
4. Faulty M102
Actions

7. Replace the unit in the nest section.

3.
4.
5.
6.
Replace the sensor.

Replace the motor.
Replace the unit in the nest section.
1. Confirm that the film is installed.



No.
W-5136
Message
Film not drawn from cartridge.
cartridge.
W-5137

Factor
Leading end load error while using the
AFC240: The leading end does not reach the
MTP.
3. D105 or the feed motor (M101) is not
connected.
6. Faulty motor (M101)
Rewind error while using the AFC240: The
TAP sensor detects the TAP when the rewind
operation ends.
(D104)
4. Faulty D104
W-5140
Magnetic head is stained.

May not read magnetic data.
the magnetic head.
Magnetic information verification error while

using the AFC240
2. Magnetic head-related mechanism
problem
3. Poorly connected or broken harness at the
magnetic head connector (D116, MG101)
4. Faulty MRH circuit board
5. Faulty MWH circuit board
6. CYS22 circuit board -toplug-in connector
or broken harness
W-5154
Cartridge lever locked.

Release the lever lock.
Cartridge lock error while using the AFC240

1. The cartridge lock lever is in the locked
state.
broken harness
3. Faulty D115
Actions

2. Clean the sensor.
3. Properly connect it to the connector.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Replace the sensor.

Replace the motor.
Replace the CYS22 circuit board.
Replace the CTC22 circuit board.


2. Replace the magnetic head ASSY.
4. Replace the magnetic head ASSY or
circuit board.
5. Replace the magnetic head ASSY or
circuit board.
1. Set the cartridge lock lever to the

unlocked position.


No.
Message
Factor
W-5160
The IX240 lane cannot be used.
The operator installed an IX240 cartridge

while the 135 feed lane was selected.
1. An IX240 cartridge was installed while the
carrier was set to the 135 feed lane.
2. 135 carrier position sensor (D122) -toCYS22 circuit board -toplug-in connector
or broken harness
3. Faulty D122
Remove cartridge and then

select the IX240 lane.
W-5161
The IX240 lane cannot be used.

Remove film and then select the
IX240 lane.
W-5162
Cartridge remains.
cartridge.
W-5203
The manual film carrier not

installed.
Install the manual film carrier.
An IX240 cartridge was installed when the

carrier was set midpoint between the two
lanes.
1. An IX240 cartridge was installed when the
carrier was set midpoint between the two
lanes.
2. IX240 carrier position sensor (D121) -toCYS22 circuit board -toplug-in connector
or broken harness
3. Faulty D121
Switching error occurred when a cartridge
was installed while using the AFC240.
1. An IX240 cartridge was installed in the
cartridge holder.
2. The cartridge set lever is set to the set
position.
broken harness
3. Faulty D115
1. The manual film carrier is not installed.
CTC22 circuit board
Actions
1. Set the carrier to the 240 feed lane.


1. Set the carrier to the 240 position.



2. Return the cartridge lever to the front.

1. Install the manual film carrier.
4. SOFTWARE INSTALLATION
4.1 Simple Upgrade
4.2 Update
4.3 Reinstallation
4.4 New Installation
4.5 Reversion
4.1 Simple Upgrade

In the Simple Upgrade, you can upgrade the
FRONTIER330 System Software(A1) and
Variety Print Software(B1) by following the
simple guidance messages on the screen.
NOTE: 1)Insert the CD in the CD-ROM drive with its
printed surface facing the front.
2)To open the tray of the CD-ROM drive, press
the eject button.
1. Insert the FRONTIER330 System (A1) Disk

into the CD-ROM drive.
FRONTIER330 System (A1) Disk
2. Perform the post-operational checks to shut

down the system.
3. Press the START switch.
CD1053
4.1 Simple Upgrade

The installer is started and the [L-001]
Simple Upgrade screen appears.
4. Click [OK].
NOTE: If [Cancel] is clicked, the FRONTIER330
System(A1) installation is skipped, and the
Variety Print(B1) installation screen appears.
The Procedure Selection 1[C-001] screen

appears.
5. Select User version up and click [Next>].
4.1 Simple Upgrade

The Starting Update[C-010] dialog box
appears.
6. Click [Yes].
The updating process starts.
Upon completion of the upgrade, the Update
Completion[C-080] dialog box appears.
7. Click [OK].
The Setup Completion [C-090] dialog box
appears.
8. Click [OK].
4.1 Simple Upgrade

If the Variety Print Service (B1) software is not
used, the SETUP dialog box appears.
If the Variety Print Service (B1) software is
used, the [L-003] Simple Upgrade for Variety
Print Service screen appears.
NOTE: If upgrade of the Variety Print Service (B1)
software is necessary, refer to the Installation
Manual for the Variety Print Service (B1).
9. Click [Cancel].
4.1 Simple Upgrade

The SETUP dialog box appears.
10. Remove the FRONTIER 330 (A1) Disk from

the CD-ROM drive.
11. Click [OK].
The system is shut down.
12. Press the START switch to start up the
system.
FRONTIER330
System (A1) Disk
CD1054
4.1 Simple Upgrade

NOTE: When the message E-2305 appears at the time
of the start-up, click [OK] to clear it.
The system software starts up and upgrade

has been completed.
13. Perform printing operation after executing
Paper Condition Setup and Preoperational Checks.
4.2 Update
In the Update, the FRONTIER 330 System
Software (A1) is upgraded.
IMPORTANT:
If more than 160MB of free space is not
available in the hard disk, delete the variety print
service template data.
1. Insert the FRONTIER 330 System (A1) Disk
2. Shut down the system after performing the

post-operational checks.
CD1053
4.2 Update
After starting up Windows, (L-100) Simple
Upgrade screen appears.
4. Click [OK].
Procedure Selection 1 (C-001) dialog box

appears.
5. Select SE maintenance and click [Next
(N)].
4.2 Update
appears.
6. Select Update and click [Next (N)].
The Starting Update (C-010) dialog box

appears.
7. Click [Yes].
NOTE: If the error message Insufficient disk space on
drive D. Installation not performed. Is displayed,
delete unnecessary files or template data files,
then start installation again.
4.2 Update
The File Copy (C-020) dialog box appears.
8. Check version information and click [Next
(N)].
The update processing starts.
4.2 Update
After approximately 16 minutes, the Inherited
Data Transport Media Selection (C-050)
dialog box appears.
9. Select Inherit data from former version of
application and click [Next (N)].
NOTE: When data in FD is used, select Inherit data
from FD.
The Update Completion (C-080) dialog box

appears.
10. Click [OK].
The Setup Completion (C-090) dialog box

appears.
11. Click [OK].
4.2 Update
used, the SETUP completion dialog box
appears.
used, the (L002) Simple Upgrade screen
appears.
12. Click [Cancel].

The SETUP completion dialog box appears.
4.2 Update
13. Remove the FRONTIER 330 System (A1)
Disk from the CD-ROM drive.
14. Click [OK].
15. Press the START switch to restart up the
system.
FRONTIER330
System (A1) Disk
CD1054
After starting up the system, the error

message E-2305 appears.
16. Click [OK] to clear the message.
4.3 Reinstallation
The reinstallation procedure is performed after
the following part has been replaced.
Main control unit

CTP22 circuit board
CTC22 circuit board
GHT22 circuit board

The Windows desktop screen is displayed.
2. Rename the FUJIFILM folder in the D
drive such as FUJIFILM-1, etc. except
when the main control unit has been
replaced.
4.3 Reinstallation
CD1053
4.3 Reinstallation
NOTE: Proceed to step 11 when the main control unit
has been replaced.
4. Select Run from the Start menu.
4.3 Reinstallation
5. Click [Browse] and select ISO9660 (N) for
the CD-ROM drive.
6. Click [Open].
7. Double click EZ171 folder and select

EZSetup.exe.
8. Click [Open].
4.3 Reinstallation
9. Make sure N:\EZ171\EZSetup.exe is
displayed in the Open box.
10. Click [OK].
The Procedure Selection (A-001) dialog box

appears.
11. Select Reinstallation and click [Next (N)].
4.3 Reinstallation
The Starting Reinstallation (A-100) dialog
box appears.
12. Click [Yes].
The reinstallation process starts.

After approximately16 minutes, the FD
Confirmation (A-117) dialog box appears.
13. Click [Yes].
4.3 Reinstallation
The Inserting Backup FD (A-120) dialog box
appears.
14. Click [Yes].
The Information dialog box appears.
4.3 Reinstallation
15. Insert the scanners backup FD into the FD
drive.
CD1055
16. Click [OK].

The Inserting Printers Backup FD (A-130)
dialog box appears when completing data
backup of the scanner.
17. Click [Yes].
4.3 Reinstallation
18. Insert the printers backup FD into the FD

drive.
CD1055
19. Click [OK].
4.3 Reinstallation
The New Installation Completion (A-020)
dialog box appears.
20. Click [OK].

The Setup Completion (A-150) dialog box
appears.
21. Click [OK].
4.3 Reinstallation
appears.
appears.
22. Click [Cancel].

4.3 Reinstallation
FRONTIER330
System (A1) Disk
CD1054
4.3 Reinstallation
24. Remove the backup FD from the FD driver.
25. Click [OK].
system.
CD1056

NOTE: If the DI Print and Data Writing Service (C4/C5)
software is used, install the software by referring
the Instruction Manual of the DI Print and Data
Writing Service.

The new installation procedure is performed
only when the backup FD is not found when
replacing the main control unit.
The Windows desktop screen is displayed.

CD1053

The Procedure Selection (A-001) dialog box
appears.
3. Select New Installation and click [Next (N)].
The Starting New Installation (A-010) dialog

box appears.
4. Click [Yes].
The new installation process starts.

After approximately16 minutes, the New
Installation Completion (A020) dialog box
appears.
5. Click [OK].
The Setup Completion (A-030) dialog box
appears.
6. Click [OK].

appears.
appears.
7. Click [Cancel].


9. Click [OK].
FRONTIER330
System (A1) Disk
CD1054

system.

The error message E-2107 appears.
13. Open the menu 41F Installation Information
Setup screen.
14. Set up each item if necessary
15. Perform the post-operational checks to shut
down the system.
16. Press the START switch to start up the
system.
Writing Service.
4.5 Reversion
This procedure reverts the system software to
the previous version.
1. Perform the Data Backup in menu 417 to
overwrite the Backup FD with the backup
data.
3. Shut down the system after performing the

post-operational checks.
CD1053
4.5 Reversion
After starting up Windows, (L-100) Simple
Upgrade screen appears.
5. Click [OK].
4.5 Reversion
appears.
6. Select SE maintenance and click [Next (>)].

appears.
7. Select Reversion to previous version and
click [Next (>)].
4.5 Reversion
The Starting Version Back (C-100) dialog
box appears.
8. Click [Yes].
The Inserting Printers Backup FD dialog

box appears.
9. Click [Yes].
4.5 Reversion
10. Insert the printers backup FD into the FD
drive.
CD1055
11. Click [OK].

The Version Back Completion (C-120) dialog
box appears.
12. Click [OK].
4.5 Reversion
The Setup Completion (C-130) dialog box
appears.
13. Click [OK].

appears.
appears.
14. Click [Cancel].

4.5 Reversion
FRONTIER330
System (A1) Disk
CD1054
4.5 Reversion
16. Remove the Backup FD from the FD drive.
17. Click [OK].
system.
CD1056

Writing Service.
5. MAINTENANCE MENU
5.1 Operational Procedure
5.3.7
5.2 System Operation Setup and

Check (41)
5.3.8
5.3.9
5.3.10
5.3.11
5.3.12
5.3.13
5.3.14
5.2.1
5.2.2
5.2.3
5.2.4
5.2.5
5.2.6
5.2.7
5.2.8
5.2.9
5.2.10
5.2.11
Production Information 1 (411)

Production Information 2 (412)
Timer Setup (414)
Error Information Check (415)
Installation Information Confirmation (416)
Data Backup (417)
Clear Error Log (41E)
Installation Information Setup (41F)
Shipping Information Reference (41G)
DI Manager Administrative Setting (41I)
Timer Waiting Time Setup (41J)
5.3 Print Condition Setup and

Check (42)
5.3.1
5.3.2
5.3.3
5.3.4
5.3.5
5.3.6
Paper Condition Setup (421)

Processor Temperature Check (422)
Control Strip Processing (423)
Print Size Setup (424)
Monitor Adjustment (426)
Image Correction Setup (42C)
Fine Adjustment of the Print Mag.Setting

(42D)
Special Film CH Setting (42E)
Monotone Correction Setting (42G)
Paper Condition Method Setup (42J)
Shop Logo Regist/Delete (42K)
Template Regist/Delete (42L)
Custom Setting Regist/Delete (42M)
Holiday File Registration/Delete (42N)
5.4 Scanner Adjustment/

Maintenance (43)
5.4.1
5.4.2
5.4.3
5.4.4
5.4.5
5.4.6
5.4.7
5.4.8
5.4.9
5.4.10
5.4.11
5.4.12
Input Check (431)

Focus Calibration (432)
Focus Position Adjustment (433)
Operation Information Display (434)
I/O Check (43A)
Carrier Inclination Display (43B)
CCD Data Display (43C)
Lens Registration (43D)
Optical Axis Adjustment (43E)
Optical Magnification Calibration (43F)
Brightness Correction (43G)
Darkness Correction (43H)
5.4.13
5.4.14
5.4.15
5.4.16
Spectral Calibration (43J)

DC Offset Cancel (43K)
LED Light Amount Adjustment (43L)
Unexposed Frame Detect Level Set (43U)
5.5 Carrier Adjustment/

Maintenance (44)
5.5.1
5.5.2
5.5.3
5.5.4
5.5.5
Mask Position Adjustment (441)

NC100AC Input Check (442)
Monitor Frame Ratio Setup (448)
NC100AC Sensor Calibration (44A)
NC100AC Sensor Calibration Information
(44C)
5.5.6
NC100AC Carrier Installation Information
Display (44D)
5.5.7
NC100AC Carrier Installation Information
Setup (44E)
5.5.8
NC100AC I/O Check (44F)
5.5.9
NC100AC Machine Data Setup (44K)
5.5.10 NC100AC Magnetic Information Reading
(44M)
5.5.11 NC100AC Magnetic Verify (44N)
5.5.12 NC100AC Fixed Feeding Setup (44R)
5.6 Printer Adjustment/

Maintenance (45)
5.6.1
5.6.2
5.6.3
5.6.4
5.6.5
5.6.6
5.6.7
5.6.8
5.6.9
5.6.10
5.6.11
5.6.12
5.6.13
5.6.14
5.6.15
5.6.16
5.6.17
5.6.18
Paper Magazine Registration (451)

Paper Feed Length Adjustment (452)
Test Pattern Printing (453)
G, B Laser (SHG) Optimal Temperature Setup
(454)
Paper Feed (455)
Printer Temperature Display (456)
Printer Input Check (457)
Printer I/O Check (45A)
Filter Replacement History (45B)
Laser Exposure Check (45C)
R Laser (R-LD) Data (45D)
G Laser (G-SHG) Data (45E)
B Laser (B-SHG) Data (45F)
Scanning Position/Scanning Home Position
Parameter Setup (45G)
Main Scanning Position Adjustment/Laser
Beam Sync. Rough Adjustment (45H)
Laser Beam Sync. Fine Adjustment Print (45J)
Laser History Display (45K)
Paper Condition Setup Table (LUT) Copy
(45L)
5.6.19
5.6.20
5.6.21
5.6.22
5.6.23
5.6.24
5.6.25
5.6.26
5.6.27
Printer Mechanical Fine Adjustment (45M)

Back Printer Test (45N)
Printer Operation Data Display (45P)
Clearing Selected Printer Operation Data
(45Q)
Clearing All Operation Data (45R)
Side Register Calibration (45S)
Data Saving (45T)
Data Download (45U)
Precut Length Setting (45V)
5.7 Processor Adjustment/

Maintenance (46)
5.7.1
5.7.2
5.7.3
5.7.4
5.7.5
5.7.6
5.7.7
5.7.8
5.7.9
Replenisher Pump Output Measurement/

Setting (461)
Auto Cleaning Output Measurement/Setting
(462)
Processing Temperature Setting (463)
Replenisher Rate Setting (464)
Evaporation Correction Rate Setting (465)
Low Volume Setup (466)
Processor Temperature Calibration (467)
Processor Input Check (468)
Processor I/O Check (46A)
5.7.10
5.7.11
5.7.12
5.7.13
5.7.14
Processor Operating Condition Setup (46B)

Processor Operation Data Display (46C)
Clearing Selected Operation Data (46D)
Processor Operation Data Display 2 (46E)
Installation (46F)
5.8 Self-Diagnostic (49)

5.8.1
5.8.2
5.8.3
5.8.4
Trouble Help (491)

Help Update (492)
Image Abnormality Analyzer (493)
Paper Feed Check (494)
5.9 Special Operations (410)

5.9.1
5.9.2
5.9.3
Paint (410A)
Explorer (410B)
Command (49C)
NOTE: For mouse operations, see the instruction

manual Basic Operations.
1. Select 4 Setup and Maintenance from the

main menu.
2. Select SE2 for the user name and enter

7777 for the password, and click [OK].
NOTE: SE1 user name is prepared for the user who
manages printing quality. The password is
6666.
SE2 user name is prepared for the service
engineer.
The Setup and Maintenance screen

appears.
3. Select the desired item from the item list and
press its [+] button.
The sub-item list appears.

4. Move the cursor to the desired item and click
[START].
Each screen appears.
5. Perform the operation by following the
instructions on the screen.
6. Upon completion of the setup and
maintenance operations, click [OK] to
perform processing or [Cancel] to quit the
screen.
Operation returns to the 4 Setup and
Maintenance screen.
7. Click [END].
8. Operation returns to the main menu.
5.2 System Operation Setup and Check (41)

5.2.1 Production Information 1 (411)
(Maintenance menu for operator)
[Selection]
4 Setup and Maintenance 1 System
Operation Setup and Check 1 Production
Information 1
[Procedure]
This procedure displays the production
information. The data can be cleared in this
menu.
1. Select Negative, Reversal, Digital
Image or All from the Input Type box.
The information of the input type is displayed.
2. Record the production information.
3. To clear the data, follow the steps below.

1) Select Input Type to be clear.
2) Click [Clear].
The Clear production information?
dialog box appears.
3) Click [OK].
The data are cleared and clearing date
appears.
4. Click [OK].
Maintenance screen.
5.2.2 Production Information 2 (412)

(Maintenance menu for laboratory manager)
[Selection]
Operation Setup and Check 2 Production
Information 2
[Procedure]
This procedure displays the production
information. The data can be cleared in this
menu.
1. Select Negative, Reversal, Digital
Image or All from the Input Type box.
The information of the input type is displayed.
2. Record the production information.
3. To clear the data, follow the steps below.

1) Click [Clear].
The Clear production information?
dialog box appears.
2) Click [OK].
The data are cleared and clearing date
appears.
4. Click [OK].
Maintenance screen.
5.2.3 Timer Setup (414)

[Selection]
Operation and Check 4 Timer Setup (414)
[Procedure]
This procedure sets the present date/time, timer
ON date/time and preheat setup times.
1. To update Present Date/Time, change the
date and time, and click [OK].
NOTE: To cancel the update, click [Cancel].
2. To change the timer date and time, enter a

tick in the day of the week boxes and enter
the time in the Timer ON Date/Time Setting
box.
3. Set the preheat timer by following the steps

below, if necessary.
IMPORTANT:
The ON time for a night-time preheating
operation must not overlap with the ON time of
the weekly timer since night-time preheating
takes priority and shuts down all power when it
is set OFF.
If, for instance, the calendar timer is set to 5:00
and night-time preheating is turned ON at 3:30,
all the power will be shut down two hours later at
5:30.
NOTE: Night-time preheating is usually conducted when
the room temperature drops below 10C (50F)
at night and the temprature is not controlled for 8
or more hours.
1) Select YES for Preheat Setting.
The 1st and 2nd preheat setting boxes

appears.
2) Move the cursor to 1st Preheat and
enter the time.
3) Move the cursor to 2nd Preheat and
enter the time.
NOTE: For preheating once only, set the same time
for both the first and second times.
Select NO when the preheat timer is not
used.
The second preheating timer is ignored if the
first preheat time and second preheat time
overlap.
<Example> 1st. pre-heat time: 2:00

2nd. pre-heat time: 3:00
With the above settings, night-time
preheating will occur from 2:00 to
4:00 (2 hours).
4. Click [OK].
Maintenance screen.
5.2.4 Error Information Check (415)

[Selection]
Operation and check 5 Error Information
Check (415)
[Procedure]
The system error log is listed up in order of date
and time.
1. Click [Accum. Info].
Accumulated error information is displayed in

order of code and frequency.
2. Click [OK].
The log file is read out and the latest

information is displayed on the screen.
3. Click [Log Information].
Operation returns to the Error log

information screen.
4. Click [OK].
Maintenance screen.
5.2.5 Installation Information Confirmation (416)

[Selection]
Operation and check 6 Installation
Information Confirmation (416)
[Procedure]
This procedure displays the scanner and printer
installation information.
1. Check the installation information.
2. Click [Option].
The Optional Device Reference dialog box

appears.
3. Check if PU800BA, External File I/O and FDI Lab-in Built-in are used.
4. Click [OK].
The dialog box disappears.
5. Click [OK].
Maintenance screen.
5.2.6 Data Backup (417)

[Selection]
Operation and check 7 Data Backup (417)
[Procedure]
This procedure makes a backup of the data
stored on the hard disk of the main control unit
when data, indicated on the data sheet located
inside the front upper cover, are changed.
The backup floppy disks are used when
reinstalling or reverting to earlier system
software.
1. Prepare a new floppy disk for data backup
when backing up data.
2. Insert the diskette into the floppy drive of the
main control unit.
3. Move the cursor to the Destination box and

select Film Scanner, Printer Processor or
Pricing Unit.
NOTE: Perform the data backup for the pricing unit
when pricing unit data are changed. Data are
backed up from the pricing unit to the hard disk
of the main control unit.
4. Click [OK].
The Making the backup of the data message
appears.
5. Upon completion of the backup, click
[Cancel].
Maintenance screen.
5.2.7 Clear Error Log (41E)

[Selection]
Select 4 Setup and Maintenance 1 System
Operation Setup and Check E Clear Error
Log
[Procedure]
This procedure clears the system error and
printer error information.
1. Select the item to be cleared and click
[Clear].
The selected information is cleared.
2. Click [OK].
Operation returns to the Setup and
Maintenance screen.
5.2.8 Installation Information Setup (41F)

[Selection]
Operation Setup and Check F Installation
Information Setup
[Procedure]
This procedure sets the installation information.
After setting up, restart the system to activate
the new settings.
1. Set the delivery date, startup date, lab ID
and scanner type.
2. Click [Option].
3. Select Usedor Not used for PU800BA
and Bar-code Reader.
4. Select YES or NO for External File I/O.
5. Click [OK].
6. Click [OK].
The following message appears.
7. Click [OK].
Maintenance screen.
8. Perform the post-operational checks to stop
the system and then restart the system.
The new settings are activated.
5.2.9 Shipping Information Reference (41G)

[Selection]
Operation Setup and Check G Shipping
Information Reference
[Procedure]
This procedure displays the shipping
information.
1. The model, serial no. and shipping date are
displayed.
2. Click [OK].
Maintenance screen.
5.2.10 DI Manager Administrative Setting (41I)

[Selection]
Operation and Check I Manager
Administrative Setting
[Procedure]
This menu is used when connecting the
optional FDI controller.
Delete Waiting Time: Sets up the time until the
order processed on the FDI controller
is deleted.
Order Identifier: Enter b for 2nd SLP800
when two machines are connected to
one FDI controller.
In this case, the Device Name for the
2nd SLP800 should be changed.
Digital image import auto start-up: The Time

to start-up box appears by selecting
YES. The PR Status Notice dialog
box will appear automatically on the
printing screen in the setting time
when there is order in the DI controller.
5.2.11 Timer Waiting Time Setup (41J)

[Selection]
Operation and Check J Timer Waiting Time
Setup
[Procedure]
This procedure sets up Sorter Information
Display Time, Waiting Time for Monitoring and
Waiting Time for the Position Adjust of the 1st
Frame.
Sorter Info. Display Time: Time to display the
number of prints and sort number
when pressing the [Sort] key or during
auto sorting
Waiting time for monitoring: Waiting time for 1or 6-frame display during prescanning. This function activates only
when the Auto film drive mode is
used.
Waiting time for the pos. adjust of the 1st
frame: Display time for black/white
image displayed after inserting the film
to adjust the position of the leading
end frame.
NOTE: The black/white frame will disappear in 20
seconds to protect the CCD.
1. Move the cursor to the sec. box.

2. Change the time by clicking the [] or []
utton.
3. Click [OK].

Maintenance screen.
5.3 Print Condition Setup and Check (42)

5.3.1 Paper Condition Setup (421)
[Selection]
4 Setup and Maintenance 2 Print Condition
Setup and Check 1 Paper Condition Setup
[Procedure]
When new paper is to be loaded, do this
procedure to set up the new paper condition.
1. Install the paper magazine to be set up.
NOTE: Click [Initialize] to initialize condition setup data.
2. Click [Print].
After about 5 minutes, a condition setup print

is fed out.
3. After the condition setup print has come out,

press the [Dens Measure] button.
4. Adjust the guide of the densitometer

according to the width of the condition setup
print.
Densitometer
Guide
NOTE: If an error occurs, press the orange [RESET]

switch.
EZ634
5. Insert the condition setup print into the

densitometer.
Densitometer
Condition Setup Print

EZ635
6. Press the [START] button on the

densitometer.
[START] Button
EZ636
The measurement is automatically started

and the density measurement result is
displayed.
7. Click [OK].
The density measurement result disappears.

NOTE: If the Density Measurement Result is not
acceptable, the message shown at the right
appears. Perform steps 4 to 9 again until the
result becomes OK.
8. Click [Cancel].
Maintenance screen.
5.3.2 Processor Temperature Check (422)

[Selection]
Setup and Check 2 Processor Temperature
Check
[Procedure]
This procedure displays the processing solution
temperatures.
1. Check the processing solution temperatures.
2. Click [OK].
Maintenance screen.
5.3.3 Control Strip Processing (423)

[Selection]
Setup and Check 2 Processor Temperature
Check
[Procedure]
The processing solution performance is
evaluated by processing a control strip,
measuring the processed strip densities, and
comparing them to the reference strip densities.
Control Strip Preparation

1. Take the control strip package out of the
freezer, and leave it for about one hour to
bring it up to room temperature.
3188
2. Take the inner bag out of the control strip

package and place it seam-side up on to the
control strip holder and put them both in the
dark box. Close the dark box cover.
Control Strip and Inner Bag
3. Insert your hands into the sleeves of the dark

box, take one control strip out of the inner
bag, and insert it into the control strip holder,
as shown in the figure. Push it in until it
reaches the far end.
Control Strip Holder
Seam-side Surface
E577
4. Fold over the open end of the inner bag to

prevent fogging of the unused control strips.
Emulsion Surface Upward
Control Strip
E575
Control Strip Processing

1. Proceed to the [423] Control Strip
Processing screen.
2. Open the dryer unit.
3. Align the center rib of the control strip holder

with the guide groove in the No. 1 crossover
rack.
4. Close the dryer unit.
Control Strip
Control Strip Holder
5. Click [OK].
CD757
The processor starts and the control strip

processing begins.
After about 4 minutes, the control strip is fed

out.
7. Remove the control strip holder and close
the dryer unit.
8. Click [OK].
The message is cleared.
9. Click [Cancel].
Control returns to the 4 Setup and
Maintenance screen.
5.3.4 Print Size Setup (424)

[Selection]
Select 4 Setup and Maintenance 2 Print
Condition Setup and Check 4 Print Size
Setup.
[Procedure]
This procedure sets the print size to be used.
Normally, sizes are registered as shown in the

following table.
NOTE: The feed length range for No.1 (89C) to No.6
(102H) is limited to 82.5 mm to 254.0 mm.
1. Select the print size to be modified or

registered from the list.
ID[No.], Name, Width, Length, Border, four BD
values and [Display(ON/OFF)] are displayed.
2. Move the cursor to the print size to be used,
select ON or OFF shown in the Display.
If you select ON, the description appears in
the list. If you select OFF, nothing appears in
the list.
3. Click [OK].
Maintenance screen.
No. Name Width Length Border

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
89C
89P
89H
102C
102P
102H
3R
3R
5R
5R
4R
4R
6R
6RW
8R
8RW
A5
A4
3DSC
3DSCf
4DSC
4DSCf
5DSC
5DSCf
89Ix
CDIDX
127Ix
89
89
89
102
102
102
127
127
127
127
152
152
152
152
203
203
210
210
89
89
102
102
127
127
89
102
127
127.0
254.0
158.0
152.0
254.0
178.0
89.0
89.0
178.0
178.0
102.0
102.0
203.0
216.0
254.0
305.0
148.0
297.0
119.0
127.0
136.0
152.0
169.0
178.0
120.0
120.0
120.0
BL
BL
BL
BL
BL
BL
BL
BD
BL
BD
BL
BD
BL
BL
BL
BL
BL
BL
BL
BD
BL
BD
BL
BD
BL
BL
BL
Upper Lower
BD
BD
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
4.0
4.0
0.0
0.0
4.0
4.0
0.0
0.0
4.0
4.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
4.0
4.0
0.0
0.0
4.0
4.0
0.0
0.0
4.0
4.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
Left Right
Display
BD
BD
0.0
0.0
ON
0.0
0.0
ON
0.0
0.0
ON
0.0
0.0
ON
0.0
0.0
ON
0.0
0.0
ON
0.0
0.0
ON
4.0
4.0
OFF
0.0
0.0
ON
4.0
4.0
OFF
0.0
0.0
ON
4.0
4.0
OFF
0.0
0.0
ON
0.0
0.0
OFF
0.0
0.0
ON
0.0
0.0
OFF
0.0
0.0
OFF
0.0
0.0
ON
0.0
0.0 Not Use
4.0
4.0 Not Use
0.0
0.0 Not Use
4.0
4.0 Not Use
0.0
0.0 Not Use
4.0
4.0 Not Use
0.0
0.0 Not Use
0.0
0.0 Not Use
0.0
0.0 Not Use
5.3.5 Monitor Adjustment (426)

[Selection]
Setup and Check 6 Monitor Adjustment
(426)
[Procedure]
This procedure sets the color balance of the
monitor for each input type.
1. Make a print without color and density
correction from a normal film using the
master channel for Custom Setting.
2. On the printing screen, correct the prescanning image so that it matches the print
using the C, M and Y keys.
3. Multiply each of the correction values by the

Key Step Width Setup value of menu 41M
Custom Setting Regist/Delete. Then enter
the results in the respective boxes on the
screen.
4. Click [OK].
Maintenance screen.
5.3.6 Image Correction Setup (42C)

This menu is used to enable image correction
condition setting by selecting Yes for each
item.
[Selection]
Condition Setup and Check C Image
Correction Setup
[Procedure]
Set the image correction type for each input
device and input type.
Input Type: Negative
Reversal
B/W negative
1. Set the nine items in the Hyper ACCS frame.
2. Click [OK].
Maintenance screen.
5.3.7 Fine Adjustment of the Print Mag.Setting (42D)

[Selection]
Condition Setup and Check D Fine
Adjustment of the Print Mag.Setting
[Procedure]
This procedure sets the fine adjustment values
for the print magnification for the film size and
print size.
1. Select the carrier, mask and film types.
2. Select the print size.
3. Select Rate
4. Click [OK].
Maintenance screen.
5.3.8 Special Film CH Setting (42E)

[Selection]
Setup and Check E Special Film CH
Setting
[Procedure]
This procedure to register or delete channel for
the DX code of special monotone films (which
use color developer). Also to fine adjust the
slope (for color) and balance (for black & white).
<Film Name Registration>

1. On the printing screen, insert the film to be
registered to pre-scan it.
2. Click the input source information icon.
The Input Source Information dialog box
appears.
3. Record the DX code.
4. Open the menu 42E screen.
5. Enter the DX code recorded into the DX
Code box.
6. Enter the film name in the Film Name box.
7. Click [Register].
<Channel Setup>
NOTE: Before channel setting, register the DX code
and film name.
1. Enter the channel number to be registered

in the CH No. box. There are 128 film
channels.
2. Enter the film name in the box next to the
CH No. box.
3. Select Register.
The registered channel is added to the
window of Print (2) - Special Film Channel
Setting (5) of the menu bar in the printing
screen that appears when the DX code
cannot be read.
4. Select the graininess control level in the
Graininess Control box.
Graininess Control Level: Normal

High
Low
5. Select the tone in the Tone box.
Tone: Color
Sepia 1
Sepia 2
B/W
6. Set Balance/Slope for color and the
Balance for black & white.
9. Click [OK].
Maintenance screen.
<Deleting>
1. Select the channel number to be deleted in
the CH No. box.
The DX code and name are displayed in the
Registered DX Code box.
2. Click [Delete].
7. Enter the DX code registered in Film Name

Registration into the DX Code box.
The DX code is deleted.
3. Click [OK].
The DX code is listed in the Registered DX

Code box.

Maintenance screen.
5.3.9 Monotone Correction Setting (42G)

[Selection]
Setup and Check G Monotone Correction
Setting
[Procedure]
Do this procedure to fine adjust the balance
values for the correction type indicated in the
Monotone Correction dialog box for menu bar
Image Correct (4) - Monotone Correct (3).
1. Select the correction type to be adjusted in
the Correction box.
Correction: B/W
Sepia 1
Sepia 2
User B/W
User Sepia 1
2. Change the balance values.
3. Click [OK].
Maintenance screen.
5.3.10 Paper Condition Method Setup (42J)

[Selection]
Condition Setup and Check J Paper
Condition Setup.
[Procedure]
This procedure sets the paper condition setup
method.
1. Select YES or NO for the ambient
variable correction.
2. Select YES or NO for the master
magazine registration.
3. If YES is selected in step 2, set the ID,
width, paper and type for the master
magazine.
NOTE: Ambient variable correction: When there is a

sudden change in temperature during the day,
it influences the color development process of
color papers. To maintain constant printing
quality in that condition, select YES.
Master magazine registration: Paper condition
setup must be performed for all papers if NO
is selected.
4. Click [OK].
Maintenance screen.
5.3.11 Shop Logo Regist/Delete (42K)

[Selection]
Setup and Check K Shop Logo Regist/
Delete
[Procedure]
This procedure registers or deletes the shop
logo that appears on the index prints.
<Registration>
1. Insert the floppy disk containing the shop
logo to be registered into the floppy disk
drive of the main control unit.
2. Click [Add].
The Media Selection dialog box appears.

3. Select FD and click [OK].
The shop logo is displayed in the dialog box.
4. Click [OK].
The shop logo is registered.
5. Click [Cancel].
6. Click [OK].
Maintenance screen.
<Deleting>
1. Select the shop logo to be deleted.
2. Click [Delete].
The shop logo is deleted from the list.
3. Click [OK].
Maintenance screen.
5.3.12 Template Regist/Delete (42L)

[Selection]
Setup and Check L Template Regist/Delete
[Procedure]
See the Installation Manual of the optional

Variety Print Service software.
5.3.13 Custom Setting Regist/Delete (42M)

Printing is normally performed according to the
condition of the master 0 channel.
The 65 (0 + 64) custom conditions can be set up
for each input type. The custom conditions can
be selected on the printing screen.
[Selection]
Setup and Check M Custom Setting Regist/
Delete
[Procedure]
Set up the custom conditions.
1. Select the input type to be set up.
Input Type: Negative
Reversal
Black & White Negative
2. Select number to be set up.

3. Enter the name for the back printing of
custom setting in the Name box.
4. Click [Cond. Edit].
The Initial Value Selection dialog box
appears.
5. Select the number to be used as the initial
value.
6. Click [OK].
The Corr. Level/Tone/Hypertone panel

appears.
7. Set up the Correct Level, Tone Adjust and
Hypertone.
<Correct Level>
Tone Correction Color/DensityHypertone
Correction
Full Correction:
Yes
Yes ON
Tone Fixing:
No
Yes OFF
Condition Confirm:
No
No OFF
<Tone Adjust>
Standard
All Hard
All Soft
Highlight Hard
Highlight Soft
Shadow Hard
Shadow Soft
<Hypertone>
Hypertone Process:
Highlight Level:
Yes
No
Lower
Low
Normal
High
Higher
Shadow Level:
Lower
Low
Normal
High
Higher
Mode: Mode 1 (Normal Hypertone Mode)
Mode 2 (Preceding acceptance rate by
improving back light and high contrast)
8. Click the Key Step Width/BL-SL tab.

The Key Step Width/BL-SL panel appears.
9. Set up the Key Step Width and Balance/
Slope.
<Key Step Width Setup>
C, M, Y:
Normally enter 8.
Dc, Dm, Dy: Normally enter 15.
<BL/SL Setup>
Normally enter 0.
Change setting only when the whole slope
condition is offset.
10. Click the Sharpness/Grain Control tab.
The Sharpness/Grain Control panel

appears.
11. Set up the Sharpness, Grain Control
Process and Sharpness Large-size Setup.
<Sharpness>
Sharpness Level: Low 3
Low 2
Low 1
Normal
High 1
High 2
High 3
Under Level:
2
1
0
(Sharpness can be set only for individually
under level.)
<Grain Control Process>

Modulation
Roughness
Normal
Up
Up
Lower
No
Down
Down
<Sharpness Large-size Setup>
Sharpness can be set up individually for
magnification entered in the Magnification box
or higher.
2
1
0
+1
+2
12. Click the High-def/Density Correct tab.

The High-def/Density Correct panel
appears.
13. Set up the High-definition, Density
Correction and Saturation.
<High-definition Process>
If this selection box is not displayed, select
YES for RP Tone Print or Face Express in
menu 42C.
RP Tone
RP Tone Print: Yes
No
Level:
Low
Normal
High
Face Express: Normal High
<Density Correction>
Level:
Normal (Select Normal normally.)
High (Tungsten lighting correction is
increased. )
Type:
Normal (Select Normal normally.)
Strobe Pref.
Back light Pref.
Saturation: 9 to +9 (Color vividness is set up.
Normally enter 0.)
14. Click [OK].
The condition panel disappears and
operation returns to the 42M Custom Setting
Regist/Delete screen.
The Status changes to the Use.
15. To delete the custom condition, select
number to be deleted and click [Delete].
16. Click [OK].

Maintenance screen.
5.3.14 Holiday File Registration/Delete (42N)

[Selection]
Setup and Check N Holiday File
Registration/Delete
[Procedure]
See the Operating Instructions of the optional
Variety Print Service software.
5.4 Scanner Adjustment/Maintenance (43)

5.4.1 Input Check (431)
[Selection]
4 Setup and Maintenance 3 Scanner
Adjustment/Maintenance 1 Input Check
[Procedure]
This procedure displays the current status of
each section.
NOTE: Refer to section 19.1 for input parts location.
1. Click [Next Page].
2. Click [OK].
Maintenance screen.
5.4.2 Focus Calibration (432)

The center value for each printing magnification
can be set up in this menu.
The NC100AC with film in the 135-lane can be
used to execute this menu if the focusing chart
jig is not available.
[Selection]
Adjustment/Maintenance 2 Focus
Calibration
[Procedure]
Calibrate the focus pulses for the magnification.
1. Install the focusing chart jig instead of the

carrier.
2. Click [Create table].
Focusing Chart Jig

CD832
The result is displayed on the screen.

3. Click [OK].
The I-1227 message appears.
4. Click [OK].
Maintenance screen.
5. Perform menu 433 Focus Position
Adjustment.
5.4.3 Focus Position Adjustment (433)

This menu is used to set up the center value
when auto focusing of each film carrier mask.
[Selection]
Adjustment/Maintenance 3 Focus Position
Adjustment
[Procedure]
Perform the focus position adjustment.
NOTE: If the scanner correction in the pre-operational
checks is not executed after the system starts
up, perform the following items before Focus
Position Adjustment.
Menu 43K DC Offset Cancel
Menu 43H Dark Correction
1. Install the carrier and proceed to the Focus

Position Adjustment screen.
Carrier ID, type and mask type (M69D
only)are displayed.
2. Click [Run].
3. Insert a film into the carrier and click [OK].
The position adjustment value is displayed

when the adjustment is completed.
4. Click [OK].
Maintenance screen.
5.4.4 Operation Information Display (434)

[Selection]
Adjustment/Maintenance 4 Operation
Information Display
[Procedure]
The LED lighting time and piezoelectric actuator
operating time are displayed.
1. Click [Clear] when the LED or piezoelectric
actuator has been replaced.
The clear confirmation dialog box appears.
2. Click [OK].
The times are cleared.
3. Click [OK].
Maintenance screen.
5.4.5 I/O Check (43A)

[Selection]
Adjustment/Maintenance A I/O Check
[Procedure]
This procedure displays the status of motors,
solenoids and sensors.
The status of each part is displayed in real
time.
NOTE: Refer to section 19.1 I/O Parts Diagram for
parts location.
1. Press any buttons to specify an operation.

The selected operation is performed.
2. Click [OK].
Maintenance screen.
5.4.6 Carrier Inclination Display (43B)

[Selection]
Adjustment/Maintenance B Carrier
Inclination Display
[Procedure]
This procedure checks the status of the carrier
inclination.
NOTE: If value is more than 100, replace the film carrier.
The auto focus is started and the position of

the focus pulse in the front and rear sides of
the carrier are displayed.
1. Insert a film into the carrier.
2. Click [135] or [120].
The auto focusing is started and the position
of the focus pulses in vertical and horizontal
of the carrier are displayed.
3. Click [OK].
Maintenance screen.
5.4.7 CCD Data Display (43C)

Use this menu to confirm the CCD settings
when there is a CCD-related irregularity or when
lines appear in prints due to dust or dirt on the
CCD, or the light source LED is suspected.
[Selection]
Adjustment/Maintenance C CCD Data
Display
[Procedure]
Do this procedure to read the CCD data and
display the values in real time.
NOTE: If the scanner correction in the pre-operational
checks is not executed after the system starts
up, perform the following items before Focus
Position Adjustment.
Menu 43K DC Offset Cancel
Menu 43H Dark Correction
NOTE: Do not try to change Output Mode and Test Pattern.

Output mode box
Operating mode box
(Full-in, 1/4 or 1/8)
Lens magnification box (0.27 to 0.82)

Test pattern box (1 to 8)
Light color switches
Display update/stop buttons
Auto exposure result
Store time switch and box
Auto focus button
Offset cancel button
Film pressure button
Current value boxes and setting button
Conjugate length moving box and button
Lens moving box and button
Auto exposure button

Density enable switch
Dark correction enable switch
and table create button
Bright correction enable switch
Save button
Display switching button
S/N value inspection button
OK button
1. Click the [Switch display] button.

<Dust Checking>
1. Check mark the R, G and B switches in
Light color.
2. Enter 10.000 in Store time and check
mark the switch.
3. Move the pointer to the dust position and
click the left button of the mouse while
pressing the [Shift] key.
The image of the dust area is centered and

magnified.
4. Click the [Switch display] button.
The graph is deformed at the dust position as

shown.
<LED Inspection>
1. Change Magnification to 0.27.
2. Check mark the LED switch in Light color to
be light.
3. Check mark the Accum. time (ms) switch
and enter the following value in the box.
IR:
20
R, G or B: 5
4. Remove the diffusion box and turn ON the
diffusion box sensor.
The light-emitted pattern is displayed on the
screen.
5. To focus the LED, enter the following value in

the Conjugate length move and Lens
move boxes and click the [Move] buttons.
IR
Pattern
Conjugate length move: 11000

Lens move:
650
R
Pattern
G
Pattern
B
Pattern
5.4.8 Lens Registration (43D)

[Selection]
Adjustment/Maintenance D Lens
Registration
[Procedure]
This procedure sets the lens ID to be used and
its focal length.
The current status is displayed.
1. Enter the lens ID number and the lens focal

distance indicated on the label attached to
the lens unit.
2. Click [OK].
Maintenance screen.
3. Perform the following menus.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
43B Carrier Inclination Display

43E Optical Axis Adjustment
43F Optical Magnification Calibration
432 Focus Calibration
433 Focus Position Adjustment for each
carrier
6) 441 Mask Position Adjustment
Label
CD694
5.4.9 Optical Axis Adjustment (43E)

[Selection]
Adjustment/Maintenance E Optical Axis
Adjustment
[Procedure]
This procedure adjusts the optical axis of the
image by moving the film carrier base.
The magnification setting is 0.6 when the
screen is opened.
1. Install the focusing chart jig to the carrier

base.
2. Click [AF].
The calculated values of 0.6 magnification are
displayed in the Axis Def. and Image
rotation columns in real time.
Focusing Chart Jig

CD832
OK is displayed if the data are within the

specified range.
3. If the data are out of range, loosen the four

hexagonal socket head bolts securing the
carrier base and adjust the optical axis by
moving the base together with the jig.
Focusing Chart Jig
Hexagonal Socket Head Bolts (4)

CD1087
Out of optical axis Front ()/Rear (+):

Left ()/Right (+):
Image rotation
Left ()/Right (+):
Range of OK
10
10
5
NOTE: Adjust image rotation first, then the optical axis.

X-axis: Move the carrier base in front and rear.
Y-axis: Move the carrier base in right and left.
4. Tighten the four hex. socket head bolts after

OK is displayed.
5. Click [OK].
Maintenance screen.
5.4.10 Optical Magnification Calibration (43F)

[Selection]
Adjustment/Maintenance F Optical
Magnification Calibration
[Procedure]
This procedure calibrates the optical
magnification.
The current status is displayed.
1. Set the focusing chart jig to the carrier base.

2. Click [Run].
Focusing Chart Jig

CD832
The optical magnification calibration is

performed.
The result is displayed.
3. Click [OK].
4. Click [OK].
Maintenance screen.
5. Perform the following menus.
- 432 Focus Calibration
- 433 Focus Position Adjustment for each
carrier
5.4.11 Brightness Correction (43G)

The brightness correction is executed
automatically when the pre-operational checks
or changing mask on the first printing screen of
the day.
Perform this menu when line appears in print
due to dust or dirt.
When reading the shading data again by
performing the scanner correction with the
IX240 mask, check mark Light Source Shading
Corr. Data Read and execute the brightness
correction.
[Selection]
Adjustment/Maintenance G Bright
Correction
[Procedure]
Perform the brightness correction.
1. Clean the diffusion box.
2. For the auto film carrier NC100AC, set it in

the 135 lane.
3. Check mark both Pixel Speed Corr. Data
Read and Light Source Shading Corr. Data
Read.

CD763
4. Click [OK].
Maintenance screen after correction.
5. Change the auto film carrier NC100AC to the
IX240 lane.
6. Proceed to menu 43G and check mark to
Light Source Shading Corr. Data Read.
7. Click [OK].
8. Install the manual film carrier with the

calibration mask.
Calibration Mask
9. Proceed to menu and check mark both Pixel

Speed Corr. Data Read and Light Source
Shading Corr. Data Read.
10. Click [OK].
Manual Film Carrier M69D
CD844
5.4.12 Darkness Correction (43H)

[Selection]
Adjustment/Maintenance H Dark
Correction
[Procedure]
Perform the darkness correction.
1. Click [OK].
5.4.13 Spectral Calibration (43J)

After replacing the LED circuit board assembly
or light source unit, perform menu 43L LED
Light Amount Adjustment and this menu for
negative and reversal films and then clear LED
Light Time in menu 434 Operation Information
Display.
[Selection]
Adjustment/Maintenance J Spectral
Calibration
[Procedure]
Perform the spectral calibration using the
following tools.
Tools: Chart/floppy disk set
Manual film carrier M69D
Calibration mask
135M mask
1. Insert the floppy disk into the main control

unit.
2. Click [OK].
3. Install the manual film carrier with the

calibration mask to the carrier base.
Calibration Mask
4. Click [OK].
Manual Film Carrier M69D

CD844
The brightness correction is performed.

5. Replace the calibration mask with the 135M
mask.
6. Insert the No. 1001001 film into the 135M

mask and set it in the exposure position.
135M Mask
No.1001001 Film
CD805
7. Click [OK].
NOTE: If the image on the screen is abnormal, click the
[Read again] button to read the image again.
8. Adjust the position of the blocks so that they

are at the center of each patch by using the
arrow keys.
9. Click [OK].
10. Repeat steps 6 to 9 for Chart Film No.

10020001, No. 1003001, No. 1004001,
No.1005001, No. 1006001 and No. 1007001.
11. Click [OK].
Maintenance screen.
12. Remove the floppy disk from the main
control unit.
5.4.14 DC Offset Cancel (43K)

This function cancels DC offset of the CCD and
normally executed automatically when the preoperational checks.
[Selection]
Adjustment/Maintenance K DC Offset
Cancel
[Procedure]
Cancel the DC level offset.
1. Click [OK].
2. Click [OK].
Maintenance screen.
5.4.15 LED Light Amount Adjustment (43L)

This menu is executed after replacing the LED
circuit board assembly or light source unit.
After executing this menu, perform menu 43J
Spectral Calibration and then clear LED Light
Time in menu 434 Operation Information
Display.
[Selection]
Adjustment/Maintenance L LED Light
Amount Adjustment
[Procedure]
Adjust LED light amount when:
the LED circuit board assembly is replaced.
the gradation setting is changed.
the light source unit or CTC22 circuit board is
replaced.
1. Install the auto film carrier NC100AC in its
135 lane.
NOTE: Do not insert a film.
2. Click [Run].

3. Click [OK].
Maintenance screen.
5.4.16 Unexposed Frame Detect Level Set (43U)

This menu sets up the detecting level for the
unexposed frame of the IX240.
[Selection]
Adjustment/Maintenance U Unexposed
Frame Detect Level Set
[Procedure]
Set up the unexposed frame detecting level.
1. Select Unexposed Frame Detect Level.
Unexposed Frame Detect Level:
1: Unexposed frames are not displayed.
2: All frames including unexposed frames
are displayed.
3: Unexposed frames between exposed
frames are also displayed.]
2. Click [OK].
Maintenance screen.
5.5 Carrier Adjustment/Maintenance (44)

5.5.1 Mask Position Adjustment (441)
This menu is used to adjust mask position
against the monitor screen and prints.
This menu should be executed for all carriers
and masks to be used.
[Selection]
4 Setup and Maintenance 4 Carrier
Adjustment/Maintenance 1 Mask Position
Adjustment
[Procedure]
Adjust the mask position.
1. Install the film carrier.
The carrier ID, carrier type and mask type are
displayed.
2. Click [Run].
The mask and adjustment frames are

displayed.
3. Adjust the mask position so that it is
centered with the adjustment frame by
clicking the Position Adjust buttons.
NOTE: Click [Initialize] to return to the initial position.
5. Click [OK].
The message disappears.
6. Click [Cancel].
Maintenance screen.
5.5.2 NC100AC Input Check (442)

The status of the sensors of the auto film carrier
NC100AC can be checked.
[Selection]
Adjustment/Maintenance 2 NC100AC Input
Check
[Procedure]
Check the status of the sensors.
[Next Page]
[Previous Page]
1. Click [OK].
Maintenance screen.
5.5.3 Monitor Frame Ratio Setup (448)

The image frame size displayed after prescanning can be set up in this menu.
[Selection]
Adjustment/Maintenance 8 Mask Position
Adjustment
[Procedure]
Set up the monitor frame ratio for each mask.
1. Select the carrier type to be set up monitor
frame ratio.
2. Change the monitor frame ratio by clicking
the [] and [] buttons.
NOTE: The default values are 95%.
3. Click [Save].
The data are saved.
4. Click [Cancel].
Maintenance screen.
5.5.4 NC100AC Sensor Calibration (44A)

[Selection]
Adjustment/Maintenance A NC100AC
Sensor Calibration
[Procedure]
This procedure calibrates the optical sensors
and shows the result data.
1. Check that there is no film in the carrier.
2. Click [Run].
The calibration results are displayed.

NOTE: The calibration results are shown but not saved.
3. Click [Cancel].
Maintenance screen.
5.5.5 NC100AC Sensor Calibration Information (44C)

[Selection]
Adjustment/Maintenance C NC100AC
Sensor Calibration Information
[Procedure]
This procedure calibrates the optical sensors
and displays the LED current setup and sensor
output data. The data can be read out and
written in.
1. Make sure there is no film in the auto film
carrier NC100AC.
2. Click [Run].
[Next Page]
[Previous Page]
The sensors are calibrated and the results are

displayed.
NOTE: [EEPROM reading]: Data are read out from the
EEPROM of the carrier and
written to the main control
unit.
[EEPROM writing]: Data in the main control
unit are written to the
EEPROM in the carrier.
[HD reading]:
Data are read out from the
written to the hard disk. Of
the main control unit
[HD writing]:
Data in the hard disk of the
main control unit are written
to the EEPROM of the
carrier.
[FD reading]:
written to floppy disk.
3. Click [Cancel].
Maintenance screen.
5.5.6 NC100AC Carrier Installation Information Display (44D)

[Selection]
Adjustment/Maintenance D NC100AC
Carrier Installation Information Display
[Procedure]
This procedure is used to check the auto film
carrier ID and hard revision (modify history)
numbers.
1. Install the auto film carrier NC100AC.
2. Proceed to the D NC100AC Carrier
Installation Information Display screen.
3. Click [OK].
Maintenance screen.
5.5.7 NC100AC Carrier Installation Information Setup (44E)

[Selection]
Adjustment/Maintenance E NC100AC
Carrier Installation Information Setup
[Procedure]
This procedure is used to register the auto film
carrier ID and hard revision (modify history)
numbers.
1. Install the auto film carrier NC100AC to be
registered.
2. Proceed to the D NC100AC Carrier
Installation Information Display screen.
The carrier ID and hard revision numbers are
displayed.
NOTE: The numbers can be rewritten if necessary.
3. Click OK].
4. Click [OK].
5. Click [OK].
Maintenance screen.
5.5.8 NC100AC I/O Check (44F)

[Selection]
Adjustment/Maintenance F NC100AC I/O
Check
[Procedure]
This procedure displays the status of the
motors, solenoid and sensors.
1. Connect the auto film carrier NC100AC to
the plug-in connector using the carrier
extension cable.
2. Proceed to the F NC100AC I/O Check
screen.
3. Click the operation buttons and check if each
part is operating normally.
4. Click [OK].
Maintenance screen.
[Next Page]
[Previous Page]
5.5.9 NC100AC Machine Data Setup (44K)

[Selection]
Adjustment/Maintenance K NC100AC
Machine Data Setup
[Procedure]
This procedure sets up the data for the auto film
carrier NC100AC.
[Next Page]
[Previous Page]
1. Click [EEPROM reading].
[Next Page]
[Previous Page]
Data are read out from the EEPROM and

displayed.
NOTE: [EEPROM reading]: Data are read out from the
written to the main control
unit.
[EEPROM writing]: Data in the main control
unit are written to the
EEPROM in the carrier.
[HD reading]:
written to the hard disk. Of
the main control unit
[HD writing]:
Data in the hard disk of the
main control unit are written
to the EEPROM of the
carrier.
[FD reading]:
written to floppy disk.
2. If necessary, change the setting values and

click [EEPROM writing].
3. Click [OK].
The dialog box disappears and data is written
to the EEPROM.
4. Click [Cancel].
Maintenance screen.
5.5.10 NC100AC Magnetic Information Reading (44M)

This menu is used to check that the magnetic
information of the IX240 can be read out.
[Selection]
Adjustment/Maintenance M NC100AC
Magnetic Information Reading
[Procedure]
This procedure is used to check magnetic
information reading operation.
1. Install the auto film carrier NC100AC in
IX240 lane.
2. Load the film cartridge or strip film.
3. Click [Run].
The magnetic information is read out and

displayed.
4. Click [Cancel].
Maintenance screen.
K: Reading out is OK.
?: Magnetic information presents but format

is NG.
: Reading out is NG.
: No magnetic information.
5.5.11 NC100AC Magnetic Verify (44N)

This menu is used to check that the magnetic
head is operating correctly.
[Selection]
Adjustment/Maintenance N NC100AC
Magnetic Verify
[Procedure]
The status of the magnetic reading head can be
checked in this menu.
1. Install the auto film carrier NC100AC in
IX240 lane.
2. Load the film cartridge or strip film.
3. Click [Run].
The magnetic information is read out and the

result is displayed.
NOTE: If the magnetic reading head is fouling, the W5140 message appears.
4. Click [Cancel].
Maintenance screen.
5.5.12 NC100AC Fixed Feeding Setup (44R)

In this menu, the feeding amount for the fixed
feeding mode of the 135 films can be adjusted.
[Selection]
Adjustment/Maintenance R NC100AC Fixed
Feeding Setup
[Procedure]
This menu sets up the fixed frame feeding
length of the auto film carrier NC100AC.
1. Set up fixed feed frame lengths for the 135
full and half sizes by clicking the [] and []
keys.
NOTE: Click [Initialize] to return to the initial values.
2. Click [OK].
Maintenance screen.
5.6 Printer Adjustment/Maintenance (45)

5.6.1 Paper Magazine Registration (451)
[Selection]
4 Setup and Maintenance 5 Printer
Adjustment/Maintenance 1 Paper Magazine
Registration
[Procedure]
This procedure registers the paper magazine to
be used.
Change the dryer temperature if necessary.
1. Release the latches and open the paper

magazine.
Paper Magazine
Latches (2)
EZ643
2. Loosen the two screws and adjust the width

of the paper guides. Tighten the two screws.
3. Loosen the four screws securing the paper
flanges to the paper shaft.
Screws (2)
Paper Guides
EZ854
4. Align the holes in the paper flange bosses

with the paper width marks and tighten the
four screws.
Paper Flanges
NOTE: Be careful not to overtighten the screws.

Do not try to loosen the screws marked red.
Paper Shaft
Screws (4)
EZ1920
5. Find the appropriate paper from the table in

the screen and install its ID chip to the
magazine using the two screws.
Paper Magazine
NOTE: Do not use ID No. 13 and No. 14 because they

are for 25.4 cm wide paper.
6. Check that the dryer temperature is set to

the recommended value listed below.
Paper Width Recommended High Temperature Low Temperature
Temperature
Setting
Setting
(mm)
89 to 130
75.0 C
80.0 C
75.0 C
152
80.0 C
85.0 C
75.0 C
162 to 210
85.0 C
85.0 C
80.0 C
ID Chip
Screws (2)
EZ1218
Except for the reasons indicated below, the

dryer temperature should not be changed from
the recommended value. If paper drying
problems arise due to the change in the drying
environment and other factors, select the high or
low temperature setting. The high temperature
setting should be used when the ambient
humidity is high. The low temperature setting
should be used when problems occur in paper
collection due to strong curling of the paper.
7. Click [Set].
8. Click [End].
Maintenance screen.
5.6.2 Paper Feed Length Adjustment (452)

This menu should be executed for all paper
magazines when installing the machine.
[Selection]
Adjustment/Maintenance 2 Paper Feed
Length Adjustment
[Procedure]
Adjust the paper feed length in this menu when
a new magazine is registered.
1. Move the cursor to ID and select the

magazine to be adjusted.
2. Enter 82.5 in both Small Size boxes for
Feed length setting value and Actual
measured value and 297.0 in both Large
Size boxes.
3. Click [OK].
4. Make each three grid pattern prints with
feed length 254 mm and 82.5 mm in menu
453 Test Pattern Printing.
Or feed each three sheets of paper with feed
length 254 mm and 82.5 mm in menu 455
Paper Feed.
5. Measure and record the length of each third
grid pattern print.
NOTE: Always measure the third paper since the feed
length may not stabilize immediately after
setting paper.
6. Proceed to Paper Feed Length

Adjustment.
7. Enter each measured value in Actual

measured value boxes.
8. Click [OK].
Maintenance screen.
<Offset Adjustment>
On this menu, the paper feed length can be
adjusted by entering the offset value of the feed
length.
1. Select magazine ID to be adjusted.
2. Enter the offset value in the Input offset
box.
3. Click [OK].
Maintenance screen.
4. Make grid pattern prints in menu 453 Test
Pattern Printing and make sure of the feed
length of the prints.
5.6.3 Test Pattern Printing (453)

[Selection]
Adjustment/Maintenance 3 Test Pattern
Printing
[Procedure]
This procedure creates test pattern prints.
1. Move the cursor to Test pattern selection,
and select Grid, Border-less contact,
Bordered contact, Gradation or Step
wedge.
Grid: For color drift and feed length inspection
Borderless contact: For exposure and

processing unevenness inspection
Bordered contact: For exposure and processing

unevenness, or white board inspection
2. Move the cursor to Feed length and enter

the feed length (mm).
Gradation:
For gradation inspection
Step wedge:
For color inspection
3. Click [Print] .
4. Click [All process].
After about 5 minutes, the print is output to
the large size tray.
Color Drift Inspection
1) Make a grid test print.
2) Use a magnifying lens (X25) to check
that the vertical line for the color drift is 1/
8 pixel or less in width, and the horizontal
line is 1/4 pixel or less in width.
REFERENCE:
1 pixel width = 0.08mm
5. Click [End].
Maintenance screen.
5.6.4 G, B Laser (SHG) Optimal Temperature Setup (454)

The G and B laser optimal temperature setting
message appears every three months. Set up
the optimal temperatures using this screen.
[Selection]
Adjustment/Maintenance 4 G, B Laser
(SHG) Optimal Temperature Setup
[Procedure]
This procedure sets the G, B laser(SHG)
optimal temperature.
NOTE: Wait about 1 hour until the temperature
adjustment is completed.
1. Click [Run].
2. Click [B-SHG].
3. Click [Run].
4. Click [Cancel].
Maintenance screen.
5.6.5 Paper Feed (455)

[Selection]
Adjustment/Maintenance 5 Paper Feed
[Procedure]
This procedure feeds and processes unexposed
sheets of paper.
1. Enter the number of sheets in Qty box and
the feed length in Length box.
Number of sheets: 1 to 999
Feed length:
82.5 to 305.0
2. Click [OK].
The sheets of paper are fed and processed.

3. Click [Cancel].
Maintenance screen.
5.6.6 Printer Temperature Display (456)

[Selection]
Adjustment/Maintenance 6 Printer
Temperature Display
[Procedure]
This procedure displays the printer temperature
and printer status.
NOTE: The temperatures are updated every 5
seconds.
Always keep ON for Working of Abnormal
temperature monitoring.
1. Click [OK].
Maintenance screen.
5.6.7 Printer Input Check (457)

[Selection]
Adjustment/Maintenance 7 Printer Input
Check
[Procedure]
sensors.

2. Click [OK].
Maintenance screen.
5.6.8 Printer I/O Check (45A)

[Selection]
Adjustment/Maintenance A Printer I/O
Check
[Procedure]
motors, solenoids and sensors.
[Next Page]:
Displays the next screen.
[Previous Page]: Displays the previous screen.
1. Click the required operation button.
The respective motor or solenoid operates if it
is normal.
2. Click [OK].
Maintenance screen.
5.6.9 Filter Replacement History (45B)

[Selection]
Adjustment/Maintenance B Filter
Replacement History
[Procedure]
This procedure is used to check the laser unit
filter replacement history and the pressurizing
time for last five times
Click [Replace] to record when the filter is
replaced.
1. Click [Replace] when the filter is replaced.
The replacement date is displayed.
NOTE: Click [Initialize] to initialize the replacement
history.
2. Click [Cancel].
Maintenance screen.
5.6.10 Laser Exposure Check (45C)

[Selection]
Adjustment/Maintenance C Laser Exposure
Check
[Procedure]
This procedure performs an RGB test exposure
and displays the results.
1. Click [OK].
Maintenance screen.
5.6.11 R Laser (R-LD) Data (45D)

[Selection]
Adjustment/Maintenance D R Laser(R-LD)
Data
[Procedure]
This procedure displays the R laser(R-LD) data
in the EEPROM.
1. Click [OK].
Maintenance screen.
5.6.12 G Laser (G-SHG) Data (45E)

[Selection]
Adjustment/Maintenance E G Laser(GSHG) Data
[Procedure]
This procedure displays the G laser(G-SHG)
data in the EEPROM.
1. Click [OK].
Maintenance screen.
5.6.13 B Laser (B-SHG) Data (45F)

[Selection]
Adjustment/Maintenance F B Laser(B-SHG)
Data
[Procedure]
This procedure displays the B laser(B-SHG)
data in the EEPROM.
1. Click [OK].
Maintenance screen.
5.6.14 Scanning Position/Scanning Home Position Parameter Setup (45G)

[Selection]
Adjustment/Maintenance G Scanning
Position/Scanning Home Position Parameter
Setup
[Procedure]
This procedure displays the parameters for
exposure positions.
1. Enter the scanning position/scanning home
position parameters by clicking [] and [].
2. Click [OK] to set the parameters.
Maintenance screen.
5.6.15 Main Scanning Position Adjustment/Laser Beam Sync. Rough Adjustment (45H)
[Selection]
Adjustment/Maintenance H Main Scanning
Position Adjustment/Laser Beam Sync. Rough
Adjustment
[Procedure]
This procedure performs the scanning
adjustment and laser beam synchronization
rough adjustment.
NOTE: Perform this adjustment after processing three or
more sheets of paper because the feed length
may not stabilize immediately after setting paper.
1. Install the paper magazine for the narrowest

paper width.
2. Click [Print].
The print is outputted in about five minutes.
3. Measure the dimensions of A, B and C, then

record them.
NOTE: Error of measurement: Within 0.5mm
4. Move the cursor to A: Left-side measured

value and enter the measured A value.
5. Move the cursor to B: Right-side measured
value and enter the measured B value.
B
Sub-Scanning Line
Rough Adjustment
Block
6. Click [Enter] of Width direction (main

scanning position).
7. Click [OK].
8. Move the cursor to C: Top measured value
and enter the measured C value.
9. Click [Enter] of Feeding direction (subscanning position).
10. Click [OK].
11. Find the X coordinate which has the
minimum color drift on the print for the
vertical lines using an inverted magnifier
(x20-40), and record the coordinate value
and the drifted color (CMY) order from the
left side.
12. Check and record the drifted color (CMY)

order of the sub-scanning line from the top
using an inverted magnifier (x20-40).
13. Move the cursor to X(Width) and enter the
measured X value
14. Move the cursor to Y(Feed) and enter the
measured Y value.
15. Click [Enter] of Coordinate with least
amount of color drift.
16. Click [OK].
17. Click [End].
Maintenance screen.
5.6.16 Laser Beam Sync. Fine Adjustment Print (45J)

[Selection]
Adjustment/Maintenance J Laser Beam
Sync. Fine Adjustment Print
[Procedure]
This procedure performs the fine adjustment of
the laser beam synchronization.
1. Move the cursor to Order of drifted colors for
main scanning and enter the drifted color
order from the left recorded in Main
Scanning Position Adjustment/Laser Beam
Sync. Rough Adjustment (Menu 45H).
2. Move the cursor to Order of drifted colors for

sub-scanning and enter the drifted color
order from the top recorded in Main
Sync. Rough Adjustment (Menu 45H).
3. Click [Print].
The print is outputted in about five minutes.

NOTE: The adjustment print has 20 or 25 vertical and
horizontal lines.
4. Find numbers that have the minimum color

drift on the output print for the vertical and
horizontal lines using the magnifier (x20-40).
5. Move the cursor to the Best main scanning
position and enter the number of the vertical
lines found.
6. Move the cursor to the Best sub-scanning
position and enter the number of the
horizontal lines found.
7. Click [Set].
8. Click [OK].
9. Click [End].
Maintenance screen.
5.6.17 Laser History Display (45K)

[Selection]
4 Setup and Maintence 5 Printer
Adjustment/Maintenance K Laser History
Display
[Procedure]
Display the exposure time and current value of
R-LD, G-SHG and B-SHG.
1. Click [Switch display] to switch between the

graph and numeric displays.
2. Click [OK].
Maintenance screen.
5.6.18 Paper Condition Setup Table (LUT) Copy (45L)

[Selection]
Adjustment/Maintenance L Paper Condition
Setup Table(LUT) Copy
[Procedure]
This procedure copies the LUT (Look-up Table)
from one magazine to another.
1. Specify the ID of the source magazine.
2. Specify the ID of the destination magazine.
3. Click [OK].
Copying is performed and operation returns to
the 4 Setup and Maintenance screen.
5.6.19 Printer Mechanical Fine Adjustment (45M)

[Selection]
Adjustment/Maintenance M Printer
Mechanical Fine Adjustment
[Procedure]
This procedure adjusts the printer mechanism.
[Next Page]:
[Calculating]:
Calculates calibration value.
[Set]:
Sets up entered data.
[Cancel]:
Returns to the 4 Setup and
Maintenance screen.
Adjust the printer paper feed system.

Adjust the sub-scanning motor speed to 60mm/
sec. for each paper magazine.
1. Make the following print in menu 453.
Print feed length: 290mm
Print type:
Grid
2. Measure the length of 15 squares in the feed

direction of the print.
Standard length of 15 squares: 254.0mm
3. Enter 254.0 in Length box of Calculating.
4. Enter the measured value in Meas. Val. box
of Calculating.
5. Click [Calculating].
The calibrating value is calculated and
displayed.
6. Enter the calculated value in the appropriate
box of Setting for each paper width.
7. Click [OK].
The entered value is set up.
Maintenance screen.
15 Squares (254.0mm)
5.6.20 Back Printer Test (45N)

[Selection]
Adjustment/Maintenance N Back Printer
Test
[Procedure]
This procedure makes a test print using the
back printer.
1. Set Qty and Feed length.
2. Select the magazine to be used.
3. Click [OK].
The test print is output.
4. Click [Cancel].
Maintenance screen.
5.6.21 Printer Operation Data Display (45P)

[Selection]
Adjustment/Maintenance P Printer
Operation Data Display
[Procedure]
This procedure displays the printer operation
data.
1. Click [OK].
Maintenance screen.
5.6.22 Clearing Selected Printer Operation Data (45Q)

[Selection]
Adjustment/Maintenance Q Clearing
Selected Printer Operation Data
[Procedure]
This procedure clears specific items of printer
operation data.
1. Select the item to be cleared.
2. Click [OK].
The selected data item is cleared.
Maintenance screen.
5.6.23 Clearing All Operation Data (45R)

[Selection]
Adjustment/Maintenance R Clearing All
Operation Data
[Procedure]
This procedure clears specific items of printer
and processor operation data.
NOTE: Total sorts and total number of prints are not
cleared.
1. Click [OK].
All operating data items are cleared.
2. Click [Cancel].
Maintenance screen.
5.6.24 Side Register Calibration (45S)

In this menu, perform the exposure start position
calibration when initial machine installation or
after replacing the register unit or register
sensor.
[Selection]
Adjustment/Maintenance B Filter
Replacement History
[Procedure]
This procedure measures and corrects the side
registration.
1. Click [Run].

2. Click [OK].
The calibration is set up.
Maintenance screen.
5.6.25 Data Saving (45T)

The parameter displayed can be written from
the memory on the CTP22 circuit board to the
HDD in the main control unit.
[Selection]
Adjustment/Maintenance T Data Saving
[Procedure]
This procedure saves the printer data into the
hard disk of the main control unit.
1. Select the item to be saved.
2. Click [OK].
The data are saved.
3. Click [Cancel].
Maintenance screen.
5.6.26 Data Download (45U)

The parameter displayed can be written from
the HDD in the main control unit to the memory
on the CTP22 circuit board.
[Selection]
Adjustment/Maintenance U Data Download
[Procedure]
This procedure loads the printer data into the
printer after the CTL21 circuit board has been
replaced.
1. Select the item to be downloaded.
2. Click [OK].
The data are downloaded.
3. Click [OK].
Maintenance screen.
4. Shut down and restart the system.
5.6.27 Precut Length Setting (45V)

This menu is used to set up the length of paper
leading end cutting. The leading end of paper is
cut after setting the paper magazine and before
starting printing after the system is started up.
[Selection]
Adjustment/Maintenance V Precut Length
Setting
[Procedure]
This procedure sets up the length of paper
leading end precutting when setting the paper
magazine or starting the system.
1. Enter the precut length in Pre-cut len. box.
Range: 89.0 to 305.0mm
2. Click [OK].
Maintenance screen.
5.7 Processor Adjustment/Maintenance (46)

5.7.1 Replenisher Pump Output Measurement/Setting (461)
Normally measure only PSR.
When execute this menu to confirm pump
operation for the P1R, P2RA or P2RB, return
the discharged replenisher into the replenisher
tank.
[Selection]
4 Setup and Maintenance 6 Processor
Adjustment/Maintenance 1 Pump Output
Measurement/Setting
[Procedure]
This procedure measures and corrects the
replenisher pump output.
1. Prepare a measuring cylinder.
2. Remove the circulation filter section cover.
PSR Supply Port Cover
3. Click [Start] for the box to be measured.
Circulation Filter Section Cover

CD866
The alarm beeps intermittently for 10

seconds.
NOTE: Click [Cancel] to stop the operation.
Replenisher Nozzle
4. Before the pump starts discharging,

disconnect the replenisher nozzle and insert
it into the measuring cylinder.
The replenisher pump starts discharging.
The alarm beeps when discharging is
completed.
5. Insert the replenisher nozzle into the subtank.
Measuring Cylinder
6. Place the measuring cylinder on a level

surface, and then read and record the
output.
7. Pour the replenisher solution from the
measuring cylinder into the waste recovery
tank.
CD090
8. Select the Measured value box, and enter

the recorded output value using the numeric
keys or the [] and [] keys.
NOTE: The machine automatically measures and
adjusts the pump output for P1-R, P2-RA and
P2-RB.
9. Click [OK].
Maintenance screen.
10. Reinstall the circulation filter section cover.
11. Clean the measuring cylinder.
5.7.2 Auto Cleaning Output Measurement/Setting (462)

[Selection]
Adjustment/Maintenance 2 Auto Cleaning
Output Measurement/Setting
[Procedure]
This procedure measures and corrects auto
cleaning pump output.
1. Prepare the measuring cup for auto-cleaning
output measurement.
3. Install the splash prevention cover over the

dryer fan section.
CD091
4. Loosen the two screws and remove the No.1

crossover rack.
Screws (2)
NOTE: Do not remove the crossover racks not to be

measured.
No.1 Crossover Rack

CD092
5. Release the tab and remove the autocleaning nozzle from the No.1 crossover
rack.
Locking Tab
Washer Nozzle
CD093
6. Drain the remaining water from the nozzle.
Washer Nozzle
CD873
7. Install the auto-cleaning nozzle in the

measuring cup.
Measuring Cup
Washer Nozzle
CD094
8. Install the measuring cup by aligning the

nozzle's rubber joint with the hole.
NOTE: Make sure the rubber joint is properly inserted. If
not, the solution will splash.
9. Press the [Start] button for the P1.
Measuring Cup
Rubber Boots
Hole
CD095
The countdown starts.

NOTE: To stop the pump, press the [Cancel] button.
The alarm beeps once when the discharging

is completed.
10. If the output is completed, release the lock

lever and remove the measuring cup.
Measuring Cup
Lock Release Lever

CD096
11. Put the measuring cup on the horizontal

place, read the liquid amount and record it.
Measuring Cup
12. Dispose of the water from the measuring

cup.
13. Install the cleaning nozzle in the No.1
crossover rack, and install the rack in the P1
processing rack.
14. Move the cursor to the Measured value of
the P1 and enter the value recorded in step
16.
CD097
15. Release the lock and remove the No.2

crossover rack.
16. Release the tab and remove the autocleaning nozzle from the No.2 crossover
rack.
No.2 Crossover Rack
17. Drain the remaining water from the nozzle.
Washer Nozzle
Locking Tab
CD098
18. Install the auto-cleaning nozzle in the

measuring cup.
Measuring Cup
19. Repeat steps 8 to 18 for the P2.

20. Repeat steps 19 to 22 for the PS1 and PS3.
21. Click [OK].
Operation reterns to the 4 Setup and
Maintenance screen.
22. Remove the splash prevention cover and
close the dryer unit.
Washer Nozzle
CD099
5.7.3 Processing Temperature Setting (463)

[Selection]
Adjustment/Maintenance 3 Processing
Temperature Setting
[Procedure]
This procedure sets the processing
temperatures.
1. Enter the numerical values of the P1, P2
and PS processing temperatures.
P1
P2
PS
Range
30.0 to 40.0
30.0 to 40.0
30.0 to 40.0
Default Value
38.5
38.0
38.0
2. Click [OK].
Maintenance screen.
5.7.4 Replenisher Rate Setting (464)

[Selection]
Adjustment/Maintenance 4 Replenisher
Rate Setting
[Procedure]
This procedure sets the replenishment amounts.
1. Enter the numerical values of the P1-R,
P2-R and PS-R replenishment amount.
P1-R
P2-R
PS-R
Range
30.0 to 200.0
20.0 to 300.0
100.0 to 300.0
Default Value
45.0
35.0
175.0
2. Click [OK].
Maintenance screen.
5.7.5 Evaporation Correction Rate Setting (465)

[Selection]
Adjustment/Maintenance 5 Evaporation
Correction Rate Settting
[Procedure]
This procedure sets the evaporation correction
rate.
1. Select YES for Evaporation Correction
and Standard for Humidity.
2. Click [OK].
Maintenance screen.
5.7.6 Low Volume Setup (466)

[Selection]
Adjustment/Maintenance 6 Low Volume
Setup
[Procedure]
This procedure sets up low volume processing.
1. Select YES for Low volume.
2. Enter minimum processing amount in the
box.
Range: 0.0 to 15.0
3. Enter minimum processing amount for last
eight days in the box.
Range: 0.0 to 99.9
NOTE: Click [Clear] to clear all data.
4. Click [OK].
Maintenance screen.
5.7.7 Processor Temperature Calibration (467)

[Selection]
Adjustment/Maintenance 7 Processor
Temperature Calibration
[Procedure]
This procedure calibrates the processor section
temperatures.
1. Check that the display values have reached
the Setting temperatures.
2. Turn the P1 filter holder 90

counterclockwise, remove the P1 circulation
filter and place it on a tray.
P1 Circulation Filter Holder
NOTE: Do not let the solution drip or run.
CD100
3. Measure the temperature of the processing

solution and record it.
Thermometer
CD101
4. Reinstall the filter by aligning the fastening

tab with the cutout, and then turn it 90
clockwise.
Tab
5. If the Setting temperatures differ from the

values displayed, move the cursor to the
Measured value and enter the values
recorded in step 3.
Range: 0.0 to 99.9
Cutout
6. Click [Enter].
CD102
7. Repeat steps 1 to 6 for P2, PS2 and PS4.

8. Click [OK].
Maintenance screen.
5.7.8 Processor Input Check (468)

[Selection]
Adjustment/Maintenance 8 Processor Input
Check
[Procedure]
sensors.
This screen shows the replenisher tank levels.
The levels are indicated by the color shown
below.
Upper limit: Blue
Middle level: Yellow
Lower limit: Red

2. Click [OK].
Maintenance screen.
5.7.9 Processor I/O Check (46A)

[Selection]
Adjustment/Maintenance A Processor I/O
Check
[Procedure]
motors, solenoids and sensors.
[Next Page]:
[Cancel]:
Operation returns to the 4
Setup and Maintenance
screen.
1. Click the required operation button.

The respective motor or solenoid operates, if
it is normal.
2. Click [Cancel].
Maintenance screen.
5.7.10 Processor Operating Condition Setup (46B)

[Selection]
Adjustment/Maintenance B Processor
Operating condition Setup
[Procedure]
This procedure sets up the processor operating
condition.
1. Select YES or NO for Dryer section
preheat driving.
2. Select YES for Rack auto cleaning.
3. Select YES or NO for Auto intermittent
driving.
4. Select YES or NO for PS rack cleaning.
5. Click [OK].
Maintenance screen.
5.7.11 Processor Operation Data Display (46C)

[Selection]
Adjustment/Maintenance C Processor
Operation Data Display
[Procedure]
This procedure displays the processor operation
data. The data can be cleared using menu 46D
1. Click [OK].
Maintenance screen.
5.7.12 Clearing Selected Operation Data (46D)

[Selection]
Adjustment/Maintenance D Clearing
Selected Operation Data
[Procedure]
This procedure clears specific items of
processor operation data (displayed in menus
46C and 46E).
1. Select the item to be cleared.
2. Click [OK].
The selected data item is cleared.
Maintenance screen.
5.7.13 Processor Operation Data Display 2 (46E)

[Selection]
Adjustment/Maintenance E Processor
Operation Data Display 2
[Procedure]
This procedure displays the processor operation
data. The data can be cleared using menu 46D
1. Click [OK].
Maintenance screen.
5.7.14 Installation (46F)

[Selection]
Adjustment/Maintenance F Installation
[Procedure]
This procedure is used for setting, replenisher
system air bleeding and cartridge opening when
initial installation.
1. Select CP-48S for Processing formula.
2. Select No use for External waste tank.
3. Select 50Hz or 60Hz for Frequency
setting in accordance with the power supply
frequency.
4. Click [Set].
5. Execute Washing pump aeration,
Opening and Replenisher pump aeration
in this order by clicking the [Run] buttons.
6. Click [OK].
Maintenance screen.

5.8.1 Trouble Help (491)
If an abnormality occurs in print image, the
cause can be diagnosed by following the
guidance on the screens.
[Selection]
4 Setup and Maintenance 9 SelfDiagnostic 1 Trouble Help
[Procedure]
This procedure is used to diagnose any
abnormality of the print image by following the
screens (see chapter 6 MSDP TROUBLE
HELP).
1. Click To The Manual for Image
Abnormalities.
The menu screen of Manual for Image

Abnormalities appears (see chapter 6).
2. Diagnose the mage problem by following the
indication of the screen.
3. Click Back to cover.
Operation returns to the menu screen.
4. Click [END].
Maintenance screen.
5.8.2 Help Update (492)

This machine does not support this function.
5.8.3 Image Abnormality Analyzer (493)

Execute this function if abnormality occurs in the
print image without appearing any error.
[Selection]
4 Setup and Maintenance 9 SelfDiagnostic 3 Image Abnormality Analyzer
[Procedure]
This procedure is used to diagnose any
abnormality of the image processing functions
automatically.
1. Check mark the items to be checked.
2. Click [Start].
The system checks the checking items in the

order listed and displays the result.
Faulty circuit boards and cables are displayed

the end of the check list.
3. Click [Storage] to save data.
4. Insert the floppy disk into the drive of the

main control unit.
5. Select Floppy (A:) and click [Save].
The result data are saved into the floppy disk.
6. Click [End].
Maintenance screen.
5.8.4 Paper Feed Check (494)

The last 500 paper feeding data can be checked
in this menu
[Selection]
4 Setup and Maintenance 9 SelfDiagnostic 4 Paper Feed Check
[Procedure]
This procedure is used to check the paper feed
system automatically.
1. Select menu 494.
2. Click [OK].
The (8) About screen appears.
3. Click View and select the item to be display.

The selected screen appears.
(1) Feed error log/Error occurrence order
(2) Feed error log/Number of error times order
(3) Feed sequence log/Raw data
(4) Feed sequence log/Passing time
(5) Feed sequence log/Side registration data
(6) Side registration calibration
(7) Feed sensor log
4. Click [Storage] to save data into the floppy

disk.
5. Insert the floppy disk into the drive of the

main control unit.
6. Select Floppy (A:) and click [Save].
The data are saved into the floppy disk.

NOTE: Click Option to select functions.
7. Click [OK].
Maintenance screen.

5.9.1 Paint (410A)
[Selection]
4 Setup and Maintence 10 Special
Operations A Paint
[Procedure]
Do this procedure to use Paint.
NOTE: For information on Paint operations, see the
Windows 2000 manual.
1. Press the [X] button in the upper right-hand

side of the screen.
NOTE: Be sure not press the emergency button.

Maintenance screen.
5.9.2 Explorer (410B)

[Selection]
Operations B Explorer
[Procedure]
Do this procedure to use Explorer.
NOTE: For information on Explorer operations, see the
Windows 2000 manual.
1. Press the [X] button on the upper right-hand

side of the screen.
NOTE: Be sure not press the emergency button.

Maintenance screen.
5.9.3 Command (49C)

[Selection]
Operations C Command
[Procedure]
Do this procedure to perform MS-DOS
command operations.
NOTE: For information on Command operations, see
the MS-DOS manual.
1. Press the [X] button on the upper right-hand

side of the screen.
Maintenance screen.
6. TROUBLESHOOTING FOR ABNORMAL IMAGES

These troubleshooting flowcharts converted from maintenance menu 491 Trouble Help are used to
diagnose the cause of abnormal images.
6.1
6.1.1
6.1.2
6.1.3
6.1.4
6.1.5
6.1.6
6.2
6.2.1
6.2.2
6.3
6.3.1
6.3.2
6.3.3
6.4
6.4.1
6.4.2
6.4.3
6.5
6.5.1
6.5.2
6.6
6.6.1
6.6.2
6.7
6.7.1
6.7.2
6.7.3
6.7.4
6.7.5
6.7.6
6.7.7
6.7.8
6.7.9
Color Abnormalities
Non-existent image or too light / white print
Cyan non-existent or too light
Yellow non-existent or too light
Fogged magenta
Ghost
Color abnormality general
Color Misalignment
Each color shifts perpendicular to feeding direction (Increments of 1cm)
Each color shifts (Increments of 0.1mm)
Scratches
Red paper scratches at the leading end of black print
Scratch restoration malfunction or image scratch general
Straight continuous scratch in fixed image position even if the film is exchanged
Paper scratch general
Vignetting
Vignetting (NC100AC)
Vignetting (M69D/Negative)
Vignetting (M69D/Reversal)
Frame Misalignment
Frame misalignment in both monitor and print
Frame misalignment in prints, OK in monitor
Graininess and Jaggedness

Overall graininess
Jaggedness in large-size prints/Jaggedness of straight line
Streaks
Streak perpendicular to feed direction (53mm spacing)
2Streak perpendicular to feed direction (60mm spacing)
Streak perpendicular to feed direction (Black blurred streak at 2mm of leading end)
Streak perpendicular to feed direction (Black blurred streak at 13mm of leading end)
Streaks perpendicular to feed direction (Pitch streaks within 0 to 40mm of leading end)
Streaks perpendicular to feed direction (White clear streak at 4mm of trailing end)
Streaks perpendicular to feed direction (White/black blurred streak at 13mm of trailing end)
Streaks perpendicular to feed direction (White clear streak at 13mm of trailing end)
Streaks perpendicular to feed direction (Black blurred streak at 23mm of trailing end)
6.7.10
6.7.11
6.7.12
6.7.13
6.8
6.8.1
6.8.2
6.8.3
6.9
Streaks perpendicular to feed direction (Pitch streaks within 0 to 25mm and at 33mm of trailing end)
Streaks perpendicular to feed direction (Pitch streaks at 48mm of trailing end)
Streaks perpendicular to feed direction (Pitch streaks at 52mm and 68 mm of trailing end)
Streaks perpendicular to feed direction (Pitch streaks at 72mm and 88 mm of trailing end)
White Border Imprecision

1White border imprecision (Shifted in feed direction)
White border imprecision (Shifted perpendicular to feed direction)
White border imprecision (Inclination)
Spots
6.10 Densitometer and Calibration Print Error

6.10.1
6.10.2
6.10.3
Repeated calibrations do not improve the result.

Calibration print density is too low to be measured.
Color becomes worse after calibration. Paper cannot be fed in Densitometer.
6.11 Focus Problems

6.11.1
6.11.2
6.11.3
Overall blur
Blur along the periphery
Periphery blur
6.12 Unevenness
6.12.1
6.12.2
Regular unevenness perpendicular to feeding direction (mm spacing)

Regular unevenness in feed direction (mm spacing)
6.13 Others
6.13.1
Setup confirmation when developer degraded (Developer Degradation)
6.1 Color Abnormalities

6.1.1 Non-existent image or too light / white print
Make sure there is no problem with the original beforehand.
Non-existent image or too light/white print?
No
To 6.1.2
Yes
(I-7)
Check the monitor screen.
Is the image on the monitor screen normal?
No
A1
Yes
(I-1)
A2
Execute 4. Setup and Maintenance- 2.

Print Condition Setup and Check - 1.
Paper Condition Setup.
Click [Initialize] and execute calibration printing.
Check condition of calibration print.
Calibration print condition is so light that

density cannot be measured.
(I-23)
Calibration print is normal.

Try to follow troubleshooting for
Calibration print density is too low to be
measured in Densitometer and
Calibration Print Error.
(I-2)
Measure density of calibration print.
Has the trouble now been remedied?
End.
Densitometer and
calibration
print error list
No
END
(I-3)
Try troubleshooting for Densitometer and
Calibration Print Error.
Go to item list of Densitometer
and Calibration Print Error.
To Section 6.10
End.
End.
END
To 6.10.2
END
A1
No
(I-17)
Light source burnt

out 1/4 or more.

Scanner Adjustment/Maintenance - C.
CCD Data Display.
Remove the diffusion box and execute 135
detecting condition. Check each lighting color
and make sure condition of the light source on
the monitor screen. Do not stare the light
source.
Select item applicable.
Light source burnt out

in units of pair.
Normal
(I-37)
Scanner Adjustment/Maintenance - A. I/O
Check (Scanner).
Check the shutter home position sensor for
proper operation by repeating Open and
Close.
Yes
No
A3
(I-11)
Execute 4. Setup and Maintenance- 9. Selfdiagnosis - 3. Image Abnormality Analyzer.
It will take approximately 10 minutes.
Is a solution to the problem found?
Yes
No
END
(I-4)
Problem may be in the scanner side (scanner,
carrier or image processing circuit boards).
(I-19)
(I-22)
Check the connector to the LED circuit board.
Check the harness between the LED and CTC
circuit boards for poor connection or open
circuit and correct as necessary.
The LED circuit board may have

malfunctioned.
Replace the LED circuit board.
Yes
No
No
END
END
(I-21)
(I-18)
The CTC circuit board may have
malfunctioned.
Replace the CTC circuit board.

malfunctioned.
Yes
END
END
(I-4)
(I-20)
No
(I-4)
Yes
No
No

malfunctioned.
Yes

Yes
END
A2
(I-6)
Execute 4. Setup and Maintenance - 5.
Printer Adjustment/Maintenance - G.
Scanning Position/Scanning Home
Position Parameter Setup.
Check value in G Main scanning start position.
Value lies from
490 to 560.
Value is less than 490 or more than 560.

(I-28)
Setting value change
Change value of G main scanning start position
to 525. Execute 4. Setup and Maintenance - 5.
Printer Adjustment/Maintenance - H. Main
Rough Adjustment to fine adjust scanning start
position. Has the trouble now been remedied?
No
Yes
END
(I-31)
Execute 4. Setup and Maintenance - 5. Printer
Adjustment/Maintenance - 7. Printer Input Check.
Remove the front upper cover, turn ON the
interlock switch and insert a sheet of paper
near the sub-scanning area. Check the preexposure sensor is operating properly on the
7. Printer Input Check screen.
Is the sensor operating properly?
Yes
(I-36)
Check LDA and image processing (GMB)
circuit boards for poor connection.
Check connection between LDA and image
processing (GMB) circuit boards for poor
connection or open circuit and correct as
necessary.
No
(I-24)
Check the pre-exposure sensor connection.
Check the pre-exposure sensor harness for
poor connection or open circuit and correct as
necessary.
Yes
No
The laser unit may have malfunctioned.

Replace the laser unit.
END
(I-5)
No
Yes
No
END
(I-8)
Yes
Problem may be in the printer side (printer

exposure section or image processing circuit
boards).
END
A3
(I-35)
Check circuit from pre-exposure sensor to
downstream of power supply.
END
(I-41)
No
CTP circuit board or pre-exposure sensor
may have malfunctioned.
Check following items.
Poor connection or open circuit between the
CTP circuit board and the LDA circuit board.
Does voltage input/output normally from the
CTP circuit board?
Replace the CTP circuit board or pre-exposure
sensor as necessary.
Yes
(I-38)
Checking shutter unit connector
Check harness between the shutter unit and
the CTC circuit board for poor connection or
open circuit and correct as necessary.
Yes
No
END
(I-39)
The CTC circuit board may have malfunctioned.
Yes
No
END
(I-40)
The shutter unit may have malfunctioned.
Remove the CCD circuit board and replace the
shutter unit.
No
(I-4)
Yes
END
6.1.2 Cyan non-existent or too light

From 6.1.1
Cyan non-existent or too light?
No
To 6.1.3
Yes
(I-42)
No
B1
Yes
(I-30)
Execute calibration printing (Do not measure
print density). Is print normal?
No
(I-44)
Yes
(I-15)
No
(I-45)
Problem cannot be solved by Image
Abnormality Analyzer.
Yes
Yes
END
No
(I-12)
END
Check the R modulation cable and JML

circuit board cable.
Open the cover under the monitor and check
the R modulation cable (BNC) and JML circuit
board for poor and improper connection. Then
execute calibration printing.
Does density become normal?
Yes
END
No
(I-27)
No
(I-8)
boards).
Yes
END
B1
(I-43)
Light source burnt

out 1/4 or more.

CCD Data Display.
source. Select item applicable.
Light source burnt

out in units of pair.
Normal
(I-11)
Yes
No
END
(I-4)
(I-22)
(I-19)


malfunctioned.
Yes
Yes
No
No
END
(I-21)
(I-18)
malfunctioned.

malfunctioned.
Yes
No
No
END
(I-4)
(I-20)
malfunctioned.
No
(I-4)

Yes
END
END
Yes
END
6.1.3 Yellow non-existent or too light

C
From 6.1.2
Yellow non-existent or too light?
No
To 6.1.4
Yes
(I-46)
No
C1
Yes
(I-14)
Print condition setup and Check - 1.
Execute calibration printing (Do not measure
print density). Is print normal?
No
(I-25)
Yes
(I-15)
No
(I-45)
Yes
Yes
END
No
(I-26)
END
Check the input and output cables on the

AOM driver.
Check input and output cables of the B-AOM
driver for poor or incorrect connection and
Yes
END
No
(I-27)
No
(I-8)
boards).
Yes
END
C1
(I-43)
Light source burnt

out 1/4 or more.

CCD Data Display.
Light source burnt

Normal
(I-11)
Yes
No
END
(I-4)
(I-22)
(I-19)


malfunctioned.
Yes
Yes
No
No
END
(I-21)
(I-18)
malfunctioned.

malfunctioned.
Yes
No
No
END
(I-4)
(I-20)
malfunctioned.
No
(I-4)

Yes
END
END
Yes
END
6.1.4 Fogged magenta

D
From 6.1.3
Fogged magenta?
No
To 6.1.6
Yes
(I-16)
No
D1
Yes
(I-9)
Execute calibration printing.
Is calibration print normal?
No
(I-10)
Yes

Scanning Position/Scanning Home
Position Parameter Setup.
Is scanning start position detecting interval
8800?
(I-15)
Yes
8800
No
No
END
(I-29)
Incorrect setting value
Change value of scanning start position
detecting interval to 8800 or contact Fujifilm.
(I-45)
Problem cannot be solved by
Image Abnormality Analyzer.
Yes
No
END
(I-47)
Printer Adjustment/Maintenance - 3. Test
16.6-17.0mm
pattern Printing.
Print grid test pattern. Does the spacing
between vertical (paper feed direction) lines lie
between 16.6 and 17.0 mm?
(I-49)
No
Yes
(I-50)
No
END
(I-48)
The LDA or LDD circuit board may have
malfunctioned.
Replace the LDA or LDD circuit board.
No

Yes
No
END
Yes
(I-13)
END
Yes
(I-8)
boards).
No
(I-8)
boards).
END

D1
(I-43)
Light source burnt

out 1/4 or more.

CCD Data Display.
the monitor screen.
Do not stare the light source.
Light source burnt

Normal
(I-11)
Yes
No
END
(I-4)
(I-22)
(I-19)


malfunctioned.
Yes
Yes
No
No
END
(I-21)
(I-18)
malfunctioned.

malfunctioned.
Yes
No
No
END
(I-4)
(I-20)
malfunctioned.
No
(I-4)

Yes
END
END
Yes
END
6.1.5 Ghost
F
From 6.1.6
Ghost (The same shape appears on 54 mm

left hand on high density area when the
leading end is positioned up. )?
No
Yes
END
(I-59)
No
Yes
END
(I-55)
Pattern Printing.
Print wide-size Borderless contact test
pattern. Place the print with its leading end up.
Is magenta density of left side on the boarder
of 54 mm from the right end image high?
Yes
(I-57)
No
(I-45)
Problem cannot be solved by
Image Abnormality Analyzer.
The AOM driver may have malfunctioned.

Replace the AOM driver.
6.1.6 Color abnormality general

From 6.1.4
Color abnormality general?
No
To 6.1.5
Yes
(I-51)
No
E1
Yes
(I-53)
Execute calibration printing.
Is calibration print normal?
No
(I-32)
Yes

(I-56)
No
(I-45)
Yes
Yes
No
END
(I-34)
END

Control Strip Processing.
Is color tint normal?

Yes
No
(I-54)
Problem may be in printer
exposure section or image
processing circuit boards.
(I-58)
The processor may be set incorrectly.
Try to follow troubleshooting for Developer
Degradation of Others item.
Go to item of Others.
To Section 6.13
End
END
E1
(I-33)
Yes
No
END
(I-52)
Problem cannot be solved by Manual for
Dealing Image Abnormalities.
Yes
No
END
(I-17)
Light source burnt
out 1/4 or more.

CCD Data Display.
Light source burnt

Normal
(I-37)
Check (Scanner).
Check the shutter home position sensor for
proper operation by repeating Open and
Close.
No
E2
Yes
(I-11)
Yes
No
END
(I-4)
(I-22)
(I-19)


malfunctioned.
Yes
No
No
END

malfunctioned.
Yes
No
No
END
(I-20)
malfunctioned.
No
(I-4)
(I-4)
Yes
END
END
(I-21)
(I-18)
malfunctioned.
Yes
Yes
END
E2
(I-38)
Checking shutter unit connector
Check harness between the shutter unit and
the CTC circuit board for poor connection or
Yes
No
END
(I-39)
malfunctioned.
Yes
No
END
(I-40)
The shutter unit may have malfunctioned.
Remove the CCD circuit board and replace the
shutter unit.
No
(I-4)
Yes
END
6.2 Color Misalignment

6.2.1 Each color shifts perpendicular to feeding direction
(Increments of 1cm)
The printer is much influenced by vibration. Make sure color misalignment is not caused by vibration from external factor at scanning
or exposing or by faulty original.
Select an appropriate item
Each color shifts.

(increments of 0.1mm)
To 6.2.2
Each color shifts

perpendicular to feeding.
direction (increments of 1cm)
(U-6)
Pattern Printing.
Print grid test pattern.
Is print normal?
No
Yes
(U-1)
Yes
No
END
(U-8)
(U-9)
The trouble may be in scanner side (scanner,

carrier or image processing circuit board).
Inequalities are
not satisfied.
(U-14)
Printer Adjustment/Maintenance - U. Data
Download.
Select parameter and execute. Then make
sure the inequalities 450 G main scanning
home position 560, 290 Main scanning
shift amount (G-R) 350 and 600 Main
scanning shift amount (G-B) 660 are
satisfied.
The inequalities
are satisfied.
Inequalities are
satisfied.
(U-2)
Check R modulation, input and output
cables from LDA circuit board.
Check R modulation, input and output cables
from LDA circuit board for poor connection or
open circuit and reconnect correctly or repair.
Then perform calibration.
Not changed
(U-15)
Change setting values.
Change G main scanning home position, main
scanning shift amount (G-R) and main
scanning shift amount (G-B) to default values.
And execute 4. Setup and Maintenance-5.
Printer Adjustment / Maintenance-H. Main
Sysc. Rough Adjustment and J. Laser Beam
Sync. Fine Adjustment Print.

Scanning Position/Scanning Home Position
Parameter Setup.
Are the inequalities 450 G main scanning
home position 560, 290 Main scanning
shift amount (G-R) 350 and 600 Main
scanning shift amount (G-B) 660 satisfied?
No
(U-4)
END
No
(U-3)
(U-3)
The trouble may be in printer (exposure

section or image processing circuit board.)
No
(U-3)
END
Yes
No
(U-16)
Printer Adjustment/Maintenance - H.
Main Scanning Position Adjustment/Laser
Beam Sysc. Rough Adjustment and J.
Laser Beam Sync. Fine Adjustment Print.
Yes

Yes
END
Yes
END
6.2 Color Misalignment
6.2.2 Each color shifts (Increments of 0.1mm)

B
From 6.2.1
(U-10)

Pattern Printing.
Print grid test pattern (3 color level values:20).
Then check the amount of shift from grid using
a magnifier.
Is color shift less than 20 micrometer?
No
Yes
(U-18)
Execute 4. Setup and Maintenance-9. Selfdiagnosis - 3. Image Abnormality Analyzer.
Yes
No
END
(U-8)
The trouble may be in scanner side (scanner,
carrier or image processing circuit board).
(U-5)
Line shift of horizontal line (sub-scanning direction) is more

than 20 micrometer.

Sysc. Rough Adjustment and J. Laser
Beam Sync. Fine Adjustment Print.
Adjust laser beam synchronization and print
test pattern (grid) again. Check the amount of
shift from grid using a magnifier.
Line shift of vertical line

(feed direction) is more
than 10 micrometer.
Shift amount of horizontal line is less than 20

micrometer and vertical line is less than 10
micrometer.
(U-11)
The performance limit of shift amount in
transverse direction of feeding is within 10
micrometer and in feeding direction is withing
20 micrometer.
(U-12)
Readjust laser beam synchronization.
(U-13)
Check laser beam synchronization
adjustment print.
Check the amount of shift from horizontal line
(sub-scanning direction) using a magnifier.
Shift amount or each
color is more than 200
micrometer.
Shift amount for each color is

less than 200 micrometer.
(U-17)
Confirm setting values.
Shift can be adjusted by changing
setting values. Check shifted color
order and setting and execute laser
beam synchronization adjustment print
again.
Check setting again and execute 4. Setup

and Maintenance - 5. Printer
Adjustment/Maintenance - H. Main
Sysc. Rough Adjustment and J. Laser
Beam Sync. Fine Adjustment Print.
Color shift cannot be remedied

by adjustment of three times.
(U-20)
No
(U-3)
(U-19)

Yes
No
END
(U-7)
The laser unit may be faulty.
No
(U-3)
Yes
END
End
END
Yes
END
6.3 Scratches
6.3.1 Red paper scratches at the leading end of black print
B
From 6.3.3
Red paper scratches at the leading end of

black print?
No
To 6.3.2
Yes
(A-22)
Pattern Printing.
Print Borderless contact test pattern
continuously. Then observe the leading end of
prints.
Always red
scratches appear.
(A-24)
The cutter unit may have malfunctioned.
Replace the cutter unit.
Red scratches appear on first several prints.
(A-23)
Processor cleaning.
Clean crossover racks.
Yes
No
Yes
END
(A-25)
No
END
(A-25)

Dealing with Image Abnormalities.

6.3.2 Scratch restoration malfunction or image scratch

general
Straight continuous scratch in fixed image position
even if the film is exchanged
C
From 6.3.1
Scratch restoration malfunction or image

scratch general?
Yes
C1
No
Straight continuous scratch in fixed image

position even if the film is exchanged?
Yes
(A-18)
No
END
Inside inspection of the carrier

The carrier may be cause of film scratch. Clean
and inspect the film guides on the carrier. Replace
the carrier if the films are scratched at the same
location by the carrier.
6.3 Scratches
C1
(A-8)
Light source burnt

out 1/4 or more.

CCD Data Display.
Light source burnt

Normal
(A-6)
Yes
No
END
(A-15)
(A-12)
(A-14)


malfunctioned.
Yes
Yes
No
No
END
(A-13)
(A-17)
malfunctioned.

malfunctioned.
Yes
No
No
END
(A-15)
(A-16)
malfunctioned.
No
(A-15)

Yes
END
END
Yes
END
6.3 Scratches
6.3.3 Paper scratch general

Make sure there is no scratches on the original beforehand.
No
Paper scratch general?
To 6.3.1
Yes
(A-1)
Pattern Printing.
Print Borderless contact test pattern.
Is print normal?
No
A1
Yes
(A-8)
Light source burnt

out 1/4 or more.

CCD Data Display.
detecting condition. Check light color IR and
make sure lighting condition on the monitor
screen. If the amount of light is insufficient,
increase value of accumulated time. Do not
stare the light source.
Light source burnt

Normal
(A-6)
Yes
No
END
(A-15)
(A-12)
Checking connector on the LED circuit board
Check wire harness between the LED circuit
board and the CTC circuit board for poor
connection or open circuit and correct as
necessary.
(A-14)
malfunctioned.
Yes
No
No
END

malfunctioned.
Yes
No
No
END
(A-15)
(A-16)
malfunctioned.
No
(A-15)

Yes
END
END
(A-13)
(A-17)
malfunctioned.
Yes
Yes
END
6.3 Scratches
A1
(A-2)
Observe paper scratches.

Is scratches colored?
No
(A-3)
Yes
Performing post-operational check.

Perform post-operational check to wash
processing racks. Then print Borderless
contact test pattern.
Has print now been returned normal?
(A-9)
Magazine inspection
Remove the magazine and try to pull paper
out by hand.
Is paper scratched?
No
Yes
No
(A-4)
Yes
Processor cleaning
Clean the crossover racks, processing racks,
dryer guides and rollers.
(A-10)
The magazine may have malfunctioned.
Inspect the magazine in a dark bag. Replace
the magazine if paper scratches cannot be
remedied.
Yes
No
No
Yes
(A-7)
Processor Adjustment/Maintenance B. Processor Operation Condition
Setup.
If No for Rack auto cleaning is selected, it
is recommended that Yes be selected.
END
(A-5)
Problem may be in printer side (printer
boards).
(A-5)
boards).
(A-11)
Printer feed unit inspection
Remove the printer feed unit and pass paper
through the unit by hand.
Is paper scratched?
No
(A-20)
Yes
(A-19)
Yes
An unit may have malfunctioned.

Check and clean the suspected location of the
feed path.
Replace the unit if scratches cannot be
remedied.
No
(A-5)
Printer exit unit inspection.

Remove the printer exit unit and pass paper
Is paper scratched?
Yes
No
(A-26)
END
Yes

boards).
Sub-scanning unit inspection.

Remove the sub-scanning unit and pass paper
Is paper scratched?
No
(A-21)
Yes
Registration unit inspection.

Remove the registration unit and pass paper
Is paper scratched?
No
(A-5)
boards).
6.4 Vignetting
6.4.1 Vignetting (NC100AC)
Make sure there is no problem with the original and the carrier is installed correctly beforehand.
Vignetting (NC100AC) ?
No
To 6.4.2
Yes
(K-11)
Observing print images.
Check the vignette edge for unclearness or
jaggies. (Clearness: Printer exposure section
or image processing circuit boards)
(Unclearness or jaggies: Scanner or carrier)
Unclearness or jaggies at the end
Clearness
(K-12)
Pattern Printing.
Print Bordered contact test pattern
continuously.
Is the edge of print normal?
Yes
No
(K-21)
(K-13)
exposure section or image processing
circuit boards).
Try to follow White Border Imprecision item.
End
Go to White Border
Imprecision item list.
Confirming vignetting position.

Observe the film and print. Is vignetting top or
bottom when the film is in feed direction?
END
(K-2)
No
(K-3)
Connect the carrier to the plug-in

connector using the carrier extension cable
and open the upper cover. Execute 4.
Setup and Maintenance- 3. Scanner
Adjustment/Maintenance - F NC100AC
I/O Check ( NC100AC carrier only ).
Click [Mask motor]. Is the variable mask
operating properly?If the carrier extension
cable is not available, hear operating noise.
Yes
Yes
(K-7)
No
END
(K-6)
The CTC circuit board or variable mask
mechanism may have malfunctioned.
Check:
the CTC circuit board for correct input and
output voltages.
the variable mask for proper operation by
fingers.
Replace the CTC circuit board or variable
mask (or carrier) as necessary.

Scanner Adjustment/Maintenance - K
NC100AC Machine Data Setup
( NC100AC carrier only).
Fine adjust the correction value of mask home
position. Has the trouble now been remedied?

END
(K-31)
Yes

(K-8)
(K-8)
Yes
No
No
No
A1
Yes
To Section 6.8
Checking connection to the CTC circuit board.

Check the harness to the CTC circuit board for
necessary.
Check connector pins for bending.
No
END

Yes
END
6.4 Vignetting
A1
(K-5)
Confirming upper and lower masks.
Open the carrier upper cover and check the
upper and lower masks:
for bent?
for broken?
Replace the upper and lower masks as
necessary.
Yes
No
END
(K-1)
Carrier Adjustment/Maintenance - 1.
Mask Opening Position Correction to
adjust position.
Click [Measure] and adjust position using the
arrow keys.
Yes
No
END
(K-4)
Scanner Adjustment/Maintenance - E
Optical Axis Adjustment.
Execute Optical Axis Adjustment (a focus
chart jig is required).
Yes
No
END
(K-2)
Connect the carrier to the plug-in
connector using the carrier extension cable
and open the upper cover. Execute 4.
Setup and Maintenance- 3. Scanner
Adjustment/Maintenance - F NC100AC
I/O Check ( NC100AC carrier only ).
Click [Mask motor]. Is the variable mask
operating properly?
If the carrier extension cable is not available,
hear operating noise.
Yes
(K-7)
Scanner Adjustment/Maintenance - K
NC100AC Machine Data Setup
( NC100AC carrier only ).
Fine adjust the correction value of mask home
position.
No
(K-3)
Checking connection to the CTC circuit board.
Check the harness to the CTC circuit board for
necessary.
Check connector pins for bending.
Yes
No
Yes
END
(K-31)
No
END

Yes
(K-6)
The CTC circuit board or variable mask
mechanism may have malfunctioned.
Check:
the CTC circuit board for correct input and
output voltages.
the variable mask for proper operation by
fingers.
Replace the CTC circuit board or variable
mask (or carrier) as necessary.
No
(K-8)
No
(K-8)
Yes
END
END
6.4 Vignetting
6.4.2 Vignetting (M69D/Negative)

B
From 6.4.1
Vignetting (M69D/Negative) ?
No
To 6.4.3
Yes
(K-14)
Observe the film and print. Is vignetting right or
left-hand when the film is in feed direction?
Yes
B1
No
(K-16)
Is color of the vignetted edge black?
White
(K-17)
Black
(K-23)
Adjust the position of the film guide in the
carrier.
Confirming carrier position.

Remove the carrier and reinstall it correctly.
(Remove foreign matter.)
Yes
Yes
No
No
END
From 6.4.3
B2
Unclearness or
jaggies at the end
(K-28)
Inspecting the inside of the carrier.
Check the carrier upper mask and shading
parts for distortion. Remove dust and dirt from
the inside of the carrier.
Clean or replace the part or carrier as
necessary.
Yes
(K-19)
END
END
(K-8)

circuit boards).
Go to White Border
Yes
To Section 6.8
END
(K-31)
No
Yes
B3
(K-13)
Yes
No


Pattern Printing.
continuously. Is the edge of print normal?
No
No
(K-30)
Scanner Adjustment/Maintenance - E
Optical Axis Adjustment.
Execute Optical Axis Adjustment (a focus
chart jig is required).

or image processing circuit boards )
Clearness
No
(K-29)
Execute 4. Setup and Maintenance- 4. Carrier
Adjustment/Maintenance - 1. Mask Opening
Position Correction to adjust position.
Click [Measure] and adjust position using the
arrow keys.
END
(K-18)
Yes
END
End
END
6.4 Vignetting
B1
(K-15)
White
(K-24)
Black

or image processing circuit boards)
Clearness
B3
(K-35)
Does vignetting vary with frames to be
printed?
No
Yes
(K-25)
Confirming film position.
Adjust frame position by moving the film.
Yes
No
END
(K-26)
No
(K-27)
Yes
END
Unclearness or
jaggies at the end
B2
6.4 Vignetting
6.4.3 Vignetting (M69D/Reversal)

C
From 6.4.2
Vignetting (M69D/Reversal) ?
No
Yes
END
(K-10)
White
(K-20)
Black

Pattern Printing.
continuously. Is the edge of print normal?
(K-32)
Observe the film and print. Is vignetting right or
left-hand when the film is in feed direction?
No
No
Yes
(K-31)
Yes

(K-9)
No

Does vignetting vary with frames to be
printed?
No
Yes
END
(K-8)
Yes
(K-22)

Confirming film position.

Adjust frame position by moving the film.
Yes
No
END
(K-26)
(K-13)
Yes
No
END

circuit boards).
End
(K-27)
Go to White Border

To Section 6.8
(K-33)
Confirming carrier position.
Remove the carrier and reinstall it correctly.
(Remove foreign matter.)
Yes
No
END
(K-34)
Adjust film guide position in the carrier.
No
B2
To 6.4.2
Yes
END
END
6.5 Frame Misalignment

6.5.1 Frame misalignment in both monitor and print
Make sure there is no problem with the original and the carrier is installed correctly beforehand.
Frame misalignment in
prints, OK in monitor.

Frame misalignment both
in monitor and print.
(O-11)
240 film
135 film
Confirming the film

Select film-type from followings.
Others
(O-12)
(O-1)
Confirming the film.

The image range of 240 films is specified.
(Perforation right end to film center is 11.95
mm, width is 27.4 mm and height is 15.6 mm
based on center.)
Is misaligned frame out of the specified range?
Confirming setting of 2. Printing - Film

Scanner Op.(3).
Is Fixed length feed selected?
No
Yes
(O-2)
Yes
No
(O-13)
Confirming film.
Is frame length out of standard (38.1mm)?
The cause is in film.

Adjust position on the monitor
screen.
Yes
(O-3)
No
Changing setting of 2. Printing Scanner Op. (3).

Change to Frame detecting feed or adjust on
the monitor screen.
Yes
END
(O-9)
No
Confirming the film.

Check the film:
for too light image (image of fireworks, night
sky, darkness, etc.).
for unclearness start or end of the frame
(vertical white line, dark pole, etc. or fogging).
for silver halide film. (Above items may cause
frame misalignment).
Yes
(O-10)
No
Changing setting of 2. Printing Scanner Op. (3)

Change to Fixed length feed or adjust on the
monitor screen.
Yes
B
To 6.5.2
END
No (Frame
feed)
6.5 Frame Misalignment
6.5.2 Frame misalignment in prints, OK in monitor

B
From 6.5.2
(O-4)
Flaws in the film

guides
Checking the film and the inside of the

carrier.
Check the film:
for bent leading or trailing end.
for check tape attached over the perforations.
for splice tape left on.
for leading or trailing end cut diagonally.
for scratches and dust.
(Above items may cause frame misalignment.)
Check the film condition.
Clean the film guides in the carrier and check
them for flaws.
No flaws but frame misalignment

cannot be remedied.
The trouble has now

been remedied.
END
(O-8)
(O-5)
Faulty carrier.
Replace the carrier.
Yes
No
No
(O-7)
END

Carrier Adjustment/Maintenance - K.
NC100AC Machine Data Setup (or
SC135A Machine Data Setup.
Check the correction value. (Fine adjustment
of the correction value due to worn rubber
rollers and belts.) Change or adjust the setting
value.

Yes
No (Recur.)
END
(O-6)
The rubber rollers or belts may be faulty.
Replace the carrier or the rubber rollers, belts.
No
(O-7)
Yes
END
6.6 Graininess and Jaggedness

6.6.1 Overall graininess
The printer is much influenced by vibration. Make sure the cause of graininess and jaggedness is not
external vibration when scanning or exposing beforehand.
Jaggedness in large-size
prints. Jaggedness of
straight line.
To 6.6.2
Overall graininess.
(Z-1)
Actual printing with normal negative
(normal density)
Does graininess or jaggedness occur when
printing with normal negative (normal density)?
No
(Z-2)
Yes
The problem may be in film.

Correct sharpness or tone by clicking 2. Print Image Correction - Sharpness or Tone
Adjustment.
(Z-14)
Confirming setting value
Correct sharpness or tone by clicking 2. Print
- Image Correction - Sharpness or Tone
Adjustment.
Yes
No
END
(Z-3)
pattern Printing.
Print Borderless contact test pattern.
Is print normal?
Yes
A1
No
(Z-10)
Self-diagnosis - 3. Image Abnormality
Analyzer.
No
(Z-4)
Yes
END
A1
(Z-5)
CCD Data Display.
the monitor screen.
Do not stare the light source.
Light source burnt out

1/4 or more.
Light source burnt

Normal
(Z-13)
(Z-12)
Checking the connector of the LED circuit

board
Check the harness between the LED and the
CTC circuit boards for poor connection and

malfunctioned.
Yes
Yes
No
No
END
(Z-11)
malfunctioned.
END
(Z-16)
malfunctioned.
Yes
Yes
No
No
END
END
(Z-15)
(Z-9)
malfunctioned.
Yes
No

END
(Z-9)
(Z-7)
CCD Data Display.
Click [S/N value disp]. Does S/N value exceed
the standard value?
(Approximately 20 or more is normal.)
Yes
No
(Z-8)
S/N value is abnormal.
Replace the ADC circuit board, CDS circuit
board, power supply and CCD unit in this
order.
No
(Z-6)
Analyzer.
No
(Z-9)
boards).
Yes
END
Yes
END
6.6.2 Jaggedness in large-size prints/Jaggedness of

straight line
From 6.6.1
(G-6)
Pattern Printing.
Print grid test pattern. Observe the grid lines
with magnifier.
Is print normal?
No
B1
Yes
(G-1)
Check (Scanner).
Click [Piezoelectric actuator 1] or [Piezoelectric
actuator 2]. Does it operate properly?
No
(G-3)
Yes
Checking connectors between the

piezoelectric actuator 1/2 and the PZR
circuit board/CTC circuit board
Check the harness between the piezoelectric
actuator 1/2 and the PZR circuit board/CTC
circuit board for poor connection or open
circuit. Correct or repair as necessary.
(G-5)
Analyzer.
No
(G-2)
Yes
Yes
No
END
END
(G-4)
The PZR circuit board, CTC circuit board or
CCD unit (piezoelectric actuator 1/2) may
have malfunctioned.
Check the following items.
Does voltage input/output normally from the
CTC circuit board?
Does voltage input/output normally from PZR
circuit board?
Replace the CTC circuit board, PZR circuit
board or CCD unit as necessary.
No
(G-2)
Yes
END
B1
(G-7)
Observing test print (grid)
Are there jaggedness lines spacing 0.17 mm in
parallel to feed direction and left-hand darker
when the leading end is positioned up?
No
(G-8)
Yes
Observing test print (grid)

Is each color misaligned?
(G-11)
No
No
Yes
Yes
(G-10)
END
Try to follow items for Color Misalignment.
End.
(G-12)
boards).
Go to items for
Color Misalignment.
END
To Section 6.2
(G-9)
Analyzer.
Yes
(G-12)
boards).
No
END
6.7 Streaks
Streaks herein is limited to the cause in the printer side ( printer, processor, exposure section and image processing section ) . Refer to
Scratches for streaks caused by scanner side ( scanner, carrier and image processing section ) . Print a test pattern ( gray contact ) to
determine whether the cause is in scanner side or printer side. If the test pattern print is normal, the cause is in the scanner side.
To 6.7.1
Streak perpendicular to feed direction
(53 mm spacing)?
Yes
Definition of term
Pitch streaks (Several streaks spacing in
unit of mm by observing with a magnifier)
Clear streak (Streak with clear edges)
Blurred streak (Streak with blurred edges)
No
To 6.7.2
(60 mm spacing)?
Yes
No
To 6.7.3
(black blurred streak at 2 mm of leading end)?
Yes
No
To 6.7.4
( black blurred streak at 13 mm of
leading end)?
Yes
6.7.1 Streak perpendicular to

feed direction (53mm
spacing)
D
A
No
To 6.7.5
Streaks perpendicular to feed direction
(pitch streaks within 0 to 40 mm of
leading end)?
Yes
No
To 6.7.6
(white clear streak at 4 mm of
trailing end)?
Yes
No
(S-29)
Probable causes are faulty bearings, loose
bearings/sub-scanning rollers and fouling
sub-scanning rollers.
Check for:
faulty bearings.
loose bearings/sub-scanning rollers.
fouling sub-scanning rollers.
Replace the sub-scanning unit if necessary.
To 6.7.7
(white/black blurred streak at 13 mm of
trailing end)?
Yes
To 6.7.8
Yes
No
To 6.7.9
(black blurred streak at 23 mm of trailing end)?
Yes
No
To 6.7.10
(pitch streaks within 0 to 25 mm and at 33 mm
of trailing end)?
Yes
No
To 6.7.11
(pitch streaks at 48 mm of trailing end)?
Yes
No
To 6.7.12
(pitch streaks at 52 mm and 68 mm of
trailing end)?
Yes
No
To 6.7.13
(pitch streaks at 72 mm and 88 mm of
trailing end)?
(S-13)
No
(white clear streak at 13 mm of trailing end)?
No
Yes
Yes
END
6.7 Streaks
6.7.2 Streak perpendicular to feed direction (60mm spacing)

B
(S-1)
Pattern Printing.
Print several Borderless contact test pattern
sheets.
Are prints normal?
No
Yes
(S-2)
Analyzer.
Yes
No
END
(S-3)
(S-4)
Performing 3. Post-operational Check.
Wash the crossover racks and perform Postoperational Check.
Yes
No
(S-6)
Washing the processing racks
Wash the processing racks.
No (streaks weaken but remain.)
Yes
No (streaks are not changed.)

(S-7)
(S-5)
The crossover racks or processing racks

may have malfunctioned.
Replace the rollers.
Confirming processor setting

It is recommended that Yes be selected for
Rack auto washing and Auto intermittent
drive in menu 4. Setup and Maintenance 6. Processor Adjustment/Maintenance - B.
Processor Operation Setup. Perform
periodical inspection and maintenance.
Yes
No
END
(S-9)
boards).
(S-8)
Analyzer.
No
(S-9)
boards).
Yes
END
6.7 Streaks
6.7.3 Streak perpendicular to feed direction (Black blurred

streak at 2mm of leading end)
C
(S-11)
The registration loop time may be
insufficient.
Fine adjust by changing the fine adjustment
value of top registration loop in menu 4. Setup
and Maintenance - 5. Printer
Adjustment/Maintenance - M. Printer
Mechanism Fine Adjustment.
Yes
No
END
(S-12)
Probable causes are faulty registration nip
pressure, improper backlash of registration
drive motor gears and damaged gears.
Check the registration unit:
for damaged roller, spring, nip release motor,
nip release cam or nip release gears.
for damaged registration drive motor and
gears.
Replace the damaged parts or registration unit
as necessary.
Yes
No
END
(S-14)
Analyzer.
No
(S-13)
Yes
END
6.7 Streaks
6.7.4 Streak perpendicular to feed direction (Black blurred

streak at 13mm of leading end)
D
(S-16)
Printer Adjustment/Maintenance - M.
Printer Mechanism Fine Adjustment.
Fine adjust the sub-scanning nip roller 2 nip
timing by changing the value.
Yes
No
END
(S-15)
Probable causes are improper subscanning 2nd roller nip timing, damaged
sub-scanning 2nd roller nip release
mechanism and improper roller nipping.
Check the sub-scanning 2nd roller nip release
for:
damaged nip release cam.
damaged nip home position sensor.
damaged nip release arm.
worn or damaged bearings.
damaged nip release belt and gears.
damaged nip rollers.
Repair or replace the parts or subscanning unit if required.
Yes
No
END
(S-14)
Analyzer.
No
(S-13)
Yes
END
6.7 Streaks
6.7.5 Streaks perpendicular to feed direction (Pitch streaks

within 0 to 40mm of leading end)
E
(S-17)
Printer Adjustment/Maintenance - A. I/O
Check (Printer).
Open the cover, release interlocking and drive
the sub-scanning nip motor (M311).
Does the roller release nip normally?
Yes
No
(S-18)
Probable causes are vibration of subscanning nip release motor and damaged
sub-scanning 2nd roller nip release
mechanism.
Check sub-scanning 2nd roller nip release
mechanism for:
faulty nip release motor (M311).
faulty PDC circuit board.
improper drive timing belt tension (nip release
belt tension).
damaged, distorted or worn pulley.
damaged, distorted or worn nip release gears.
worn nip release cam.
broken nip release arm or out of position.
broken nip release belt.
Adjust or replace the parts as necessary.
Yes
No
END
(S-19)
The sub-scanning unit may have
malfunctioned.
Replace the sub-scanning unit.
Yes
No
END
(S-14)
Analyzer.
No
(S-13)
Yes
END
6.7 Streaks
6.7.6 Streaks perpendicular to feed direction (White clear

streak at 4mm of trailing end)
F
(S-20)
Probable causes are faulty nip roller,
distorted or broken nip roller bracket, and
jamming foreign matter.
Check the nip rollers for proper movement or
jammed foreign matter.
Remove foreign matter or replace the subscanning unit.
Yes
No
END
(S-14)
Analyzer.
No
(S-13)
Yes
END
6.7 Streaks
6.7.7 Streaks perpendicular to feed direction (White/black

blurred streak at 13mm of trailing end)
G
(S-21)
Paper curling may be too much.
Check paper curling.
Replace paper if necessary.
Yes
No
END
(S-22)
Probable causes are distorted nip roller
bracket or paper guide.
Check the nip roller bracket and guides for
distortion.
Repair or replace the parts as necessary.
Yes
No
END
(S-14)
Analyzer.
No
(S-13)
Yes
END
6.7 Streaks
6.7.8 Streaks perpendicular to feed direction (White clear

H
(S-23)
Check (Printer).
Does the roller release nip normally?
Yes
(S-25)
No

Printer Mechanical Fine Adjustment.
Fine adjust the sub-scanning nip roller 1 nip
timing by changing the value.
No
(S-24)
Probable causes are improper subscanning 1st roller nip release timing,
damaged sub-scanning 1st roller nip
release mechanism and improper roller
nipping.
Check the sub-scanning 1st roller nip release
for:
distorted or damaged nip release cam.
nip home position sensor out of position.
out of position or damaged nip release arm.
Yes
No
END
(S-14)
Analyzer.
No
(S-13)
Yes
END
Yes
END
6.7 Streaks
6.7.9 Streaks perpendicular to feed direction (Black blurred

I
(S-35)
Probable causes are incorrect subscanning guide height (distorted
registration side), incorrect feeding form
the registration unit to the sub-scanning
unit, incorrect nip roller height and
incorrect sub-scanning 1st roller nip
release height.
Check for:
feeding from the registration unit to the subscanning unit.
nip roller height.
sub-scanning roller nip release height.
Replace the sub-scanning unit if necessary.
Yes
No
END
(S-14)
Analyzer.
No
(S-13)
Yes
END
6.7 Streaks
6.7.10 Streaks perpendicular to feed direction (Pitch streaks

within 0 to 25mm and at 33mm of trailing end)
J
(S-26)
Check (Printer).
Does the roller move correctly? Is abnormal
noise heard?
Yes
No
(S-27)
Probable causes are vibration of subscanning nip release motor and damaged
sub-scanning 1st roller nip release
mechanism.
Check sub-scanning 1st roller nip release
mechanism for:
improper drive timing belt tension (nip release
belt tension).
damaged, distorted or worn pulley.
damaged, distorted or worn nip release gears.
broken nip release arm or out of position.
broken nip release belt.
Replace the parts as necessary.
Yes
No
END
(S-19)
malfunctioned.
Yes
No
END
(S-14)
No
(S-13)
Yes
END
6.7 Streaks
6.7.11 Streaks perpendicular to feed direction (Pitch streaks at

48mm of trailing end)
K
(S-30)
Check (Printer).
the registration drive motor (M304).
Do the rollers move normally? Is abnormal
noise heard?
Yes
No
(S-31)
Probable causes are vibration of registration
drive motor and interference between the
sub-scanning unit and the registration unit.
Check the registration unit for:
faulty registration drive motor (M304).
damaged registration drive gears.
interference between the sub-scanning unit
and the registration unit.
Replace the parts if necessary.
Yes
No
END
(S-19)
malfunctioned.
Yes
No
END
(S-14)
Analyzer.
No
(S-13)
Yes
END
6.7 Streaks

52mm and 68 mm of trailing end)
L
(S-33)
Check (Printer).
the registration nip motor (M309).
Do the registration rollers move normally? Is
abnormal noise heard?
Yes
No
(S-34)
Probable causes are vibration of the nip
release motor and damaged registration
nip release mechanism.
Check the registration nip and release
mechanism for:
damaged, distorted or worn nip release gear.
missing or damaged arm.
Yes
END
No
(S-19)
malfunctioned.
Yes
No
END
(S-14)
Analyzer.
No
(S-13)
Yes
END
6.7 Streaks

72mm and 88 mm of trailing end)
M
(S-32)
Check (Printer).
the registration drive motor (M309).
Do the pre-registration rollers move normally?
Is abnormal noise heard?
Yes
No
(S-28)
Probable causes are vibration of preregistration motor and damaged
registration nip release mechanism.
Check the pre-registration nip and release
mechanism for:
damaged, distorted or worn nip release gear.
missing or damaged arm.
Yes
END
No
(S-19)
malfunctioned.
Yes
No
END
(S-14)
Analyzer.
No
(S-13)
Yes
END
6.8 White Border Imprecision

6.8.1 White border imprecision (Shifted in feed direction)
White border imprecision herein is limited to the causes in the printer side (printer, exposure section and image processing section).
Refer to Vignetting for border imprecision caused by scanner side (scanner, carrier and image processing section). Print a test
pattern (bordered gray contact) to determine whether the cause is in scanner side or printer side. If the border of the test pattern is
normal, the cause may be in the scanner side.
Border imprecision ( Shifted in feeding

direction ) ?
No
To 6.8.2
Yes
(B-2)
Measuring feed direction length of print.
Is feed length of border imprecision print out of
specified value?
Perform test print.
No
(B-6)
Yes
Measuring image length (feed direction)

Measure image length in feed direction of
border imprecision print. Is it out of specified
value?
The image should be 10 mm less than print
length because normal border is 5 mm.
(B-3)
Printer Adjustment/Maintenance - 2.
Printer Feed Length Adjustment.
Perform feed length fine adjustment.
Yes
A1
No
(B-10)
No
END
(B-4)
The magazine may have malfunctioned.
Check the magazine for:
faulty spool.
faulty magazine nip roller.
improperly setting paper.
Replace the parts or magazine as necessary.
Yes
Yes

Sync. Rough Adjustment.
Check Top measured value of Feeding
direction ( sub-scanning position ) and set up
correctly.
Yes
No
END
(B-17)
No
(B-9)
Problem may be in printer side (exposure
section or image processing circuit boards).
END

Analyzer.
No
(B-9)
Yes
END
A1
(B-7)
Adjust image length on the sub-scanning feed
speed fine adjustment screen.
Yes
No
END
(B-18)
Analyzer.
Yes
No
END
(B-8)
The sub-scanning unit (paper slipping at
the rollers) may have malfunctioned.
Check the sub-scanning unit for faulty or
fouling rollers.
Clean the rollers or replace the parts or unit.
No
(B-9)
Yes
END
6.8.2 White border imprecision (Shifted perpendicular to feed

direction)
B
From 6.8.1
Border imprecision ( Shifted perpendicular to

feeding direction ) ?
No
Yes
(B-13)
Paper Magazine Registration.
Check the magazine ID matches to paper
width and correct the registration.
Yes
No
END
(B-12)
Sync. Rough Adjustment.
Check Left measured value and Right
measured value of Width direction (main
scanning position) and set up correctly.
Yes
No
END
(B-14)
Printer Adjustment/Maintenance - S. Side
Registration Calibration.
Perform Side Registration Calibration.
Yes
No
END
(B-11)
Analyzer.
Yes
No
END
(B-15)
The registration unit may have
malfunctioned.
Check the registration unit for out of position or
worn width detecting belt or pulley and faulty
width sensor housing (too much sliding
friction). Check the laser unit for malfunction.
Correct or replace the parts or unit.
No
(B-9)
Yes
END
To 6.8.3
6.8.3 White border imprecision (Inclination)

C
From 6.8.2
Border imprecision ( Inclination ) ?
No
Yes
END
(B-5)
Confirming back printing position.
Is the center of back printing (center of two
lines) out of the center of paper?
No
(B-20)
Yes

Fine adjust the top registration loop by
changing the fine adjustment value.
(B-16)
The printer feed unit or magazine may have
malfunctioned.
Check the paper feeding route from the paper
feeding section to the back printer for cause to
misalign paper.
Repair or replace the parts or unit as
necessary.
No
(B-9)
Yes
Yes
No
END
(B-19)
END

Analyzer.

Yes
No
END
(B-1)
Probable cause: faulty registration unit,
faulty sub-scanning unit or improperly
installed laser unit.
Check registration, sub-scanning and laser
units for following items:
out of position or broken registration section
spring
damaged registration section rollers
broken nip release cam, broken bearings and
out of position or broken arm
faulty registration drive gear
improperly installed registration unit
out of position or broken sub-scanning spring
broken sub-scanning roller or nip release cam
broken nip release arm or bearing
improperly installed laser unit
Replace parts or unit as necessary.
No
(B-9)
Yes
END
6.9 Spots
Blurred spots?
No
Yes
Clear spot in fixed place for every prints?
(T-1)
Checking diffusion box.
Check the diffusion box for dusty or damage
and clean it. Replace the diffusion box if
necessary. Perform Pre-operational Check.
No
(T-2)
No
A1
Yes
Yes
(T-3)
END

CCD Data Display.
Repeat bright correction ON/OFF. Do white
spots appear only when turning ON bright
correction?

Yes
No
(T-4)
Perform Pre-operational Check
again to recreate bright correction
data.
Has the trouble now been
remedied?
No
END
(T-5)
Analyzer.
Yes
No
END
(T-7)
Probable causes are dusty CCD cover
glass and faulty CCD pixels.
Replace the CCD unit.
No
(T-2)
Yes
END
Yes
6.9 Spots
A1
(T-9)
Checking carrier type
Is the problem carrier M69D?
No
Yes
(T-10)
Checking light-shield cover installation
Has printing be done with the light-shield
cover?
Yes
No
(T-11)
Retouch processing may be operated
improperly.
Intall the light-shield cover.
No
Clear spots in different place for every print?
No
Yes
Yes
(T-8)
END
Probable causes are dust, stain or defect

on the film.
Clean the film and inside of the carrier. If there
is scratch on the film, execute 2. Print Image Correction - Scratch erasing.
Yes
No
END
(T-2)
Patterned spots?
Yes
(T-6)
Analyzer.
No
(T-2)
Yes
END

6.10.1 Repeated calibrations do not improve the result.
Repeated calibrations do not improve the

result?
No
To 6.10.2
Yes
(N-1)
Paper Magazine Registration.
Check to see that the magazine ID agrees with
color paper type (A to I) and reset up if
necessary. Check the time limit of paper. If it
has passed the time limit, color may not be
obtained. Confirm the time limit of paper.
Yes
No
END
(N-2)
Analyzer.
Yes
No
END
(N-8)
No
(N-10)
Yes
Try to follow the items of Developer

Degradation of Others
(N-3)
The densitometer or AOM driver may have
malfunctioned.
Replace the densitometer or AOM driver.
Go to Others item list.
Yes
To Section 6.13
No
(N-4)
END
End.
END
6.10.2 Calibration print density is too low to be measured.

B
From 6.10.1
Calibration print density is too low to be

measured?
No
To 6.10.3
Yes
(N-5)
Click [Initialize] and perform calibration print.
Is density normal?
Yes
(N-6)
No

Perform density measurement.
Yes
No
END
(N-7)
Analyzer.
Yes
No
END
(N-9)
No
(N-10)
Yes
Try to follow the items of Developer

degradation of Others.
(N-11)
No
(N-4)
Go to Other item list.
Yes
END
To Section 6.13
End.
END
6.10.3 Color becomes worse after calibration. Paper cannot

be fed in Densitometer.
From 6.10.2
Color becomes worse after calibration. Paper

cannot be fed in densitometer?
No
Yes
END
(N-13)
Cleaning the densitometer.
Clean the white board. Replace the white
board if dirt cannot be removed.
Yes
No
END
(N-12)
The densitometer may have malfunctioned.
Replace the densitometer.
No
(N-4)
Yes
END
6.11 Focus Problems

6.11.1 Overall blur
Make sure the original is not out of focus beforehand.
Overall blur?
No
To 6.11.2
Yes
(P-1)
Checking the carrier, carrier base and
carrier table
Check the carrier, carrier base and carrier
table for incorrect setting.
Reinstall the carrier.
Remove foreign matter from bottom of the
carrier and between the carrier and the carrier
base.
Check carrier and carrier table for incorrect
contact.
Clean or repair if necessary.
Yes
No
END
(P-2)
Confirm setting of 2. Print - Image
Correction - Sharpness.
Select setting for higher sharpness if it is low.
Yes
No
END
(P-3)
Execute 2. Print - Input Operation Frame AF.
Select Frame AF for the frame that print has
been out of focus and reprint.
Yes
(P-4)
No
Problem is in the film.

Print the film using Frame AF function.
(P-5)
Confirm with the other carrier.
Does the same trouble occur with the other
carrier?
No (or there is
no other carrier.)
A1
Yes
A2
6.11 Focus Problems
A1
(P-6)
Checking the upper mask, lower mask and
pressure plate.
Open the upper cover and check the upper
and lower masks and upper cover for:
loose upper mask mounting screws and
missing E-rings.
incorrectly installed upper and lower masks.
smooth movement of upper mask and upper
cover.
Replace the upper or lower mask, or pressure
plate.
Yes
No
END
(P-7)
Carrier Adjustment/Maintenance - F.
NC100AC I/O Check (M69D I/O
Check/SC135A I/O Check).
Click [ON] and [OFF] for Pressure solenoid
alternately and check for normal operation
(hear operation noise).
Normal (No other carrier)
Normal (There is other carrier.)
(P-10)
Abnormal or noise
A2
Problem is in the carrier.

(P-8)
Checking the connector to the CTC circuit

board
Check the harness between the CTC circuit
board and the carrier for poor connection or
Yes
No
END
(P-9)
The CTC circuit board or solenoid may
have malfunctioned.
Check the CTC circuit board and solenoid for
the following items.
Check the input voltage from the CTC circuit
board.
Open the carrier cover, execute 4. Setup and
Maintenance - 4. Carrier
Adjustment/Maintenance - F. NC100AC I/O
Check and check the solenoid for proper
operation by using a steel piece and clicking
[ON] and [OFF] for Pressure Solenoid
(extension cable and steel piece should be
prepared).
Replace the CTC circuit board or solenoid (or
carrier) as necessary.
No
(P-10)
Yes
END
6.11 Focus Problems
A2
(P-11)
Check (Scanner).
Click [Home] and [Maximum] for Conjugate
length variable and Lens home position.
Check for incorrect operation or abnormal
noise due to interference of the cover to the
scanner or loss of synchronism.
Abnormal or noise
(P-12)
Normal
(P-16)
Scanner Adjustment/Maintenance - 2.
Focus Calibration.
Click Table Creation. (To make sure the table
can be created without performing optical
calibration).
Normal
Yes

Check (Scanner).
Click [Home] and [Maximum] for Conjugate
length variable and Lens home position
alternately. Check the conjugate variable
length section gears and lens unit for proper
operation. ( Replace the scanner cover if the
scanner interferences to it.)
Trouble has now

been remedied.
Abnormal
No
END
END
(P-13)
(P-17)
Analyzer.
Confirming the connectors to the CTC

circuit board.
Check the harness between the conjugate
variable length section/lens unit to the CTC
circuit board for poor connection or open
Yes
No
END
Yes
(P-18)
No

Pattern Printing.
Print grid test pattern (3 color level values:20).
Then check grid using a magnifier.
The CTC circuit board, conjugate variable

length motor/gears or lens unit may have
malfunctioned.
Check the CTC circuit board, conjugate
variable length motor/gears or lens unit for
following items.
board.
Check the conjugate variable length
motor/gears and lens unit for pinching foreign
matter or loss of synchronism.
Replace the CTC circuit board, conjugate
variable length motor/gears or lens unit as
necessary.
Normal
(P-21)
(P-19)
Each color
line is shifted.
Try to follow the items of Color

misalignment.
End.
No
(P-15)
Go to items of Color
Misalignment
(P-20)
Lines are
jaggedness.
Problem is in the scanner.
To Section 6.2
Try to follow the items of Graininess

and Jaggedness.
End.
Go to items of Graininess
and Jaggedness
(P-27)
Grid lines are
out of focus.
To Section 6.6
The developer may be degraded.

Try to follow items of setting check when
the developer degraded of Others
item.
Go to list of Others.
To Section 6.13
END
(P-14)
End.
END
Yes
END
6.11 Focus Problems
6.11.2 Blur along the periphery

B
From 6.11.1
Partial blur?
No
To 6.11.3
Yes
(P-22)
Checking the carrier, carrier base and table
Check the carrier, carrier base and carrier
table for incorrect setting.
Reinstall the carrier.
Remove foreign matter from bottom of the
carrier and between the carrier and the carrier
base.
Check carrier and carrier table for incorrect
contact.
Check the carrier, carrier base and table for
inclination.
Clean or repair as necessary.
Yes
No
END
(P-23)
Install the carrier occurred out of side
focus and execute 4. Setup and
Maintenance - 3. Scanner
Adjustment/Maintenance - B. Carrier
Inclination Display.
Measure carrier quantitative inclination. Check
the vertical and horizontal values are within
the standard value (standard value: less than
15). If they exceed the standard value, the
scanner or carrier is inclined. Measure carrier
inclination using the other carrier.
Value exceeds the standard

value but value for the other
carrier is OK.
Value exceeds
the standard value
for both carrier.
(P-24)
The lens or CCD unit may have
malfunctioned.
The lens or CCD unit may be inclined. Replace
the lens unit or CCD unit.
No
(P-21)
Yes
END
B1
6.11 Focus Problems
B1
(P-25)
Checking the upper and lower mask and
pressure plate.
Open the upper cover and check the upper
and lower masks and upper cover for:
loose upper mask mounting screws and
missing E-rings.
incorrectly installed upper and lower masks.
smooth movement of upper mask and upper
cover.
Replace the upper or lower mask, or pressure
plate.
Yes
No
END
(P-26)
Normal
(No other
carrier)

Carrier Adjustment/Maintenance - F.
NC100AC I/O Check (M69D I/O
Check/SC135A I/O Check).
Click [ON] and [OFF] for Pressure solenoid
alternately and check for normal operation
(hear operation noise).
Abnormal or noise
(P-8)
Normal (There is
other carrier.)
Checking the connector to the CTC circuit

board
Check the harness between the CTC circuit
board and the carrier for poor connection or
(P-28)
The carrier may have malfunctioned.
Replace the carrier.
No
(P-21)
Yes
Yes
No
END
END
(P-9)
The CTC circuit board or solenoid may
have malfunctioned.
Check the CTC circuit board and solenoid for
the following items.
board.
Open the carrier cover, execute 4. Setup and
Maintenance - 4. Carrier
Adjustment/Maintenance - F. NC100AC I/O
Check and check the solenoid for proper
operation by using a steel piece and clicking
[ON] and [OFF] for Pressure Solenoid
(extension cable and steel piece should be
prepared).
Replace the CTC circuit board or solenoid (or
carrier) as necessary.
No
(P-10)
Yes
END
6.11 Focus Problems
6.11.3 Periphery blur

From 6.11.2
Periphery blur?
No
Yes
END
(P-29)
Confirming film curling.
Check the film for excessive curling.
Is curling normal?
No
(P-30)
Yes
Problem is in the film.
(P-21)
6.12 Unevenness
6.12.1 Regular unevenness perpendicular to feeding direction
(mm spacing)
External (inside or outside of the printer) vibration may cause print unevenness. Check for processor driving vibration, sub-scanning
unit interference with the printer exit unit, abnormal noise and installation condition beforehand.
Regular unevenness
in feed direction
(mm spacing)
To 6.12.2
Regular unevenness
perpendicular to feeding
direction (mm spacing)
(M-1)
Pattern Printing.
Print several Borderless contact (each color)
test pattern sheets. (Print each color contact
by changing output level of each color.)
Are prints normal?
No
(M-2)
Yes
No
(M-6)
Analyzer.
It will take approximately 10 minutes.Is a
solution to the problem found?
Observing prints.
Does unevenness occur only on cyan contact
print?
Yes
Yes
(M-8)
No
END
(M-7)

Analyzer.
It will take approximately 10 minutes.Is a
solution to the problem found?

Yes
No
END
(M-9)
(M-3)
Yes
No

Analyzer.
(M-10)
Yes

malfunctioned.
No
END
No
(M-4)
malfunctioned.
(M-11)
Yes
No
Problem may be in printer exposure section or

image processing circuit boards.
END
(M-5)
No
(M-11)
Problem may be in printer exposure section or
image processing circuit boards.
END
Yes
END
Yes
END
6.12 Unevenness
6.12.2 Regular unevenness in feed direction (mm spacing)

B
From 6.12.1
(M-15)
Check (Printer).
the sub-scanning drive motor (M305).
Does the motor operate normally? Is abnormal
noise heard? Does the motor vibrate
excessively?
No
(M-12)
Yes
The sub-scanning drive motor may vibrate.

Replace the sub-scanning motor.
No
(M-16)
The drive steel belt or rubber belt drive
system may have malfunctioned.
Check the sub-scanning unit for:
off center or bent drive steel belt.
off center or worn rubber belt.
faulty large pulley.
tensioner maladjustment.
Correct or replace the parts or sub-scanning
unit as necessary.
Yes
No
END
(M-13)
Analyzer.
No
(M-14)
Yes
END
Yes
END
6.13 Others
6.13.1 Setup confirmation when developer degraded
(Developer Degradation)
Setup confirmation when developer degraded. (Developer Degradation)
(V-1)
Developer may be degraded.
Replace all processing solutions.
After replacement, confirm processor setting.
End.
Confirm
processor setting.
END
(V-2)
Confirming number of processing prints
Check that the number of processing prints
per day is less than the minimum number of
processing prints (standard number of
processing prints: 353 (3R)).
If it is less than the standard, increase quantity
of prints.
End.
Confirm next setting.
END
(V-3)
Processor Adjustment/Maintenance - 5.
Evaporation Correction Rate Setting.
Check that YES is selected for Evaporation
Correction.
Change to YES if NO is selected.
End.
END
(V-4)
Processor Adjustment/Maintenance - B.
Processor Operation Condition Setup.
Check that YES is selected for Rack auto
cleaning.
Change to YES if NO is selected.
End.
END
(V-5)
Processor Adjustment/Maintenance - F.
Installation Operation.
Check that CP-48S is selected for
Processing type.
Change to CP-48S if the other is selected.
End.
END
(V-6)
Processing Temperature Setting.
Check that setting temperatures are default
values. If not, change them to the default
values.
Default values:
P1:38.5 P2:38.0 PS:38.0
End.
END
(V-7)
Replenisher Rate Setting.
Check that setting replenisher rates are default
values. If not, change them to the default
values.
Default values:
P1R:45.0 P2R:35.0 PSR:175.0
A1
End.
END
6.13 Others
A1
(V-8)
Pump Output Measurement/Setting.
Measure pump outputs. Are actual outputs
within pluses and minuses 20% of the default
values? Are the pumps operating normally?
(No or too little output is abnormal.)
Default values:
When 50Hz
P1R: 54.0
P2RA: 54.0
P2RB: 54.0
PSR: 57.0
(When 60Hz,50Hz default value multiplied by
1.2)
Yes
(V-9)
No
Confirmation of setting values is completed.
(V-10)
Checking the replenisher pump connector
Does AC100V exist at the replenisher pump
connector. (Check the harness for loose
connection and open circuit.)
Yes
(V-11)
No
The replenisher pump may have

malfunctioned.
Replace the replenisher pump.
No
(V-12)
Confirming the CTP circuit board for
correct voltage
Are input and output voltage of the CTC circuit
board normal?
yes
No
(V-14)
The CTP circuit board may have
malfunctioned.
Replace the CTP circuit board.
Yes
No
END
(V-13)
Confirming the PAC circuit board for
correct voltage
Are input and output voltage of the PAC circuit
board normal?
Yes
No
(V-15)
The PAC circuit board may have
malfunctioned.
Replace the PAC circuit board.
No
(V-16)
Check the harness between the power supply
and the replenisher pump again.
Yes
END
Yes
END
7. OPERATION SECTION
Parts Location
7.1 Monitor
7.1.1
Monitor Replacement
7.2 Mouse/Keyboard
7.2.1
7.2.2
7.2.3
7.2.4
Mouse Replacement
Table Top Cover Removal/Reinstallation
Keyboard Replacement
Light Table (Optional) Replacement
Parts Location
Monitor
Tble Top Cover
Light Table
Keyboard
CD879
7.1 Monitor
7.1.1 Monitor Replacement
Removal
1. Shut down the system after
performing the postoperational checks and turn
OFF the built-in circuit
breaker and the main power
supply.
Screws (4)
Monitor Supports
2. Loosen the four screws

securing the monitor
supports.
CD460
7.1 Monitor
3. Cut the two cord ties

securing the monitor cable.
4. Disconnect the monitor
cable connector.
Monitor
Monitor Power
Supply Cable
5. Disconnect the monitor

power cable from the
monitor.
6. Remove the monitor and
monitor stand.
Cord Ties
Monitor Cable
Connector
CD1093
7.1 Monitor
Installation
Installation is essentially in the
reverse order of removal.
NOTE: Loop the monitor cable as
shown and secure it using
the cord ties.
After installation, perform
the following adjustments.
1) Adjust monitor color and
density
Cord Ties
(see monitor instruction

manual).
2) Menu 426 Monitor

Adjustment
Monitor Cable
CD1094
7.2 Mouse/Keyboard
7.2.1 Mouse Replacement
Removal
1. Disconnect the mouse cable
from the connector on the
bracket.
Monitor Cable
CD864
7.2 Mouse/Keyboard
2. Pass the mouse cable

through the hole in the
tablemat.
Mouse Cable
Tablemat
CD1095
7.2 Mouse/Keyboard
Installation
Groove/Cable
Mouse
NOTE: Place the mouse on the right

end of the table and insert its
cable along the groove in the
table as shown.
CD838
7.2 Mouse/Keyboard
7.2.2 Table Top Cover Removal/Reinstallation

Removal
Screws (4)
1. Remove:
Front upper cover
Monitor
Mouse
Printer Rear Cover
2. Remove the four screws and
then the monitor stand.
Monitor Stand
CD1109
7.2 Mouse/Keyboard
3. Remove the two screws and

then the mouse cable
bracket.
Mouse Cable Bracket
Screws (2)
CD863
7.2 Mouse/Keyboard
4. Disconnect the JNDL1 and

JKEY1 connectors.
JNDL1
JKEY1
CD008
7.2 Mouse/Keyboard

then the manual film carrier
release lever.
Manual Film Carrier Release Lever
6. Remove the table mat.

7. Remove the five screws and
then the table top cover.
Reinstallation
Reinstall the cover in the
Screws (2)
Table Mat
CD462
7.2 Mouse/Keyboard
7.2.3 Keyboard Replacement

Removal
Tapping Screws (4)
1. Remove the table top cover

2. Disconnect the connector
from the keyboard.
3. Remove the four tapping
screws and then the
keyboard.
Installation
Install the keyboard in the
Keyboard
Connector
CD464
7.2 Mouse/Keyboard
7.2.4 Light Table (Optional) Replacement

Removal
the built-in circuit breaker
and the main power supply
OFF.
Light Table Cover

Screw
2. Remove the screw and then

the light table cover.
CD841
7.2 Mouse/Keyboard

and remove the light table.
Light Table
Connector
CD840-1
7.2 Mouse/Keyboard
Installation
NOTE: Insert the harness into the
opening in the table top cover
as shown.
Light Table Harness
CD840-2
8. FILM CARRIER SECTION

Parts Location
8.1 Auto Film Carrier NC100AC
(Upper Cover Section)
8.1.1
8.1.2
Carrier Upper Cover Removal/Reinstallation

135 Leading End Sensor LED (D101L) Replacement
8.1.3
135 Downstream Perforation Sensor LED
(D103L) Replacement
8.1.4
135 Entrance Pressure Guide Removal/Reinstallation
8.1.5
135 Frame Sensor LED (D107L) (FSP Circuit
Board) Replacement
8.1.6
135 Upstream Perforation/Check Tape/Rear
Fogging/Front Fogging Sensor LED (LEF22
Circuit Board) Replacement
8.1.7
135 Entrance Pressure Guide Section Roller
Replacement
8.1.8
135 Entrance Side Dust Removal Roller Replacement
8.1.9
IX240 TAP & Leading End Sensor LED
(D104L) Replacement
8.1.10 IX240 Perforation Sensor LED (D105L) Replacement
8.1.11
8.1.12
8.1.13
8.1.14
8.1.15
8.1.16
8.1.17
8.1.18
8.1.19
8.1.20
8.1.21
8.1.22
Write Head Circuit Board Replacement

Read Head Circuit Board Replacement
Reading Magnetic Head (D116) Replacement
Writing Magnetic Head (MG101) Replacement
IX240 Entrance Pressure Guide Removal/Reinstallation
IX240 Rear/Front Unexposed Frame Sensor
LED (D108L/D109L) (LEB22 Circuit Board) Replacement
IX240 Entrance Pressure Guide Section Roller
Replacement
IX240 Entrance Side Dust Removal Roller Replacement
Dummy Head Replacement
Exit Pressure Guide Removal/Reinstallation
Exit Pressure Guide Section Roller Replacement
Film Mask Replacement
8.2 Auto Film Carrier NC100AC

(Main Body Section)
8.2.1
8.2.2
Plug-in Connector Section Cover Removal/

Reinstallation
Bottom Cover Removal/Reinstallation
8.2.3
8.2.4
8.2.5
8.2.6
8.2.7
8.2.8
8.2.9
8.2.10
8.2.11
8.2.12
8.2.13
8.2.14
8.2.15
8.2.16
8.2.17
8.2.18
Bottom Left Cover Removal/Reinstallation

Bottom Inner Cover Removal/Reinstallation
Indicator Lamp (L101) Replacement
Upper Cover Open/Close Sensor (D120)
(MSA22 Circuit Board) Replacement
Input Key 1 to 4 (D124 to D127) Replacement
CYS22 Circuit Board Removal/Reinstallation
Solenoid (S101) Replacement
135 Lower Mask H/F Sensor (D118/D119)
(MSB22 Circuit Board) Replacement
Variable Mask Removal/Reinstallation
Mask Motor Home Position Sensor (D117)
(SSE22 Circuit Board) Replacement
135 Downstream Perforation Sensor (D103P)
(DTE22 Circuit Board) Replacement
Mask Motor (M103) Replacement
135 Dust Removal Roller Replacement
135 Leading End Sensor (D101P) Replacement
135 Frame Sensor (D107P) Replacement
135 Upstream Perforation/Check Tape/Rear
Fogging/Front Fogging Sensor (DTF22 Circuit
Board) Replacement
8.2.19
8.2.20
8.2.21
8.2.22
8.2.23
8.2.24
8.2.25
8.2.26
8.2.27
8.2.28
8.2.29
IX240 Perforation Sensor (D105P) Replacement

IX240 TAP & Leading End Sensor (D104P)
(DTG22 Circuit Board) Replacement
IX240 Rear/Front Unexposed Frame Sensor
(D108P/D109P) (DTB22 Circuit Board) Replacement
IX240 Dust Removal Roller Replacement
Opposite Roller Replacement
Dummy Head Opposite Roller Replacement
IX240 Guide Roller Replacement
Feed Motor Cover Removal/Reinstallation
Feed Motor (M101) Replacement
Feed Roller/IX240 Drive Belt Replacement
Plug-in Connector Replacement
8.3 Nest Section

8.3.1
8.3.2
8.3.3
8.3.4
8.3.5
Nest Section Cover Removal/Reinstallation

Strip Film Guide Removal/Reinstallation
Door Open/Close Sensor (D112)/Cartridge
Sensor (D115) (SSB22 Circuit Board) Replacement
Nest Unit Removal/Reinstallation
Door Drive Assembly Removal/Reinstallation
8.3.6
8.3.7
8.3.8
8.3.9
8.3.10
8.3.11
8.3.12
8.3.13
8.3.14
8.3.15
8.3.16
8.3.17
8.3.18
8.3.19
8.3.20
Set Lever Assembly Removal/Reinstallation

Spool Assembly Removal/Reinstallation
Supply Motor Bracket Removal/Reinstallation
Supply Motor (M102) /Gear Replacement
IPI Sensor (D113) (SSA22 Circuit Board) Replacement
Door Motor (M104) Replacement
Door Drive Gear Replacement
Supply Motor Home Position Sensor (D114)
Replacement
Spool Rack Replacement
Spool Replacement
IPI Unit Disassembly/Reassembly
Guide Assembly Removal/Reinstallation
Cartridge Holder Replacement
Set Lever Stopper Replacement
Cam Roller Replacement
8.4 Winding Section

8.4.1
8.4.2
8.4.3
8.4.4
Winding Unit Removal/Reinstallation

Winding Gear Replacement
Winding Shaft Disassembly/Reassembly
Film Guide Replacement
8.5 Carrier Base Section

8.5.1
8.5.2
8.5.3
8.5.4
8.5.5
8.5.6
8.5.7
8.5.8
8.5.9
Carrier Base Front Cover Removal/Reinstallation

IX240/135 Carrier Position Sensor (D121/
D122) Replacement
Carrier Table Removal/Reinstallation
Carrier Sensor (D123) Replacement
Gear Bracket Removal/Reinstallation
Gear Replacement
Ball Catch Replacement
Film Lane Changing Linkage Disassembly/
Reassembly
8.6 Manual Negative Carrier M69D

(Optional)
8.6.1
8.6.2
8.6.3
8.6.4
8.6.5
MNC Circuit Board Replacement

Negative Press Solenoid (S10) Replacement
Negative Mask Detection Pin Replacement
Negative Mask Adjustment
Parts Location
IX240 Perforation Sensor LED Magnetic Reading Head
Circuit Board
Magnetic Writing Head
(D105L)
Circuit Board
IX240 TAP and
Leading End
Sensor LED
(D104L)
LEB22 Circuit Board

IX240Rear Unexposed Frame Sensor
LED (D108L)
IX240Front Unexposed Frame Sensor
LED (D109L)
135 Leading End

Sensor LED
(D101L)
135 Frame Sensor LED
(D107L)
LEF22 Circuit Board
135 Upstream Perforation Sensor LED (D102L)
135 Check Tape Sensor LED (D106L)
135 Rear Fogging Sensor LED (D110L)
135 Front Fogging Sensor LED (D111L)
135 Downstream Perforation

Sensor LED (D103L)
CD602
Parts Location
135 Entrance Pressure Guide
Dust Removal Roller
135 Upper Mask
Exit Pressure Guide
Magnetic Writing Head

(MG101)
IX240 Entrance
Pressure Guide
Dummy Head
Magnetic Reading Head

(D116)
Dust Removal Roller
IX240 Upper Mask

CD603
Parts Location
Plug-in Connector
Spool Assembly
Solenoid (S101)
Dust Removal Roller
Supply Motor
(M102)
Feed Motor
(M101)
Belt Tensioner
Set Lever
Assembly
Strip Film
Guide
Door Drive
Assembly
Dust Removal Roller
Winding Unit
135 Lower Mask
135 Downstream Perforation

Sensor (D103P)
CD604
Parts Location
Mask Motor Home Position
Sensor (D117)
Dust Removal
Roller
IX240 Perforation
Sensor (D105P)
IX240 Rear/Front
Unexposed Frame Sensors
(D108P/D109P)
IX240 TAP and

Leading End
Sensor (D104P)
Mask Motor
(M103)
135 Leading End

Sensor (D101P)
135 Frame Sensor

(D107P)
Variable Mask
MSC22 Circuit Board

Upper Cover
Open/Close
Sensor (D120)
DTF22Circuit Board
135 Upstream Perforation Sensor
135 Lower Mask Indicator Lamp (D102P)
135 Check Tape Sensor (D106P)
H/F Sensor
(L101)
135 Rear Fogging Sensor (D110P)
(D118/D119)
135 Front Fogging Sensor (D111P)
CD605
Parts Location
Carrier Base Section
Auto Film Carrier Lock Lever
Manual Film Carrier
Release Lever
Auto Film Carrier

Lock Arm
Plug-in Connectors
135 Carrier Position
Sensor (D122)
Ball Catch
Carrier Table
IX240 Carrier Position

Sensor (D121)
Slide Shaft
Carrier Table Lock Arm
Switching Shaft
135/IX240 Switching Button
CD813
8.1 Auto Film Carrier NC100AC (Upper Cover Section)

8.1.1 Carrier Upper Cover Removal/Reinstallation
Removal
1. Open the upper cover.
Carrier Upper Cover
2. Remove the eight screws

securing the upper cover.
Screws (8)
3. Remove the rear screw and

then the upper cover.
Reinstallation
Screw
CD601
8.1.2 135 Leading End Sensor LED (D101L) Replacement

Removal
1. Remove the carrier upper
Connector

the sensor LED.
from the sensor LED.
Installation
NOTE: Tighten the screw while
pressing the sensor LED
against the stopper.
Sensor LED (D101L)
Screw
CD606
8.1.3 135 Downstream Perforation Sensor LED (D103L) Replacement

Removal
Sensor LED

the sensor LED.
Installation
Screw
Connector
CD609
8.1.4 135 Entrance Pressure Guide Removal/Reinstallation

Removal
FSP
LEF1
2. Disconnect the three

connectors.
D101L
CD613
3. Remove the four special

screws and then the
pressure guide and four
springs.
Special Screws (4)

Springs (4)
Reinstallation
Reinstall the guide in the
Entrance Pressure Guide
CD614
8.1.5 135 Frame Sensor LED (D107L) (FSP Circuit Board) Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the 135 entrance
pressure guide (see subsection
8.1.4).
Screws (2)

then the sensor LED.
Installation
Install the sensor in the reverse
order of removal.
135 Frame Sensor (D107)
CD615
8.1.6 135 Upstream Perforation/Check Tape/Rear Fogging/Front Fogging Sensor LED

(LEF22 Circuit Board) Replacement
Code
Sensor LED
D102L
Upstream Perforation
D106L
Check Tape
D110L
Rear Fogging
D111L
Front Fogging
Removal
8.1.4).
Sensor LED
(D102L/D106L/D110L
/D111L)

the sensor LED.
Installation
Screw
Install the sensor LED in the

CD616
8.1.7 135 Entrance Pressure Guide Section Roller Replacement

Screw
Removal
8.1.4).
2. Loosen one screw, remove
one screw and then each
retainer plate, two springs,
two rollers, four poly-slider
and shaft.
Installation
Retainer Plate
Poly-sliders (4)
Springs (2)
Rollers (2)
Springs
(White/Strong)
Springs
(Black/Weak)

NOTE: Entrance side roller springs:
White (Strong)
Middle and exist side rollers:
Black (Weak)
CD617
8.1.8 135 Entrance Side Dust Removal Roller Replacement

Removal
Dust Removal Roller

8.1.4).
E-rings (2)
Springs (2)
2. Remove the two E-rings,

springs and then the dust
removal roller.
Installation
Install the roller in the reverse
order of removal.
CD622
8.1.9 IX240 TAP & Leading End Sensor LED (D104L) Replacement
Removal
Connector
Screw

the sensor LED.
from sensor LED.
Installation
Senosr LED (D10SL)
CD607
8.1.10 IX240 Perforation Sensor LED (D105L) Replacement

Removal
Connector
Screw

the sensor LED.
Installation
Sensor LED
CD608
8.1.11 Write Head Circuit Board Replacement

Removal
Print Harness
Screws (2)

then the circuit board.
3. Disconnect the two
connectors from the circuit
board.
Connector
NOTE: Lift the print harness
connector and disconnect the
harness.
Installation
Connetor
Write Head Circuit Board
Install the circuit board in the

CD610
8.1.12 Read Head Circuit Board Replacement

Removal
Circuit Board Cover
Screws (2)

then the circuit board cover.
CD611

board.
Read Head Circuit Board

Screws (3)
4. Remove the three screws

and then the circuit board.
Installation
Connectors
CD612
8.1.13 Reading Magnetic Head (D116) Replacement

Removal
Circuit Board
Connector
1. Remove the read head

circuit board cover
from the read head circuit
board.
the magnetic head guide.
Screw
Magnetic Head Guide
CD624

then the magnetic head.
Magnetic Head (D116)
Installation
Install the magnetic head in the
Screws (2)
CD625
8.1.14 Writing Magnetic Head (MG101) Replacement

Removal
Print Harness
Writing Magnetic
Head (MG101)
Screw
2. Disconnect the print harness

from the write head circuit
board.
the writing head.
Installation
Connector
Install the writing head in the

CD629
8.1.15 IX240 Entrance Pressure Guide Removal/Reinstallation

Removal
1. Remove the read head
circuit board cover (see
subsection 8.1.12).
Connectors (4)
2. Disconnect the four

connectors.
CD618
3. Remove the three special

screws and then the
pressure guide and three
springs.
Springs (3)
Special Screws (3)
Reinstallation
IX240 Entrance Pressure Guide
CD619
8.1.16 IX240 Rear/Front Unexposed Frame Sensor LED (D108L/D109L)

(LEB22 Circuit Board) Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the IX240 entrance
8.1.13).
Screws (2)

then the sensor LED.
Installation
Sensor LED (D108L/D109L)
CD620
8.1.17 IX240 Entrance Pressure Guide Section Roller Replacement

Screws (2)
Removal
Retainer Plate
Rollers (2)
Poly-sliders (4)

8.1.13).
the sensor LED.
Springs (Black) (2)
Screw
Sensor LED

then the retainer plate, two
(black) springs, two rollers,
four poly-sliders and shaft.
Installation
Install the rollers in the reverse
order of removal.
CD621
8.1.18 IX240 Entrance Side Dust Removal Roller Replacement

Removal
Dust Removal Roller

E-rings (2)

8.1.13).
Springs (2)
2. Remove the two E-rings and

then the two springs and the
dust removal roller.
Installation
order of removal.
CD623
8.1.19 Dummy Head Replacement

Removal
8.1.13).
Dummy Head
Screw

the dummy head.
Installation
Install the dummy head in the
CD626
8.1.20 Exit Pressure Guide Removal/Reinstallation

Removal
Print Harness
2. Disconnect the print harness

from the write head circuit
board.
3. Disconnect the D103L
connector.
D103L Connector
CD627

screws and then the
pressure guide and four
springs.
Special Screws (4)

Springs (4)
Reinstallation
Exit Pressure
Guide
CD628
8.1.21 Exit Pressure Guide Section Roller Replacement

Removal
1. Remove the exit pressure
guide (see subsection 8.1.19).
Screws (2)
Springs
(Yellow/Short) (2)
Retainer Plate
Rollers (2)
Poly-sliders (4)
2. Remove two screws each

and then the retainer plate,
two springs, two rollers, four
poly-sliders and shaft.
Installation
Shaft

NOTE: IX240 Side Springs:
Long (White)
135 Side Springs:
Short (Yellow)
Springs
(White/Long) (2)
CD630
8.1.22 Film Mask Replacement

Removal
135 Mask
1. Open the carrier upper

cover.
2. Remove the mask.
Installation
Install the mask in the reverse
order of removal.
IX240 Mask
CD631
8.2 Auto Film Carrier NC100AC (Main Body Section)

8.2.1 Plug-in Connector Section Cover Removal/Reinstallation
Removal
cover.
Screws (2) (Remove)
Screw (Loosen)
2. Loosen one screw, remove

the two screws and then the
plug-in connector section
cover.
Reinstallation
Plug-in Connector Section Cover
CD632
8.2.2 Bottom Cover Removal/Reinstallation

Removal
Screws (6)
1. Place the carrier up side

down.
2. Remove the six screws and
then the bottom cover.
Reinstallation
Bottom Cover
CD634
8.2.3 Bottom Left Cover Removal/Reinstallation

Removal
1. Place the carrier up side
down.
Countersunk Flat
Head Screws (2)
Bottom Left Cover
2. Remove the two

countersunk flat head
screws and then the bottom
left cover.
Reinstallation
CD650
8.2.4 Bottom Inner Cover Removal/Reinstallation

Removal
1. Remove:
Bottom cover (see subsection
8.2.2).
Bottom left cover (see subsection
8.2.3).
Left Guide Rail
Screws (2)

then the left guide rail.
CD652
3. Disconnect the DTF1, DTB1

and D104P connectors.
and then the bottom inner
cover.
Bottom Inner Cover
D104P
DTF1
DTB1
Screws (3)
CD653
Reinstallation
Reinstallation is essentially in
the reverse order of removal.
Left Guide Rail
NOTE: Tighten the two screws while
pressing the left guide rail
toward the left side.
Screws (2)
CD669
8.2.5 Indicator Lamp (L101) Replacement

Removal
1. Remove the bottom cover
Screw

from the indicator lamp.
the indicator lamp.
Installation
Install the lamp in the reverse
order of removal.
Indicator Lamp
(L101)
Connector
CD636
8.2.6 Upper Cover Open/Close Sensor (D120) (MSA22 Circuit Board) Replacement
Removal
Screw

from the sensor.
the sensor.
Installation
Sensor (D120)
Connector
Locating Pin
NOTE: Align the hole in the sensor

with the locating pin on the
carrier frame.
CD638
8.2.7 Input Key 1 to 4 (D124 to D127) Replacement

Removal
Connector
Transparent
Sheet
Screws (2)

then the transparent sheet,
MSC22 circuit board and
four keys.
from the MSC22 circuit
board.
Installation
MSC22
Circuit Board
Keys (4)
NOTE: Note the installation direction

of the keys.
CD639
8.2.8 CYS22 Circuit Board Removal/Reinstallation

Removal
1. Remove the plug-in
connector section cover (see
subsection 8.2.1).
connectors.
Connectors
CD643

Screws (2)

then the harness guide.
5. Disconnect all connectors
from the circuit board.
Harness
Guide
CYS22 Circuit Board

Screws (6)

Reinstallation
Reinstall the circuit board in the
CD644
8.2.9 Solenoid (S101) Replacement

Removal
3. Disconnect the solenoid
connector.
4. Remove the countersunk flat
head screw and then the
solenoid from the upper
side.
Solenoid (S101)
Screws (2)
Countersunk
Flat Head Screw
Installation
NOTE: Align the hole in the solenoid
with the pin on the carrier
frame.
Harness Guide
Connector
CD668
8.2.10 135 Lower Mask H/F Sensor (D118/D119) (MSB22 Circuit Board) Replacement
Removal
Screws (2)

form the sensor.
then the sensor.
Installation
order of removal.
Sensors (D118P/D119P)
Connector
CD637
8.2.11 Variable Mask Removal/Reinstallation

Removal
Screws (4)

D117 Connector
2. Disconnect the M103 and

D117 connectors.
then the variable mask.
Reinstallation
Reinstall the mask in the
Variable Mask
M103 Connector
CD640
8.2.12 Mask Motor Home Position Sensor (D117) (SSE22 Circuit Board) Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the variable mask
the sensor.
Installation
order of removal.
Screws
Sensor (D117)
CD641
8.2.13 135 Downstream Perforation Sensor (D103P) (DTE22 Circuit Board) Replacement
Removal
Connector

from the sensor.
the sensor.
Installation
order of removal.
Screw
Sensor (D103P)
CD642
8.2.14 Mask Motor (M103) Replacement

Removal
then the motor.
Screws (2)
Installation
Install the motor in the reverse
order of removal.
Motor (M103)
CD648
8.2.15 135 Dust Removal Roller Replacement

Removal
Screws (2)
Dust Removal Roller

then the roller.
Installation
order of removal.
CD649
8.2.16 135 Leading End Sensor (D101P) Replacement

Removal
1. Remove the bottom left
Screw
2. Disconnect the D101P

connector.
Sensor
(D101P)

the sensor.
Installation
D101P Connector
NOTE: Press the sensor against the

stopper and tighten the screw.
CD651
8.2.17 135 Frame Sensor (D107P) Replacement

Removal
1. Remove the bottom inner
Screws (2)
Sensor (D107P)
2. Disconnect the AR
connector.
then the sensor.
Installation
order of removal.
AR Connector
CD654
8.2.18 135 Upstream Perforation/Check Tape/Rear Fogging/Front Fogging Sensor

(DTF22 Circuit Board) Replacement
Code
Sensor
D102P
Upstream Perforation
D106P
Check Tape
D110P
Rear Fogging
D111P
Front Fogging
DTF2 Connector
Screws (2)
Removal
2. Disconnect the DTF2
connector.
then the sensor.
Installation
Sensors (D102P/D106P/D110P/D111P)
Install the sensors in the reverse

order of removal.
CD655
8.2.19 IX240 Perforation Sensor (D105P) Replacement

Removal
Connector
Screw

from the sensor.
the sensor.
Installation
order of removal.
Sensor (D105P)
CD635
8.2.20 IX240 TAP & Leading End Sensor (D104P) (DTG22 Circuit Board) Replacement
Removal
Screws (2)

then the sensor.
Installation
order of removal.
Sensor (D104P)
CD656
8.2.21 IX240 Rear/Front Unexposed Frame Sensor (D108P/D109P)

(DTB22 Circuit Board) Replacement
Removal
Screw

the sensor.
Installation
order of removal.
Sensors (D108P/D109P)
CD657
8.2.22 IX240 Dust Removal Roller Replacement

Removal
Screws (2)

then the dust removal roller.
Installation
order of removal.
Dust Removal Roller
CD645
8.2.23 Opposite Roller Replacement

Removal
Roller Retainer
Screws (2)
Screws (2)

then the dust removal roller.
and then the roller retainer.
Roller Retainer
Dust Removal Roller
Screws (2)
CD646
4. Remove two spring, two

poly-sliders, opposite roller
and shaft, respectively.
Poly-sliders (2)
Screw
Installation
order of removal.
Screw
Springs (2)
Poly-sliders
(2)
Springs (2)
Opposite
Roller
Shaft
Shaft
Opposite
Roller
CD647
8.2.24 Dummy Head Opposite Roller Replacement

Removal
Screw
Cover
Screw
Poly-sliders (2)

the roller assembly.
the cover, two springs, roller,
two poly-sliders and shaft
from the roller bracket.
Springs (2)
Shaft
Roller
Roller Bracket
Installation
order of removal.
CD658
8.2.25 IX240 Guide Roller Replacement

Removal
1. Remove:
Screws (2)
IX240 perforation sensor (see

subsection 8.2.19).
IX240 dust removal roller (see
subsection 8.2.22).
IX240 rear/front unexposed
frame sensors (see subsection
8.2.21).
then the two rollers.
Installation
Rollers (2)

order of removal.
CD939
8.2.26 Feed Motor Cover Removal/Reinstallation

Removal
cover.
Screws (2)

then the motor cover.
Reinstallation
Motor Cover
CD660
8.2.27 Feed Motor (M101) Replacement

Removal
1. Remove the winding section
2. Remove the three
screws and then the righthand harness cover.
3. Remove the two
screws and then the rear
harness cover.
Countersunk
Flat Head
Screws (2)
Countersunk
Flat Head
Screws (3)
Rear Harness Cover

Right-hand Harness Cover
CD1111
4. Disconnect the M101

connector.
M101 Connector
CD1112
5. Remove the screw and

spring and then the belt
tensioner.
Screw
Belt Tensioner/Spring
CD1110
6. Disengage the belt from the

pulley on the motor.
then the motor bracket.
Motor Bracket
Screws (2)
Belt
CD1113

then the motor from the
motor bracket.
Screws (2)
Bracket
Motor (M101)
CD1114
Installation
Screw
NOTE: Adjust the belt tension by

following the steps below.
<Belt Tension Adjustment>

1. Loosen the belt tensioner
screw.
Tensioner
2. Turn the belt one turn and

tighten the tensioner screw.
Belt
CD670
8.2.28 Feed Roller/IX240 Drive Belt Replacement

Removal
Screws (2)
1. Remove:
Bottom inner cover (see
subsection 8.2.4).
Variable mask (see subsection
8.2.11).
Winding section (see subsection
8.4.1).
IX240 TPA & leading end
sensor (see subsection 8.2.20).
2. Disconnect the CYS7 and
CYS8 connectors from the
circuit board.
Harness Guide
CYS7
CYS8

CD659
4. Loosen the belt tensioner

screw, move the tensioner to
the loosening side and
tighten the screw.
Screw
Belt Tensioner
CD663

securing the roller bearing
holders.
CD664
Screws (2)
Bearing Holders (2)
CD665
6. Remove the bearing holders,

bearing and the roller
assembly.
Roller Assembly
Bearing Holder
Bearing
7. Remove the IX240 drive belt.

NOTE: Do not try to remove the 135
drive belt.
IX240 Drive Belt
CD666

the guide roller.
Installation
Screw
Guide Roller

NOTE: Adjust the belt tension (see
subsection 8.2.27).
CD667
8.2.29 Plug-in Connector Replacement

Removal
1. Remove:
Nest Section
Harness Cover
Plug-in connector section

Bottom cover (see subsection
8.2.2).
Bottom left cover (see subsection
8.2.3).
2. Remove the three
screws and then the nest
section harness cover.
Countersunk Flat
Head Screws (3)
CD895
3. Remove the five

screws and then the two
right harness covers.
Right Harness Covers
Countersunk
Flat Hear Screws (5)
CD936
4. Remove the two

screws and then the rear
harness cover.
Rear Harness
Cover
Countersunk
Flat Head Screws (2)
CD937
5. Disconnect all connectors of

the plug-in connector
harness.
Screws (2)

then the plug-in connector.
Installation
Install the plug-in connector in
Plug-in Connector
CD938
8.3 Nest Section

8.3.1 Nest Section Cover Removal/Reinstallation
Removal
connector section cover (see
subsection 8.2.1).
Nest Section Cover

Screws (2)

then the nest section cover.
Reinstallation
CD633
8.3 Nest Section
8.3.2 Strip Film Guide Removal/Reinstallation

Removal
cover.
Screws (2)
Counter Sunk Flat Screw
2. Remove the two screw,

countersunk flat head screw
and then the strip film guide.
Reinstallation
Strip Film Guide
CD892
8.3 Nest Section
8.3.3 Door Open/Close Sensor (D112)/Cartridge Sensor

(D115) (SSB22 Circuit Board) Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the strip film guide
Sensor (D112)

the sensor.
from the sensor.
Installation
order of removal.
Connector
Screw
CD893
8.3 Nest Section
8.3.4 Nest Unit Removal/Reinstallation

Removal
1. Remove:
Nest Section
Harness Cover
Nest section cover (see

subsection 8.3.1).
Strip film guide (see subsection
8.3.2).
2. Remove the three
screws and then the nest
Countersunk Flat
Head Screws (3)
CD895
8.3 Nest Section
3. Disconnect the M102, M103,

121J, 122J and J123
connectors.
Connectors (5)
CD896
8.3 Nest Section
4. Move the spool section to its

setting position by pushing
down the cartridge set lever.
Cartridge Set Lever
Spool Section
CD894
8.3 Nest Section

then the nest unit.
Reinstallation
Reinstall the nest unit in the
Nest Unit
Screws (4)
CD897
8.3 Nest Section
8.3.5 Door Drive Assembly Removal/Reinstallation

Removal
1. Remove the nest unit (see
subsection 8.3.4).
Door Drive
Assembly

and remove the screw and
then the door open/close
sensor.
then the door drive
assembly.
Reinstallation
Connector
Screws (2)
Screw
Reinstall the door drive

assembly in the reverse order of
removal.
CD898
8.3 Nest Section
8.3.6 Set Lever Assembly Removal/Reinstallation

Removal
1. Remove the door drive
assembly (see subsection 8.3.5).
2. Move the set lever assembly
to the motor side.
Spring
E-ring
Lever
3. Remove the E-ring and then

the spring and the lever.
CD899
8.3 Nest Section
4. Remove the two coil springs.
Coil Springs
CD900
8.3 Nest Section
5. Remove the E-ring and polyslider.

E-ring
Poly-slider
CD901
8.3 Nest Section

the shaft and the set lever
assembly.
Set Lever Assembly
Shaft
E-ring
CD902
8.3 Nest Section
Reinstallation
Spool
NOTE: Push the spool fully to the
cartridge side and engage the
set lever assembly with the
gear.
Set Lever
CD926
8.3 Nest Section
8.3.7 Spool Assembly Removal/Reinstallation

Removal
1. Remove the set lever
Spool Assembly
2. Remove the E-ring from the

guide shaft.
3. Withdraw the guide shaft
and remove the spool
assembly.
E-ring
Guide Shaft
CD903
8.3 Nest Section
Reinstallation
NOTE: Install the spool assembly
while pushing in the IPI shaft.
Spool Assembly
IPI Shaft
CD925
8.3 Nest Section
8.3.8 Supply Motor Bracket Removal/Reinstallation

Removal
1. Remove the spool assembly
Motor Bracket

securing the motor bracket.
Toothed
Washer
Screws (3)
CD904
8.3 Nest Section
3. Remove the screw securing

the gear to the motor shaft.
Screws
CD905
8.3 Nest Section
4. Remove the D-washer,

collar, gear bracket, gear
and motor bracket.
Gear
Reinstallation
Reinstall the bracket in the
Motor Bracket
Gear Bracket
Spring
Collar
Screw
D-washer
CD906
8.3 Nest Section
8.3.9 Supply Motor (M102) /Gear Replacement

Removal
1. Remove the supply motor
bracket (see subsection 8.3.8).
Screws (2)

bracket.
Motor Bracket
Motor (M102)
CD907
8.3 Nest Section

then the two gears from the
gear bracket.
E-rings
Gears
Gear Bracket
CD908
8.3 Nest Section

then the two gears from the
motor bracket.
Gears
E-ring
Installation
Install the motor and gears in
E-ring
Motor Bracket
CD909
8.3 Nest Section
8.3.10 IPI Sensor (D113) (SSA22 Circuit Board) Replacement

Removal
Connector

from the sensor.
Screw

the sensor bracket.
Sensor Bracket
CD910
8.3 Nest Section

the sensor from the bracket.
Installation
Bracket

order of removal.
Sensor (D113)
Screws
CD911
8.3 Nest Section
8.3.11 Door Motor (M104) Replacement

Removal
Motor (M104)
Screws (2)
2. Cut the two cord ties.

then the motor.
Installation
order of removal.
Cord Ties
CD912
8.3 Nest Section
8.3.12 Door Drive Gear Replacement

Removal
Rack
Poly-Slider
E-rings (2)
Spring
2. Remove the spring.

then the poly-slider, rack and
guide.
Guide
CD913
8.3 Nest Section
4. Remove the four gears.

Gears

the door drive shaft and
gear.
E-ring
Gear
Door Drive Shaft
CD914
8.3 Nest Section
Installation
NOTE: Align the gear timing by
following the steps below.
1)Align the long tooth on the
door drive shaft gear with
the groove in the sector
gear boss.
2)Rest the sector gear on the
door drive shaft gear as
shown.
Long Tooth
Door Drive
Shaft Gear
Rest on
Boss
CD915
8.3 Nest Section
3)While resting the sector

gear on the door drive shaft
as shown, engage the rack
and gear so that the rack is
positioned to the sensor
side.
Rack
Rack
CD916
8.3 Nest Section
8.3.13 Supply Motor Home Position Sensor (D114) Replacement

Removal
Connector
Sensor (D114)

from the sensor.
the sensor.
Installation
order of removal.
Screw
CD917
8.3 Nest Section
8.3.14 Spool Rack Replacement

Removal
Spring

then the rack.
Installation
Install the rack in the reverse
order of removal.
Rack
E-ring
CD918
8.3 Nest Section
8.3.15 Spool Replacement

Removal
Screw

clamp/cover.
Clamp/Cover
CD919
8.3 Nest Section

the bearing.
Bearing
E-ring
CD920
8.3 Nest Section
4. Withdraw the spool and

remove the gear, spacer and
home position sensor.
Spool
Installation
Install the spool in the reverse
order of removal.
Gear
Spacer
Sensor Plate
CD921
8.3 Nest Section
8.3.16 IPI Unit Disassembly/Reassembly

Disassembly
Screw

the IPI unit.
IPI Unit
CD922
8.3 Nest Section

the IPI shaft and spring.
E-ring
IPI Shaft
Spring
CD923
8.3 Nest Section

the IPI detecting arm and
spring.
Reassembly
Reassemble the IPI unit in the
reverse order of disassembly.
E-ring
IPI Detecting Arm
Spring
CD924
8.3 Nest Section
8.3.17 Guide Assembly Removal/Reinstallation

Removal
1. Remove the nest unit (see
subsection 8.3.4).
2. Remove the E-ring and
bearing.
Bearing
E-ring
CD927
8.3 Nest Section
3. Loosen the two screws

securing the guide bracket.
Guide Assembly
Screws (2)
CD928
8.3 Nest Section
4. Remove the guide assembly,

cam plate, bearing and
shaft.
Cam Plate
Shaft
Bearing
Reinstallation
Reinstall the guide assembly in
Guide Assembly
CD929
8.3 Nest Section
8.3.18 Cartridge Holder Replacement

Removal
1. Remove the guide assembly
the cartridge holder
assembly and spring.
Lever
Spring

lever and spring from the
cartridge holder.
E-ring
Installation
Install the cartridge holder in the
Cartridge Holder
E-ring
CD930
8.3 Nest Section
8.3.19 Set Lever Stopper Replacement

Removal
Guide Braclet
Screw

then the guide bracket.
CD931
8.3 Nest Section

the set lever stopper and
spring.
Installation
Set Lever Stop
Install the set lever stop in the

E-ring
Spring
CD932
8.3 Nest Section
8.3.20 Cam Roller Replacement

Removal
Screws (2)

then the cam roller
assembly.
Cam Roller Assembly
CD933
8.3 Nest Section
3. Remove the spring, E-ring

and then the roller bracket.
Spring
Roller Bracket
E-ring
CD934
8.3 Nest Section

the roller from the bracket.
Installation
Install the cam roller in the
E-ring
Roller
CD935
8.4 Winding Section

8.4.1 Winding Unit Removal/Reinstallation
Removal
Knob Cover
1. Remove the feed motor

the knob cover.
Screw
CD661
8.4 Winding Section

then the winding unit.
Reinstallation
Reinstall the winding unit in the
Winding Unit
Screws (4)
CD662
8.4 Winding Section
8.4.2 Winding Gear Replacement

Removal
1. Remove the winding unit (see
subsection 8.4.1).
the poly-slider, knob, collar
and gear.
Collar
Knob
Gear
Poly-slider
E-ring
CD883
8.4 Winding Section
3. Remove the pin and gear.

gears.
Installation
Install the gears in the reverse
order of removal.
Gear
Gears
Pin
E-rings
CD884
8.4 Winding Section
8.4.3 Winding Shaft Disassembly/Reassembly

Disassembly
Shaft Assembly
1. Remove the winding gears

then the shaft assembly by
shifting the bearing.
Bearing
CD885
8.4 Winding Section
3. Disassemble the shaft.

Pin
Shaft
Reassembly
Reassemble the shaft in the
135 Real
One-way Clutch
Collar
IX240 Reel
Spring
Joint
Collar
Bearings (2)
E-rings (2)
Poly-sliders (2)
CD886
8.4 Winding Section
8.4.4 Film Guide Replacement

Removal
1. Remove the winding shaft
Screw

the spring retainer and two
coil springs.
Coil Spring (2)
Spring Retainer
CD887
8.4 Winding Section
3. Remove the film guide.
Installation
Film Guide
Install the film guide in the

CD888

8.5.1 Carrier Base Front Cover Removal/Reinstallation
Removal
1. Remove the table top cover
Countersunk Flat Head Screw

Screws (2)

head screw and two screws
and then the cover.
Reinstallation
Reinstall the front cover in the
Carrier Base Front Cover
CD728
8.5.2 IX240/135 Carrier Position Sensor (D121/D122) Replacement

Removal
1. Remove:
Screws (2)
Scanner front cover unit (see

subsection 9.2.1).
Table top cover (see subsection
7.2.2).
Connector Cover

then the connector cover.
CD748
3. Disconnect the sensor

connector and open the
harness clamp.
135 Carrier Position Sensor (D122)

Screw

the sensor.
IX240 Carrier
Position Sensor (D121)
Installation
order of removal.
Connector
Screw
Clamp
Connector
CD749
8.5.3 Carrier Table Removal/Reinstallation

Removal
1. Remove:
Carrier base front cover (see
subsection 8.5.1).
Scanner rear cover (see
subsection 9.2.2).
then the printer exhaust fan
bracket.
Screws (2)
Printer Exhaust Fan Bracket
CD731

the grounding wire.
Grounding Wire
Screw
CD732

the grounding wires.
Screw
Grounding Wires
CD746
5. Open the two harness

clamps.
6. Disconnect the nine JCA
connectors.
JCA Connectors (9)
Clamps
CD747

then the stop plate.
Screws (2)
Stop Plate
CD733
8. Remove the cover spacer.
Cover Spacer
CD1104

the two springs and slide
shaft.
Springs (2)
NOTE: Be careful not to miss the rear

spring because it may fall
when withdrawing the shaft.
Slide Shaft
Screw
CD734
10. Remove the carrier table.
Reinstallation
NOTE: Face the flat surface on the
slide shaft up and tighten the
screw.
After installation, perform the

following adjustments.
1) Menu 43E Optical Axis
Adjustment (see subsection
5.4.9).
2) Menu 433 Focus Position
5.4.3).
3) Menu 441 Mask Position
5.5.1).
Carrier Table
CD1105
8.5.4 Carrier Sensor (D123) Replacement

Removal
1. Remove the carrier table
then the gear cover.
Gear Cover
Screws (2)
CD1106
3. Loosen the four plug-in

connector guide screws.
then the plug-in connector
bracket.
Plug-in Connector Bracket
Screws (3)
Guide Screws (4)
CD1107
5. Disconnect the JCA10

connector.
JCA10
Connector
CD1108
6. Loosen the one screw,

remove the one screw and
Harness Guide
Screw (Remove)
Screw (Loosen)
CD735

the sensor bracket.
Sensor Bracket
Screw
CD736
8. Cut the cord tie.

the sensor.
Installation
Cord Tie

order of removal.
Screw
Sensor (D123)
CD737
8.5.5 Gear Bracket Removal/Reinstallation

Removal
1. Remove the carrier sensor
Gear Cover
Screw (Loosen)
2. Loosen the screw, and

remove the two screws and
then the gear cover.
Screw (Remove)
CD738
3. Remove the release lever

spring.
then the gear bracket.
Spring
Reinstallation
Screws (2)

reverse order of
Gear Bracket
CD739
8.5.6 Gear Replacement

Removal
1. Remove the gear bracket (see
subsection 8.5.5).
Gears
2. Remove the two E-ring and

then the two gears.
3. Loosen the two hex. socket
head setscrews and remove
the gear.
Hex.Socket Head
Setscrews (2)
E-ring
CD740
4. Remove the two bearings

and lock arm/shaft.
Bearing

the gear, lock lever shaft and
two bearings.
Gear
E-ring
Lock Arm/Shaft
Lock Lever Shaft
Bearings (2)
CD741
Installation
NOTE: Engage the three gears so
that their the " " marks are
aligned.
Marks
Marks
CD742
8.5.7 Ball Catch Replacement

Removal
1. Remove the gear bracket (see
subsection 8.5.5).
E-ring
Ball Catch

the manual film carrier
release arm and pin.
then the ball catch.
Manual Film Carrier

Release Arm
Pin
Installation
Install the ball catch in the
Screws (2)
CD743

Removal
1. Remove:
Gear Cover
Open the image processing

circuit board bracket (see
subsection 18.3.1).
Remove the scanner rear
the gear cover.
Screws (2)
CD1102
3. Loosen the four plug-in

connector guide screws.

and then the plug-in
connector bracket.
Guide Screws (4)
Screws (3)
CD729
5. Remove the cover spacer.

6. Disconnect the JCA10
connector.
JCA10 Connector
Cover Spacer
CD730

then the printer exhaust fan
bracket.
Screws (2)
Printer Exhaust Fan Bracket
CD731

the grounding wires.
Screw
Grounding Wires
CD746
9. Open the two clamps.

10. Disconnect the nine JCA
connectors.
connectors.
Installation
Install the plug-in connectors in
JCA Connectors (9)
Clamps
CD747
8.5.9 Film Lane Changing Linkage Disassembly/Reassembly

Disassembly
1. Remove the carrier base
front cover (see subsection 8.5.1).
2. Remove the E-ring, polyslider, bearing, spring and
arm.
E-ring
Spring
Arm
Poly-slider
Bearing
CD744

the plain washer, spring and
changing shaft.
Changing Shaft
Reassembly
Reassemble the linkage in the
Spring
Plain Washer
E-ring
CD745
8.6 Manual Negative Carrier M69D (Optional)

8.6.1 MNC Circuit Board Replacement
Removal
bottom cover.
Bottom Cover
Screws (4)
9286

and MNC circuit board.
MNC Circuit Board
Screws (3)
9287
3. Disconnect the connectors

Installation
Install the new circuit board in
MNC Circuit Board
Connectors
1959
8.6.2 Negative Press Solenoid (S10) Replacement

Removal
connector cover.
Connector Cover
Screw
9289
2. Remove the MNC circuit

board (see subsection 8.6.1).
Cord Ties
3. Cut the three cord ties.

(CN3) from the MNC circuit
board.
the solenoid and then the
solenoid.
Installation
Install the new solenoid in the
Connector
Screw
MNC Circuit Board
9288
8.6.3 Negative Mask Detection Pin Replacement

Removal
2. Remove the four screws
securing the holder plate
and then the holder plates,
leaf springs and pins.
Leaf Spring
Holder Plates
Screws (4)
9290
Installation
reverse order of removal,
nothing the following.
Spring Plate
No Good
1. Make sure the midpoint of

the holder plate does not
buckle upwards as shown in
the figure below. If it buckles
this way the spring plate will
be out of place.
2. Make sure that the spring
plates have play in the
direction shown.
Good
Good
Holder Plate
9291
3. Make sure the pins move up

and down smoothly.
Pins
2708
8.6.4 Negative Mask Adjustment

1. Depress the upper mask
against the lower mask and
make sure its opening is
larger than the opening of
the lower mask and that it is
positioned equally against
the lower mask opening.
Upper Mask
Lower Mask
9294
2. If necessary, loosen the two

screws and adjust the
opening by moving the upper
mask.
Screws (2)
Upper Mask
3. Tighten the two screws

securely.
9295

Removal
connector cover.
Connector Cover
Screw
9289

MNC Circuit Board

(CN1, CN2) from the MNC
circuit board.
Connectors
9293

the grounding wire.
Grounding Wire/Screw

plug-in connector.
Plug-in Connector
Installation
Install the new connector in the
Screws (2)
9292
9. SCANNER SECTION
Parts Location
9.2.4
9.2.5
9.1 Light Source Section

9.1.1
9.1.2
Light Source Unit Removal/Reinstallation

135/IX240 Diffusion Box Sensor (D201/D202)
Replacement
9.1.3
Light Source Assembly Removal/Reinstallation
9.1.4
Plug-in Connector (on Light Source Unit) Replacement
9.1.5
LED Circuit Board Assembly Replacement
9.1.6
Peltier Element (LH201) Replacement
9.1.7
Light Source Section Cover Removal/Reinstallation
9.1.8
LTC22 Circuit Board Bracket Removal/Reinstallation
Light Source Cooling Fan (F201) Replacement
9.1.9
9.1.10 LTC22 Circuit Board Replacement
9.1.11 Plug-in Connector (on Frame) Replacement
9.2 Scanner Section

9.2.1
9.2.2
9.2.3
Scanner Front Cover Unit Removal/Reinstallation

Scanner Rear Cover Removal/Reinstallation
Scanner Cooling Fan (F216) Replacement
9.2.6
9.2.7
CCD Unit Removal/Reinstallation

Shutter Home Position Sensor (D215) Replacement
Shutter Drive Motor (M203) Replacement
Shutter/Gear Replacement
9.3 Lens Unit

9.3.1
9.3.2
9.3.3
Lens Home Position Sensor (D214) Replacement

Lens Unit Removal/Reinstallation
Lens Drive Motor (M202) Replacement
9.4 Conjugate Length Variable

Section/Circuit Board Section
9.4.1
9.4.2
9.4.3
9.4.4
9.4.5
9.4.6
Conjugate Length Variable Section Home Position Sensor (D211)/Upper and Lower Limit
Sensor (D212 and D213) Replacement
Conjugate Length Variable Motor (M201) Replacement
Conjugate Length Variable Gear Replacement
ADC22 Circuit Board Replacement
PZR22 (Piezo Power Supply) Circuit Board
Replacement
Piezo Electric Voltage Adjustment
Parts Location
Conjugate Length Variable Home Position Sensor (D211)/
CCD Unit
Upper and Lower Limit Sensors (D212 and D213)
Shutter Home Position Sensor
(D215)
Scanner Cooling Fan (F216)
Shutter Drive Motor (M203)
Shutter/Gears
Scanner
Rear Cover
Lens Unit
Lens Home Position
Sensor (D214)
Lens Drive Motor
(M202)
Light Source Cooling
Fan (F201)
LTC22 Circuit
Board Bracket
LTC22 Circuit Board
Light Source Unit

135/IX240 Diffusion Box Sensors
(D201/D202)
Light Source Assembly
Plug-in Connector
(on Light Source Unit)
LED Circuit Board Assembly
Peltier Element (LH201)
Light Source Section Cover
Plug-in Connector (on Frame)
CD812
Parts Location
Conjugate Length Variable Motor (M201)
Conjugate Length Variable Gears
ADC22
Circuit Board
PZR22 (Piezo Power Supply)

Circuit Board
Piezo Electric Voltage Adjustment
CD825

9.1.1 Light Source Unit Removal/Reinstallation
Removal
1. Remove the scanner front
cover unit (see subsection 9.2.1).
2. Remove the diffusion box.
then the light source unit.
Light Source Unit
Screws (4)
CD716
Reinstallation
Installation is essentially in the reverse order of removal.
When the unit has been replaced, perform the following adjustment after installation.
1) Menu 43L LED Light Amount Adjustment (see subsection 5.4.15).
2) Menu 43J Spectral Calibration (see subsection 5.4.13).
3) Clear the operation data in menu 434 Operation Information Display (see subsection 5.4.4).
9.1.2 135/IX240 Diffusion Box Sensor (D201/D202) Replacement

Removal
1. Remove the light source unit
connector.
Sensor Connector
CD718

then the diffusion box sensor
bracket.
Screws (2)
Diffusion Box Sensor Bracket
CD717
4. Cut the cord ties and remove

the two screws and then the
sensors.
Cord Ties
Installation
Install the sensors in the reverse
order of removal.
Sensor (D201)
Sensor (D202)
Screws (2)
CD719
9.1.3 Light Source Assembly Removal/Reinstallation

Removal
1. Remove the light source unit
2. Disconnect the diffusion box
sensor connector.
Sensor Connector
CD718
3. Remove the two screws

securing the harness
clamps.
Special Screws (4)
Screws/Clamps
Light Source

screws securing the plug-in
connectors.
then the light source
assembly.
Screws (4)
CD720
Reinstallation
Reinstall the light source assembly in the reverse order of removal.
After reinstallation, perform the following adjustments.
1) Menu 43L LED Light Amount Adjustment (see subsection 5.4.15).
2) Menu 43J Spectral Calibration (see subsection 5.4.13).
9.1.4 Plug-in Connector (on Light Source Unit) Replacement

Removal
1. Remove the light source
Transparent Cover/Gasket

then the transparent cover
and gasket.
Screws (5)
CD721
3. Disconnect four connectors

from the LED circuit boards.
Connector
LED Circuit Board

Cover (4)
CD722
4. Disconnect the D203 and

LH201 connectors.
5. Remove the JCP3 connector
from the bracket.
D203 Connector
6. Remove the harnesses from

the four clamps and then the
plug-in connectors.
Installation
Plug-in
Connector
LH201
Connector
JCP3
Connector
Plug-in
Clamps (4) Connector
CD723
9.1.5 LED Circuit Board Assembly Replacement

Removal

and gasket.
Screws (5)
CD721
3. Disconnect the D203

connector.
D203 Connector
CD1116
4. Wear the grounding

wristband on your wrist and
connect the other end to the
carrier base.
Screws (4)
LED Circuit Board

from the LED circuit board.
then the LED circuit board.
Connectors (4)
Grounding Wristband
CD724
7. Remove the four spacers

and spring washers from the
LED circuit board assembly.
Spring Washers (4)
Spacers (4)
Installation
NOTE: Take care not to pinch the
wires.
Do not touch to the surface
of the LED.
1) Menu 43L LED Light

Amount Adjustment
2) Menu 43J Spectral
Calibration
3) Clear the operation data in
menu 434 Operation
Information Display
CD1115
9.1.6 Peltier Element (LH201) Replacement

Removal

and gasket.
Screws (5)
CD721
3. Disconnect the LH201

connector.
LH201 Connector
CD725
4. Disconnect the LED1 and

LED4 connectors.
Screws (4)
5. Remove the four screws,

spacers, spring washers,
LED bracket and sponge.
Spacers (4)
Spring Washers (4)
LED2 Connector
LED Bracket
LED1 Connector
CD726
6. Remove the LH201

connector from the bracket
and then the Peltier element.
Heat Conduction Sheet

Peltier Element
Installation
NOTE: Face the heat conduction
sheet on the Peltier element
up.
LH201 Connector
CD727
9.1.7 Light Source Section Cover Removal/Reinstallation

Removal
OFF.
2. Remove the front upper
then the light source section
cover.
Reinstallation
Screws (2)
Light Source Section Cover

CD710
9.1.8 LTC22 Circuit Board Bracket Removal/Reinstallation

Removal
section cover (see subsection
9.1.7).
securing the bracket.
3. Disconnect the LTC4
connector from the LTC22
circuit board.
Screws (2)
4. Open the clamp and pull out

the bracket.
Bracket
Clamp
LTC4 Connector
CD711
5. Disconnect the LTC1, LTC2,

LTC3 and FAN201
connectors and remove the
bracket.
LTC2
LTC1
Reinstallation
Bracket
FAN201
LTC3
CD712
9.1.9 Light Source Cooling Fan (F201) Replacement

Removal
1. Remove the LTC22 circuit
board bracket (see subsection
9.1.8).
Screws (2)
Fan Guard
Clamps

then the fan guard and the
fan.
Installation
Fan (F201)
Install the fan in the reverse

order of removal.
CD713
9.1.10 LTC22 Circuit Board Replacement

Removal
1. Remove the LTC22 circuit
board bracket (see subsection
9.1.8).
Circuit Board Cover

then the circuit board cover.
Screws (4)
CD714

then the LTC22 circuit board.
Installation
Screws (4)

LTC22 Circuit Board
CD715
9.1.11 Plug-in Connector (on Frame) Replacement

Removal
1. Remove:
Screws (2)
Special Screws (4)
Light source unit

LTC22 circuit board bracket
Printer rear cover
screws securing the plug-in
connectors.
bracket.
CD750
4. Open the seven harness

clamps.
Clamps (7)
CD751

open the circuit board
bracket.
Screws (2)
Circuit Board Bracket
CD171
6. Disconnect the plug-in

connector harness
connectors (CTC6 to CTC10
and CTC13) from the CTC22
circuit board.
7. Open the clamps and
remove the plug-in
connectors.
Installation
CTC22 Circuit Board

CD752
9.2 Scanner Section

9.2.1 Scanner Front Cover Unit Removal/Reinstallation
Removal
supply.
Manual Film Carrier

Release Lever
Auto Film Carrier

Lock Lever

the auto film carrier lock
lever.
release lever.
Screw
Screws (2)
CD671
9.2 Scanner Section

then the scanner upper
cover.
Screws (2)
Scanner Upper Cover
CD014
9.2 Scanner Section

then the table top small
cover.
Screws (5)
Table Top Small Cover
CD672
9.2 Scanner Section

securing the cover unit.
Scanner Front Cover Unit
Screws (4)
CD673
9.2 Scanner Section

securing the side of the
cover unit.
8. Disconnect the scanner
cooling fan (F216)
connector.
Screws (3)
Screws (2)

and then the cover unit.
Fan Connector
Reinstallation
Reinstall the cover unit in the
Scanner Front Cover Unit
CD674
9.2 Scanner Section
9.2.2 Scanner Rear Cover Removal/Reinstallation

Removal
Scanner Rear Cover

and then the scanner rear
cover.
F216 Connector
3. Remove the F216 connector

from the cover bracket.
Reinstallation
Screws (3)
CD697
9.2 Scanner Section
9.2.3 Scanner Cooling Fan (F216) Replacement

Removal
Clamp
Screws (2)
2. Remove the fan harness

from the clamp.
then the louver and the fan.
Louver/Fan (F216)
CD675
9.2 Scanner Section
Installation
Louver

NOTE: Install the fan so that its
arrow points up.
Install the louver so that its
installation direction is as
shown.
Fan (F216)
Arrow
CD676
9.2 Scanner Section
9.2.4 CCD Unit Removal/Reinstallation

Removal
Screws
2. Loosen one screw and

then the CCD cover.
CCD Cover
Screw (Loosen)
CD677
9.2 Scanner Section
3. Disconnect the JSA8, JSA9,

PZ201 and PZ202
connectors.
Coaxial Cable
PZ202

securing the harness
clamps.
5. Open the harness clamp.
PZ201
Screw
/Clamp
6. Disconnect the coaxial

cable.
JSA9
JSA8
Screw/Clamp
CD678
9.2 Scanner Section

connector.
M203 Connector
CD679
9.2 Scanner Section
8. Disconnect the JSA7

connector.
JSA7 Connector
CD680
9.2 Scanner Section
9. Loosen the four screws and

remove the two dustproof
covers.
Screws (4)

then the CCD unit.
Dustproof Cover (2)
Screws (4)
CD681
9.2 Scanner Section
Reinstallation
Reinstall the CCD unit in the reverse order of removal.
When the unit has been replaced, perform the following adjustments after reinstallation.
1) CCD Data Setup
2) Piezoelectric voltage adjustment (see subsection 9.4.6).
3) Menu 43E Optical Axis Adjustment (see subsection 5.4.9).
4) Menu 43F Optical Magnification Calibration (see subsection 5.4.10).
5) Menu 432 Focus Calibration (see subsection 5.4.2).
6) Menu 433 Focus Position Adjustment (see subsection 5.4.3).
7) Menu 441 Mask Position Adjustment (see subsection 5.5.1).
8) Pixel Correction
9) Clear Piezoelectric actuator operating time in menu 434 (see subsection 5.4.4).
9.2 Scanner Section
9.2.5 Shutter Home Position Sensor (D215) Replacement

Removal
1. Remove the CCD unit (see
subsection 9.2.4).
then the sensor bracket.
Screws (2)
Sensor Bracket
CD682
9.2 Scanner Section
3. Remove the sensor from the

bracket.
from the sensor.
Sensor (D215)
Installation
Connector

order of removal.
Bracket
CD683
9.2 Scanner Section
9.2.6 Shutter Drive Motor (M203) Replacement

Removal
subsection 9.2.4).
Screws (2)

then the shutter drive motor.
Installation
order of removal.
Shutter Drive Motor (M203)
CD684
9.2 Scanner Section
9.2.7 Shutter/Gear Replacement

Removal
Special Screw

subsection 9.2.4).
2. Remove the special screw,
spring washer and shutter.
Special Screw
Shutter
Gear
3. Remove the special screw

and gear.
Lock Washer
Installation
Install the shutter and gear in
CD685
9.3 Lens Unit

9.3.1 Lens Home Position Sensor (D214) Replacement
Removal
JSA6 Connector
Screws (2)
2. Disconnect the JSA6

connector.
Sensor Bracket
CD686
9.3 Lens Unit

from the sensor.
Connector
Installation
order of removal.
1) Menu 43F Optical
2) Menu 432 Focus
Calibration
Adjustment
Screw
Sensor (D214)
Bracket
CD687
9.3 Lens Unit
9.3.2 Lens Unit Removal/Reinstallation

Removal
subsection 9.2.4).
Lens Cover

and then the lens cover.
Screws (3)
CD688
9.3 Lens Unit
3. Disconnect the JSA6 and

M202 connectors.
M202 Connector
JSA6 Connector
CD690
9.3 Lens Unit
4. Remove the boot.

and then the lens unit.
Lens Unit
Screws (3)
Boot
CD689
9.3 Lens Unit
Reinstallation
Reinstall the lens unit in the reverse order of removal.
When the unit has been replaced, perform the following adjustments after installation.
1) *Menu 43D Lens Registration (see subsection 5.4.8).
2) Menu 43B Carrier Inclination Display (see subsection 5.4.6).
3) Menu 43E Optical Axis Adjustment (see subsection 5.4.9).
4) Menu 43F Optical Magnification Calibration (see subsection 5.4.10).
7) Menu 441 Mask Position Adjustment (see subsection 5.5.1).
*: Perform when lens unit has been replaced.
9.3 Lens Unit
9.3.3 Lens Drive Motor (M202) Replacement

Removal
1. Remove the lens unit (see
subsection 9.3.2).
2. Cut the cord tie.
Motor (M202)
3. Loosen the two motor

mounting screws and
remove the two tension
springs.
Screws (2)
Tension
Springs (2)
4. Remove the motor.
Cord Tie
CD691
9.3 Lens Unit
Installation
Screws (2)
NOTE: Temporarily tighten the two
motor mounting screws.
Turn the motor shaft several
turns and tighten the two
screws.
1) Menu 43F Optical

2) Menu 432 Focus
Calibration (see subsection 5.4.2).
5.4.3).
Motor Shaft
CD693
9.4 Conjugate Length Variable Section/Circuit Board Section

9.4.1 Conjugate Length Variable Section Home Position Sensor (D211)/
Upper and Lower Limit Sensor (D212 and D213) Replacement
Removal
Sensor Bracket
1. Remove the scanner rear

2. Move the conjugate length
drive base and remove the
three screws securing the
sensor bracket.
from each sensor.
Drive Base
Connectors (3)
Screws (3)
CD695
4. Remove the sensor from the

bracket.
Sensor (D213)
Installation
order of removal.
Sensor (D211)
Sensor (D212)
1) Menu 432 Focus

5.4.3).
Bracket
CD696
9.4.2 Conjugate Length Variable Motor (M201) Replacement

Removal
Motor
(M201)
2. Lower the conjugate length

drive base.
Screws (3)

connector and remove the
motor connector from the
bracket.
Connector
Bracker

and then the motor.
M201 Connector
CD698
Installation
Install the motor in the reverse order of removal.
After installation, perform the following adjustments.
9.4.3 Conjugate Length Variable Gear Replacement

Removal
1. Remove the conjugate
length variable motor (see
subsection 9.4.2).
Screws (5)
Gear Bracket

CD699

then the gears.
E-rings
Installation
order of removal.
1) Menu 432 Focus
Gears

5.4.3).
CD700
9.4.4 ADC22 Circuit Board Replacement

Removal
Cable Connector
Clamp (5)
2. Disconnect the two cable

connectors and coaxial
cable from the circuit board.
Coaxial Cable
3. Open the five clamps.
Cable Connector
CD701

the cord tie bracket.
Cord Tie Bracket
5. Loosen the three screws and

then the circuit board box.
Screw
Screws (3)
Connector
Circuit Board
CD702

then the circuit box cover.
Circuit Board Box Cover
Screws (6)
CD703

then the ADC22 circuit
board.
Screws (6)
Installation
ADC22 Circuit Board
CD704
9.4.5 PZR22 (Piezo Power Supply) Circuit Board Replacement

Removal
Clamp
Screws (2) (Loosen)

the clamp and open the
clamp.
3. Loosen the two screws and
remove one screw securing
the circuit board bracket.
Screw/Clamp
Screw (Remove)
CD705

remove the screw and then
the bracket and circuit board
box cover.
Screws (2) (Loosen)
Bracket
Screws (2)
(Remove)
CD706

6. Disconnect the PZR1 to
PZR3 connectors.
then the PZR22 circuit
board.
PZR3
Screws (4)
Installation
Piezo electric voltage
adjustment (see subsection 9.4.6).
PZR1
PZR2
Clamps (2)
CD707
9.4.6 Piezo Electric Voltage Adjustment

1. Remove the PZR22 circuit
board box cover (see subsection
9.4.5).
Monitor
2. Loosen the four screws

securing the monitor
supports and face the
monitor screen to the rear as
shown.
CD1083
3. Record the voltage data

shown in the label on the
CCD unit.
CCD Unit
4. Turn ON the main power

supply and the built-in circuit
breaker and press the
START switch to start up the
system.
Voltage Data
CD1080
5. Proceed to the next page of

the menu 43A I/O Check
screen.
6. Click the [ON] buttons for
Piezoelectric actuator 1
and Piezoelectric actuator
2.
7. X Voltage (1) Adjustment

PZR22 Circuit Board
1) Measure the DC voltage

between the test pin TP4 X
out and TP3 out on the
PZR22 circuit board.
TP4 Xout q
TP3 Out
CD1081
2) Adjust the voltage to the

value (1) indicated in the
label attached to the CCD
unit by turning the VR1 XADJ.
VR1 (X-ADJ)
CD1084
8. Y Voltage (2) Adjustment

PZR22 Circuit Board
1) Measure the DC voltage

between the test pin TP5 Y
out and TP3 out on the
PZR22 circuit board.
TP5 Yout w
TP3 Out
CD1082
2) Adjust the voltage to the

value (2) indicated in the
label attached to the CCD
unit by turning the VR2 YADJ.
supply.
VR2 (Y-ADJ)
10. Reinstall the removed parts.
CD1085
10. PAPER SUPPLY SECTION

Parts Location
10.1 Paper Magazine
10.1.1
10.1.2
10.1.3
10.1.4
10.1.5
Paper End Sensor Plate Replacement

Magazine Drive Gear Replacement
Nip Roller Replacement
Paper End Sensor (D311) Replacement
Magazine ID Sensor Section Cover Removal/
Reinstallation
10.1.6 Magazine ID Sensor (D306 to 310) Replacement
10.1.7 Magazine Door Detecting Interlock Switch
(D322) Replacement
10.2 Paper Magazine Table

10.2.1
Magazine Table Front Cover Removal/Reinstallation

10.2.2 Magazine Table Setting Gear Replacement
10.2.3 Magazine Setting Bevel Gear Replacement
10.2.4 Magazine Table Unit Removal/Reinstallation
10.3 Paper Supply Drive Section

10.3.1
Paper Supply Drive Unit Removal/Reinstallation
10.3.2
10.3.3
Paper Supply Motor (M301) Replacement

Paper Supply Drive Belt Replacement
10.4 Cutter Unit

10.4.1
10.4.2
10.4.3
Paper Splice Sensor (D301) Replacement

Cutter Unit Replacement
Cutter Home Position Sensor 1/2 (D312/D313)
Replacement
10.4.4 Cutter Drive Motor (M307) Replacement
Parts Location
Paper Supply Drive Unit
Papre Supply Motor
(M301)
Paper Supply
Drive Unit
Magazine ID Sensors
(D306 to D310)
Paper Magazine
Magazine End Sensor Plate
Magazine Drive Gear
Nip Roller
Slide Arm
Magazine Table Unit
Magazine Table
Front Cover
Magazine Table Setting Gear
Magazine Set Lever

Magazine Door Detecting Interlock Switch (D322)
CD814
Parts Location
Paper End Sensor (D311)
Cutter Home
Position Sensor 1
(D312)
Paper Splice
Sensor (D301)
Cutter Unit
Cutter Home Position

Sensor 2 (D313)
Cutter Drive Motor

(M307)
CD815-1
10.1 Paper Magazine

10.1.1 Paper End Sensor Plate Replacement
Removal
securing the magazine exit
cover.
Screws (3)
Magazine Exit Cover
CD753
10.1 Paper Magazine
2. Remove the magazine exit

cover by pulling it toward
front side.
Magazine Exit Cover
CD754
10.1 Paper Magazine
3. Remove the end sensor

plate.
End Sensor Plate
CD755-1
10.1 Paper Magazine
Installation
1. Align the holes in the end
sensor plate with the screw
and the steel plate as
shown.
Screw
Steel Plate
End Sensor Plate
CD755
10.1 Paper Magazine
2. Insert the latch release pin

into the hole in the magazine
exit cover.
Latch Release Pin
End Sensor Plate
3. Align the end sensor plate

with the slot in the magazine
exit cover and install the
cover.
Magazine Exit Cover
EZ1843
10.1 Paper Magazine
4. Tighten the three screws

while pressing the magazine
exit cover as shown.
Screws (3)
5. Make sure there is no

clearance between the
magazine exit cover and the
magazine.
NOTE: Paper fogging may result if
there is clearance.
Magazine Exit Cover
EZ1844
10.1 Paper Magazine
6. Make sure the end sensor

plate moves smoothly by
pushing it by finger and
freely returns to the original
position when it is released.
7. Place the magazine upright
and make sure the sensor
plate is protruded 10.5mm or
more from the magazine.
More than
10.5mm
End Sensor Plate
EZ1845
10.1 Paper Magazine
10.1.2 Magazine Drive Gear Replacement

Removal
remove the gear.
2. Remove the drive pin from
the shaft.
Gear
Installation
Install the gear in the reverse
order of removal.
Pin
E-ring
CD756
10.1 Paper Magazine
10.1.3 Nip Roller Replacement

Removal
1. Place the paper magazine
up side down and remove
the six screws securing the
nip roller assembly.
Screws (6)
EZ1902
10.1 Paper Magazine
2. Release the latches and

open the magazine gently
while holding the lid cover.
Lid Cover
EZ1903
10.1 Paper Magazine
3. Remove the lid cover.
Lid Cover
EZ1904
10.1 Paper Magazine
4. Remove the nip roller

assembly.
Nip Roller Assembly
EZ1905
10.1 Paper Magazine

then the stainless steel
guide plate.
NOTE: Be careful not to distort the
stainless steel guide plate.
Stainless Steel
Guide Plate
Screws (4)
EZ1906
10.1 Paper Magazine
6. Remove two nip springs

each form both ends.
NOTE: Mark the coil springs since
there are two types of springs
Inner roller springs:Strong
Outer roller springs:Weak
Spring (Weak)
Spring (Strong)
Spring (Strong)
Spring (Weak)
EZ1907
10.1 Paper Magazine
7. Remove the four bearings

and then the two nip roller
shafts from the bracket.
Nip Roller Shafts
Bearings (4)
Spectacle Guides
EZ1911
10.1 Paper Magazine
8. Remove the four outside Erings and then the four

rollers and two spectacle
guides.
E-rings (4)
Rollers (4)
Spectacle Guides
EZ1910
10.1 Paper Magazine
Installation
Nip Roller Shafts
NOTE: Install the rollers and four
bearings so that the holes in
the spectacle guides are
positioned as shown in the
figure below.
Bearings (4)
Spectacle Guides
EZ1911
10.1 Paper Magazine
Position the flanges on the

bearings between the
spring arms and the side
plates.
Install the nip springs in
their correct positions.
Spring Arms
Nip Spring
(Weak)
Nip Spring
(Strong)
EZ1912
10.1 Paper Magazine
Install the nip roller

assembly on the magazine
so that its rollers align with
the ones on the magazine.
Nip Roller Assembly
EZ1913
10.1 Paper Magazine
10.1.4 Paper End Sensor (D311) Replacement

Removal
1. Perform the post-operational
checks and turn the built-in
circuit breaker and the main
power supply OFF.
D311 Connector

connector from the sensor.
3. Remove the sensor by
releasing its locking tabs.
Installation
order of removal.
D311 Sensor
CD381
10.1 Paper Magazine
10.1.5 Magazine ID Sensor Section Cover Removal/Reinstallation

Removal
Screws (Loosen)
1. Remove the feed section

2. Loosen the two screws,
then the magazine ID sensor
section cover.
Reinstallation
NOTE: Take care not to pinch the
wire harness.
Magazine ID Sensor
Section Cover
Screws (Remove)
CD382
10.1 Paper Magazine
10.1.6 Magazine ID Sensor (D306 to 310) Replacement

Removal
1. Remove the magazine ID
sensor section cover (see
subsection 10.1.5).
from the sensor.
Connector
CD383
10.1 Paper Magazine

Screws (2)
Sensor Bracket
CD384
10.1 Paper Magazine

then the sensor circuit
board.
Screws (2)
5. Disconnect the wire harness

Wire Harness
Sensor Circuit Board
CD385
10.1 Paper Magazine

and then the sensor circuit
board bracket, four springs
and sensor shafts.
Screws (3)
Sensor Shafts (4)

Springs (4)
Sensor Circuit Board Bracket
CD386
10.1 Paper Magazine
Installation
Screws (2)
NOTE: Tighten the two screws while

pressing the circuit board
toward the arrow direction.
Sensor Circuit
Board
CD1060
10.1 Paper Magazine
10.1.7 Magazine Door Detecting Interlock Switch (D322) Replacement

Removal
Screws (2)

then the switch bracket.
Switch Bracket
CD395
10.1 Paper Magazine

connector from the switch.
4. Remove the spring and Ering and then the switch.
D322 Connector
Installation
Switch
Install the switche in the reverse

order of removal.
E-ring
CD394

10.2.1 Magazine Table Front Cover Removal/Reinstallation
Removal
the magazine setting lever.
Magazine Setting Lever
Screw
CD368

and then the magazine table
front cover.
Reinstallation
Screws (3)
Magazine Table Front Cover
CD369
10.2.2 Magazine Table Setting Gear Replacement

Removal
Stainless Steel Plate
1. Remove the magazine table

four tapping screws and then
the stainless steel plate.
Screws (4)
Tapping Screws (4)
CD370
3. Loosen the five screws

securing the guide rollers
and remove the sliding plate.
Guide Rollers (2)
Screws (5)
CD371
4. Remove the four magazine

rests and two brackets.
Magazine Rests (4)

then the guide plate.
Screws (4)
Brackets
Guide Plate
CD372
6. Remove the three E-rings

and then the two gears and
the sliding arm/gear.
E-rings (3)
Sliding Arm/Gear
Gears
CD373

the shaft, bearing and rubber
roller.
then the gear from the
sliding arm.
Screw
Gear
Rubber
Roller
Screws (2)
Bearing
Shaft
EZ038
Installation
Guide Pin
Sliding Arm
NOTE: Loosen the two screws and

adjust the clearance
between the stop of the
bevel gear and the
adjustment bracket to 0 mm
by moving the bracket.
Tighten the two screws
securely.
0 mm
Stop
Screws (2)
Adjustment Bracket
CD374
Align the roller on the

sliding arm with the guide
groove in the sliding plate
and tighten the two screws
while lightly pushing the
guide rollers as shown.
Then tighten the three plate
screws.
After tightening the screws,
make sure the magazine
table moves smoothly
without rattle.
Sliding Plate
Guide Groove
Screws (2)
Roller
Screws (3)
Guide Rollers (2)
CD375
10.2.3 Magazine Setting Bevel Gear Replacement

Removal
Screws (4)

then the bevel gear bracket.
Bavel Gear Bracket
CD376

then the bracket and the
gear.
Screws (2)
Bracket
Gear
CD377

the bearing, shaft, bevel
gear, pin and bearing.
Shaft
Bearing
E-ring
Bearing
Pin
Bevel Gear
CD378
Installation
Shaft

<Magazine Table Position
Adjustment>
1) Point the mark on the
gear to the right side and
engage the gears so that the
flat surface on the shaft is
horizontal.
Mark
CD1057
2) Move the magazine table to

the right side fully and install
the gear bracket.
3) Make sure the flat surface on
the shaft is horizontal.
Shaft
Gear Bracket
CD1058
4) If the flat surface is not

horizontal, remove the gear
bracket, point the mark
to the left side and engage
the gears.
Mark
CD1059
5) Adjust the adjustment

bracket position so that the
clearance between the stop
on the bevel gear and the
adjustment bracket is 0 mm
when the magazine setting
lever is turned to the
magazine setting position.
Magazine Seting Lever
Stop
Screws (2)
Adjustment Bracket
0 mm
CD380
6) Turn the magazine setting

lever clockwise fully and
make sure there is no
clearance between the lever
and the magazine table front
cover.
Magazine Setting Lever
CD379
10.2.4 Magazine Table Unit Removal/Reinstallation

Removal
1. Remove the front lower
Magazine Table Unit

then the magazine table unit.
Reinstallation
Reinstall the unit in the reverse
order of removal.
Screws (2)
CD387

10.3.1 Paper Supply Drive Unit Removal/Reinstallation
Removal
Paper Supply Drive Unit
1. Remove:
Magazine ID sensor
10.1.5).
Magazine table unit (see
subsection 10.2.4).
connector.
then the paper supply drive
unit.
M301 Connector
Screws (6)
Reinstallation
order of removal.
CD388
10.3.2 Paper Supply Motor (M301) Replacement

Removal
1. Remove the paper supply
drive unit (see subsection 10.3.1).
Motor (M301)

then the motor.
Installation
Screws (4)
NOTE: Align the motor pulley with the

drive belt when installing the
motor.
CD389
10.3.3 Paper Supply Drive Belt Replacement

Removal
1. Remove the paper supply
motor (see subsection 10.3.2).
Screws (7)
2. Remove the seven screws

and then the belt cover.
Belt Cover
CD390
3. Remove the spring, collars,

belt tensioner and pulleys.
Pulleys
Collar
Spring
Belt Tensioner
CD391
4. Remove the screw, pulley,

shaft and the drive belt.
Drive Belt
Shaft
Installation
Pulley
Install the drive belt in the

Screw
CD392
10.4 Cutter Unit

10.4.1 Paper Splice Sensor (D301) Replacement
Removal
unit (see subsection 10.2.4).
Cutter Paper Guide

then the cutter paper guide.
Screws (4)
CD396
10.4 Cutter Unit

connectors.
Screw
4. Remove the screws and

then the sensor and the
sensor LED.
Installation
Sensor LED
(D301L)
Connector

order of removal.
Screw
Sensor
(D301P)
Connector
CD397
10.4 Cutter Unit
10.4.2 Cutter Unit Replacement

Removal
1. Remove the magazine ID
sensor section cover (see
subsection 10.1.5).
JCU3
JCU1
2. Disconnect the four

connectors.
JCU4
JCU2
CD399
10.4 Cutter Unit

clamps.
then the cutter unit.
Screws (2)
NOTE: Do not try to loosen the red
painted screws.
Cutter Unit
Clamp
CD400
10.4 Cutter Unit
Installation
NOTE: Tighten the two cutter
mounting screws while
pressing the cutter unit
against the left side.
Cutter Unit
Screws (2)
CD1064
10.4 Cutter Unit
10.4.3 Cutter Home Position Sensor 1/2 (D312/D313) Replacement

Removal
Sensor Cover
1. Remove the cutter unit (see

subsection 10.4.2).

Sensor 2 (D313)

the sensor cover and the
bracket.
Screw
Bracket

Sensor 1 (D312)
CD1061
10.4 Cutter Unit

from the sensor.
4. Release the locking tabs and
remove the sensor from the
bracket.
Installation
order of removal.
Connector
Sensor (D312/D313)
CD1062
10.4 Cutter Unit
10.4.4 Cutter Drive Motor (M307) Replacement

Removal
1. Remove the cutter unit (see
subsection 10.4.2).
Connector
Motor (M307)
2. Disconnect the motor

connector.
then the motor.
Installation
order of removal.
Screws (2)
CD1063
11. PAPER FEED SECTION

Parts Location
11.2.8
11.1 Feed Section Cover
11.2.9
11.1.1
11.1.2
11.1.3
11.1.4
11.1.5
11.1.6
11.1.7
Left Cover Removal/Reinstallation

Feed Section Upper Door Detecting Interlock
Switch (D324) Replacement
Feed Section Lower Door Detecting Interlock
Switch (D323) Replacement
Feed Section Front Cover Removal/
Reinstallation
Front Upper Cover Detecting Interlock Switch
(D325A/B) Replacement
Printer Suction Fan 3 (F310) Replacement
Printer Suction Fan 1/2 (F308/F309)
Replacement
11.2 Feed Unit

11.2.1
11.2.2
11.2.3
11.2.4
11.2.5
11.2.6
11.2.7
Feed Unit Removal/Reinstallation

Feed Nip Motor (M313) Replacement
Feed Nip Home Position Sensor (D319)
Replacement
Feed Drive Motor 2 (M303) Replacement
Feed Drive Motor 1 (M302) Replacement
Entrance Guide Plate Roller Replacement
Entrance Side Feed Roller Replacement
11.2.10
11.2.11
11.2.12
Back Printer Section Guide Plate Roller

Replacement
Back Printer Section Feed Roller
Replacement
Exit Guide Plate Roller Replacement
Exit Feed Roller Replacement
Feed Nip Cam Shaft Replacement
11.3 Back Printer Section

11.3.1
11.3.2
11.3.3
11.3.4
Back Printer Unit Removal/Reinstallation

Ink Ribbon Drive Gear Replacement
Back Printer Set Sensor (D320) Replacement
Back Printer Entrance Sensor (D302)
Replacement
11.3.5 Back Printer Head/JNE20 Circuit Board
Replacement
11.3.6 Back Printer Head Clearance Adjustment
11.3.7 Platen Replacement
Parts Location
Exit Feed Rollers
Exit Guide Plate Rollers
Paper Feed Unit
Feed Nip Home
Position Sensor
(D319)
Feed Nip Motor
(M313)
Back Printer Section
Guide Plate Rollers
Feed Nip Cam Shaft

Feed Drive Motor 2 (M303)
Back Printer Unit
Back Printer Set Sensor (D320)
Back Printer Entrance Sensor (D302)
Back Printer Head/JNE20 Circuit Board
Back Printer Head Clearance Adjustment
Platen
Ink Ribbon Drive Gear

Feed Drive Moter 1 (M302)

Feed Rollers
Entrance Guide
Plate Rollers
Entrance Side Feed Rollers

Feed Section Upper Door Detecting Interlock Switches (D324A/B)
Feed Section Lower Door Detecting Interlock Switch (D323)
Front Upper Cover Detecting Interlock Switches (D325A/B)
Cutter Unit
Printer Suction Fan 3 (F310)
Printer Suction Fans 1/2 (F308/F309)
CD815

11.1.1 Left Cover Removal/Reinstallation
Removal
Screws (14)

OFF.
Tapes (3)
2. Secure the feed section

upper and lower doors using
the three tapes.
3. Remove the fourteen screws
and then the left cover.
Left Cover
Reinstallation
CD861
11.1.2 Feed Section Upper Door Detecting Interlock Switch (D324) Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the left cover (see
subsection 11.1.1).
Screws
(2)

Switch
Bracket
CD458

from the switches.
4. Remove the spring and Ering and then the two
switches.
Connectors
Spring
Installation
Install the switches in the
Switches (2)
E-ring
CD459
11.1.3 Feed Section Lower Door Detecting Interlock Switch (D323) Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the left cover
Switch Bracket
Screws (2)

CD1066

from the switch.
Connector
Spring
4. Remove the spring and Ering and then the switch.
Installation
Install the switch in the reverse
order of removal.
Switch
E-ring
CD1067
11.1.4 Feed Section Front Cover Removal/Reinstallation

Removal
Screws (6)

then the feed section front
cover.
Feed Section
Front Cover
CD363
3. Disconnect the F310

connector.
Reinstallation
F310 Connector

CD364
11.1.5 Front Upper Cover Detecting Interlock Switch (D325A/B) Replacement

Removal
front cover (see subsection 11.1.4)
Interlock Switch Cover

then the interlock switch
cover.
Screws (4)
CD1065

Screws (2)
Switch Bracket
CD393
4. Disconnect the D325A and

D325B connectors from the
switches.
D325A and D325B Connectors
5. Remove the spring and Ering and then the two

switches.
Switches
Installation
E-ring
Install the switches in the

CD394
11.1.6 Printer Suction Fan 3 (F310) Replacement

Removal
Connector
Screws (2)
Fan (F310)
2. Remove the connector from

the bracket and open the
clamp.
then the fan and three
louvers.
Bracket
Clamp
Louvers (3)
CD365
Installation
Arrow
NOTE: Point the arrow on the fan to

the inside of the printer.
Install the louvers
alternately as shown.
Louvers (3)
CD366
11.1.7 Printer Suction Fan 1/2 (F308/F309) Replacement

Removal
Screws (4)
1. Remove the left cover

then the fan bracket.
Fan Bracket
CD193
3. Disconnect the two fan

connectors.
Fan Connectors
CD194
4. Remove the two connectors

from the bracket.
Fan Guards (2)

Fan (F309)

then the clamp bracket, fan
guards, fans and six louvers.
6. Remove the fan harnesses
from the three clamps.
Fan (F308)
Louvers(6)
Connector
Screws (4)
Clamp Bracket
Clamps (3)
CD195
Installation
Arrow

the inside.
Install each louver
Louvers (6)
CD196
11.2 Feed Unit

11.2.1 Feed Unit Removal/Reinstallation
Removal
Connector Cover
1. Remove the left cover (see

subsection 11.1.1).
Screws (2)
CD405
11.2 Feed Unit
3. Disconnect the JHA5 and

JHK1 connectors and open
the clamp.
Clamp
JHK1
JHA5
CD406
11.2 Feed Unit
4. Disconnect the JHA1 to

JHA4 connectors.
JHA1

then the feed unit.
JHA2
JHA4
JHA3
Reinstallation
Reinstall the feed unit in the
Feed Unit
Screws (4)
CD407
11.2 Feed Unit
11.2.2 Feed Nip Motor (M313) Replacement

Removal
Motor (M313)
1. Remove the feed unit (see

subsection 11.2.1).
M313 Connector
Gear

the idler gear.
connector.
then the motor.
Installation
Screws(3)

order of removal.
E-ring
CD407-1
11.2 Feed Unit
11.2.3 Feed Nip Home Position Sensor (D319) Replacement

Removal
Locking Tabs

connector from the sensor.
remove the sensor.
Installation
order of removal.
Sensor (D319)
D319 Connector
CD408
11.2 Feed Unit
11.2.4 Feed Drive Motor 2 (M303) Replacement

Removal
subsection 11.2.1).
Back Printer
Section Cover

then the back printer section
cover.
Screws (6)
CD409
11.2 Feed Unit

connector.
Clamps (2)
Motor (M303)
E-rings (2)

then the two gears.
then the motor.
Installation
order of removal.
M303
Connector
Screws (2)
CD410
11.2 Feed Unit
11.2.5 Feed Drive Motor 1 (M302) Replacement

Removal
subsection 11.2.1).
Screws (4)

then the entrance bracket.
Entrance Bracket
CD433
11.2 Feed Unit

clamp.
Motor Gear
Clamp

connector.
5. Release the locking tab and
remove the gear.
Screw

the motor gear.
Motor
Connector
E-ring
Spacer
E-ring
CD434
11.2 Feed Unit

then the motor
Motor (M302)
Installation
order of removal.
Screws (2)
CD435
11.2 Feed Unit
11.2.6 Entrance Guide Plate Roller Replacement

Removal
subsection 11.2.1).
Screws (2)

then the guide plate.
CD436
11.2 Feed Unit

then the entrance guide
plate.
4. Disconnect the back printer
entrance sensor connector.
Sensor Connector
Entrance Guide Plate

Screws (4)
CD437
11.2 Feed Unit
5. Remove the springs and Erings and then the rollers

and bearings.
Springs
Rollers
Installation
order of removal.
E-rings
Bearings
Rollers
Roller Shafts
Springs
CD438
11.2 Feed Unit
11.2.7 Entrance Side Feed Roller Replacement

Removal
1. Remove the entrance guide
plate (see subsection 11.2.6).
Bracket

connector.
then the bracket.
Screws (2)
M302 Connectors
CD439
11.2 Feed Unit

remove the three gears and
collar.
Locking
Tab
Gears (3)
CD440
11.2 Feed Unit
5. Remove the bearing and

then the three roller shafts
toward the front.
E-ring
Roller Shafts (3)

the bearing from the roller
shaft.
Bearings (3)
Installation
order of removal.
Bearings
(3)
CD441
11.2 Feed Unit
11.2.8 Back Printer Section Guide Plate Roller Replacement

Removal
subsection 11.2.1).
then the back printer section
guide plate.

Guide Plate
Screws (4)
CD425
11.2 Feed Unit
3. Remove the springs,

bearings and two nip rollers.
4. Remove the E-rings and
then the two roller shafts.
Springs (2)
Roller Shafts (2)
Bearings (2)
CD442
11.2 Feed Unit
Installation
Holes/Locating Half Punches (2)
NOTE: Align the holes in the guide

plate with the two locating half
punches.
CD432
11.2 Feed Unit
11.2.9 Back Printer Section Feed Roller Replacement

Removal
1. Remove the back printer
section guide plate (see
subsection 11.2.8).
Screws (2)
2. Remove the ink ribbon

cassettes.
then the harness bracket.
Harness Bracket
CD444
11.2 Feed Unit

the one-way gear from the
upper roller shaft.
One-way Gear

remove the gear from the
lower roller shaft.
Gear
E-ring
CD445
11.2 Feed Unit
6. Remove the bearings and

then the two roller shafts
toward the front.
the bearing from the roller
shaft.
Bearings (2)
Installation
order of removal.
E-rings (2)
Bearings (2)
Roller Shafts (2)
CD446
11.2 Feed Unit
11.2.10 Exit Guide Plate Roller Replacement

Removal
subsection 11.2.1).
E-ring
2. Remove the two guide plate

return springs.
3. Remove the two nip springs.
the guide plate.
Nip
Springs (2)
Guide Plate Return Springs (2)
CD447
11.2 Feed Unit

guide plate.
Stainless Steel Guide Plate
Screws (4)
CD448
11.2 Feed Unit
6. Remove the two bearings, Ering, bearing and roller shaft.

E-ring

bearing form the roller shaft.
the roller shaft.
Bearing
E-ring
Roller Shaft
Bearing
Installation
order of removal.
E-ring
Roller Shaft
Bearings (2)
CD449
11.2 Feed Unit
11.2.11 Exit Feed Roller Replacement

Removal
1. Remove the exit guide plate
2. Remove the return spring
from the registration unit
drive gear bracket.
Return Spring
CD450
11.2 Feed Unit

the roller shaft toward the
rear side.
Roller Shaft
Bearing
E-ring
CD451
11.2 Feed Unit
4. Remove the E-ring, then the

bracket, two bearings,
spacer, one-way gear,
bearing and collar.
Gear
Spacer
Bearing Shaft
Collar

the gear shaft, spacer and
gear.
Bearing
Installation
order of removal.
Screw
Bracket
E-ring
One-way Gear
Bearings (2)
Spacer
CD452
11.2 Feed Unit
11.2.12 Feed Nip Cam Shaft Replacement

Removal
1. Remove the exit guide plate
Gear
Screw
Gear

3. Remove the E-ring and gear.
4. Remove the E-ring, sensor
plate and gear.
Sensor
Bracket
Sensor
Plate
E-ring
E-ring
CD453
11.2 Feed Unit
5. Remove the E-ring and idler

gear.
E-ring
Idler Gear

the one-way gear from the
roller shaft.
E-ring
One-way Gear
CD454
11.2 Feed Unit

bearing.
Bearing
8. Remove the E-ring securing

the cam and then the cam
shaft and two cams.
E-ring
Installation
Install the cam shaft in the
E-ring
Cam Shaft
Cams (2)
CD455

11.3.1 Back Printer Unit Removal/Reinstallation
Removal
1. Remove feed drive motor 2
Screws (2)

cassettes.
plain washers and then the
back printer unit.
Back Printer
Unit
Plain Washers (2)
CD411

Connector Cover
Screws (2)
CD412
5. Disconnect the S301 and

S302 connectors.
S301 Connector
S302 Connector
CD413
Reinstallation
NOTE: Place the two poly-sliders to
the pivots under the back
printer unit base as shown.
Poly-slider
Poly-slider
CD424
11.3.2 Ink Ribbon Drive Gear Replacement

Removal
1. Remove the back printer unit
Locking Tab
2. Remove the locking tab and

then the gear.
Gear
CD414
3. Remove the spring, two Erings, two bearings and then

the gear shaft.
Gear Shaft
Spring
Bearings (2)
E-rings (2)
CD415
4. Withdraw the shaft and

remove the gear and four
bearings.
Gear

remove the gear.
Shaft
Gear
Bearings (4)
CD416
6. Remove the E-ring, and then

the one-way gear, ink ribbon
drive shaft, two bearings and
two spacers.
Ink Ribbon Drive Shaft

Bearings (2)
Spacer
Spacer
One-way
Gear
E-ring
CD417

unit.
E-ring
Gear
CD418

and then the gear bracket.
9. Remove the gear shaft
Gear Bracket
Screws (3)
CD419
10. Remove the E-ring, then the

bearing, spacer, gear,
bearing and two poly-sliders.
Poly-slider
Bearing
Gear
Spacer
Bearing
E-ring
CD420

the idler gear.
E-ring
Installation
order of removal.
Idler Gear
CD421
11.3.3 Back Printer Set Sensor (D320) Replacement

Removal
2. Release the locking tab and
roller shaft.
3. Move the roller shaft slightly
toward the front.
Roller Shaft
Gear
Locking Tab
CD1068

then the sensor.
from the sensor.
Screws (2)
Installation
order of removal.
Sensor (D320)
Connectors
CD422
11.3.4 Back Printer Entrance Sensor (D302) Replacement

Removal
Locking Tabs

connector.
remove the sensor.
Installation
order of removal.
Connector
Sensor (D302)
CD423
11.3.5 Back Printer Head/JNE20 Circuit Board Replacement

Removal
1. Remove the back printer
section guide plate (see
subsection 11.2.8).
cassettes.
Clamps
CD427

Screws (2)
Connector Cover
CD426

the front head.
Front Head
Screw
EZ073

then the front head bracket.
Front Head Bracket
Screws (2)
EZ074

the rear head.
Rear Head
Screw
EZ075

the JNE20 circuit board
bracket.
Screw
JNE20 Circuit Board Bracket
EZ076
9. Disconnect the S301 and

S302 connectors from the
JNE20 circuit boards.
S301
S302
EZ077
10. Disconnect the print

harnesses form the circuit
boards.
Print Harness (2)
EZ078

and then the JNE20 circuit
boards.
JNE20 Circuit Board
Installation
Screws (2)
Install the circuit boards and

heads in the reverse order of
removal. After installation,
perform the following
adjustments.
Back printer head clearance
adjustment (see subsection 11.3.6).
Clear Back Printing Quantity
on the menu 45Q Clearing
Selected Printer Operation
Data screen (see subsection
5.6.22).
EZ079
11.3.6 Back Printer Head Clearance Adjustment

subsection 11.2.1).
Platen

cassettes.
3. Align the jig with the platen
and screw in its screw fully,
and then loosen it one turn.
NOTE: The screw should be
loosened one turn, or correct
clearance cannot be obtained.
Jig
1. Screw in fully.
2. Loosen one turn.
CD428
4. Loosen the three screws

slightly.
Screws (3)
5. Turn the cam clockwise to

increase head clearance.
Cam
CD429
6. Insert the feeler gauge

between the rear head and
the platen and adjust the
head clearance by turning
the cam.
Specified Clearance: 0.50 to
0.59mm
Screws (3)
Feeler Gauge
7. Tighten the three screws,
Cam
CD430
8. Loosen slightly the two

screws securing the front
head.
9. Turn the cam clockwise to
increase clearance.
10. Insert the feeler gauge
between the front head and
the platen.
11. Adjust the clearance by
turning the cam.
Specified Clearance: 0.50 to
0.59mm
12. Tighten the two screws.
13. Recheck the clearances.
14. Remove the jig and reinstall
the removed parts.
Screws (2)
Cam
Feeler Gauge
CD431
11.3.7 Platen Replacement

Removal
1. Open the feed section upper
door.
Screws (2)

then the platen bracket.
Platen Bracket
CD443

then the springs and platens.
Installation
Install the platens in the reverse
order of removal.
After installation, adjust the back
printer head clearance
E-rings (2)
Platens (2)
Springs (2)
GD1078
12. REGISTRATION AND EXPOSURE SECTIONS

Parts Location
12.3.7
12.1 Cover and Electrical Parts

12.1.1
12.1.2
12.1.3
Top Inner Cover Removal/Reinstallation

Laser Unit Cooling Fan (F314) Replacement
Printer Exhaust Fan 3/4 (F315/F316)
Replacement
12.1.4 JML22 Circuit Board Replacement
12.1.5 AOM Driver Replacement
12.2 Laser Unit

12.2.1
12.2.2
Laser Unit Removal/Reinstallation

Anti-Dust Fan 1/2/3 (FAN1/FAN2/FAN3)
Replacement
12.3 Sub-scanning Unit

12.3.1
12.3.2
12.3.3
Sub-scanning Unit Removal/Reinstallation

Sub-scanning Steel Belt Replacement
Sub-scanning Drive Motor (M305)
Replacement
12.3.4 Sub-scanning Nip Home Position Sensor
(D317) Replacement
12.3.5 Sensor Cover Removal/Reinstallation
12.3.6 Pre-exposure Sensor (D304P) Replacement
12.3.8
12.3.9
12.3.10
12.3.11
12.3.12
12.3.13
12.3.14
Pre-exposure Sensor LED (D304L)

Replacement
Sub-scanning Nip Motor Cooling Fan (F301)
Replacement
Exposure Section Temperature Sensor
(THA1) Replacement
Sub-scanning Nip Motor (M311) Replacement
Front Feed Rubber Belt Replacement
Rear Feed Rubber Belt Replacement
Nip Belt Replacement
Nip Roller Replacement
12.4 Registration Unit

12.4.1
12.4.2
12.4.3
12.4.4
12.4.5
12.4.6
12.4.7
12.4.8
Registration Unit Removal/Reinstallation

Width Detecting Home Position Sensor
(D315) Replacement
Register Sensor LED (D303L) Replacement
Register Sensor (D303P) Replacement
Width Sensor (D314P) Replacement
Width Detecting Bracket Removal/
Reinstallation
Width Sensor LED (D314L) Replacement
Width Detecting Guide Shaft Replacement
12.4.9 Width Detecting Belt Replacement

12.4.10 Register Nip Home Position Sensor (D316)
Replacement
12.4.11 Register Nip Motor (M309) Replacement
12.4.12 Register Drive Motor (M304) Replacement
12.4.13 Width Detecting Drive Motor (M310)
Replacement
12.4.14 Entrance Nip Roller Replacement
12.4.15 Exit Nip Roller Replacement
12.4.16 Guide Plate Removal/Reinstallation
12.4.17 Entrance Feed Roller Replacement
12.4.19 Roller Nip Cam Shaft Replacement
12.4.20 Roller Nip Cam Arm Replacement
Parts Location
Sub-scanning Unit
Sub-scanning Nip Motor

Cooling Fan (F301)
Locating Jig
Sub-scanning Steel Belt
Rear Feed Rubber Belt
Sub-scanning Drive Motor

(M305)
Sub-scanning
Nip Motor (M311)
Nip Belt
Front Feed Rubber Belt
Nip Roller
Exposure Section
Temperature Sensor
(THA1)
Sub-scanning Nip
Pre-exposure Sensor
(D304P)
Sensor LED (D304L)
Home Position Sensor (D317)
CD817
Parts Location
Roller Nip Cam Shaft
Register Nip Motor (M309)
Register Nip Home
Entrance Feed Roller
Position Sensor
(D316)
Entrance Nip Roller
Roller Nip Cam Arm

Width Detecting Sensor (D314P)
Guide Plate
Width Home Position Sensor
(D315)
Width Detecting Sensor LED

(D314L)
Width Detecting Guide Shaft
Register Drive Motor
(M304)
Register Unit
Exit Feed Roller
Width Detecting Belt

Exit Nip Roller
Width Detecting
Drive Motor (M310)
Register Sensor (D303P)

Register Sensor LED (D303L)
CD816

12.1.1 Top Inner Cover Removal/Reinstallation
Removal
1. Remove:
Top Inner Cover
Left cover (see subsection 11.1.1).

7.2.2).
2. Loosen the seven screws,
remove the eight screws and
then the top inner cover.
Reinstallation
Screws (7)
(Loosen)
Screws (8)
(Remove)
CD009
12.1.2 Laser Unit Cooling Fan (F314) Replacement

Removal
1. Remove:
Screws (Loosen)

Printer rear cover (see subsection
18.2.1).
remove one screw and then
the fan (F313) bracket.
Fan Bracket
Screw (Remove)
CD177
3. Open the clamp.

4. Disconnect the DR1 and
DR2 connectors from the
motor driver.
the cover.
Screws
(Loosen)
Connectors
Screws
(Remove)
Clamp
CD190

from the LDD22 and LDA22
circuit boards.
Circuit Board
Bracket
LDD22
Circuit Board
LDA22
Circuit Board

securing the circuit board
bracket and open the clamp.
8. Remove the circuit board
bracket by shifting it to the
left.
Screws (4)
Clamp
CD475

then the fan/start switch
bracket.
Fan/Sart
Switch
Bracket
Screws (4)
CD474

and then the bracket by
shifting it to the left.
Screws (3)
Bracket
CD470

connector.
Screws (4)

then the fan duct.
Fan Duct
F314 Connector
CD471

and then the duct cover.
Screws (3)
Duct Cover
CD472
14. Remove the fan connector

from the duct.
Screws (3)

and then the fan.
Installation
order of removal.
Connector
Fan (F314)
CD473
12.1.3 Printer Exhaust Fan 3/4 (F315/F316) Replacement

Removal
1. Remove:
Screws (11)

7.2.2).
2. Remove the eleven screws
and then the fan bracket.
Fan Bracket
CD465
3. Disconnect the F315 and

F316 connectors.
F316 Connector
F315 Connector
CD466
4. Open the clamp and remove

the fan connector from the
bracket.
Screws (2)

then the three louver and the
fan.
Fan Connector
Bracket
Clamp
CD467
Installation
Louvers (3)

the outside.
Install the louvers
Arrow
CD468
12.1.4 JML22 Circuit Board Replacement

Removal
1. Remove the top inner cover
Grouding Wristband
2. Wear the grounding

wristband on the left wrist
and connect the other end to
the exposure section frame.
Exposure Section Frame
CD483

Screws (6)
JMC22 Circuit Board
Installation
CD553
12.1.5 AOM Driver Replacement

Removal
AMO Connector
2. Disconnect the AOM

connector and G and B
cables from the driver.
B Cable
G Cable
CD554

then the AOM driver.
Installation
Screws (4)
Install the AOM driver in the

AOM Driver
CD555
12.2 Laser Unit

12.2.1 Laser Unit Removal/Reinstallation
Removal
2. Disconnect the R, G and B
cables.
B Cable
R Cable
G Cable
CD478
12.2 Laser Unit
3. Wear the wristband on the

wrist and connect the other
end to the exposure section
frame.
Grouding Wristband
Exposure Section Frame
CD483
12.2 Laser Unit
4. Disconnect the JML1, JML2

and JML4 to JML9
connectors from the JML22
circuit board.
JML1
JML4
JML2
JML5
JML6
JML7
5. Open the clamp.

JML8
JML9
Clamp
CD479
12.2 Laser Unit
6. Remove the short

connectors from the clamp.
Clamp
Short Connectors
CD480
12.2 Laser Unit
7. Connect the short

connectors to the JML4 and
JML7 connectors of the
harness.
JML7
JML4
Short Connectors
CD481
12.2 Laser Unit
8. Disconnect the JROS

connector.
JROS Connector
CD482
12.2 Laser Unit
9. Loosen the one screw and

remove the three screws
securing the laser unit.
Screws
(Loosen)
Screws (3)
(Remove)
CD484
12.2 Laser Unit
10. Grasp the handles and

remove the laser unit.
Handles (2)
Laser Unit
CD485
12.2 Laser Unit
Reinstallation
NOTE: Align the two holes in the
laser unit base with the
locating pins on the frame.
After reinstallation, perform
1)Menu 45H Main Scanning
Position Adjustment/Laser
Beam/Synchronous Rough
5.6.15).
2)Menu 45J Laser Beam
Synchronous Fine
Adjustment Print (see
subsection 5.6.16).
3)Menu 454 G, B Laser
(SHG) Optimal Temperature
Setup (see subsection 5.6.4).
4)Menu 16 Print Condition
Upkeep
Laser Unit
Pins (2)
Holes (2)
CD050
12.2 Laser Unit
12.2.2 Anti-Dust Fan 1/2/3 (FAN1/FAN2/FAN3) Replacement

Removal
then the air duct.
Air Duct
Screws (4)
CD476
12.2 Laser Unit
3. Disconnect the fan

connectors and remove
them from the bracket.
NOTE: Take care not to apply
excessive force to the
vibration isolation rubbers.
Excessive force may shorten
the rubber's service life.
Screws (2)

then the fan.
Fan Connector (3)
Arrow
Installation
Fan
NOTE: Install the fan with the arrow

pointing down.
CD477

12.3.1 Sub-scanning Unit Removal/Reinstallation
Removal
1. Remove the laser unit (see
subsection 12.2.1).
Screws (2)

then the air duct.
Air Duct
CD486
3. Disconnect the JHU1 to

JHU4 connectors.
Screws (8)
Screws (2)

securing the grounding
wires.
5. Remove the eight screws
and then the sub-scanning
unit.
NOTE: Always remove the subscanning unit with the
damper mount rubbers.
Remove the sub-scanning
unit while moving it toward
the scanner section to
prevent damage to the two
transparent resin plates on
the register unit.
JHU1
JHU2
Grouding
Wires (2)
JHU4
JHU3
CD487
Reinstallation
Locating Jigs (2)
NOTE: Insert the two locating jigs
into the holes in the frame.
Position the frame so that
the locating jigs fall into the
locating holes smoothly and
tighten the sub-scanning
unit mounting screws. Make
sure the jigs can be
removed easily.
Note the route of the
grounding wires.
Reinstall the sub-scanning
unit while moving it toward
the scanner section to
prevent damage to the two
transparent resin plates on
the register unit.
When the sub-scanning unit
has been replaced, enter
new unit data by following
the steps below.
Frame
Screws (8)
CD488
1) Record the data indicated in

the label attached to the
right side of the nip release
knob.
Sub-scanning Nip Roller

1 Release:
mm
1 Pressure:
pulse
2 Pressure:
mm
CD959
2) Proceed to the menu 45M

Printer Mechanism Fine
Adjustment screen.
3) Enter the data recorded in
the data boxes as shown
below.
Enter the 1 Release value
in the Sub-scanning nip
roller 1 release timing box.
Enter the 1 Pressure value
roller 1 pressure timing box.
Enter the 2 Pressure value
roller 2 pressure timing box.
4) Click [OK].
12.3.2 Sub-scanning Steel Belt Replacement

Removal
1. Remove the sub-scanning
Screws (2)

then the belt cover.
Belt Cover
CD489
3. Loosen the screw securing

the belt tensioner.
4. Move the belt tensioner
toward the loosening
direction and secure it with
the screw.
Steel Belt
5. Wear gloves and remove the

steel belt.
NOTE: Wear clean gloves when
handling the belt and pulley.
Fingerprints on the belt and
pulley may cause slippage or
corrosion of the belt.
Belt
Tensioner
Screw
CD490
Installation
NOTE: Take care not to bend or
damage the belt as this may
shorten its service life.
Perform the belt alignment
adjustment by following the
steps below.
<Belt Alignment Adjustment>

1. Loosen the screw securing
the belt tensioner.
2. Rotate the pulley several
turns and tighten the screw.
Screw
Pulley
CD491
3. Rotate the pulley 30 times or

more and make sure the belt
is in the center of the pulley.
Pulley
About 30 turns
CD492
4. If the belt is off the center of

the pulley more than 0.5
mm, adjust it by following the
steps below.
Screws (2)
Steel Belt
Pulley
1) Loosen the two screws

securing the pulley bracket.
2) Adjust the belt position by
turning the adjusting screw.
When the belt moves outside:
Turn the screw clockwise.
When the belt moves inside:
Turn the screw
counterclockwise.
3) Repeat steps 1 to 3.
Adjustment Screw
4) If necessary, repeat steps 1

to 3.
CD493
12.3.3 Sub-scanning Drive Motor (M305) Replacement

Removal
steel belt (see subsection 12.3.2).
then the motor cover.
Screws (2)
Motor Cover
CD494

connector.
4. Remove the two nuts (5.5
mm) and then the motor.
M305 Connector
Installation
order of removal.
After installation, clear Subscanning motor operation on
the menu 45Q Clearing
Selected Printer Operation
Data screen.
Motor (M305)
Nuts (2)
CD495
12.3.4 Sub-scanning Nip Home Position Sensor (D317) Replacement

Removal
from the sensor.
remove the sensor.
Installation
Locking Tabs

order of removal.
Connector
Sensor (D317)
CD496
12.3.5 Sensor Cover Removal/Reinstallation

Removal
then the sensor cover.
Reinstallation
Sensor Cover
Screws (2)
CD497
12.3.6 Pre-exposure Sensor (D304P) Replacement

Removal
Screw
1. Remove the sensor cover

Sensor (D304P)
Cover

from the sensor.
the cover, the sensor and the
spacer.
Installation
order of removal.
Connector
Spacer
CD498
12.3.7 Pre-exposure Sensor LED (D304L) Replacement

Removal
Cover
2. Place the sub-scanning unit

up side down.
then the cover.
Screws (2)
CD521

from the sensor.
the sensor LED and the
spacer.
Connector
Screw
Sensor LED (D304L)
Installation
Spacer
CD522
12.3.8 Sub-scanning Nip Motor Cooling Fan (F301) Replacement

Removal
Fan (F301)
1. Remove the pre-exposure

sensor (see subsection 12.3.6).
connector.
then the fan.
Installation
order of removal.
F301 Connector
Screws (2)
CD499
12.3.9 Exposure Section Temperature Sensor (THA1) Replacement

Removal
1. Remove the sensor cover
Temperature Sensor (THA1)
2. Disconnect the THA

connector.
then the temperature sensor.
Installation
order of removal.
THA Connector
Screws (2)
CD501
12.3.10 Sub-scanning Nip Motor (M311) Replacement

Removal
connector.
Screws (2)

then the motor.
Installation
Motor (M311)

order of removal.
Conector
CD502
12.3.11 Front Feed Rubber Belt Replacement

Removal
Front Feel Rubber Belt
2. Rotate the knob and remove

the front feed rubber belt.
Installation
Install the belt in the reverse
order of removal.
Knob
CD504
12.3.12 Rear Feed Rubber Belt Replacement

Removal
steel belt (see subsection 12.3.2).
Hex. Socket Head Setscrews (2)

head setscrews (2 mm) and
remove the pulley.
Pulley
CD505
3. Remove the rear feed rubber

belt.
Installation
order of removal.
Rear Feed Rubber Belt
CD506
12.3.13 Nip Belt Replacement

Removal
2. Rotate the knob and remove
the nip belt.
Installation
order of removal.
Knob
Nip Belt
CD507
12.3.14 Nip Roller Replacement

Removal
1. Remove:
Exposure section
temperature sensor (see
subsection 12.3.9).
Front feed rubber belt (see
subsection 12.3.11).
Rear feed rubber belt (see
Nip belt (see subsection 12.3.13).
2. Remove the front E-ring and
then the nip release knob,
pulley, pin and bearing.
Bearing
Pin
Pulley
Nip Release Knob
E-ring
CD508
3. Remove the rear E-ring and

then the bearing and the
cam shaft.
Cam Shaft
Bearing
E-ring
CD509
4. Remove the four nip springs.

Inlet Side Springs (Stronger)(Black Marked)
NOTE: The inlet side nip springs are
shorter (stronger) and have
black marks.
Springs (4)
CD510
5. Remove the front and rear

screws.
Screws (2)
CD512
6. Remove the shaft, two

collars, two arms and spring.
Screw
Collar
Spring
Arms
Collars (2)
Shaft
CD511
7. Remove the four springs and

then the two spring brackets.
Screws (4)
Spring Bracket (2)
CD513
8. Remove the two nip rollers.

9. Remove the two hex. socket
head setscrews and then the
two pulleys.
Hex. Socket Head

Setscrews (2)
Installation
order of removal.
Pulleys (2)
Nip Rollers
CD515

12.4.1 Registration Unit Removal/Reinstallation
Removal
JRE2
2. Disconnect the JRE1 and

JRE2 connectors.
JRE1
CD523

then the registration unit.
Reinstallation
Screws (4)

order of removal.
NOTE: After installation, perform
menu 45S Side Register
Calibration (see subsection
5.6.24).
CD524
12.4.2 Width Detecting Home Position Sensor (D315) Replacement

Removal
1. Remove the registration unit
Connector

from the sensor.
releasing the locking tabs.
Installation
order of removal.
Sensor (D315)
Locking Tabs
CD525
12.4.3 Register Sensor LED (D303L) Replacement

Removal
Connector

2. Place the unit up side down.
the sensor LED and spacer.
Screw

Installation
Sensor LED (D303L)
Spacer
CD526
12.4.4 Register Sensor (D303P) Replacement

Removal
Screw

from the sensor.
Cover

the cover, sensor and
spacer.
Installation
order of removal.
Sensor (D303P)
Spacer
CD527
12.4.5 Width Sensor (D314P) Replacement

Removal
the cover, sensor and
spacer.
Screws
Cover
Sensor
(D314P)

from the sensor.
Installation
order of removal.
Spacer
CD528
12.4.6 Width Detecting Bracket Removal/Reinstallation

Removal
Screw

the belt holder.
Belt Holder
CD546
3. Disconnect the M304, M310

and D303L connectors.
4. Open the seven clamps.
then the width detecting
bracket.
Width Sensor Bracket

D 303L
Clamps (7)
M 304
M 310
Screws (4)
CD547
6. Disconnect the flat cable

connector.
Screws (2)

securing the flat cable.
Connector
Reinstallation
Flat Cable
CD548
12.4.7 Width Sensor LED (D314L) Replacement

Removal
1. Remove the width detecting
Connector

the sensor LED.
Installation
Sencor LED

Screw
CD549
12.4.8 Width Detecting Guide Shaft Replacement

Removal
1. Remove:
Screws (3)
Width sensor (see subsection

12.4.5).
Width detecting bracket (see
subsection 12.4.6).
and then the motor cover.
Motor Cover
CD532

the knob from the roller
shaft.
Guide Shaft

the gear.
then the guide shafts.
Installation
Install the shafts in the reverse
order of removal.
Gear
Screws (4)
E-ring
Knob
Screw
CD550
12.4.9 Width Detecting Belt Replacement

Removal
1. Remove the width detecting
Gear

the gear.
Belt
3. Remove the belt.
Installation
order of removal.
E-ring
CD556
12.4.10 Register Nip Home Position Sensor (D316) Replacement

Removal
Connector

releasing the locking tabs.
from the sensor.
Loking Tabs
Installation
order of removal.
Sensor (D316)
CD537
12.4.11 Register Nip Motor (M309) Replacement

Removal
Motor Connector
Cord Tie

connector and cut the cord
tie.
then the motor.
Installation
order of removal.
Motor (M309)
Screws (2)
CD529
12.4.12 Register Drive Motor (M304) Replacement

Removal
Screws (3)

Motor Cover
CD532

connector.
then the motor.
Installation
order of removal.
Connector
Motor (M304)
Screws (2)
CD533
12.4.13 Width Detecting Drive Motor (M310) Replacement

Removal
Screws (2)

connector.
then the motor.
Installation
order of removal.
Motor (M310)
Motor Connector
CD535
12.4.14 Entrance Nip Roller Replacement

Removal
Nip Roller

3. Remove the two fulcrum
screws and then the both
arms.
Nip Springs (2)
4. Remove the nip roller.

Arm
Installation
order of removal.
Fulcrum Screws (2)
Arm
CD538
12.4.15 Exit Nip Roller Replacement

Removal
1. Remove the width sensor
Screws (3)

Motor Cover
CD532

4. Remove the two fulcrum
screws and then the both
arms.
Nip Springs (2)
Arm (2)
5. Remove the nip roller.
Installation
order of removal.
Fulcrum Screws (2)
CD539
12.4.16 Guide Plate Removal/Reinstallation

Removal]
1. Remove:
Entrance nip roller (see
Exit nip roller (see subsection
12.4.15).
Two front nip cam arms (see
the knob.
E-ring
Gear
Knob

the gear.
securing the upper guide
plate fulcrum shafts.
Screws
Screws (2)
Nip Roller
CD540
5. Remove the upper guide

plate and two fulcrum shafts.
Screws (2)
Upper Guide Plate
Fulcrum Shafts (2)
CD541

then the two fulcrum shafts,
springs and guide plate.
Screws (2)
Reinstallation
Reinstall the guide plates in the
Guide Plate
Springs (2)
Fulcrum Shofts (2)
CD542
12.4.17 Entrance Feed Roller Replacement

Removal
1. Remove the rear E-ring,
spacer, gear, two spacers
and bearing.
Gear
E-ring

bearing from the shaft.
3. Remove the roller shaft.
Installation
order of removal.
Spacer
Bearing
Bearing
E-ring
Spacers
Roller shaft
CD544

Removal
1. Remove the rear E-ring and
then the bearing.
E-ring

then the bearing.
3. Remove the roller shaft.
Installation
Bearing

order of removal.
Bearing
Feed Roller Shaft
E-ring
CD545
12.4.19 Roller Nip Cam Shaft Replacement

Removal
1. Remove the nip motor
bearings and then the cam
shaft.
Roller Nip Cam Shaft
Bearings (2)
Installation
Install the cam shaft in the
E-rings (2)
CD551
12.4.20 Roller Nip Cam Arm Replacement

Removal
Arms
1. Remove the roller nip cam

shaft (see subsection 12.4.19).
E-rings (2)
Arms
2. Remove two E-rings each,

then the arms and spring.
E-rings (2)
Installation
Install the arms in the reverse
order of removal.
Spring
Spring
CD552
13. PRINTER EXIT SECTION

Parts Location
13.1 Printer Exit Unit
13.1.1
13.1.2
13.1.3
13.1.4
13.1.5
13.1.6
13.1.7
13.1.8
13.1.9
13.1.10
13.1.11
13.1.12
13.1.13
Printer Exit Unit Removal/Reinstallation

Exit Section Up/Down Belt Home Position
Sensor (D321) Replacement
Exit Section Up/Down Belt Motor (M314)
Replacement
Exit Drive Motor (M306)/Gear Replacement
Stainless Steel Exit Guide Plate Removal/
Reinstallation
Processor Entry Sensor (D305P)
Replacement
Processor Entry Sensor LED (D305L)
Replacement
Up/Down Belt Motor Bracket Removal/
Reinstallation
Up/Down Gear Replacement
Up/Down Arm Removal/Reinstallation
Lower Exit Belt Bracket Removal/
Reinstallation
Upper Exit Belt Bracket Removal/
Reinstallation
Upper Exit Belt/Pulley Replacement
13.1.14
13.1.15
13.1.16
13.1.17
Lower Pulley Drive Belt Replacement

Lower Exit Belt/Pulley Replacement
Lower Exit Belt Height Adjustment
Up/Down Belt Height Adjustment
Parts Location
Up/Down Arm
Up/Down Belt
(Height Adjustment)
Up/Down Belt Home Position Sensor

(D321)
Up/down Gears
Up/Down Belt Motor (M314)
Exit Drive Motor (M306)
Lower Pulley Drive Belt

Lower Exit Belts/Pulleys
(Height Adjustment)
Processor Entry Sensor

(D305P)
Upper Exit Belts/Pulleys

Printer Exit Unit
Processor Entry Sensor LED

(D305L)
CD819

13.1.1 Printer Exit Unit Removal/Reinstallation
Removal
OFF.
2. Open the magazine door
and remove the front upper
cover.
Front Upper Cover

Magazine Door
CD006
3. Remove the screw and lower

the exit belt section by
releasing the hook.
Screw
4. Turn the lever to the left.
Lever
Exit Belt Section
CD557
5. Turn the gear

counterclockwise to lower
the up/down belt.
Gear
Up/Down Belt
CD1069

Connector Cover
Screws (2)
CD558
7. Disconnect the JSY1 and

JSY2 connectors.
JSY1
Screw

the printer exit unit.
Reinstallation
order of removal.
Printer Exit Unit
JSY2
CD559
When the printer exit unit has

been replaced, enter new unit
data by following the steps
below.
1) Record the data in the label
attached to the front of the
printer exit unit.
Exit Up/Down Belt

Downward fine adjustment value: pulse
Upward fine adjustment value:
pulse
CD960

Printer Mechanical Fine
Adjustment screen.
3) Enter the data recorded as
shown below.
Enter the Downward fine
adjustment value in the Exit
section up/down belt
downward fine-adj. box.
Enter the Upward fine
adjustment value in the Exit
section up/dpwn belt upward
fine-adj. box.
4) Click [OK].
13.1.2 Exit Section Up/Down Belt Home Position Sensor (D321) Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the printer exit unit
from the sensor.
remove the sensor.
Installation
Connector

order of removal.
up/down belt height adjustment
Sensor (D321)
(see subsection 13.1.17)
CD560
13.1.3 Exit Section Up/Down Belt Motor (M314) Replacement

Removal
Screws

clamp.
3. Using a long shank
screwdriver, remove the two
screws and then the motor.
Connector
Clamp
Motor (M314)
CD561

the gear from the motor.
Installation
Motor (M314)

order of removal.
E-ring
Gear
CD562
13.1.4 Exit Drive Motor (M306)/Gear Replacement

Removal
clamp.
Motor Connector
Clamp
Motor
Bracket

Screws (4)
CD563

the connector from the
bracket.
E-ring
Gear

bracket.
Screws (2)

Connector
Clamp
Motor (M306)
CD564

the three gears.
Installation
Install the motor and gears in
Gears (3)
E-rings (2)
CD565
13.1.5 Stainless Steel Exit Guide Plate Removal/Reinstallation

Removal
Upper Exit Guide Plate

then the upper exit guide
plate.
then the lower exit guide
plate.
Reinstallation
Reinstall the guide plates in the
Screws (2)
Lower Exit Guide Plate
Screws (2)
CD566
13.1.6 Processor Entry Sensor (D305P) Replacement

Removal
1. Remove the stainless exit
guide plates (see subsection
13.1.5).
Screw

and open the clamp.
the sensor bracket.
Sensor Bracket
Clamp
Connector
CD1070
4. Remove the countersunk

sensor.
Installation
Install the sensor/LED in the
Countersunk
Flat Head Screw
Sensor (D305P)
CD1071
13.1.7 Processor Entry Sensor LED (D305L) Replacement

Removal
1. Remove the stainless exit
guide plates (see subsection
13.1.5).
Sensor LED Bracket

then the sensor LED
bracket.
Screws (2)
CD1072

connector.
sensor LED.
Installation
Countersunk
Flat Head Screw

Connector
Sensor LED (D305L)
CD1073
13.1.8 Up/Down Belt Motor Bracket Removal/Reinstallation

Removal
Up/Down Shaft

up/down shaft and then the
bearing.
Spring
Bearing
E-ring
CD568

5. Disconnect the M314 and
D321 connectors.
Screws (3)

and then the motor bracket.
Reinstallation
D321
Clamps (2)
M314
CD569
13.1.9 Up/Down Gear Replacement

Removal
1. Remove the up/down belt
motor bracket (see subsection
13.1.8)
Gear Bracket
Screws (2)
E-ring
Bearing

the bearing.
the gear.
E-ring
Idler Gear
CD570

the sensor plate.
the bearing, cam/gear shaft
and idler gear.
Installation
E-ring
Sensor Plate
Bearing

order of removal.
E-ring
Gear/Cam Shaft
CD571
13.1.10 Up/Down Arm Removal/Reinstallation

Removal
E-rings (2)
Spring

the arm to the link.
then the up/down arm.
Screw
Up/Down Arm
CD572
5. Remove the E-ring and shat

and pulley.
Reinstallation
Reinstall the arm in the reverse
order of removal.
E-ring
Pulley
Shaft
CD573
13.1.11 Lower Exit Belt Bracket Removal/Reinstallation

Removal
1. Remove the stainless guide
plates (see subsection 13.1.5).
Upper Bracket
Deltight Screws
2. Remove the two deltight and

one double-sems screws
and then the upper bracket.
Double Sems Screw
CD574
3. Remove the two springs and

open the three harness
clamps.
Clamps (3)
Springs (2)
CD588
4. Open the clamp and

disconnect the D305P
connector.
Exit Side
Upper Bracket
D305P Connector

then the exit side upper
bracket.
Clamp
Screws (2)
CD586
6. Remove the lower spring.
Spring
CD587

the gear.
Hex. Socket Head

Setscrews (2)

the boss.
bearings.
Boss
Bearings (2)
E-ring
Gear
CD585
10. Open the six clamps and

disconnect the two motor
connectors and sensor
connector.
Clamps (6)
Motor Connector
Motor
Connector
Sensor Connector
CD1074

then the two nip release
shafts.
12. Remove the lower exit belt
bracket.
Screws (2)
Nip Release
Shafts (2)
CD1075
Reinstallation
NOTE: Insert a 150mm stainless
steel ruler (T=0.5mm)
between the E-ring and the
bearing and tighten the two
hex. socket head setscrews
while pressing the lower
belt drive shaft and the boss
to remove bearing play.
After reinstallation, adjust
lower exit belt height (see
150mm Ruler
(T=Approx. 0.5mm)
E-ring
Boss
Hex. Socket Head
Setscrew
Bearing
13.1.12 Upper Exit Belt Bracket Removal/Reinstallation

Removal
Bearings (2)
2. Remove the two E-rings.

Shift the bearing and remove
the upper exit belt bracket.
Reinstallation
E-rings (2)
Upper Exit Belt Bracket
CD589
13.1.13 Upper Exit Belt/Pulley Replacement

Removal
1. Remove the upper exit belt
2. Remove the three E-rings
and then the three gears.
Spring
Bearing
3. Remove the spring, gear

bracket and bearing.
Gear Bracket
Gears (3)
E-rings (3)
CD575

opposite side and then the
bearing and the exit pulley
shaft.
5. Remove the two small
bearings from the pulley
shaft.
E-ring
Bearings (4)
Exit Pulley Shaft

Small Bearings (2)
CD576
6. Remove the four E-rings,

four bearings and then the
two entrance pulley shafts.
E-rings (4)
Bearings (4)
Entrance Pulley Shafts (2)
CD577

then the entrance side
bracket.
Entrance Side Bracket
8. Remove the three belts.
Screws (5)
Installation
NOTE: Install the belts so that their
manufacturer mark surface
faces the inside.
Belts
CD578
13.1.14 Lower Pulley Drive Belt Replacement

Removal
2. Remove the gear and pin.
3. Remove the belt, pulley and
pin.
Belt
Pin
Pulley
Pin
Gear
CD579
4. Remove the entrance side

belt.
Installation
Install the belts in the reverse
order of removal.
Entrance Side Belt
CD580
13.1.15 Lower Exit Belt/Pulley Replacement

Removal
1. Remove the lower pulley
drive belts (see subsection
13.1.14).
Hex. Socket Head

Setscrews (2)
Entry Belts (6)
Pully Shaft

the boss.
3. Remove the three E-rings,
bearings and two spring
brackets.
4. Remove the two pulley belts
and entry belts.
E-rings (3)
Spring Brackets (2)

Bearings (4)
CD581
5. Remove the E-rings,

spacers, pulleys, poly-sliders
and pins from the shaft.
Poly-sliders (5)
E-rings (2)
Spacers (2)
Shaft
Short
Pulleys (4)
Long Pulleys (2)
Rubber Spacers (5)
Pins (5)
CD582
6. Remove the E-ring, two

bearings and then the exit
side lower pulley shaft.
E-rings (2)
Bearings (2)
7. Remove the belts.

8. Disassemble the pulley
shaft.
Poly-sliders
(10)
Marking
Surface
Long
Pulleyrs (2) Short
Pulleys (4) Bearings
(12)
Rollers with
One-way Clutch (5)
CD583
9. Remove the E-ring, pulley,

bearing and then the
entrance side pulley shaft.
Screw
Bearing

the gear from the pulley
shaft.
Knob

bearing.
Pulley
E-ring
E-ring
Entrance Side Pulley Shaft
CD584
Installation
NOTE: Install the pulleys (black) with one-way clutch to the exit side lower pulley shaft so that their making surfaces face
toward the front (short end) side.
Insert a sheet of print paper (approximately 0.2 mm) between the E-ring and the bearing as shown and tighten the
two hex. socket head setscrews while pressing the shaft and boss to remove bearing play.
13.1.16 Lower Exit Belt Height Adjustment

2. Place the printer exit unit on
a level surface.
3. Measure the lower exit belt
front and rear height from
the floor as shown.
Specified height:
97.20.5 mm
97.2 0.5 mm
CD1077
4. If the height exceeds the

limit, adjust by following the
steps below.
1) Loosen the two screws.
2) Adjust the height by
turning the adjusting cam.
3) Tighten the two screws.
5. Reinstall the printer exit unit.
Adjusting Cam
Screws (2)
CD1078
13.1.17 Up/Down Belt Height Adjustment

cover and turn ON the
interlock switch.
2. Proceed to the menu 45A
Printer I/O Check screen.
SM054
3. Click [Home] of M314 Exit

up/down belt motor.
4. Measure the clearance
between the up/down belt
and the lower exit belt.
Paper bent 25mm at a right angle
Specified Clearance:
252 mm
25 2 mm
CD1079-1
5. Click [Descent] of M314 Exit

up/down belt motor.
6. Measure the clearance
between the up/down belt
and the lower exit belt.
Specified Clearance:
30.5 mm
3 0.5 mm
Paper bent 3mm at a right angle
CD1079-2
7. If the clearance exceeds the

limit, adjust by following the
steps below.
Printer Mechanism Fine
Adjustment screen.
2) Change the fine adjustment
value in Exit section up/
down belt downward fine
adjustment box.
Increase the value to narrow
the clearance
Change the fine adjustment
value in Exit section up/
down belt upward fine
adjustment box.
Increase the value to widen
the clearance
8. Repeat steps 2 to 7 if
necessary.
SM066
14. PROCESSOR SECTION

Parts Location
14.1 Crossover Racks
14.1.1
Crossover Rack No.1 Disassembly/

Reassembly
14.1.2 Crossover Racks No.2 to No.5 Disassembly/
Reassembly
14.1.3 Crossover Rack No.6 Disassembly/
Reassembly
14.2 Processing Racks

14.2.1
14.2.2
14.2.3
14.2.4
Upper Guide Disassembly/Reassembly

Roller Replacement
Rack Drive Shaft Removal/Reinstallation
Rack Center Guide Replacement
14.3 Processor Drive System

14.3.1
14.3.2
14.3.3
14.3.4
14.3.5
Processor Drive Motor Bracket Removal/Reinstallation

Processor Drive Motor (M401) Replacement
Processor Drive Motor Driver Replacement
Processor Drive Bracket Removal/
Reinstallation
Drive Sprocket/Gear Replacement
14.3.6
14.3.7
14.3.8
Processor Drive Idler Sprocket Replacement

Dryer Drive Gear Replacement
Processor Drive Chain Replacement
Parts Location
Dryer Drive Gears
Processor Drive Chain
No.1 Crossover Racks
No.6
Crossover Rack
No.2 to No.5
Crossover Racks
Processor Drive
Idler Sprocket
Processing
Racks
Upper Guide Rollers
Rack Drive Shaft
Rack Center Guides
Chain
Tensioner
Motor Driver
Processor Drive Bracket
Drive Sprocket
Drive Gear
Processor Drive Motor (M401)
CD820

14.1.1 Crossover Rack No.1 Disassembly/Reassembly
Disassembly
1. Remove crossover rack No.1
by loosening the two screws.
Bearings (4)
2. Remove the auto washing

nozzle.
Coil
Springs (2)
3. Remove the two coil springs,

four C-rings ,gears and
bearings.
Gears (4)
C-rings (4)
CD221
4. Remove the roller by pulling

the roller shaft out.
four C-rings and bearings
from the roller shafts.
Reassembly
Reassemble the rack in the
NOTE: Remove the P1 solution or
water from the entrance side
two rollers on the No.1
crossover rack by wiping them
with a dry cloth. The moist
rollers on the No.1 crossover
rack may cause uneven print.
Roller Shafts (4)

Rollers (4)
Bearings (4)
Coil Springs (2)
C-rings (4)
CD222
14.1.2 Crossover Racks No.2 to No.5 Disassembly/Reassembly

Disassembly
1. Remove the crossover rack.
C-rings (4)
Coil Springs (2)

nozzle.
four C-rings and bearings.
4. Remove the rollers by pulling
the roller shaft out.
Reassembly
Reassemble the racks in the
Bearings (4)
9751
14.1.3 Crossover Rack No.6 Disassembly/Reassembly

Disassembly
1. Remove crossover rack
No.6.
Coil Spring
Gears (2)

nozzle.
3. Remove the two C-rings, two
gears, coil spring, and two
bearings for the exit roller.
4. Remove the C-ring and then
the idler gear.
C-rings (2)
C-ring
Idler Gear
CD223
5. Remove the exit roller by

pulling the roller shaft out.
Roller Shafts (4)

Rollers (4)

four C-rings and bearings.
7. Remove the four rollers by
pulling the roller shafts out.
Exit Roller
Shaft
Bearings
(8)
Reassembly
Reassemble the rack in the
C-rings (8)
Exit Rollers
C-rings
Bearings (2)
Coil Spring
CD224

14.2.1 Upper Guide Disassembly/Reassembly
Disassembly
1. Remove the screw, two
washers, bearing, gear, pin,
bearing washer and
sprocket.
Sprocket
Screw
2. Remove the gear, washer

and bearing by removing the
screws.
Gear
Washers (2)
Screw
9755
3. Remove the drive bearing by

removing the two tapping
screws.
Drive Bearing
Tapping Screws (2)
9756
4. Remove the E-ring, washer

and bearing from the
crossover rack drive shaft.
Bearing
Washer
E-ring
9757
5. Remove the gear pin by

pulling the shaft slightly, and
remove the two gears, two
bearings, and screw by
pulling the shaft out.
Pin
Gear
Bearing
9758
6. Remove the upper guide/

handle by removing the four
tapping screws.
Upper Guide/Handle
Tapping Screws (4)
9759
7. P1 rack:
Remove the gear, pin,
bearing and roller by
removing the C-ring and
pulling the shaft out.
Entrance Roller (P1 only)

Gear
C-ring
9760
Reassembly
Reassembly is essentially in the
Shaft
NOTE: Align the D-flats of the shaft

and the washer.
Washer
999d
14.2.2 Roller Replacement

Removal
1. Loosen the locking tabs and
remove the guides from both
sides.
Locking Tab
Guide
9761
2. Remove the screw, Dwasher and plain washer

and then the spiral gear and
plain washer.
Screw
D-washer
Gear
Plain Washer
Plain Washer
CD1097
3. Remove the rack drive shaft

4. Remove the coil spring, Crings, gears and bearings.
Rack Drive Shaft
Bearings
C-rings
Gear
Coil Springs
CD1098

the shaft out from the
opposite side.
C-rings (4)
Coil Springs (2)

four C-rings and bearings
from the lower turn roller
shafts.
Bearings (4)
9763

the shafts out from the
opposite side.
Bearing
C-ring
8. Remove the roller by

removing the C-ring, gear
and bearing.
Gear
9764
Installation
reverse order of removal, noting
the following.
Coil Spring Marks
1. Install shorter coil springs on

the entrance side of the
lower turn rollers and longer
ones on the exit side. Wrong
installation results in paper
jamming.
Entrance Side
Exit Side
999e

<Roller Arrangement>
Black Soft Roller (20mm)

Gray Soft Roller (20mm)
Black Hard Roller (20mm)
Gray Soft Roller (20mm)
White Soft Roller (20mm)
Gray Hard Roller (20mm)
CD225
14.2.3 Rack Drive Shaft Removal/Reinstallation

Removal
1. Remove the crossover rack
drive shaft
(see steps 1 to 5 in subsection 14.2.1).
Bearing
2. Remove the E-ring, bearing

and washer from the lower
end of the shaft.
E-ring
9766
3. Shift the middle bearing to

the lower side and remove
the shaft.
Reinstallation
Shaft
Reinstall the shaft in the reverse

order of removal.
Middle Bearing (P1, P2 only)
9767
14.2.4 Rack Center Guide Replacement

Removal
1. Loosen the locking tabs and
remove the guides.
Locking Tab
Guide
9761
2. Remove the guide by

removing the two screws.
Installation
Screws (2)
Install the new guide in the

Guide
9765

14.3.1 Processor Drive Motor Bracket Removal/Reinstallation
Removal
1. Remove the replenisher
pump section cover (see
subsection 16.2.1).
Screws (4)
Motor Bracket

connector.
Installation
Install the motor bracket in the
Motor Connector
CD265
14.3.2 Processor Drive Motor (M401) Replacement

Removal
Collar
1. Remove the processor drive

motor bracket (see subsection
14.3.1).
2. Loosen the hex. socket head
bolt (3 mm) and remove the
collar and gear.
Gear
Hex. Socket
Head Bolt (3mm)
Boss
3. Loosen the two hex socket

remove the boss and key.
Flat Key
CD266
4. Open the clamp.

5. Remove the four hex, socket
head bolts (3 mm) and then
the motor from the bracket.
Hex. Socket Head Bolts (3mm) (4)
Installation
order of removal.
Motor
(M401)
Clamp
CD267
14.3.3 Processor Drive Motor Driver Replacement

Removal
subsection 16.2.1).
Screw (Remove)
Motor Driver Bracket

connectors from the motor
driver.
3. Loosen the screw and
the motor driver bracket.
Connectors (3)
Screw (Loosen)
CD278

then the motor driver from
the bracket.
Motor Driver
Installation
Install the motor driver in the
Scews (2)
CD277
14.3.4 Processor Drive Bracket Removal/Reinstallation

Removal
1. Remove:
Clamps (4)
Circulation pump section

Replenisher pump bracket (see
subsection 16.2.2).
Processor drive motor bracket
Processor drive motor driver
2. Open the four clamps and
remove the PS2 and PS3
circulation hoses from the
clamps.
PS2 Circulation Hose
PS3 Circulation Hose
CD269

then the drive bracket from
the replenisher pump
bracket side.
Screws (2) (Loosen)
Reinstallation
Drive Bracket
Screws (2) (Remove)
CD268
14.3.5 Drive Sprocket/Gear Replacement

Removal
1. Remove the processor drive
Cover
Screws (2)

then the cover.
CD270
3. Loosen the hex. socket head

bolt (3 mm) and remove the
collar and gear.
Hex. Socket Head

Setscrews (2mm) (2)

remove the boss and key.
5. Remove the E-ring.
Boss
Flat Key
Gear
Hex. Socket Head Bolt (3mm)

Collar
CD271

lock washers and then the
sprocket.
Hex. Socket Head Screws (2)

the boss.
8. Remove the E-ring.
Screws (2)
Flat Key
Boss
Lock Washers (2)
Sprocket
CD272
9. Remove the two bearings

and shaft.
Shaft
Bearings (2)
CD273

the shaft, idler sprocket, two
bearings and spacer.
Bearings (2)
Idler Sprocket
Shaft
Spacer
E-ring
CD274
11. Remove the E-ring, spring

and tensioner.
Tensioner
E-ring
Spring
CD275

the two bearings and
sprocket.
Installation
E-ring
Bearings (2)
Sprocket
NOTE: Note the position of the

setscrews.
CD276
14.3.6 Processor Drive Idler Sprocket Replacement

Removal
1. Remove:
Screw (Loosen)
Replenisher pump section

Processor rear cover (see
subsection 15.3.1).
2. Loosen the screw and
remove the screw securing
the sprocket bracket.
Screw (Remove)
CD279
3. Disengage the chain from

the sprocket and remove the
sprocket bracket.
Sprocket
Bracket
Chain
CD281

the two bearings, sprocket
and poly-slider.
E-ring
Bearings (2)
Installation
Sprocket
Install the sprocket in the

Poly-slider
CD280
14.3.7 Dryer Drive Gear Replacement

Removal
1. Open the circuit board
Circuit Board Protection Cover

then the circuit board
protection cover.
Screws
CD262

the hose protector.
Gear Bracket

and then the gear bracket.
Screw
Screws (3)
Hose
Protector
CD263

the bearing, gear, bearing
and spacer.
the bearing, sprocket/gear,
bearing and spacer.
Spacer
Bearing
Gear
Bearing
E-ring
Installation
order of removal.
Spacer
Bearing
Sprocket/Gear
Bearing
E-ring
CD264
14.3.8 Processor Drive Chain Replacement

Circuit Board Protection Cover
2. Remove all processing

racks.
then the circuit board
protection cover.
Screws
CD262
4. Remove the clip and then

the master link from the drive
chain.
5. Connect new chain to the old
chain using the master link.
Old Chain
New Chain
Master Link
Clip
CD282
6. Install the new chain by

using the old chain as a
guide.
7. Remove the old chain from
the new chain by removing
the master link.
8. Connect the ends of the new
chain using the master link
and clip.
NOTE: Face the closed end of the
clip to the rotating direction.
Old Chain
New
Chain
CD283
15. PROCESSING SOLUTION CIRCULATION SYSTEM

Parts Location
15.3 Waste Solution System

15.3.1
15.1 Sub-tanks
15.1.1
Processing Tank Temperature Sensor

Replacement
15.1.2 Solution Level Sensor Replacement
15.2 Processing Tank Heater/

Circulation Pump Section
15.2.1
15.2.2
15.2.3
15.2.4
15.2.5
15.2.6
15.2.7
15.2.8
Circulation Pump Section Cover Removal/

Reinstallation
Front Upper and Lower Connector Cover
Removal/Reinstallation
Processing Tank Heater Cooling Fan (F403)
Replacement
Processing Tank Heater Cooling Fan (F401/
F402) Replacement
Safety Thermostat Replacement
Processing Tank Heater Replacement
Circulation Pump Replacement
Hose Connection
15.3.2
15.3.3
15.3.4
15.3.5
Processor Rear Cover Removal/

Reinstallation
Circuit Board Bracket Opening/Closing
Waste Solution Level Sensor (FS415)
Replacement
Waste Solution Tank Replacement
Waste Solution Hose Replacement
15.4 Processing Solution

Replacement
15.4.1
15.4.2
15.4.3
15.4.4
15.4.5
15.4.6
Processing Chemical Handling Precautions

Processing Rack Washing and Processing
Solution Draining
Processing Tank Washing and Processing
Rack Reinstallation
Solution Preparation Tools and Procedure
Preparing Processing Solutions (CP-48S)
with 10L kit
Preparing Processing Solutions (CP-48S)
with 4.2L kit
Parts Location
Circulation Filters
Processing Tank
Temperature Sensors
(TS401 to TS404)
Sub-tanks
P1
P2
PS1
PS2
Processing Tank Heater

Cooling Fan (F401)
Solution Level Sensors

(FS401 to FS406)
PS3
PS4
Waste Solution Tank

Safety Thermostat
(D401 to D404)
Waste Solution
Level Sensor (FS415)
H
401
H
402
PU
401
PU
402
Circulation Pumps
(PU401 to PU406)
Waste Hose
H
403
PU
403
PU
404
H
404

Cooling Fan (F403)
PU
405
PU
406
Processing Tank Heaters (H401 to H404)

Processing Tank Heater Cooling Fan (F402)
CD284
15.1 Sub-tanks
15.1.1 Processing Tank Temperature Sensor Replacement
Sensor
TS401
TS402
TS403
TS404
Tank
P1
P2
PS2
PS4
Removal
connector cover (see subsection
15.2.2).
connector.
Sensor Connector
CD345
15.1 Sub-tanks

nozzle hose.
Screw
Sensor
4. Remove the harness from

the clamp.
the sensor.
Installation
order of removal.
Clamp
Replenisher Nozzle Hose
CD346
15.1 Sub-tanks
15.1.2 Solution Level Sensor Replacement

Sensor
FS401
FS402
FS403
FS404
FS405
FS406
Tank
P1
P2
PS1
PS2
PS3
PS4
Removal
15.2.2).
connector.
Sensor Connector
CD347
15.1 Sub-tanks

nozzle hose.
Screw
Sensor
4. Remove the harness from

the clamp.
the sensor.
Installation
order of removal.
Clamp
Replenisher Nozzle Hose
CD348
15.2 Processing Tank Heater/Circulation Pump Section

15.2.1 Circulation Pump Section Cover Removal/Reinstallation
Removal
supply.
PSR Supply Port Cover
2. Open the PSR supply port

cover and remove the
circulation filter section
cover.
Circulation Filter Section Cover
CD866
3. Remove the air filter holder

from the cover.
Air Filter Holder
CD023

then the circulation filter
section cover.
Circulation Pump Section Cover
Reinstallation
Screws (5)
CD867
15.2.2 Front Upper and Lower Connector Cover Removal/Reinstallation

Removal
1. Remove the circulation
subsection 15.2.1).
remove the front upper
connector cover.
Screws (2)
Front Upper Connector Cover
CD342

remove the front lower
connector cover.
Reinstallation
Reinstall the covers in the
Front Lower
Connector Cover
Screws (2)
CD339
15.2.3 Processing Tank Heater Cooling Fan (F403) Replacement

Removal
1. Remove:
Front lower connector cover
connector.
F403 Connector
CD340

fan.
Fan (F403)
Installation
Fan Guard

NOTE: Point the arrow on the fan
inward.
Screws (2)
Inside
Arrow
CD341
15.2.4 Processing Tank Heater Cooling Fan (F401/F402) Replacement

Removal
1. Remove the front upper and
lower connector covers (see
subsection 15.2.2).
D401
D402
D403 D404

clamps.
3. Disconnect the D401 to
D404 connectors and
remove their harnesses from
the bosses on the fans.
F402 connectors.
F401
F402
Clamps (2)
Boss
CD343

fan.
Fan Guard
Fan (F401)
Fan (F402)
Installation
Screws (2)

inward.
Screws (2)
Fan Guard
Arrow
CD344
15.2.5 Safety Thermostat Replacement

Safety Thermostat
D401
D402
D403
D404
Tank
P1
P2
PS1/2
PS3/4
Safety Thermostat
(D401 to D404)
Removal
subsection 15.2.1).
2. Remove the rubber cover.
3. Disconnect the wires from
the safety thermostat.
then the safety thermostat.
Installation
Install the safety thermostat in
Wires (2)
Rubber Cover
Screws (2)
CD350
15.2.6 Processing Tank Heater Replacement

Heater
H401
H402
H403
H404
Tank
P1
P2
PS1/2
PS3/4
Removal
15.2.2).
2. H402/H403: Remove the
screw and then the cover
bracket.
Cover Bracket
Screw
CD351
3. Disconnect the heater

connector.
Heater Connector
CD352
Hoses (2)
4. Remove the rubber cover,

two screws and then the
safety thermostat from the
heater.
5. Pinch the heater inlet and
outlet hoses with the two
pinchcocks.
Pinchcocks (2)
Screws (2)
Heater
Screws (2)
6. Loosen the hose clamps and

disconnect the hoses from
the heater.
Safety
Thermostat

then the heater.
Clamps (2)
CD353
Installation
NOTE: Connect the hoses securely
After installation, clear
Heater on time in the
menu 46D Clearing
Selected Processor
Operation Data screen
15.2.7 Circulation Pump Replacement

Circulation Pump
PU401
PU402
PU403
PU404
PU405
PU406
Tank
P1
P2
PS1
PS2
PS3
PS4
Screw (Loosen)
Screw
(Remove)
Removal
15.2.2).
2. Disconnect the pump
connector.
3. Loosen the one screw,
then the connector bracket.
Connector Bracket
Pump Connector
CD354

then the pump from the
bracket.
Screws (2)
Pump
CD355
5. Pinch the inlet and outlet

hoses with the two
pinchcocks.
Hoses (2)
6. Loosen the hose clamps,

the pump.
Pinchcocks (2)
Installation
Hose Clamps (2)
Pump
CD356
15.2.8 Hose Connection

1. Connect the hose securely
to connecting opening as far
as it will go.
2. Inspect the hose clamps,
and replace them if the
docking portion is damaged.
Docking Portion
Hose Clamp
0681
3. Install each hose clamp with

its inside edge towards the
end of the connection as
shown.
5S074
4. Check that the hose clamps

are not twisted when they
are installed. Hold each end
of the clamp with a pair of
pliers and tighten securely.
5. After operating the machine
for 30 minutes, check if there
is no leakage of solution
from the hose connections.
0680

15.3.1 Processor Rear Cover Removal/Reinstallation
Removal
supply.
Screws (6)

then the processor rear top
cover.
Processor Rear Top Cover
CD025

and then the processor rear
cover.
Reinstallation
Screws (7)

Processor Rear Cover
CD865
15.3.2 Circuit Board Bracket Opening/Closing

Bracket Opening
1. Remove the processor rear
bracket.
Bracket Closing
Close the bracket in the reverse
order of opening.
Screws (4)
Circuit Board Bracket
CD261
15.3.3 Waste Solution Level Sensor (FS415) Replacement

Removal
Connector Cover

remove the connector cover.
Screws (2)
CD306
3. Disconnect the FS415

clamp.
FS415
4. Remove the waste solution

tank cap.
Waste Solution
Tank Cap
Clamp
CD330

then the sensor from the
cap.
Installation
order of removal.
Screws (2)
Sensor (FS415)
Cap
CD331
15.3.4 Waste Solution Tank Replacement

Removal
1. Collect the waste solution
into the waste solution
recovery tank.
Chain Protection Cover
2. Move the P1R tank (see

subsection 16.2.11 steps 1 to 5).
then the chain protection
cover.
Screws
CD262

Connector Cover
Screws (2)
CD306
5. Disconnect the FS415

clamp.
FS415
Clamp
CD328
6. Loosen the five hose clamps

and disconnect the hoses
from the tank.
Hose Clamps (5)
7. Remove the waste solution

tank.
Hoses (5)
Installation
Waste Solution Tank
CD329
15.3.5 Waste Solution Hose Replacement

Removal
subsection 16.2.1).
Screws (2)

then the hose box.
then the hose bracket.
Screws (2)
Hose Box
Hose Bracket
CD358
5. Loosen the hose clamp and

disconnect the drain hose
from the waste solution
hose.
Drain Hose
Installation
Clamp
Waste Solution Hose
CD359
15.4 Processing Solution Replacement

15.4.1 Processing Chemical Handling Precautions
*Processing chemicals should be handled in accordance with the precautions indicated on the boxes and
labels of the respective chemicals.
!
CAUTION
Protective Gloves
Safety Goggles
Always wear protective gloves and safety goggles when handling chemicals with the above indications.
This is recommended even for chemicals without these indications. For greater protection, the use of a
protective mask and apron is also recommended.
Wash hands thoroughly after handling processing chemicals or solutions.
Any spilled chemicals should be wiped up immediately.

Use caution when mixing chemicals as certain mixtures may produce toxic gases.
If you get any chemical on your skin or in your eyes, immediately flush the affected part with a great
amount of water.
If you swallow any chemical or get any in your eyes, seek medical attention immediately and show the
physician the information printed on the box or label of the chemical(s) involved.

In some countries, chemicals carrying a poison label are required by law to be stored under lock and
key. You are responsible for ascertaining and complying with the regulations concerning the handling of
poisonous substances that apply in your country.
Store chemicals in a safe place out of reach of children.
Waste solutions should be disposed of in accordance with the ordinances governing the handling of
industrial waste products in your locale. The P1R chemical in the CP-48S replenisher cartridge and the
Component A of the P1 start-up chemical fall into the category of industrial waste. Should you have any
questions concerning these chemicals, consult your service representative.
*Special note should be taken regarding the following properties of the CP-48S chemicals.
!
CAUTION
The P1R chemical of the Replenisher Cartridge PC and Component A of the P1 Start-up Chemical
These components contain P-phenylenediamine and may thus cause skin and eye irritation if
improperly handled. They may be injurious to the health if swallowed.
The P2RA Chemical of the Replenisher Cartridge PC and Component A of the P2 Start-up Chemical
These components cause oxidation in metals. They may produce harmful ammonia gas if mixed with a
chlorine-based bleach (hypochlorite) or an alkaline (P1R or N1RA).
The P2RB Chemical of the Replenisher Cartridge PC and Component B of the P2 Start-up Chemical
These components may produce harmful ammonia gas if mixed with a chlorine-based bleach
(hypochlorite) or an alkaline (P1R or N1RA). They may also produce harmful sulfur trioxide gas if mixed
with an acid.
FSC100 (Fuji Super Conditioner)
This component contains dichloroisocyanurate and may thus produce harmful chlorine gas if mixed
with an acid. It could be injurious to the health if swallowed.
15.4.2 Processing Rack Washing and Processing Solution Draining

1. Remove the crossover racks,
wash and leave them to dry
naturally.
Crossover Rack
CD032
2. Remove the processing

racks, and run about one
liter of water over the entire
rack. Collect the waste in the
waste solution collection
tank.
Processing Rack
3. Run warm water (30 to

40C/86 to 104C) over the
rack, and thoroughly wash
the roller bearing section
and parts that come in
contact with the solution in
the tank. Allow them to airdry.
CD031

subsection 15.2.1).
5. Connect a hose (ordinary
water hose) to each of the
drain valve of the processing
tanks and drain the solution
in the tank into the waste
recovery tank.
Drain Valve
CD035
6. If the solution being drained

off stops flowing, replace the
waste recovery tank with a
lower container (such as
tray) which can bring the end
of the hose to a level lower
than the valve, and continue
draining off the solution.
Collect the solution in the
waste recovery tank.
CD036
15.4.3 Processing Tank Washing and Processing Rack Reinstallation

1. Install the splash prevention
cover over the dryer fan
section.
CD033
2. Check that all drain valves of

the processing tanks are
closed.
P1
P2
Drain Valves
PS1
PS2
PS3
PS4
CD357
3. Wash out the inside of each

processing tank using clean
running water.
CD034
4. Connect a hose (ordinary

water hose) to each of the
drain valves of the
processing tanks and drain
the water in the tank into a
bucket or other container.
Drain Valve
CD035
5. If the water being drained off

stops flowing, and there is
still water remaining in the
tank, replace the bucket with
a lower container (such as a
tray) which can bring the end
of the hose to a level lower
than the valve, and continue
draining off the water.
6. After all the water has been
drained off, close the drain
valve and remove the hose.
7. Repeat steps 4 to 7 for each
tank.
8. Remove the splash
prevention cover.
CD036
9. Make sure all drain valves

are closed.
10. Reinstall the circulation
pump section cover.
11. Reinstall the processing and
crossover racks.
Processing Tank Drain Valves (6)
CD357
15.4.4 Solution Preparation Tools and Procedure

Tools
Measuring Cup (5L)
Measuring Cylinder
Level Gauge
PS1,2,3,4
P1, P2
Chemicals
Preparation Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Drain the processing tank (properly dispose of the drained

solution).
Remove the processing rack.
Clean the processing tank and rack with running water
(preferably warm water) and a sponge or soft cloth. Do not use
any abrasive material such as a scrub brush.
Install the processing rack into the tank.
Prepare the solution in accordance with the 5.4 Preparing
Processing Solutions (CP-48S).
Thoroughly clean the solution preparation tools with water.
Ensure that they are free of processing solution incrustations
so as to avoid problems with the ensuing solution preparation.
IMPORTANT
Use the dedicated measuring cup for P1 solution preparation. If the

measuring cup has contained other solutions, thoroughly clean it
before P1 solution preparation.
Name
Code
Packing Units Components
Quantity*
Color Developer
Startup Chemicals
P1
To make 10 L
(To make 4.2 L)
A+B
1 box
( 2 boxes)
Bleach-fix Startup
Chemicals
P2
To make 10 L
(To make 4.2 L)
A+B
1 box
( 2 boxes)
Tablets
5 tablets
Super Rinse
To make 5 L
Replenisher
FSC100
100
(Fuji Super Conditioner)
P1R
Replenisher Cartridge
PC
2 Cartridge
(PC 2)
P2RA
1 cartridge
P2RB
NOTE: Paper area processed by a replenisher cartridge : 111 sq.m (Approximately
10,000 sheets of 3R-size)
*Required quantity to initial installation.
15.4.5 Preparing Processing Solutions (CP-48S) with 10L kit

* Prepare the processing solutions by following the numerical order shown. If these steps are not followed,
abnormality of solutions may result.
P1 Solution Preparation (Tank Capacity: 9.4 liters)
1. Water 1 liters (15 to 40 C) 2. Water 2 liters and one
bottle of P1A
3. Water 2 liters and one

bottle of P1B
4. Water (approximately 2.2 liters)

up to P1 line on gauge.
P1
P1
Circulation Filter
Water 2 liters
Water 2 liters
P1 Line on
Gauge
Water 1 liters
Sub Tank
Water + P1A
Water + P1B
Water
(Approximately
2.2 liters)

1. Water 1 liters (15 to 40 C) 2. Water 2 liters and one
bottle of P2A
3. Water 2 liters and one

bottle of P2B
4. Water (approximately 1.2 liters)

P2
P2
Circulation Filter
Water 2 liters
Water 2 liters
P2 Line on
Gauge
Water 1 liters
Sub Tank
Water + P2A
Water + P2B
Water
(Approximately
1.2 liters)
PS Solution Preparation (Tank Capacity: 19.6 liters)

1. PS4 Tank
1) One tablet of FSC100
2) Water (approximately
5 liters) up to PS line
on gauge
FSC100
1)
2. PS3 Tank
on gauge
Lift PS4 rack.
FSC100
Lift PS3 rack
3. PS2 Tank
on gauge
Lift PS2 rack.
PS3 Tank
PS4 Tank
FSC100
4. PS1 Tank
on gauge
Lift PS1 rack.
PS2 Tank
FSC100
PS1 Tank
2)
PS Line on
Gauge
Sub
Tank
PS Line on
Gauge
Water
(Approximately
5 liters)
PS Line on
Gauge
Water
(Approximately
5 liters)
PS Line on
Gauge
Water
(Approximately
5 liters)
Water
(Approximately
5 liters)
15.4.6 Preparing Processing Solutions (CP-48S) with 4.2L kit

P1
P1B 130mL
P1
P1A 100mL
3. Water 2 liters, two bottles 4. Water (approximately 0.2 liters)

and 130 mL of P1B
P1
1. Water 3 liters (15 to 40 C) 2. Water 2 liters, two bottles

and 100 mL of P1A
P1
Circulation Filter
Water 2 liters
Water 2 liters
P1 Line on
Gauge
Water 3 liters
Sub Tank
Water +
(P1A X 2 + 100mL)
Water +
(P1B X 2 + 130mL)
Water
(Approximately
0.2 liters)
P2B 180mL
P1
A
P2A 170mL
3. Water 2 liters, two bottles 4. Water (approximately 0.2 liters)

and 180 mL of P2B
P1
P1
A
1. Water 2 liters (15 to 40 C) 2. Water 2 liters, two bottles

and 170mL of P2A
P1
Circulation Filter
Water 2 liters
Water 2 liters
P2 Line on
Gauge
Water 2 liters
Sub Tank
Water +
(P2A X 2 + 170 mL)
Water +
(P2B X 2 + 180mL)
Water
(Approximately
0.2 liters)
PS Solution Preparation (Tank Capacity: 26.8 liters)

1. PS4 Tank
on gauge
FSC100
1)
2. PS3 Tank
on gauge
Lift PS4 rack.
FSC100
Lift PS3 rack
3. PS2 Tank
on gauge
Lift PS2 rack.
PS3 Tank
PS4 Tank
FSC100
4. PS1 Tank
on gauge
Lift PS1 rack.
PS2 Tank
FSC100
PS1 Tank
2)
PS Line on
Gauge
Sub
Tank
PS Line on
Gauge
Water
(Approximately
5 liters)
PS Line on
Gauge
Water
(Approximately
5 liters)
PS Line on
Gauge
Water
(Approximately
5 liters)
Water
(Approximately
5 liters)
16. PROCESSING SOLUTION REPLENISHMENT SYSTEM

Parts Location
16.1 Replenisher Cartridge Section
16.1.1
16.1.2
16.1.3
16.1.4
16.1.5
16.1.6
16.1.7
16.1.8
Replenishing Section Cover Removal/

Reinstallation
Replenisher Box Door Lock Manual Releasing
Replenisher Door Detecting Interlock Switch
(D410) Replacement
Cartridge Box Upper/Lower Sensor (D408/
D409) Replacement
Replenisher Cartridge Box Removal/
Reinstallation
Cartridge Setting Sensor (D407) Replacement
Replenisher Cartridge Opening Drive Motor
(M402) Replacement
Replenisher Cartridge Opening Gear
Replacement
16.2 Processing Solution

Replenishment System
16.2.1
Replenisher Pump Section Cover Removal/

Reinstallation
16.2.2 Replenisher Pump Bracket Removal/
Reinstallation
16.2.3
16.2.4
16.2.5
16.2.6
Replenisher Filter Replacement

Replenisher Pump Replacement
Replenisher Pump Valve Replacement
Rear Upper Connector Cover Removal/
Reinstallation
16.2.7 Rear Lower Connector Cover Removal/
Reinstallation
16.2.8 P1R Upper/Lower Level Sensor (FS407/
FS411) Replacement
16.2.9 P2RA/P2RB Upper/Lower Level Sensor
16.2.10
16.2.11
16.2.12
16.2.13
Replacement
PSR Upper/Lower Level Sensor (FS410/
FS414) Replacement
P1R Tank Replacement
P2RA/P2RB Tank Replacement
PSR Tank Replacement
16.3 Auto Washing/P1R Stirring

System
16.3.1
16.3.2
Auto Washing Pump (PU407) Replacement

Cartridge Washing /P1R Stirring Valve
Replacement
16.3.3 Rack Auto Washing Valve Replacement
Parts Location
Rack Auto Washing Valves
(S401 to S404)
Replenisher Nozzles
PSR Tank
P1R Upper/Lower Level Sensor

(FS407/FS411)
Replenisher
Cartridge
P1
P2
PS1
PS2
PS3
PS4
Cartridge Washing
P1R Stirring Valves
(S407 to S410)
PSR (PU411)
PSR Upper Level

Sensor (FS414)
P1R
Tank
P2RA
Tank
P2RB (PU410)
P2RA (PU409)
Auto Washing Pump (PU407)

Replenisher Filters
P2RB
Tank
PSR Lower Level

Sensor (FS414)
P1R (PU408)
P1R Replenisher Pumps
P2RA Upper/Lower
Level Sensor
(FS408/FS412)
P2RB Upper/Lower
Level Sensor
(FS409/FS413)
PSR
P2RB
P2RA
P1R
PSR
P2RB
P2RA
Drain Valves
P1R
CD285
Parts Location
Replenisher Door Detecting
Interlock Switch (D410)
Replenisher Box Door Lock

Box
Cartridge Opening
Gear
Opening Drive Motor
(M402)
Cartridge Box Upper

Sensor (D408)
Cartridge Box Lower
Sensor (D409)
Cartridge Setting
Sensor (D407)
Opening/Washing
Nozzle
CD821

16.1.1 Replenishing Section Cover Removal/Reinstallation
Removal
Screw (1) (Remove)

supply.
2. Loosen the five screws and
the replenishing section
cover.
Replenishing Section
Cover
Reinstallation
Screws (5) (Loosen)
CD038
16.1.2 Replenisher Box Door Lock Manual Releasing

the right front of the dryer fan
section cover as shown.
2. Insert the rod with 3 mm
outside diameter or less
through the screw hole to
release the lock and open
the door.
Rod (3mm O.D. or less)
Screws (2)
3. Retighten the screw.
Replenisher Box Door
CD360
16.1.3 Replenisher Door Detecting Interlock Switch (D410) Replacement

Removal
Switch Bracket
1. Remove:
Dryer fan section cover (see
subsection 17.3.1).
subsection 15.3.1).
the connector cover.
Screw
(Remove)
3. Loosen the screw, remove

the screw and then the
switch bracket.
Screw
Screw
(Loosen)
Connector Cover
CD302

from the switch.
E-ring
5. Remove the spring and Ering and then the switch from
the bracket.
Switch (D410)
Connector
Installation
order of removal.
Spring
CD303
16.1.4 Cartridge Box Upper/Lower Sensor (D408/D409) Replacement

Removal
1. Remove the replenishing
16.1.1).
Sensor Bracket

Screws (2)
CD304

from the sensor.
bracket.
Connector
Lower Sensor (D409)

Upper Sensor
(D408)
Installation
Locking Tabs

order of removal.
Connector
CD305
16.1.5 Replenisher Cartridge Box Removal/Reinstallation

Removal
1. Remove:
Clamp
Rear upper connector cover

Rear lower connector cover
Replenishing section cover
2. Disconnect the JH01
clamp.
JH01 Connector
CD307

clamp.
M402 Connector
Clamp
CD308
4. Remove the six screws

securing the opening nozzle
section.
Screws (6)
Opening Nozzle
Section
CD309

securing the lower of the
replenisher cartridge box
and remove the screw at the
top.
Screw (Remove)
Screws (2) (Loosen)
CD310
6. Loosen the hose clamp,

disconnect the overflow
hose and remove the
replenisher cartridge box.
Overflow Hose
Reinstallation
NOTE: Connect the hose securely
Hose Clamp
Box
CD311
16.1.6 Cartridge Setting Sensor (D407) Replacement

Removal
cartridge box (see subsection
16.1.5).
the sensor bracket.
Sensor Bracket
Screws
CD312

from the sensor.
Sensor (D407)

bracket.
Installation
order of removal.
Connector
Locking Tabs
CD313
16.1.7 Replenisher Cartridge Opening Drive Motor (M402) Replacement

Removal
16.1.5).
Screws (2)
Motor Bracket
CD314

then the motor.
Gear
Screws (2)
Installation
order of removal.
Motor (M402)
Hex. Socket Head Setscrews (2)
CD315
16.1.8 Replenisher Cartridge Opening Gear Replacement

Removal
Connector
Sensor

16.1.5).
then the cartridge bracket.
from the sensor.
E-rings (2)
Cartridge Bracket
CD316

the gear.
Installation
Gear

order of removal.
E-ring
CD317
16.2 Processing Solution Replenishment System

16.2.1 Replenisher Pump Section Cover Removal/Reinstallation
Removal
1. Remove the replenishing
16.1.1).
then the replenisher pump
section cover.
Reinstallation
Replenisher Pump
Section Cover
Screws (5)
CD1051
16.2.2 Replenisher Pump Bracket Removal/Reinstallation

Removal
subsection 16.2.1).
pull out the bracket.
Reinstallation
NOTE: Take care not to bend or crush
the replenisher hoses when
reinstalling the bracket.
Replenisher Pump Bracket
Screws (2)
CD286
16.2.3 Replenisher Filter Replacement

Removal
pump bracket (see subsection
16.2.2).
hoses with the two
pinchcocks.
3. Loosen the two hose clamps
from the filter.
Hoses
Installation
After PSR filter
replacement, perform PSR
output measurement and
setting in menu 461
Measurement/Setting (see
subsection 5.7.1).
Pinchcocks (2)
Filter
Clamps
CD287
16.2.4 Replenisher Pump Replacement

Pump
PU408
PU409
PU410
PU411
System
P1R
P2RA
P2RB
PSR
Connectors
PU411
PU409
PU410
PU408
Removal
16.2.2).
Clamp
2. Disconnect the pump

connector.
CD288

hoses with the two
pinchcocks.
Pinchcocks (2)
Outlet Hose
Inlet Hose
5. Loosen the hose clamp and

disconnect the inlet hose
from the pump.
6. Cut the cord tie and
disconnect the outlet hose
from the pump.
Cord Tie
Clamp
CD289

the pump by pulling it.
Installation
Pump

After PSR pump
replacement, perform PSR
output measurement and
setting in menu 461
subsection 5.7.1).
Screw
CD290
16.2.5 Replenisher Pump Valve Replacement

Removal
16.2.2).
Mark
2. Pinch the pump inlet and

outlet hoses with the two
pinchcocks.
Joint Nuts (2)

Mark
3. Loosen the two joint nuts.

Label
4. Remove the valves.
Joints (2)
CD291
Installation
NOTE: Use new valves identified by the same color mark as the label on the pump body.
Color
Pump
Red
P1R
Yellow P2RA and P2RB
White
PSR
Note the installation direction of the valves and tighten the joint nuts securely.
After PSR pump replacement, perform PSR output measurement and setting in menu 461 Replenisher Pump
Output Measurement/Setting (see subsection 5.7.1).
16.2.6 Rear Upper Connector Cover Removal/Reinstallation

Removal
Connector Cover
1. Remove the dryer fan

17.3.1).
Reinstallation
Screws (2)
CD251
16.2.7 Rear Lower Connector Cover Removal/Reinstallation

Removal
Connector Cover

Reinstallation
Screws (2)
CD306
16.2.8 P1R Upper/Lower Level Sensor (FS407/FS411) Replacement

Removal
1. Remove:
Screws (2)

Open the circuit board bracket
then the connector bracket.
Connector Bracket
CD318
3. Disconnect the FS407 and

FS411 connectors.
FS411
FS407
CD319

then the sensors.
Screws (2)
Sensors (FS407/FS411)
CD320
Installation
Arrows

NOTE: Install the gasket on the
sensor flange correctly.
Align the arrow on the
sensor with that on the tank.
Gasket
CD321
16.2.9 P2RA/P2RB Upper/Lower Level Sensor Replacement

Code
FS408
FS409
FS412
FS413
Sensor
P2RA Upper
P2RB Upper
P2RA Lower
P2RB Lower
FS412
FS408 FS409
Removal
1. Remove:
then the P1R tank bracket.
3. Disconnect the FS408/
FS412 or FS409/FS413
connectors.
4. Open the three clamps.
FS413
Clamps (3)
Screws (2)
P1R Tank Bracket
CD333

Screws (2)

then the tank bracket.
Tank Bracket
Clamps
CD334
7. Tilt the tank towards the

outside.
Screws (2)
Sensors
(FS409/FS413)

then the sensors.
Installation
NOTE: Install the gasket on the
sensor flange correctly.
Point the arrow on the
sensor outward.
Sensors
(FS408/FS412)
Arrow
CD335
16.2.10 PSR Upper/Lower Level Sensor (FS410/FS414) Replacement

Removal
1. Remove:
2. Drain the PSR replenisher
from the drain valve.
PSR
P1R
P2RB
P2RA
Drain Valves
CD322

FS414
FS410
4. Disconnect the FS410 or

FS414 connector.
Clamps (3)
Screws (2)
P1R Tank
Bracket
CD337
Clamps (2)
7. Loosen the two hose

clamps, disconnect the
hoses and remove the
sensor.
Installation
Hose
Clamps (2)
Sensor
(FS410)

Sensor (FS414)
Hose
CD338
16.2.11 P1R Tank Replacement

Removal
1. Remove:
Remove the rear lower
16.2.7).
2. Drain the P1R, P2RA and
P2RB replenishers from the
drain valve.
NOTE: Collect the replenishers into
the W1 waste recovery tank.
PSR
P1R
P2RB
P2RA
Drain Valves
CD322
3. Disconnect the FS407 and

FS411 connectors.
FS407
FS411
CD323

Screws (2)
P1R Tank Bracket
CD324
5. Pull out the tank.

Inlet Hose
6. Disconnect the overflow

hose from the boss on the
floor pan.
Stirring Hose
7. Loosen the four clamps and

the tank.
Installation
cartridge opening in menu
46F Installation.
Outlet
Hose
P1R Tank
Drain Hose
Clamps (4)
Overflow
Hose
CD325
16.2.12 P2RA/P2RB Tank Replacement

Removal
1. Remove:
2. Drain the P1R, P2RA and
P2RB replenishers from the
drain valve.
PSR
NOTE: Collect the replenishers into
the W1 waste recovery tank.
P1R
P2RB
P2RA
Drain Valves
CD322

FS412
FS408 FS409
4. Disconnect the FS408/

FS412 or FS409/FS413
connectors.
FS413
Clamps (3)
Screws (2)
P1R Tank Bracket
CD333

Screws (2)

Tank Bracket
Clamps
CD334
8. Tilt the tank to the outside.

Overflow Hose
9. Loosen the four hose clamps

from the tank.
Clamps (4)
P2RB
Tank
Outlet Hose
Installation
cartridge opening in menu
46F Installation.
Drain Hose
P2RA Tank
Inlet Hose
CD336
16.2.13 PSR Tank Replacement

Removal
1. Remove:
2. Drain the PSR replenisher
from the drain valve.
PSR
P1R
P2RB
P2RA
Drain Valves
CD322
3. Remove the two screws,

then the P1R tank bracket
and pull out the tank.
Screws (2)
P1R Tank Bracket
CD324

Tank Bracket
Screws (2)
CD326
5. Loosen the five clamps and

the tank.
6. Remove the tank.
Installation
To Level Sensors
Breather Hose
Inlet Hose
Clamps (5)

After replacement, perform
PSR output measurement
and setting in menu 461
subsection 5.7.1).
Drain Hose
Outlet Hose
PSR Tank
CD327
16.3 Auto Washing/P1R Stirring System

16.3.1 Auto Washing Pump (PU407) Replacement
Removal
16.2.2).
Clamp
PU407 Connector
2. Disconnect the PU407

connector.
3. Open the clamps.
CD292
4. Pinch the three hoses with

the pinchcocks.
Pinchcocks (3)
5. Loosen the two hose clamps

from the pump.
Clamps (2)
CD293

then the pump bracket.
Pump Bracket
Screws (2)
CD294

then the pump from the
bracket.
Pump (PU407)
Installation
1) Clear Pump on times
on the menu 46D
Clearing Selected
Processor Operation
Data screen (see
subsection 5.7.12).
2) Menu 462 Auto Cleaning
output measurement/
Setting (see subsection
5.7.2).
Screws (2)
CD295
16.3.2 Cartridge Washing /P1R Stirring Valve Replacement

Code
S407
S408
S409
S410
Valve
P1R Washing
P2RA Washing
P2RB Washing
P1R Stirring
Removal
subsection 16.2.1).
remove the valve bracket.
Valve Bracket
Screws (2)
CD296
3. Disconnect the S407 to

S410 connectors.
4. Open the clamp.
Clamp
S407
S408
S409
S410
CD297
5. Pinch the five hoses using

the pinchcocks.
Pinchcocks (5)

the valve unit.
then the valve unit from the
bracket.
Installation
Clamps (5)
Valve Unit
Screws (2)
CD298
16.3.3 Rack Auto Washing Valve Replacement

Code
S401
S402
S403
S404
Rack
P1
P2
PS1/2
PS3/4
S401
Removal
1. Remove:
Remove the rear upper
16.2.6).
Clamp
S404
2. Disconnect the S401 to

S404 connectors.
3. Open the clamp.
S403
S402
CD299

remove the valve bracket.
Valve Bracket
Screws (2)
CD300
5. Pinch the five hoses with the

pinchcocks.
Pinchcocks (5)

the valve unit.
Valve Unit

then the valve unit from the
bracket.
Installation
Clamps (5)
menu 462 Auto Cleaning
Output Measurement/
setting (see subsection 5.7.2).
Screws (2)
CD301
17. DRYER/SORTER SECTION

Parts Location
17.1 Dryer Unit
17.1.1
17.1.2
17.1.3
17.1.4
17.1.5
17.1.6
17.1.7
17.1.8
17.1.9
17.1.10
17.1.11
17.1.12
Dryer Section Cover Removal/Reinstallation

Feed Belt/Pulley Replacement
Dryer Section Exit Sensor (D411)
Replacement
Dryer Temperature Sensor (TS406)
Replacement
Dryer Rack Drive Gear Replacement
Dryer Rack Removal/Reinstallation
Dryer Rack Drive Chain Replacement
Dryer Rack Exit Roller Replacement
Feed Section Roller Replacement
Entrance Side Roller Replacement
Dryer Section Cover Detecting Interlock
Switch (D416A) Replacement
Dryer Unit Open/Close Detecting Interlock
Switch (D416B) Replacement
17.2 Sorter
17.2.1
17.2.2
17.2.3
Sorter Drive Motor (M404) Replacement

Sorter Removal/Reinstallation
Sorter Belt Replacement
17.2.4
17.2.5
17.2.6
17.2.7
Belt Tension Adjustment

CTS04 Circuit Board Replacement
Sorter Full Sensor LED Replacement
Sorter Full Sensor Replacement
17.3 Dryer Fan/Heater Section

17.3.1
Dryer Fan Section Cover Removal/

Reinstallation
17.3.2 Dryer Fan (F405) Replacement
17.3.3 Dryer Heater (H406) Replacement
Parts Location
Dryer Rack Drive Gear
Dryer Section
Exit Sensor (D411)
Dryer Unit Open/Close

Detecting Interlock Switch
Dryer Fan (F405)
Dryer Rack
Dryer Temperature
Sensor (TS406)
Dryer Rack
Exit Rollers
Dryer Heater (H406)
Dryer Section
Cover Detecting
Interlock Switch (D416)
Entrance
Side Rollers
Sorter Belt
Dryer Unit
Sorter Drive Motor

(M404)
Feed Section Rollers

Feed Belt/Pulleys
Dryer Rack Drive Chane
CD822
17.1 Dryer Unit

17.1.1 Dryer Section Cover Removal/Reinstallation
Removal
supply.
securing the dryer section
cover.
Screws (2)
CD122
17.1 Dryer Unit

cover.
Reinstallation
Dryer Section Cover

CD123
17.1 Dryer Unit
17.1.2 Feed Belt/Pulley Replacement

Removal
Pulley
Entrance Guide

then the entrance guide.
E-ring
Screws (4)
3. Remove the two springs.

4. Remove the two E-rings, and
bearings.
Shaft
Springs (2)
Bearings
CD198
17.1 Dryer Unit

the pulley to the shaft and
then the pulley by pulling the
shaft out.
E-ring
Pulley
Shaft
9689
17.1 Dryer Unit
6. Remove the drive side E-ring

and then the gear and
bearing.
Belt
Shaft
E-ring

the pulley and belt by pulling
out the shaft.
Installation
Install the belt/pulleys in the
Pulley
Bearing
E-ring
Gear
9690
17.1 Dryer Unit
17.1.3 Dryer Section Exit Sensor (D411) Replacement

from the sensor.
Connector
Screw

the sensor bracket.
Sensor Bracket
CD209
17.1 Dryer Unit

remove the sensor.
Locking Tabs
Installation
order of removal.
Sensor (D411)
CD210
17.1 Dryer Unit
17.1.4 Dryer Temperature Sensor (TS406) Replacement

Removal
remove the duct.
Duct
Screws (2)
CD230
17.1 Dryer Unit

connector.
Dryer Temperature
Sensor Connector
CD228
17.1 Dryer Unit
5. Cur the two cord ties and

remove the sensor bracket.
Cord Ties (2)
Sensor Bracket
Screws (2)
CD212
17.1 Dryer Unit

the sensor.
Installation
Cord Ties (3)

order of removal.
Screw
Sensor (TS406)
E520
17.1 Dryer Unit
17.1.5 Dryer Rack Drive Gear Replacement

Removal
the drive gear bracket.
Screws (2)(Loosen)
Drive Gear Bracket
Screw (Remove)
CD229
17.1 Dryer Unit
3. Remove the two E-rings,

spacer, gear bracket and
gear.
E-ring
Bracket
E-ring
Spacer
Gear
CD242
17.1 Dryer Unit
4. Remove the clip and then

the gear and shaft.
Shaft
Gear
Clip
CD243
17.1 Dryer Unit

the gear (green).
E-ring
6. Remove the E-ring and two

screws and then the bracket
and the gear (white).
E-ring
Bracket
Screws (2)
Gear (Green)
Gear (White)
CD244
17.1 Dryer Unit
Bearing
7. Remove the two bearings,

gear (black) and shaft.
Installation
Thrust Washer
NOTE: Apply recommended resin

grease to the gear and shafts
as shown in the figures.
Bearing
Shaft
Thrust Washer
Gear (Black)
CD245
17.1 Dryer Unit
17.1.6 Dryer Rack Removal/Reinstallation

Removal
1. Remove:
Screw
Dryer section cover (see

subsection 17.1.1).
Dryer rack drive gear bracket
the grounding wire.
Grounding Wire
CD227
17.1 Dryer Unit

remove the duct.
Duct
Screws (2)
CD230
17.1 Dryer Unit
5. Disconnect the dryer

temperature sensor
connector.
Dryer Temperature
Sensor Connector
CD228
17.1 Dryer Unit

then the cover.
Cover
Screws (4)
CD232
17.1 Dryer Unit
7. Loosen the six screws

securing the dryer rack.
Screws (6)
CD231
17.1 Dryer Unit
8. Pull the lock release lever

and remove the dryer rack.
Lock Release Lever
Sensor Arm
NOTE: Take care not to damage the

dryer section exit sensor arm.
Reinstallation
Reinstall the rack in the reverse
order of removal.
Dryer Rack
CD233
17.1 Dryer Unit
17.1.7 Dryer Rack Drive Chain Replacement

Removal
1. Remove the dryer rack (see
subsection 17.1.6).
and then the chain slider.
Screws (3)
Chain Slider
CD234
17.1 Dryer Unit
3. Release the chain tensioner

spring hook.
Chain
4. Remove the chain.
Installation
Install the chain in the reverse
order of removal.
Spring
CD1099
17.1 Dryer Unit
17.1.8 Dryer Rack Exit Roller Replacement

Removal
Exit Side Spring

Black Mark
1. Remove the dryer rack (see

subsection 17.1.6).
Bearings (6)
2. Remove the six E-rings and

three springs and then the
gear, sprockets and bearings
from the front side.
NOTE: The exit side spring has the
black mark and the entrance
side spring has the red mark.
Sprockets (2)
Spring
E-rings (6)
Entrance
Side Spring
Red Mark
CD235
17.1 Dryer Unit
3. Remove the six E-rings and

then the six gears, three
springs, six bearings and
four rollers.
Black Mark
Exit Side Spring

Rollers (4)
Spring
NOTE: The exit side spring has the

black mark and the entrance
side spring has the red mark.
Entrance Side
Spring
Bearings (6)
Red Mark
Gears (6)
E-rings (6)
CD236
17.1 Dryer Unit

two springs and collars and
then the lower guide plate.
Long White Roller Shaft

then the upper guide plate.
Screws (4)
6. Remove the two long white

roller shafts.
Installation
NOTE: Exit side coil spring has black
mark the entrance side spring
has the red mark.
Screws (4)
Springs (2)
Collars (2)
CD237
17.1 Dryer Unit
17.1.9 Feed Section Roller Replacement

Removal
1. Remove the dryer rack drive
chain (see subsection 17.1.7).
Roller
Bearing

the gear and bearing.
3. Withdraw the shaft from the
front side and remove the
roller (20 hard).
Gear
Shaft
E-ring
9731
17.1 Dryer Unit
4. Remove the three screws.
Screws (3)
CD238
17.1 Dryer Unit

guide plate.
Screws (6)
Stainless Steel Guide Plate
CD239
17.1 Dryer Unit

the sprocket and bearing
form the front side.
Roller

bearing and then the roller.
Bearing
Installation
order of removal.
Sprocket
E-ring
9733
17.1 Dryer Unit
17.1.10 Entrance Side Roller Replacement

Removal
1. Remove the dryer rack drive
chain (see subsection 17.1.7).
Spring
Plain Bearings (3)
2. Remove the four E-rings and

then the gears from the rear
side.
3. Remove the spring ends
from the grooves in the
bearings.
4. Remove the three plain
bearings and ball bearing.
Ball Bearing
Gears (4)
E-rings (4)
CD240
17.1 Dryer Unit
5. Remove the front four Erings, two sprockets and four

bearings.
6. Withdraw the shafts from the
front side and remove the
roller.
Installation
order of removal.
Shafts (4)
Rollers (4)
CD241
17.1 Dryer Unit
17.1.11 Dryer Section Cover Detecting Interlock Switch (D416A) Replacement

Removal
1. Remove:
Tapping Screws (3)
Dryer section cover (see

subsection 17.1.1).
Bracket

3. Remove the three tapping
screws and then the bracket.
Clamp
CD247
17.1 Dryer Unit
4. Disconnect the D416A

connector from the switch.
D416A Connector

remove the switch from the
bracket.
Installation
order of removal.
Locking Tabs
Switch (D416)
CD248
17.1 Dryer Unit
17.1.12 Dryer Unit Open/Close Detecting Interlock Switch (D416B) Replacement

Removal
supply.
Switch Cover

then the switch cover.
Screws (2)
CD1023
17.1 Dryer Unit
4. Insert the flat blade

screwdriver through the slots
to release the locking tabs
and remove the switch.
Switch
Flat Brade Screwdriver
CD1024
17.1 Dryer Unit

connectors from the switch.
Switch
Connectors (2)
CD1025
17.1 Dryer Unit
Installation
order of removal.
Cover
Screws (4)
After installation, adjust the

switch cover position.
<Switch Cover Position
Adjustment>
then the cover.
CD232
17.1 Dryer Unit

securing the switch cover.
Switch Lever
3. Adjust the switch cover

position so that the switch
lever on the dryer unit aligns
with the center of the hole in
the switch cover.
Screws (2)
4. Tighten the two screws.
Switch Cover
CD1100
17.2 Sorter
17.2.1 Sorter Drive Motor (M404) Replacement
Removal
then the lower cover.
Screws (2)
Lower Cover
CD199
17.2 Sorter

then the lower cover bracket.
Lower Cover Bracket
Screws (2)
CD200
17.2 Sorter

Motor
Gear
Hex. Socket Head Screws (2)
E505
17.2 Sorter

connector.
then the motor.
Screws (2)
Motor (M404)
Installation
NOTE: Apply locking agent to the
threads of the hex. socket
head setscrews.
Thread Locking Agent:
LOCTITE 425 or equivalent
Motor Connector
E506
17.2 Sorter
17.2.2 Sorter Removal/Reinstallation

Removal
Screws (4)

then the sorter.
Sorter
CD201
17.2 Sorter

the grounding wire.
Screw
Reinstallation
Reinstall the sorter in the
Grounding
Wire
CD202
17.2 Sorter
17.2.3 Sorter Belt Replacement

Removal
1. Remove the sorter (see
subsection 17.2.2).
Screws (2)
Lower Cover

CD203
17.2 Sorter

Connectors (3)
Lower Cover Bracket

connectors.
Screws (2)
E516
17.2 Sorter

bracket.
Motor Connector
Screw

connector.
Screws
(4)
Grouding Wire
CD204
17.2 Sorter

from the sorter full sensor
and LED.
Connectors
CD205
17.2 Sorter

Motor Bracket
Screws (3)
E512
17.2 Sorter

then the pulley bracket.
Pulley Bracket
Screws (2)
E511
17.2 Sorter

motor protection cover.
Motor Protection Cover
Screws (4)
CD206
17.2 Sorter
11. Remove the flat countersunk

head screws.
securing the pulley shaft.
Flat Countersunk Head Scews (2)
Pulley Shaft Screws (2)
9685
17.2 Sorter
13. Remove the spring on the

one side and then the belt.
Installation
Spring

NOTE: After installation, adjust the
belt tension (see subsection
17.2.4).
Belt
9686
17.2 Sorter
17.2.4 Belt Tension Adjustment

1. Remove the sorter (see
subsection 17.2.2).
Screws (2)
Lower Cover
CD203
17.2 Sorter
3. Loosen the three screws

Pulley Bracket
Screws (2) (Remove)

then the pulley bracket.
Screws (3)
(Loosen)
Motor Bracket
999u
17.2 Sorter
5. Move the motor bracket as

far as it will go to tighten
tension and secure with the
three screws.
Motor Bracket
Screws (3)
E515
17.2 Sorter
6. Measure the belt tension

near the rib on the sorter as
shown using the spring
balancer.
Spring Balancer
Belt Tension:
250g25g/25mm
7. Adjust the belt tension by
loosening the three screws
and moving the motor
bracket.
25mm
Rib
Belt
999v
17.2 Sorter
17.2.5 CTS04 Circuit Board Replacement

Removal
Screws (2)
Lower Cover
CD199
17.2 Sorter

Lower Cover Bracket
Screws (2)
CD200
17.2 Sorter

connectors from the CTS04
circuit board.
CTS04 Circuit Board
Connectors (3)
E507
17.2 Sorter

then the circuit board from
the spacer.
Screws (2)
CTS04 Circuit Board
Installation
Spacer
E508
17.2 Sorter
17.2.6 Sorter Full Sensor LED Replacement

Removal
supply.
Upper Cover

then the upper cover.
Screws (2)
E502
17.2 Sorter

from the LED.
then the LED.
Sensor LEDs (2)
Screws (2)
Installation
Install the LED in the reverse
order of removal.
Connectors
(2)
CD208
17.2 Sorter
17.2.7 Sorter Full Sensor Replacement

Removal
Screws (2)
Lower Cover
CD199
17.2 Sorter

Lower Cover Bracket
Screws (2)
CD200
17.2 Sorter

connector.
board and cut the cord tie.
Connector
Motor Connector
Screws (4)

bracket.
Cord Tie
CD207
17.2 Sorter

from the sensor and LED.
Sensors (2)
Connectors (2)
E518
17.2 Sorter

the sensor from the front
side.
Screw
Sensor
Sensor

the sensor bracket from the
rear side.
Installation
order of removal.
Screw
Bracket
Screw
E519

17.3.1 Dryer Fan Section Cover Removal/Reinstallation
Removal
supply.
Densitometer
2. Open the Dryer unit.

3. Disconnect the cable and
remove the densitometer.
Cable
CD213

then the dryer fan section
cover.
Dryer Fan Section Cover
Reinstallation
Screws (6)
CD214
17.3.2 Dryer Fan (F405) Replacement

Removal
17.3.1).
2. Remove the three flat
countersunk head screws.
NOTE: Be careful not to drop the
screws.
Flat Countersunk Head Screws (3)
CD215

and the fan duct.
Screws (3)
Fan Duct
CD216

the grounding wire.
Fan Connector

the capacitor.
Grounding Wire
Capacitor
Screw

connector.
Screw
Clamps
CD217

then the fan.
Fan (F405)
Screws (2)
CD218
Installation
NOTE: After installing the fan and
duct, tighten the screws in the
following order.
(1) Install the two fan screws
loosely.
(2) Tighten the three fan duct
screws.
(3) Tighten the three
screws.
(4) Tighten the two fan
screws.
CD1101
17.3.3 Dryer Heater (H406) Replacement

Removal
17.3.1).
2. Disconnect the heater
connectors.
Heater Connectors
CD219

then the heater.
Installation
Install the heater in the reverse
order of removal.
After installation, clear Heater
on time on the menu 46D
Clearing Selected Processor
Operation Data screen (see
subsection 5.7.12).
Heater (H406)
Screws (5)
CD220
18. ELECTRICAL SECTION

Parts Location
18.1 Power Supply Input Section
18.1.1
18.1.2
18.1.3
18.1.4
18.1.5
18.1.6
18.1.7
18.1.8
18.1.9
18.1.10
18.1.11
18.1.12
Front Lower Cover Removal/Reinstallation

Built-in Circuit Breaker (NFB1) Replacement
Leakage Breaker (NFB2 to NFB4) Test
Leakage Breaker (NFB2 to NFB4)
Replacement
Circuit Protector (CP1 to CP10) Replacement
Power Supply Section Bracket Removal/
Reinstallation
Relay (K1 to K6) Replacement
SSR (SSR1 to SSR3) Replacement
Circuit Protector (CP11 to CP14) Replacement
Noise Filter (NF1 to NF3)/Capacitor (C1 to C3)
Replacement
Step Down Transformer Replacement
PAC22 Circuit Board Replacement
18.2 DC Power Supply Section

18.2.1
18.2.2
Printer Rear Cover Removal/Reinstallation

DC Power Supply Bracket Removal/
Reinstallation
18.2.3 LED Circuit Board Replacement
18.2.4
18.2.5
18.2.6
PWR22 Circuit Board Replacement

DC Power Supply Replacement
DC Voltage Adjustment
18.3 Image Processing Circuit

Board Section
18.3.1
18.3.2
18.3.3
18.3.4
18.3.5
18.3.6
18.3.7
18.3.8
18.3.9
18.3.10
18.3.11
Image Processing Circuit Board Bracket

Opening/Closing
Printer Exhaust Fan 1/2 (F311/F312)
Replacement
Printer Exhaust Fan 2 (F313) Replacement
Image Processing Section Cooling Fan 1/2
(F217/F218) Replacement
GHT22/GIA22/GPA22 Circuit Board
Replacement
GMB22 Circuit Board Replacement
CTC22 Circuit Board Replacement
Pulse Motor Driver Replacement
LDA22 Circuit Board Replacement
LDD22 Circuit Board Replacement
Start Switch Replacement
18.4 Main Control Unit Section

18.4.1
18.4.2
Main Control Unit Replacement

UPS Battery (Optional) Replacement
18.5 Control Circuit Board Section

18.5.1
18.5.2
18.5.3
PDC22 Circuit Board Replacement

CTP22 Circuit Board Replacement
Start Up Procedure When Battery on CTP22
Circuit Board Discharged.
18.5.4 Processing Tank Exhaust Fan (F406)
Replacement
18.5.5 Control Section Exhaust Fan (F317)
Replacement
18.5.6 Power Supply Section Exhaust Fan 1 (F306/
F307) Replacement
Parts Location
Power Supply Input Section
Terminal Block (TB4)
Step Down Transformer
Capacitors (C1 to C3)
Noise Filters
(NF1 to NF3)
1
1
Relays
(K1 to K6)
2
2
3
Built-in Circuit Breaker

(NFB1)
SSR3 SSR2 SSR1
Circuit Protectors
(CP1 to CP10)
2 5 7
4 6
8 10
4
11
Power Supply
Terminal
Block (TB1)
Connection
Label
14
12
13
Terminal Block
(TB2)
Leakage Breakers
(NFB2 to NFB4)
Circuit Protectors
(CP11 to CP14)
PAC22 Circuit Board
CD823-B
Parts Location
Printer Rear Section
Printer Exhaust Fans
G1A22
Circuit Board 1/2 (F311/F312)
Image Processing
Section Cooling Fans 1/2
(F217/F218)
GHT22
Circuit
Board
LDD22 Circuit Board
Printer Exhaust Fan 2

(F313)
GPA22
Circuit Board
Start Switch
LDA22 Circuit Board
Printer Suction Fans
1/2 (F3081)
GMB22
Circuit Board
Pluse Motor Dirver

CTC22
Circuit
Board
DC Power
Supply
Image Processing Circuit

Board Section
Main Control
Unit Section
DC Power
Supply Section
Main Control Unit
PWR22 Circuit Board

LED Circuit Board
CD823-A
Parts Location
Processor Rear Section
Processing Tank Exhaust Fan
(F406)
Printer Control Section

Exhaust Fan (F317)
PDC22 Circuit Board
Control Circuit
Board Section
CTP22 Circuit Board
Power Supply Section

Exhaust Fans 1
(F306/F307)
CD824

18.1.1 Front Lower Cover Removal/Reinstallation
Removal
supply.
Front Lower Cover

cover.
3. Remove the nine screws and
then the front lower cover.
Reinstallation
Screws (9)

CD047
18.1.2 Built-in Circuit Breaker (NFB1) Replacement

Removal
Screws (2)

securing the breaker to the
bracket.
then the bracket.
Bracket
Screws (4)
CD149
4. Remove the eight terminal

screws to disconnect the
wires from the built-in circuit
breaker.
Screws (8)
Wires (8)
Installation
NOTE: Connect the wires correctly.
Bi1-4 Bi1-3 Bi1-2 Bi1-1
Built-in Circuit Breaker (NFB1)

Bo1-4 Bo1-3 Bo1-2 Bo1-1
CD150
18.1.3 Leakage Breaker (NFB2 to NFB4) Test

NOTE: Perform the leakage breaker
test once a month.

Leakage Breaker (NFB2)
NFB3
NFB4

breaker.
3. Confirm the leakage breaker
turns OFF by pressing the
red button.
4. Reinstall the front lower
cover.
Red Button
CD143
18.1.4 Leakage Breaker (NFB2 to NFB4) Replacement

Removal
NFB2
NFB3
Screws (2)
B4IL
B4IN
Screws (4)
2. Remove the terminal covers.

disconnect the wires from
the breaker.
then the leakage breaker.
Installation
NFB4
B40L
B40N
Terminal
Covers (2)
CD144
18.1.5 Circuit Protector (CP1 to CP10) Replacement

Removal
Screws (2) (Remove)

move the circuit protector
bracket.
Screws (2) (Loosen)
Circuit Protector Bracket
CD145
3. Disconnect the two wires

from the circuit protector.
Wires

remove the circuit protector.
Installation
Install the circuit protector in the
Circuit Protector
Locking Tabs
CD146
18.1.6 Power Supply Section Bracket Removal/Reinstallation

Removal
1. Remove:
Front lower cover (see subsection
18.1.1).
2. Remove the screw and the
grounding wire.
disconnect the power supply
wires from the input terminal
block (TB1).
pull out the power supply
section bracket.
Reinstallation
Wires
Input Terminal
Block (TB1)
Screws
Power Supply Section

Bracket
Screw/Grounding Wire
CD151
18.1.7 Relay (K1 to K6) Replacement

Removal
1. Remove the power supply
section bracket (see subsection
18.1.6).
Connectors (6)
Screws (2)
K1
K3
2. Disconnect the six

connectors from the relay.
then the relay.
K2
Installation
Install the relay in the reverse
order of removal.
K4
K5
K6
CD152
18.1.8 SSR (SSR1 to SSR3) Replacement

Removal
18.1.6).
SSR3
SSR2

disconnect the four wires
from the SSR.
then the SSR.
SSR3
Installation
Install the SSR in the reverse
order of removal.
Screws (4)
Screws (2)
CD153
18.1.9 Circuit Protector (CP11 to CP14) Replacement

Removal
18.1.6).
Screws (3)
(Loosen)
2. Open the six clamps and

remove the harnesses from
them.
3. Loosen the three screws,
remove one screw and move
the relay bracket.
Clamps (6)
Screw
(Remove)
CD154
4. Disconnect the wires from

the circuit protector.
remove the circuit protector.
Circuit Protector (CP11)

Locking Tabs
Installation
Install the circuit protector in the
CP12
CP13
Wires
CP14
CD155
18.1.10 Noise Filter (NF1 to NF3)/Capacitor (C1 to C3) Replacement

Removal
18.1.6).
Bracket

3. Loosen the three screws and
move the bracket.
Clamps
Screws (3)
CD156
4. Open the five clamps.
Clamps (5)
CD157
5. Remove the three terminal

covers, loosen the six
screws and disconnect the
six OUT wires from the
NFB2 to NFB4.
Screws (6)
Terminal Covers (3)
OUT Wires (6)
CD158
<Noise Filter>
6. Remove the four nuts and
disconnect the wires from
the noise filter.
Screws (2)
Noise Filter (NF1)

then the noise filter.
NF3
NF2
Nuts (4)
CD159
<Capacitor>
8. Remove the two nuts and
disconnect the capacitor
wires from the noise filter.
Capacitor
Screws
Nuts

the capacitor.
Installation
Install the capacitor and noise
filter in the reverse order of
removal.
CD160
18.1.11 Step Down Transformer Replacement

Removal
18.1.6).
Screws (10)
Screws (2)
(Remove)
2. Remove the ten terminal

screws on the step down
transformer terminal block
and disconnect the wires.
then the transformer.
Wires
CD161
Installation
200N
200L
200V
210L
210V
220L
220V
230L
230V
240L
240V
E
100N1D
100N1U
100L1D
100L1U
100N2-D
100N2-U
100L2-D
100L2-U
200N2
200L2
100V
100V
18.1.12 PAC22 Circuit Board Replacement

Removal
Circuit Board Spacers (6)

from the PAC22 circuit
board.
3. Release the locking tabs of
the six circuit board spacers
and remove the circuit
board.
Installation
PAC22 Circuit Board
CD147

18.2.1 Printer Rear Cover Removal/Reinstallation
Removal
supply.
Screws (11)
2. Remove the eleven screws

and then the printer rear
cover.
Reinstallation
Printer Rear Cover
CD162
18.2.2 DC Power Supply Bracket Removal/Reinstallation

Removal
1. Remove the printer rear
then the main control unit
Screws (2)
Main Control Unit Section Cover
CD163

and pull out the DC power
supply bracket.
NOTE: Open the harness clamps if
necessary.
DC Power Supply Section Bracket

Screws (3)
CD164
NOTE: Place the bracket on a

suitable block to keep it to the
installed height.
Reinstallation
Block
CD875
18.2.3 LED Circuit Board Replacement

Removal
1. Remove the DC power
supply bracket (see subsection
18.2.2).
Screws (4)
LED Circuit Board

connectors from the LED
circuit board.
then the LED circuit board.
Installation
Connectors
CD165
18.2.4 PWR22 Circuit Board Replacement

Removal
PWR22 Circuit Board

18.2.2).
form the circuit board.
3. Remove the thirteen screws
Installation
Screws (13)
CD166
18.2.5 DC Power Supply Replacement

Removal
18.2.2).
from the PWR22 circuit
board and DC power
supplies.
Connectors
CD167

and then the DC power
supply bracket.
DC Power Supply Bracket
Screws (7)
CD168

then the DC power supply
from the bracket.
Installation
M48 Screws (2)
M46 Screws (6)
Toothed Washers (2)

NOTE: Replace the wire harnesses
from the old unit to a new
unit one by one.
After installation, adjust DC
voltages (see subsection
18.2.6).
CD169
18.2.6 DC Voltage Adjustment

1. Remove:
DC power supply bracket (see
subsection 18.2.2).
subsection 15.3.1).
Screws (7)

securing the DC power
supply bracket.
CD874
3. Place a 2 cm spacer under

the DC power supply bracket
to raise the bracket.
Spacer
(Approximately 2cm)
CD876

breaker. Start up the system.
5. Measure the voltage at the
points shown in the CD
Voltage Check List (see
subsection 19.6.1).
A+12V
A+24V
A+13V
A+20V
A+5V
P+5V
+24V0
+24V3
6. Adjust the voltage by turning

the VR on the DC power
supply.
7. Turn OFF the built-in circuit
supply.
A13V
A12V
D+3.3V
P+8V
+24V2
A5V
+24V1
A+8V
D+5V
+24V4
VR Location

CD170
18.3 Image Processing Circuit Board Section

18.3.1 Image Processing Circuit Board Bracket Opening/Closing
Opening
Screws (4)

bracket.
Closing
Close the bracket in the reverse
order of opening.
Circuit Bracket
CD171
18.3.2 Printer Exhaust Fan 1/2 (F311/F312) Replacement

Removal
Manual Film Carrier

Release Lever
Auto Film Carrier

Lock Lever

release lever.
the auto film carrier lock
lever.
Screw
Screws (2)
CD671

then the small table top
cover.
Screws (5)
Table Top Small Cover
CD173

Fan Bracket
Screws (5)
CD174

F312 connectors.
Connectors

the fan connectors from the
bracket.
Screws (2)

and then the fan guard and
the fan.
Clamp
Fan Guard
Fan
Fan Guard
Screws (2)
Fan
CD175
Installation
Arrow

the outside.
CD176
18.3.3 Printer Exhaust Fan 2 (F313) Replacement

Removal
Screws (Loosen)

Fan Bracket
Screw (Remove)
CD177

connector.
the fan connector from the
bracket.
Screws (2)
Connector
Fan Connector

then the fan guard.
Fan Guard
Clamp
CD178

then the fan and fan guard
from the bracket.
Fan
(F313)
Fan Guard
Screws (2)
CD179
Installation
Arrow
NOTE: Point the arrow of the fan to

the outside.
Outside
CD180
18.3.4 Image Processing Section Cooling Fan 1/2 (F217/F218) Replacement

Removal
1. Open the image processing
subsection 18.3.1).
Screws (2)
Fan Cover

connectors.
then the fan cover.
Connectors
CD181
4. Remove the fan connectors

from the fan cover.
Fan Cover
Connectors

then the fan.
Fan (F217)
Installation
NOTE: Install the fan with the arrow
pointing up.
Up
Screws (2)
Fan (F218)
Screws (2)
CD182
18.3.5 GHT22/GIA22/GPA22 Circuit Board Replacement

Removal
subsection 18.3.1).
Fan Connectors
Clamp
2. Disconnect the five

board box.
3. Disconnect the two fan
connectors and open the
clamp.
Connectors (5)
CD1089

remove the circuit board box
from the bracket.
Circuit Board Box
Screws (4)
CD183
5. Remove the thirteen screws

and then the circuit board
box cover.
Screws (13)
CD1090

then the circuit board holder.
Screws (2)
Circuit Board Holder
CD184
7. Release the locks and

remove the circuit boards.
Locks
Connector

from the GHT22 circuit
board.
GPA22
Circuit Board
GIA22
Circuit Board
CHT22
Circuit Board
CD185
Installation
NOTE: Connect the harness
connector to the GHT22
circuit board securely.
Insert each circuit board
into the connector on the
GMB22 circuit board
securely.
GHT22
Circuit
Board
Locks
Connector
CD1091
Align the GPA22, GIA22

and GHT22 circuit boards
with the grooves in the
circuit board holder and
install the holder while
depressing it lightly.
Circuit Board Holder
Install the system software

when the GHT22 circuit
board has been replaced
(see section 4.3).
GPA22
Circuit Board
GIA22
Circuit Board
GHT22
Circuit Board
CD1092
18.3.6 GMB22 Circuit Board Replacement

Removal
Screws (12)
1. Remove the GHT22, GIA22

and GPA22 circuit boards
2. Remove the twelve screws
and then the GMB22 circuit
board.
Installation
GMB22 Circuit Board

CD187
18.3.7 CTC22 Circuit Board Replacement

Removal
subsection 18.3.1).
from the CTC22 circuit
board.
3. Remove the nine screws and
Screws (9)
Installation
followings.
1) System software
reinstallation (see section 4.3).
2) Menu 43L LED Light
Amount Adjustment (see
subsection 5.4.15).
CTC22 Circuit Board
CD188
18.3.8 Pulse Motor Driver Replacement

Removal
Connector
Motor Driver

DR2 connectors.
then the motor driver.
Installation
Install the motor driver in the
Screws (2)
CD189
18.3.9 LDA22 Circuit Board Replacement

Removal
1. Remove the F313 fan
motor driver and open the
clamp.
Screws
(Loosen)
Connectors

the cover.
Screws
(Remove)
Clamp
CD190
4. Disconnect the R, G and B

cables and all connectors
B Cable
G Cable
R Cable
Screws (2)

Installation
LDA22 Circuit Board
CD191
18.3.10 LDD22 Circuit Board Replacement

Removal
Screws (7)
1. Remove the LDA22 circuit

Spacers (6)

and six spacers and then the
circuit board.
LDD22
Circuit
Board
Installation
CD192
18.3.11 Start Switch Replacement

Removal
1. Remove the F313 fan
motor driver and open the
clamp.
Screws
(Loosen)
Connectors

the cover.
Screws
(Remove)
Clamp
CD190
4. Disconnect the POSW

connector.
POSW Connector
Locking Tabs

remove the start switch.
Installation
order of removal.
Start Switch
CD469

18.4.1 Main Control Unit Replacement
Removal
Main Control Unit
1. Remove:
Printer rear cover (see subsection
18.2.1).
2. Pull the main control unit
slightly toward the left side.
Cables
3. Disconnect all cables from

the main control unit.
4. Remove the main control
unit.
CD197
Installation
1. Insert the main control unit
from the left side halfway.
Main Control Unit
CD058
(2) Mouse Cable
2. Connect the cables to the

main control unit in the order
listed below.
(1) Keyboard Cbale
(5) UPS Serial

Cable (optional)
(COM2)
(10) Power
Supply
Cable
(1) Keyboard cable

(2) Mouse cable
(3) USB-A cables
(4) PC Ethernet cable
(5) COM2-UPS serial cable
(6) COM1 cable
(7) PC2 cable
(8) CRT cable
(9) PCON cable
(10) Power supply cable
(4) PC
Ethrnet
Cable
(3) USB-A Cable
3. Make sure the power switch

on the main control unit is
ON.
Power Switch
(6) To Outside
(COM1 Cable)
(8) To Monitor
(CRT Cable)
(9) Power
Control
Serial
Cable
(PCON)
(7) SCSI Cable to
Image Processing
Section (PC2)
CD969
4. Push the main control unit all

the way in.
5. Install the system software
(see section 4.4).
Main Control Unit
CD063
18.4.2 UPS Battery (Optional) Replacement

Removal
then the battery cover.
Screws (2)
Battery Cover
CD060
2. Remove the UPS battery

from the battery cover.
Installation
UPS Battery
1. Install a new UPS battery to

the battery cover.
Battery Cover
CD061
2. Install the UPS battery/cover

to the main control unit and
tighten the two screws.
UPS Battery/Cover
3. When an UPS battery has

been newly installed,
proceed to the following
UBS Setup.
Screws (2)
CD062
<UPS Setup>
1) Select 4 Setup and
Maintenance 10 Special
Operations B Explorer.
2) Double click Control Panel.
3) Double click RICHO UPS

Service.
4) Click [start] when optional
UPS battery is used.
Click [stop] when no optional
UPS battery is used.
5) Click [exit].
6) Close Explorer.

18.5.1 PDC22 Circuit Board Replacement
Removal
Screws (12)

from the PDC22 circuit
board.
Installation
PDC22 Circuit Board
CD249
18.5.2 CTP22 Circuit Board Replacement

Screws (12)
Lithium Battery
Removal
from the CTP22 circuit
board.
CTP22 Circuit Board

CD250
When the CTP22 circuit board needs replacing, always

replace its assembly entirely.
Do not try to replace the lithium battery for data backup.
Incorrect battery replacement may cause explosion.
Return the old CTP22 circuit

board to the FUJIFILM's
factory.
Installation
NOTE: Change the jumper plug (J2)
from 1-2 (OFF) to 2-3
(Backup).
After installation, reinstall the

system software (see section 4.3).
Jumper Plug J2
NOTE: If the system does not start
up, proceed to Start Up
Procedure When Battery on
CTP22 Circuit Board
Discharged (see subsection
18.5.3).
CTP22 Circuit Board
CD064
18.5.3 Start Up Procedure When Battery on CTP22 Circuit Board Discharged.

NOTE: If the machine does not start
up due to discharged backup
battery, follow the steps below
to start up.
Battery

2. Measure the voltage
between the TP17 (GND)
and the battery positive (+)
terminal on the CTP22
circuit board.
CTP20 Circuit Board
CD970
3. If the voltage is less than

2.5V, remove the front lower
PAC22 Circuit Board
Jumper Connector
4. Disconnect the jumper

connector from the PAC18
connector on the PAC22
circuit board and connect it
to the PAC19 connector.
PAC18
PAC19
CD077
5. Press the start switch to start

up the machine.
6. After starting up the
machine, return the jumper
connector to the PAC18
connector.
PAC18
PAC19

8. In the menu 45U Data
Download screen, select
All and click [OK].
Jumper Connector
CD078
18.5.4 Processing Tank Exhaust Fan (F406) Replacement

Removal
Connector Cover
1. Remove:
subsection 15.3.1).
subsection 17.3.1).
Screws (2)
CD251

clamp.
F406 Connector
Clamp
CD252

fan.
Fan (F406)
Fan Guard
Installation
the outside.
Screws (2)
Arrow
CD253
18.5.5 Control Section Exhaust Fan (F317) Replacement

Removal
Connector Cover
1. Remove:
subsection 15.3.1).
subsection 17.3.1).
Screws (2)
CD251

clamp.
F317 Connector
Clamp
CD254

and then the fan bracket.
Fan Bracket
Screws (3)
CD255

then the fan guard and fan.
Fan Guard
Screws (2)
CD256
Screws (2)
Installation
Fan Guard

outward.
Fan (F317)
Arrow
CD257
18.5.6 Power Supply Section Exhaust Fan 1 (F306/F307) Replacement

Removal
Fan Bracket

Screws (2)
CD258

F307 connectors.
F307
F306
CD259
4. Open the clamp.

fan.
Arrow
Fan Guard
Fan (F307)
Installation
Clamp
NOTE: Point the arrow of the fan to
the outside.
Fan (F306)
Screws (4)
CD260
19. ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS

19.1
Electrical Parts and Circuit Board Layout Diagrams
19.1.1
19.1.2
19.1.3
19.1.4
Input Power Supply Section

Printer Rear Section
Processor Rear Section
Scanner Section
19.2
Block Diagram
19.3
Wiring Diagrams
19.3.1
19.3.2
19.3.3
19.3.4
19.3.5
19.3.6
19.3.7
19.3.8
19.3.9
19.3.10
19.3.11
19.3.12
19.3.13
19.3.14
19.3.15
AC Power Supply Wiring Diagram

PWR22 Circuit Board Wiring Diagram
CCD22/ADC22 Circuit Board Wiring Diagram
CTC22 Circuit Board Wiring Diagram
CTP22 Circuit Board Wiring Diagram
LDD22 Circuit Board Wiring Diagram
LTC22 Circuit Board Wiring Diagram
PAC22 Circuit Board Wiring Diagram
Main Control Unit Wiring Diagram
PDC22 Circuit Board Wiring Diagram
PZR22 Circuit Board Wiring Diagram
Exposure Section Wiring Diagram (Laser Unit)
Exposure Section Wiring Diagram (Sensors and Mechanical System)
Image Processing Circuit Board Wiring Diagram
Auto Film Carrier NC100AC Wiring Diagram
19.4
Circuit Board Circuit Diagrams
19.4.1
19.4.2
PAC22 Circuit Board Circuit Diagram

PDC22 Circuit Board Circuit Diagram
19.5
List of LEDs, Fuses and Destinations for Each DC Power Supply

Unit
19.5.1
19.5.2
19.5.3
19.5.4
19.5.5
19.5.6
DC Power System
List of the LEDs and DC Voltages on the PAC22 Circuit Board
List of the LEDs and DC Voltages on the PDC22 Circuit Board
List of the LEDs and DC Voltages on the CTP22 Circuit Board
List of the LEDs and DC Voltages on the CTC22 Circuit Board
List of the LEDs and DC Voltages on the CYS22 Circuit Board
19.6
DC Voltage Adjustment
19.6.1
19.6.2
DC Voltage Check List

Potentiometers Used to Adjust the DC Power Supply Voltages
19.1 Electrical Parts and Circuit Board Layout Diagrams

19.1.1 Input Power Supply Section
Terminal Block (TB4)
Relays (K1 to K6)
Step Down
Transformer
Capacitors (C1 to C3)

Noise Filters
(NF1 to NF3)
5 3 1
1
Built-in Circuit
Breaker
(NFB1)
6 4 2
1
2
3
SSR3 SSR2 SSR1
Circuit Protectors
(CP1 to CP10)
13 579
2 4 6 8 10
2
4
11 14
12
13
Terminal Block
(TB2)
Leakage Breakers
Power Supply Terminal (NFB2 to NFB4)
Block (TB1)
Power Supply
Connection Label
Circuit Protectors
(CP11 to CP14)
PAC22 Circuit Board

CD823B
19.1.2 Printer Rear Section
Image Processing
Section
Cooling Fans 1/2
(F217/F218)
GIA22
Circuit Board
Printer Exhaust Fans 1/2

(F311/F312)
GHT22
Circuit Board
LDD22 Circuit Board
Printer Exhaust
Fan 2 (F313)
GPA22
Circuit Boards
(4 to 6)
Start Switch
LDA22 Circuit Board
Printer Suction
Fans 1/2
(F308/F309)
GMB22
Circuit Board
Pulse Motor Driver

CTC22
Circuit Board
Image Processing Circuit

Board Section
Main Control
Unit Section
DC Power
Supply Unit
(Alpha 600)
Main Control Unit

DC Power Supply Section
DC Power
Supply Unit
(Alpha 400)
PWR22 Circuit Board
LED Circuit Board
CD823A
19.1.3 Processor Rear Section

Processing Tank Exhaust Fan
(F406)
Printer Control Section Exhaust Fan

(F317)
PDC22 Circuit Board
Control Circuit Board Section
CTP22 Circuit Board
Power Supply Section Exhaust Fans 1

(F306/F307)
CD824
19.1.4 Scanner Section

<Scanner Section Rear View>
ADC22 Circuit Board

PZR22 Circuit Board
LTC22 Circuit Board
CD825
Lens
PZR22
Circuit Board
(See 19.3.11)
LTC22
Circuit Board
(See 19.3.7)
Mouse
Keyboard
Densitometer
PDC22
Circuit Board
(DC Driver)
(See 19.3.10)
PWR22 Circuit Board

(See 19.3.2)
Main Control Unit

(See 19.3.9)
GPA22 Circuit Board
(See 19.3.15)
GPA22 Circuit Board
GHT22 Circuit Board
GPA22 Circuit Board
Manual Film
Carrier M69D
GPA22 Circuit Board
GMB22 Circuit Board

(See 19.3.14)
GPA22 Circuit Board
CYS22
Circuit Board
(Auto Film Carrier
NC100AC)
Monitor
Image Processing Section

GIA22 Circuit Board
(See 19.3.2)
PWR22
Circuit Board
Heaters
Pumps
Dryer Fan
PAC22
Circuit Board
(AC Driver)
(See 19.3.8)
(See 19.3.1)
Power
Supply
Section
Interlock
Information
Laser Unit
(See 19.3.12)
(See 19.3.13)
Interlock
Information
JML22
Circuit Board
(See 19.3.12)
AOM-B
AOM-G
CTP22 Circuit Board

(Printer and Processor Control)
(See 19.3.5)
LDD22
Circuit Board
(See 19.3.6)
(See 19.3.12)
LDA22
Circuit Board
(See 19.3.12)
Sensors of Printer
and Processor
Motors
Solenoids
Fans
GPA22 Circuit Board
CTC22 Circuit Board

(Carrier and Scanner Control)
(See 19.3.4)
ADC22
Circuit Board
CCD22
Circuit Board
(See 19.3.3)
LED22
Circuit Board
Scanner Section
PWR22
Circuit Board
(See 19.3.2)
19.2 Block Diagram
19.3 Wiring Diagrams

19.3.1 AC Power Supply Wiring Diagram
1
10
11
A
ORG
BLK
Electrical Wiring Diagram
BLK
BLK
WHT
WHT
Power Supply Section Wiring Diagram

(for a Three-phase Four-wire System)
ORG
BLK
BLK
WHT
RED
RED
ORG
ORG
BRN
BRN
BLU
BLU
YEL
BLK
BLK
WHT
WHT
BLK
WHT
YEL
BLK
BLK
WHT
BLK
WHT
BLK
WHT
To the DC power
supply unit
RED
WHT
BLK
BLK
WHT
To the dryer heater A
GRN/YEL
RED
BLK

(for a Single-phase System)
RED
RED
ORG
ORG
BRN
BRN
BLU
To the dryer heater B
YEL
YEL
YEL
BLU
BLK
BLK
WHT
WHT
BLK
BLK
WHT
WHT
BLK
BLK
WHT
BLK
WHT
BLK
WHT
WHT
Panel
BLK
BLK
WHT
ORG
WHT
BLK
GRN/YEL
GRN/YEL
BLK
BLK
BLK
WHT
WHT
WHT
To the PC (100 VAC)

ORG
Solution heater A
(
)
BLK
BLK
ORG

(for a Three-phase Three-wire System)
RED
RED
ORG
ORG
BRN
BRN
BLU
BLU
WHT
BLK
YEL
YEL
BLK
BLK
BLK
BLK
Solution heater B
WHT
WHT
WHT
WHT
BLK
BLK
WHT
YEL
BLK
WHT
BLK
BLK
WHT
WHT
RED
WHT
Panel
BLK
Dryer fan
Transformer
BLK
WHT
GRN/YEL
Panel
To the 100 VAC-related loads in

the PAC circuit board
H
1 2
2 1
3 4
JSA8
JSA8
3 4
3 4 5 6 7 8
CCD2
CCD2
CCD2
5 6 7
5 6 7
6 3 2 4 1 5
ADC2
ADC2
ADC2
To CTC_2/3_JCA8
2 3
N.C
1
4
7
LDD2
LDD2
8 10 9 5 6
LDD22
5 7 1 3 2 4 6
LDD1
LDD1
1 2
LTC1
LTC1
LTC22
N.C
PWR13
PWR13
8 9 10 11121314
PWR22 Circuit Board (1/2)
PWR12
PWR12
1 13 2 14 3 15 4 16 5 17 6 18 7 19 8 20 9 21 10 22 11 23 12 24
3 4
(ORG)
(BLK)
+9V
GND
N.C
N.C
(ORG)
(BLK)
(RED)
(BLK)
To PAC22_PAC16
1 2
JNDL2
JNDL2
1 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011 1213 1415 16 17 18

PWR17
PWR17
N,C
N,C
N.C
N.C
1 2 3 4
JPS2
JPS2
1 2 3 4
N,C
N,C
N,C
N,C
N,C
N,C
N,C
N,C
N,C
N,C
N,C
N,C
N,C
N,C
N,C
N,C
24V
GND
(ORG)
(BLK)
D416A/D416BD416x_RTN
N.C
N.C
+24v30
+24v31
+23v32
GND-24V3
+24v41
+24v42
+24v43
GND-24V4
GND-24V4
+24v30
+24v31
+24v32
GND-24V3
+24v41
+24v42
+24v43
GND-24V4
GND-24V4
(RED)
(BLK)
1 2
N.C
N.C
N.C
P+5V1
GND_5P
P+9V1
GND_9P
N.C
P+5V1
GND_5P
P+9V1
GND_9P
N.C
To PAC22_PAC16
N.C
6 7
(BLU)
(BLK)
1 2 3 4 5
N.C (BLK)
1 2
(ORG)
(BLK)
N.C
To CTC_2/3_JCA3
(RED)
N.C
(RED)
(BLK)
(RED)
(BLK)
1 2
P+5V1
GND-5P
P+9V1
P+9V2
GND-9P
N.C
N.C
(ORG)
(BLK)
(ORG)
(BLK)
CTC3
CTC3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
+24V13
GND-24V1
N.C
N,C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
+24V01
GND_24V0
+24V11
GND_24V1
+24V01
GND_24V0
+24V11
GND_24V1
1 2
NDL
NDL
1 2
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
A+24V1
A+24V1
A+24V2
A+24V2
GND-24A
GND-24A
A+8V1
A+8V1
A+8V2
A+8V2
GND-8A
GND-8A
A+13V1
A+13V1
A+13V2
A+13V2
A+13V3
A+13V3
GND-13A
GND-13A
GND-13A
GND-13A
A-13V
A-13V
N,C
N,C
(ORG)
(BLK)
(ORG)
(BLK)
(ORG)
(BLK)
1 2
JPS1
JPS1
1 2
(RED)
(BLK)
PWR11
PWR11
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 2324
P+5V1
GND-5P
P+9V1
P+9V2
GND-9P
GND-24V2
+24V01
+24V02
GND-24V0
+24V11
1112 131415
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N,C
N,C
N,C
N,C
N,C
N,C
N,C
N,C
N,C
N,C
N,C
(BLK)
D+5V2
GND_5D
D+5V2
GND_5D
Vcc
Vcc
+24V1_on/off
P+9V_on/off
P+5V2_on/off
GND(DGND)
D+5V
DGND
JCA9
JCA9
(RED)
(BLK)
+24V12
GND-24V1
+24V21
+24V22
+24V23
GND-24V2
GND-24V2
16171819202122
PWR15
PWR15
(RED)
(BLK) N.C
(ORG)
(BLK) N.C
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLU) N.C
(RED) N.C
A+24V1
A+24V2
GND-24A
A+8V1
A+8V2
GND-8A
A+13V1
A+13V2
A+13V3
GND-13A
GND-13A
A-13V
A+24V1
A+24V2
GND-24A
A+8V1
A+8V2
GND-8A
A+13V1
A+13V2
A+13V3
GND-13A
GND-13A
A-13V
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
(BLK)
(BLK)
(RED) N.C
PWR10
PWR10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
(ORG)N.C
+24V01
+24V02
GND-24V0
+24V11
+24V12
GND-24V1
+24V21
+24V22
+24V23
GND-24V2
1 6 2 7 3 8 4 5 9 10
PWR8
PWR8
N.C
N.C
N.C
N,C
(RED)
(RED)
(RED)
(BLK)
(BLK)
N.C
N.C
CTC4
CTC4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
-13V
GND
To CTC_2/3_JCA7
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N,C
N,C
N,C
To CTC_2/3_JCA6
+13V
GND
7 13 14
N.C
N.C
N.C
6 12
CTC2
CTC2
1 2 3 4
IL24I
I24GI
IL+13I
I13GI
N.C
N.C
N.C
7 13 14
D+5V1
D+5V1
D+5V2
D+5V2
D+5V3
D+5V3
GND-5D
GND-5D
GND-5D
GND-5D
(RED)
(RED)
(GRY)
(GRY)
(GRY)
(BLK)
(RED)
(BLK)
(BLU)
(RED)
(BLK)
(BLU)
A+20V
GND-20A
A+12V1
A+12V2
GND-12A
A-12V1
A-12V2
A+5V
GND-5A
A-5V
A+20A
GND-20A
A+12V1
A+12V2
GND-12A
A-12V1
A-12V2
A+5V
GND-5A
A-5V
Vcc(D+5V2)
Vcc(D+5V2)
+24V1_on/off
P+9V_on/off
P+5V2_on/off
GND(DGND)
1 2 3 4 5 6
PWR2
PWR2
13GI
13GI
-13I
G+8I
G8GI
6 12
N.C
N.C
N.C
(RED)
(BLK)
(BLU)
N.C
(BLK) N.C
2 4
CTC5
CTC5
1 2 3 4 5 6
CTC22
+13I
2 9
(RED)N.C
CTP11
CTP11
B8GI
1 8
3 4 10 11 5
JSA5
JSA5
3 4 10 11 5
N.C
2 9
N.C
1 8
N.C
N.C
1 4 2 7 3 8 6 9 5 10
PWR7
PWR7
(RED)
N,C (BLK)
N,C
D+5V
DGND
24GI
B+8I
l+24I
1 4 2 5 3 8 6 9 7 10
BOX2
BOX2
N.C
(RED)
(BLK)
(BLU) N.C
(RED)
(BLK)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 101112 1314
PWR1
PWR1
N,C
N,C
N,C
N,C
1 3
(RED)
(BLK)
(BLU)
(BLK)
(BLU) N.C
D+5V1
GND-D5
D+5V2
D+5V2
D+5V3
D+5V3
D+5V1
GND-5D
GND-5D
GND-5D
CTP22
(RED)
(BLK)
(BLU)
1 2
(BLK)
(BLU)
A+20V
GND-20A
A+12V1
A+12V2
GND-12A
A-12V1
A-12V2
A+5V
GND-5A
A-5V
A+20V
GND-20A
A+12V1
A+12V2
GND-12A
A-12V1
A-12V2
A+5V
GND-5A
A-5V
N.C
N.C
N.C
VCC(FU1)
VCC(FU1)
D322
D323
D324
D325
D416
D410
PINSP1
PINSP2
24VON
PONSP1
PONSP2
PONSP3
GND
GND
(RED)
(BLK)
N.C
Image Processing BOX
(BLK)
(BLU)
N.C
(RED)
(BLK)
(BLU)
PWR9
PWR9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
(RED)
(BLK)N.C
N.C
(RED)
(RED)
(GRY)
(GRY)
(GRY)
(GRY)
(GRY)
(GRY)
(GRY)
(GRY)
(GRY) N,C
(GRY)
(BLK)
(BLK)
CTP10
CTP10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 101112 13141516
(RED)
(BLK)
F
Vcc(D+5V1)
Vcc(D+5V1)
D322
D323
D324A/D324B
D325A/D325B
D416A/D416B
D410
+24V2_on/off
+24V3_on/off
+24V4_on/off
N.C
GND(DGND)
GND(DGND)
(RED)
(BLK)
D+3.3V1
GND-3.3D
D+3.3V2
GND-3.3D
D+3.3V3
GND-3.3D
D+3.3V4
GND-3.3D
D+3.3V5
GND-3.3D
N.C
GND-3.3D
A12V
GND
N.C
A5V
GND
A-5V
A+20V
GND-20A
N.C
N.C
GND-12A
A-12V1
N.C
A+5V
GND-5A
A-5V
E
PWR6
PWR6
1 7 2 8 3 9 4 10 5 11 6 12
(RED)
(BLK)
(RED)
(BLK)
(RED)
(BLK)
(RED)
(BLK)
(RED)
(BLK) N.C
N.C
3.3V
GND
3.3V
GND
3.3V
GND
3.3V
GND
3.3V
GND
19.3.2 PWR22 Circuit Board Wiring Diagram (1/2)

9
10
A
To PAC22_PAC16
Light table
To CTC22_2/3_CY2
PZR22
PZR1
PZR1
1 2
To PAC22
PAC15
1 2
1 2 3
JNDL1
JNDL1
1 2 3
1 3 2 4
PWR5
PWR5
11
H
1 4
2 5 3 6
PWR4
PWR4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
PWR16
PWR16
1 10 2 11 3 12 4 13 5 14 6 15 7 16 8 17 9 18
PWR18
PWR18
PWR22 Circuit Board (2/2)
(RED)
(BLK)
PDC23
PDC23
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
N.C
N.C
P+5V
GND
P+24V43
GND
N.C
P+24V41
GND
P+24V42
GND
P+24V32
GND
GND
N.C
N.C
P+24V31
P+24V23
GND
P+24V02
GND
P+24V22
GND
Dryer unit detecting interlock switch

(V-152-1C26)
6
7
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
(ORG)
(BLK)
(ORG)
(BLK)
(ORG)
(BLK)
PDC24
PDC24
3 2 4 5 6
N.C
(ORG)
(BLK)
N.C
N.C
(ORG)
(BLK)
N.C
N.C
(BLK)
(BLK)
P+24V21
GND
GND
(YEL)
(YEL)
N.C
5 6
(ORG)
(BLK)
PDC22
PDC22
3 4
7 8
(ORG)
(ORG)
(ORG)
(BLK)
1 2
N.C
N.C
1 4
10
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
1 2
D416A
D416A
1 2
9
N.C
1 2
D410A
D410A
1 2
P+24V01
D416B
N.C
N.C
N.C
(BLK)
D410
N.C
D410
Dryer unit detecting interlock switch
(V-152-1C26)
1 2
J416A
J416A
1 2
P+5V1
P+5V1
GND-5P
GND-5P
P+9V1
P+9V1
P+9V2
P+9V2
GND-9P
GND-9P
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
PWR3
PWR3
D416A
(BLK)
(BLK)
Feed section upper door sensor

(V-152-1C26)
Feed section lower door sensor

(V-152-1C26)
+24V30
+24V30
+24V31
+24V31
+24V32
+24V32
GND-24V3
GND-24V3
+24V41
+24V41
+24V42
+24V42
+24V43
+24V43
GND-24V4
GND-24V4
GND-24V4
GND-24V4
4 8
(GRY)
(BLK)
1 4
N.C
N.C
D323
D323
(RED)
D324B
D324B
Replenisher door detecting interlock switch

(V-152-1C26)
D324A
D324A
(YEL)
(YEL)
D325B
D325B
+24V01
+24V02
GND-24VO
+24V11
+24V12
GND-24V1
+24V21
+24V22
+24V23
GND-24V2
GND-24V2
+24V01
+24V02
GND-24V0
+24V11
+24V12
GND-24V1
+24V21
+24V22
+24V23
GND-24V2
GND-24V2
3 7
N.C
Feed section lower door sensor

(V-152-1C26)
Front upper cover sensor

(V-152-1C26)
Front upper cover sensor

(V-152-1C26)
D416A/D416B+
D416A/D416BN.C
N.C
3 6
2 5
JHA5
JHA5
2 5
(YEL)
(YEL) N.C
(YEL)
N.C
D325A
D325A
(RED)
(BLK)
N.C
N.C
(YEL)
N.C
D322
D322
D410+
D410-
3 6
(RED)
(BLK)
N.C
N.C
(YEL)
(BLK)
N.C
Magazine door detecting interlock switch

(V-152-1C26)
D323+
D323-
2 6
(RED)
(BLK)
1 5
D324A/D324B+
D324A/D324B-
E
(RED)
(BLK)
N.C
(RED)
(BLK)
D325A/D325B+
D325A/D325B-
D322+
D322-
PWR22 Circuit Board Wiring Diagram (2/2)

8
PDC22
PDC25
PDC25
1 2
1 8 2 9 3 10 4 11 5 12 6 13 7 14
PWR14
PWR14
9
10
11
19.3.3 CCD22/ADC22 Circuit Board Wiring Diagram

1
10
(BLK)
(RED)
1 2
(BLK)
(RED)
7 13 14
6
N.C
N.C
(BLU)
(BLK)
(RED)
N.C
(BLU)
(BLK)
N.C
N.C
(BLK)
(RED)
A-5V
GND-5A
A+5V
A-12V2
A-12V1
GND-12A
A+12V2
A+12V1
GND-20A
A+20V
A-5V
GND-5A
A+5V
A-12V2
A-12V1
GND-12A
A+12V2
A+12V1
GND-20A
A+20V
Image Processing BOX
GND
GND
SCK(+)
SCK(-)
SDTW(-)
SDTW(+)
SDTR(+)
SDTR(-)
/HD(-)
/HD(+)
CLK(+)
CLK(-)
DIN12(-)
DIN12(+)
DIN11(+)
DIN11(-)
DIN10(-)
DIN10(+)
DIN9(+)
DIN9(-)
DIN8(-)
DIN8(+)
DIN7(+)
DIN7(-)
DIN6(-)
DIN6(+)
DIN5(+)
DIN5(-)
DIN4(-)
DIN4(+)
DIN3(+)
DIN3(-)
DIN2(-)
DIN2(+)
DIN1(+)
DIN1(-)
DIN0(-)
DIN0(+)
GND
GND
PWR22 Circuit Board
(BLK)
(RED)
5 6 7
7 1314
1 212 223 234 245 25 6 26 7 27 8 28 9 2910 3011 3112 3213 33 1434 1535 1636 17 3718 3819 3920 40
BOX1
BOX1
(BLK)
(RED)
3 4
JSA8
JSA8
3 4
2 1
GND
A+20V
CCD2
CCD2
3 4 5 6 7 8
N.C
(RED)
N.C
N.C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1314 1516 1718 1920

PWR9
PWR9
5 6 7
N.C
N.C
(BLU)
(BLK)
(RED)
2 9
(RED)
(BLU)
(BLK)
(RED)
N.C
N.C
(BLK)
(BLK)
UL1007 18AWG
A12V
A-5V
GND
A+5V
N.C
A-12V
GND
N.C
1 2
GND
GND
(BLU)
(BLK)
(RED)
1 8
(BLU)
(BLK)
(RED)
A-5V
GND
A5V
3 4 10 11 12 5
JSA5
JSA5
3 4 10 1112 5
SDTWSDTW+
SCKSCK+
SDTRSDTR+
SYNCSYNC+
IDCKIDCK+
ADCKADCK+
2 9
1 9 2 10 3 11 4 12 5 13 6 14 7 15 8
ADC3
ADC3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
JSA9
JSA9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
(BLK)
(GRY)
(BLK)
(GRY)
(BLK)
(GRY)
(BLK)
(GRY)
(BLK)
(GRY)
(BLK)
(GRY)
N.C
N.C
N.C
1 8
CCD22 Circuit Board
SDTWSDTW+
SCKSCK+
SDTRSDTR+
HDHD+
IDCKIDCK+
ADCKADCK+
CCD3
CCD3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
ADC2
ADC2
4 1 5
3 2
SIG
ADC22 Circuit Board
CCD1
CCD1
CCDOS
ADC1
ADC1
GND
GND
SCK(+)
SCK(-)
SDTW(-)
SDTW(+)
SDTR(+)
SDTR(-)
/HD(-)
/HD(+)
CLK(+)
CLK(-)
DIN12(-)
DIN12(+)
DIN11(+)
DIN11(-)
DIN10(-)
DIN10(+)
DIN9(+)
DIN9(-)
DIN8(-)
DIN8(+)
DIN7(+)
DIN7(-)
DIN6(-)
DIN6(+)
DIN5(+)
DIN5(-)
DIN4(-)
DIN4(+)
DIN3(+)
DIN3(-)
DIN2(-)
DIN2(+)
DIN1(+)
DIN1(-)
DIN0(-)
DIN0(+)
GND
GND
ADC4
ADC4
1 21 2 22 3 23 4 24 5 25 6 26 7 27 8 28 9 29 1030 11 3112 3213 3314 34 1535 1636 1737 1838 19 3920 40
11
H
D211
D212
D213
F
1 2 3
JSA6
JSA6
1 2 3
1 2 3
JSA7
JSA7
1 2 3
1 2 3
D214
1 2 3
D215
D214
D215
CTC14
CTC14
D204/
F201
D216/
F216
1 4 2 5 3 6
M201
M201
1 4 2 5 3 6
(RED)
(YEL)
(BLU)
(ORG)
1 7 2 8
CTC16
CTC16
3 9 4 10
M201
1 5 2 6
JSA4
JSA4
1 5 2 6
3 7 4 8
3 7 4 8
1 2 3
F217
F217
1 2 3
1 2 3
F218
F218
1 2 3
1 5 2 6 3 4
M202
M202
1 5 2 6 3 4
1 5 2 6 3 4
M203
M203
1 5 2 6 3 4
M202
M203
CTC15
CTC15
D217/
F217
4 5 6 7
D218/
F218
PZ201+
PZ201PZ202+
PZ202PZON+
PZONERR201
DGND
ERR202
DGND
ERRPZR
DGND
DGND
DGND
(GRY)
(BLK)
(GRY)
(BLK)
(GRY)
(BLK)
(GRY)
(BLK)
(GRY)
(BLK)
(GRY)
(BLK)
(GRY)
(BLK)
(GRY)
(BLK)
(GRY)
(BLK)
(GRY)
(BLK)
(GRY)
(BLK)
N.C
N.C
LTC4
CTC11
9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
PZR2
PZR2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
CTC4
CTC4
1 2 3 4 5 6
CTC5
CTC5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
LTC4
CTC11
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1112 13 14
CTC13
CTC13
CTC17
CTC17
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213 141516
VCC2
IAUX0
GND(DGND)
GND(DGND)
VCC2
IAUX1
GND(DGND)
GND(DGND)
OAUX0-(VCC)
GND(DGND)
OAUX0
GND(DGND)
OAUX1-(VCC)
GND(DGND)
OAUX1
GND(DGND)
OAUX2-(VCC)
GND(DGND)
OAUX2
GND(DGND)
OAUX3-(VCC)
GND(DGND)
OAUX3
GND(DGND)
LH201+
LH201D203A
GND(DGND)
D203B
GND(DGND)
D203C
GND(DGND)
D203D
GND(DGND)
(RED)
(RED)
(GRY)
(GRY)
(GRY)
(BLK)
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
X-axis on+
X-axis onY-axis on+
Y-axis onPWONon+
PWONonX-axis SNG
GND
Y-axis SNG
GND
Power NG
GND
LH201(+)
LH201(-)
D203A(+)
D203A(-)
D203B(+)
D203B(-)
D203C(+)
D203C(-)
D203D(+)
D203D(-)
Vcc(D+5V2)
Vcc(D+5V2)
+24V1_on/off
P+9V_on/off
P+5V2_on/off
GND(DGND)
+24V01
+24V012
GND-24V0
+24V11
+24V12
GND-24V1
+24V21
+24V22
+24V23
GND-24V2
GND-24V2
+24V01
+24V02
GND-24V0
+24V11
+24V12
GND-24V1
+24V21
+24V22
+24V23
GND-24V2
GND-24V2
LTC22 Circuit Board
Spare output circuitry for the Light

Source and Scanner sections
1 2 3
M24V0
PGND
D218
N.C
D
M24V0
PGND
D217
M203-A
M203-/A
M203-B
M203-/B
Vcc
Vcc
+24V1_on/off
P+9V_on/off
P+5V2_on/off
DGND
(ORG)
(BLK)
(ORG)
(BLK)
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
PWR2
PWR2
1 2 3 4 5 6
Spare output circuitry for the Light

Source and Scanner sections
(ORG)
(BLK)
(GRY)
N.C
1 2 3
JSA3
JSA3
1 2 3
(ORG)
(BLK)
(GRY)
5 11 6 12
(RED)
(YEL)
(BLU)
(ORG)
M202-A
M202-/A
M202-B
M202-/B
M201-A
M201-/A
M201-B
M201-/B
(ORG)
(BLK)
(ORG)
(BLK)
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
Image processing section cooling fan 2

(109P0824H2D01)
1 2 3
F216
F216
1 2 3

(109P0824H2D01)
4 5 6
(RED)
(BLU)
(YEL)
(ORG)
+24V01
GND_24V0
+24V11
GND_24V1
+24V01
GND_24V0
+24V11
GND_24V1
(RED)
(BLK) N.C
N.C
N.C
(ORG)
(BLK)
PWR15
PWR15
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
(RED)
(YEL)
(BLU)
N.C (ORG)
N.C
1 2 3
F201
F201
1 2 3
M24VO
PGND
D216
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CTC3
CTC3
Shutter drive motor
E
(ORG)
(BLK)
(GRY)
To PAC
(ORG)
4 5 6
(RED)
(BLK)
To PZR
N.C
N.C
4 5 6
1 2 3
UL1007 24AWG
(BLK)
PWR13
PWR13
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
(RED)
(YEL)
(BLU)
1 2 3
P+5V1
GND-5P
P+9V1
P+9V2
GND-9P
+24v13
GND-24v1
P+5V1
GND-5P
P+9V1
P+9V2
GND-9P
N.C
N.C
D+5V2
GND-5D
D+5V1
D+5V1
D+5V2
GND-5D
D+5V3
GND-5D
D+5V3
GND-5D
Image Processing
BOX
N.C
N.C
13 1415 16
Lens drive motor
JSA2
JSA2
N.C
(RED)
(BLK)
(RED)
(BLK)
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
GND
CTC_RXD
CTC_TXD
/CTC_IRQ
/CTC_INT
GND
IN PORT1
OUT PORT1
IN PORT2
OUT PORT2
Conjugate length variable motor
(ORG)
(BLK)
(GRY)
1 2 3 4
CTC2
CTC2
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
(RED)
(BLK)
(RED)
C
To the light
table
M24V0
PGND
D204
P+5V1
GND_5P
P+9V1
GND_9P
N.C
P+5V1
GND_5P
P+9V1
GND_9P
N.C
(RED)
(BLK)
To CY1 To CY2
(ORG)
(BLK)
(GRY)
VCC2
D215
GND(DGND)
GND(DGND)
VCC
D214
GND(DGND)
N.C
N.C
PWR8
PWR8
2 4 1 6 7 9 3 5 8 10
Scanner cooling fan sensor

(109P0824H4D01)
101112
(RED)
(GRY)
(BLK)
N.C
UL1007 26AWG
(RED)
(GRY)
(BLK)
D+5V2
GND_5D
D+5V2
GND_5D
(BLK)
(GRY)
(GRY)
(GRY)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(GRY)
(BLK)
(GRY)
(BLK)
Light source cooling fan sensor

(109BF24HD2-2)
7 8 9 10
(RED)
(GRY)
(BLK)
1 2 3
D213
1 2 3
(GRY)
(BLK)
7 8 9 10
(RED)
N.C
CTC12
CTC12
7 8 9
Shutter home
position sensor
(GP1A73A)
4 5 6
JSA1
JSA1
4 5 6
VCC2
D213
GND(DGND)
(BLK)
(GRY)
(GRY)
(GRY)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(GRY)
(BLK)
(GRY)
(BLK)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
JGM1
JGM1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
(RED)
(GRY)
(BLK)
1 2 3
4 5 6
(RED)
(GRY)
(BLK)
GND(DGND)
TxD
RxD
int out
int in
GND(DGND)
GMB_out1
GMB_in1
GMB_out2
GMB_in2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CTC1
CTC1
(GRY)
(BLK)
N.C
1 2 3
VCC2
D212
GND(DGND)
VCC2
D211
GND(DGND)
BOX5
BOX5
5 2 1 4 3 17 7 6 9 8
Lens home
position sensor
(GP1A75E)
(RED)
(GRY)
(BLK)
1 2 3
D212

(GP1A73A)
1 2 3
(RED)
(GRY)
(BLK)
(RED)
(GRY)
(BLK)
(RED)
(RED)
(GRY)
(BLK)
1 2 3
D211

(GP1A73A)
G
(RED)
(GRY)
(BLK)
Conjugate length variable home position sensor

(GP1A73A)
19.3.4 CTC22 Circuit Board Wiring Diagram (1/3)

9
10
A
PWR22 Circuit Board
PZR22 Circuit Board
To CY1 To CTC22_CY2
CT22 Circuit Board (1/3)
CTC18
CTC18
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
11
H
E
CTC27
CTC27
1 2
D121
D121
1 2
1 2
D122
D122
1 2
D121
D122
3 4
CTC30
CTC30
1 2 3 4 5
1 10 2 11 3 12 4 13 5 14 6 15 7 16 8 17 9 18
CTC26
CTC26
CTC31
CTC31
1 2 3 4 5
7 8 9 10 11 12
JCA2
JCA2
7 8 9 10 11 12
13 14 15 16 17 18
1 10 2 11 3 12 4 13 5 14 6 15 7 16 8 17 9 18
JCA6
JCA6
1 10 2 11 3 12 4 13 5 14 6 15 7 16 8 17 9 18
1 2
JCA6
JCA6
1 2
To PWR8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
JCA1
JCA1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CTC22 Circuit Board (2/3)
To PWR10
D
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 101112
CTC23
CTC23
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 101112 1314 15161718

CTC24
CTC24
2 18 3
1632
(RED)
(BLK)
(BLU)
N.C
To PWR8
(RED)
(BLK)
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
To PWR10
GND(FGND)
+24V12
GND-24V1
A+12V2
GND-12A
A-12V2
D+5V3
GND(DGND)
7
8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 101112 1314
JCA4
JCA4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 101112 1314
1 2
JCA3
JCA3
1 2
1 2 3 4
JCA8
JCA8
1 2 3 4
1 4 2 3 5 6
JCA9
JCA9
1 4 2 3 5 6
To PWR15
(BLK)
1 17
(RED)
(BLK)
NCC0
GND(DGND)
NCC1
GND(DGND)
NCC2
GND(DGND)
NCC3
GND(DGND)
NCC4
GND(DGND)
key1
key2
BRS+(key3)
BRS-(key_com)
RxD+
RxDCTS+
CTSTxD+
TxdRTS+
RTS/RPQ
/RPQ-RTN
GND(FGND)
A+12V2
GND-12A
A-12V2
D+5V3
GND-5D
Plug-in Connector for Film Carrier
(GRY)
(BLK)
(GRY)
(BLK)
(GRY)
(BLK)
(GRY)
(BLK)
(GRY)
(BLK)
(GRY)
(BLK)
(GRY)
(BLK)
M4 round ground terminal
1 2 3 4
JCA7
JCA7
1 2 3 4
(BLK)
CY2
CY2
1026112712 2813291430 8 24 1531
23
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
D123
4 20 5 21 6 22 7 23 9 25
(GRY)
(BLK)
(GRY)
(BLK)
(GRY)
(BLK)
(GRY)
(BLK)
(GRY)
(BLK)
2 22 3
(RED)
(BLK)
(BLU)
N.C
1 21
N.C
CY1
CY1
13 33 14 34 9 29 10 30 15 35 16 3611 31 12 321737
(GRY)
(BLK)
(GRY)
(BLK)
(GRY)
(BLK)
(GRY)
(BLK)
(GRY)
(BLK)
(GRY)
(BLK)
(GRY)
(BLK)
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
1 2
JCA10
JCA10
1 2
M4 round ground terminal
18 38 19 39 20 40
NCC0
GND(DGND)
NCC1
GND(DGND)
NCC2
GND(DGND)
NCC3
GND(DGND)
NCC4
GND(DGND)
key1
key2
key3
key COM
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
(RED)
(BLK)
M101-A
M101-/A
M101B
M101-/B
M102-A
M102-/A
M102-B
M102-/B
M103-A
M103-/A
M103-B
M103-/B
M104-A
M104-/A
M104-B
M104-/B
S101+
S101-
(GRY)
(BLK)
(GRY)
(BLK)
(GRY)
(BLK)
(GRY)
(BLK)
(GRY)
(BLK)
N.C
N.C
N.C
(BRN)
(RED)
(ORG)
(YEL)
(BRN)
(RED)
(ORG)
(YEL)
(BRN)
(RED)
(ORG)
(YEL)
(BRN)
(RED)
(ORG)
(YEL)
(ORG)
(BLK)
SIO2+
SIO2SCLK2+
SCLK2RST2+
RST2-
TxD+
TxDRTS+
RTSRxD+
RxDCTS+
CTS/PRQ
RQ-RTN
GND(DGND)
GND(DGND)
(RED)
(YEL)
(BLU)
(ORG)
(RED)
(YEL)
(BLU)
(ORG)
(RED)
(YEL)
(BLU)
(ORG)
(RED)
(YEL)
(BLU)
(ORG)
(ORG)
(BLK)
(GRY)
(BLK)
(GRY)
(BLK)
(GRY)
(BLK)
1 2 3 4 5 6
13 14 15 16 17 18
GND(DGND)
TxD
RxD
RTS
CTS
M101-A
M101-/A
M101-B
M101-/B
M102-A
M102-/A
M102-B
M102-/B
M103-A
M103-/A
M103-B
M103-/B
M104-A
M104/A
M104-B
M104-/B
S101+
S101-
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011 1213
CTC22
CTC22
GND(DGND)
TxD
RxD
Int_out
Int_in
(GRY)
(BLK)
(GRY)
(BLK)
(GRY)
(BLK)
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
SW1
SW1-RTN
D123A
D123A_RTN
SIO+
SIOSCLK+
CLKRST+
RST-
Serial communication I/F for

debugging the Carrier CPU
1 2
D122
DGND
DIO+
DIOCLK+
CLKCRES+
CRESGND(DGND)
SW1
GND(DGND)
D123A
D123A_RTN
D123B
D123_RTN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011 1213
CTC21
CTC21
Serial communication I/F for debugging the

CTC22 and GMB22 (GHT22)
(GRY)
(BLK)
CTC25
CTC25
1 2 3 4 5 6
D121
DGND
UL1007 26AWG
4 24 5 25
(GRY)
(BLK)
(GRY)
(BLK)
(GRY)
(BLK)
(GRY)
(BLK)
1 2 3 4 5 6
(GRY)
(BLK)
(GRY)
(BLK)
(GRY)
(BLK)
135 carrier position sensor
F
(GRY)
(BLK)
(GRY)
(BLK)
(GRY)
(BLK)
N.C
(GRY)
(BLK)
(GRY)
(BLK)
(GRY)
(BLK)
C
6 26 7 27 8 28
IX 240 carrier position sensor
DIO+
DIOCLK+
CLKCRES+
CRESGND(DGND)
SW1
GND(DGND)
D123A
D123A_RTN
D123B
D123B_RTN
Key switch I/F (conventionally used as the

J Carrier circuit board)
key1
key2
key3
key COM
N.C
N.C
CTC22 Circuit Board Wiring Diagram (2/3)

9
10
A
Plug-in Connector for Film Carrier
19
11
H
12 32 1333 14341535163617 37183819392040
JCP1
JCP1
1232 1333 14341535163617 37183819392040
3 23 4 24 5 25 6 26 7 27 8 28 9 2910301131
Wiring group B for the LTC22

Wiring group A for the LTC22
1 24 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213 1415 16171819202122 23 2

CTC7
CTC7
N.C
N.C
120 diffusion box sensor

(VX-014-1A3)
D202
1 2
JCP3
JCP3
1 2
3 4
LED3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213 1415161718
21 22
31113010 29 9 28 8 27 7 26 6 25 5 24 4 23 3
1 2
21 22
31113010 29 9 28 8 27 7 26 6 25 5 24 4 23 3
1 2
CTC10
CTC10
3 4
CTC22 Circuit Board (3/3)
(BRN)
(BRN)
(BRN)
(BRN)
(BRN)
(BRN)
(BRN)
(BRN)
(BRN)
(BRN)
(BRN)
(BRN)
(BRN)
(BRN)
(BRN)
(BRN)
(ORG)
(ORG)
135 diffusion box sensor

(VX-014-1A3)
D201
(BLK)
(BRN)
(BRN)
(BRN)
(BRN)
(BRN)
(BRN)
(BRN)
(BRN)
(BRN)
(BRN)
(BRN)
(BRN)
(BRN)
(BRN)
(BRN)
(BRN)
(ORG)
(ORG)
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
LED2
(BLK)
(ORG)
(ORG)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
(ORG)
(ORG)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
JCP2
JCP2
(GRY)
(BLK)
1 22 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213 14151617181920 21 2
CTC6
CTC6
1 2
(GRY)
(BLK)
3 23 4 24 5 25 6 26 7 27 8 28 9 2910301131
7
8
LED3
LED_4-/CHK
LED_4-/CHK_RTN
LED_IR23
LED_B0
LED_IR20
LED_R0
LED_G0
LED_B3
LED_IR19
LED_R3
LED_G3
LED_B4
LED_IR16
LED_R4
LED_G4
LED_B7
LED_IR11
LED_IR8
L9V
L9V
L9V
L9V
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
LGND
N.C
2 22
LED2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011 1213 14151617181920
LED_3-/CHK
LED_3-/CHK_RTN
L9V
L9V
LED_IR15
LED_IR12
LED_B1
LED_G1
LED_R1
LED_IR7
LED_B2
LED_G2
LED_R2
LED_IR4
LED_B5
LED_G5
LED_R5
LED_IR3
LED_B6
LED_IR0
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
LGND
N.C
2 22
1 21
D202
GND(DGND)
LED1
(GRY)
(BLK)
(GRY)
(BLK)
Peltier element (TEC1-12703)
D201
GND(DGND)
N.C
N.C
LH201
LH201
1 2
LED1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011 12131415161718
(BRN)
(BRN)
(BRN)
(BRN)
(BRN)
(BRN)
(BRN)
(BRN)
(BRN)
(BRN)
(BRN)
(BRN)
(BRN)
(BRN)
(BRN)
(BRN)
(ORG)
(ORG)
(ORG)
(ORG)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
D203
1 2
LH201
(BLK)
(BRN)
(BRN)
(BRN)
(BRN)
(BRN)
(BRN)
(BRN)
(BRN)
(BRN)
(BRN)
(BRN)
(BRN)
(BRN)
(BRN)
(BRN)
(BRN)
(ORG)
N.C (ORG)
N.C
N.C
N.C
(GRY)
(BRK)
D203
(BLK)
(ORG)
(ORG)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
N.C (BLK)
N.C
E
1 21
(RED)
(BLK)
Thermistor (PB7-42H-F3)
LED_2-/CHK
LED_2-/CHKRTN
LED_IR10
LED_B8
LED_IR9
LED_R6
LED_G6
LED_B11
LED_IR6
LED_R9
LED_G9
LED_B12
LED_IR5
LED_R10
LED_G10
LED_B15
LED_IR2
LED_IR1
L9V
L9V
L9V
L9V
LGND
N.C
LED_1-/CHK
LED_1-/CHK_RTN
L9V
L9V
LED_IR22
LED_IR21
LED_B9
LED_G7
LED_R7
LED_IR18
LED_B10
LED_G8
LED_R8
LED_IR17
LED_B13
LED_G11
LED_R11
LED_IR14
LED_B14
LED_IR13
LGND
N.C
D
(GRY)
(BRK)
(RED)
(WHT)
CTC22 Circuit Board Wiring Diagram (3/3)

9
10
3 4
LED4
LED4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213 14151617181920
40203919 3818 37173616351534 1433133212
40203919 3818 37173616351534 1433133212
1 26 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011121314 15 16171819202122 2324 25 2

CTC8
CTC8
1 28 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 101112131415 16171819202122 2324 252627 2
CTC9
CTC9
11
H
7 8 9 10
7 8 9 10
1 2 3
D409
D409
1 2 3 4
JFS3
JFS3
1 2 3 4
1 2 3
D411
D411
N.C
N.C
CTP19
CTP19
1 2 3 4
PAC22 Circuit Board

1 2
FS409
FS409
1 2
1 2
FS413
FS413
1 2
N.C
N.C
(RED)
(BLK)
(RED)
(BLK)
(RED)
(BLK)
3 2
5 4
7 6
9 8
11 10
13 12
15 14
CTP16
CTP16
(Not used)
CTP22 Circuit Board (1/3)
CTP21
CTP21
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011121314 15161718192021 2223 24252627282930 31323334553637 3839 40
CTP18
CTP18
1 2 3
4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011121314 15161718192021 2223 24252627282930 31323334553637 3839 40

PAC17
PAC17
1 2 3
D414
D414
1 2 3
1 2 3
D415
D415
1 2 3
1 2 3
D414
D414
D415
FS418
FS419
3 4
5 6
7 8
3 4
5 6
7 8
1 2 3
FS420
FS420
1 2 3
(RED)
(BLK)
(RED)
(BLK)
(RED)
(BLK)
(RED)
(BLK)
N.C
FS417
1 2
21 20
23 22
25 24
27 26
29 28
JFS1
JFS1
FS420
GND
FS419
GND
19 18
FS416
(RED)
(BLK)
Waste solution level sensor

(FLS-1005)
(FLS-1005)
External waste solution level sensor
(FS-08193F)
External washing solution level sensor
(FS-08193F)
External PSR level sensor
(FS-08193F)
External P2R level sensor
(FS-08193F)
External P1R level sensor
(FLS-1005)
PSR lower level sensor
(FS-08193F)
PSR upper level sensor
(FLS-1005)
P2RB lower level sensor
(FLS-1005)
P2RB upper level sensor
(FLS-1005)
P2RA lower level sensor
(FLS-1005)
P1R upper level sensor
(FLS-1005)
P1R lower level sensor
(FLS-1005)
P1R upper level sensor
(FLS-1005)
PS4 solution level sensor
(FLS-1005)
FS418
GND
17 16
FS417
GND
1 2
(RED)
(BLK)

(FLS-1005)
FS416
GND
1 2
FS415
FS415
1 2
(RED)
(BLK)
1 2 3
FS414
FS414
1 2 3
FS415
GND
1 2 3
FS410
FS410
1 2 3
FS414
GND

(FLS-1005)
FS410
GND
FS413
GND
FS409
GND
FS412
GND
FS408
GND
FS411
GND
FS407
GND
P2 solution level sensor

(FLS-1005)
N.C
1 30
1 2
FS412
FS412
1 2
(RED)
(BLK)
1112
1 2
FS408
FS408
1 2
(RED)
(BLK)
9 10
1 2
FS411
FS411
1 2
(RED)
(BLK)
(BLK)
7 8
1 2
FS407
FS407
1 2
(RED)
(BLK)
CTP16 IN
GND
1 2
FS406
FS406
1 2
(RED)
(BLK)
P1 solution level sensor

(FLS-1005)
D415
GND
GND
CTP15
CTP15
FS406
GND
5 6
1 2
FS405
FS405
1 2
(RED)
(BLK)
3 4
FS405
GND
1 2
1 2
FS404
FS404
1 2
(RED)
(BLK)
1 2
FS403
FS403
1 2
FS404
GND
1 2
FS402
FS402
1 2
(RED)
(BLK)
1 2 3
CTP13
CTP13
FS403
GND
Dryer temperature sensor
VCC(FU1)
D414
GND
8 10 12
1 2
FS401
FS401
1 2
(RED)
(BLK)
1 2
TS406
TS406
1 2
FS402
GND
1 2 3
TS404
TS404
1 2 3
(GP1AQ36L)
PS3/4 processing tank temperature sensor

(PNX-24)
TS406
CTP21 IN
VCC (FU1)
PU408
PU409
GND
PU410
PU411
PU401
F405
VCC (FU1)
H401
H402
GND
H403
H404
H406A
H406B
VCC (FU1)
Output spare 1
H407
GND
REON
H408
D401
D402
VCC (FU1)
D403
D404
GND
D406
D418
+5V ON signal
GND
VCC (FU1)
PACP +5V
PACP +24V
GND
PACSEL0
PACSEL1
GND
N.C
PS1/2 processing tank temperature sensor

(PNX-24)
TS404
(RED)
(BLK)
(RED)
(WHT)
N.C
N.C
P2 processing tank temperature sensor

(PNX-24)
TS403
FS401
GND
TS406
(0)AGND
FGND
(RED)
(WHT)
N.C
N.C
P1 processing tank temperature sensor

(PNX-24)
TS402
CTP21IN
(5)VCC
PU408
PU409
(0)GND
PU410
PU411
PU401
F405
(5)VCC
H401
H402
(0)GND
H403
H404
H406A
H406B
(5)VCC
Output spare
H407
(0)GND
REON
H408
D401
D402
(5)VCC
D403
D404
(0)GND
D406
Not used
+5V ON signal
(0)GND
(5)VCC
CTP P+5V notice
CTP P+24V notice
(0)GND
PACSELO
PACSEL1
CTP21OUT
1 2 3
D408
D408
N.C
4 5 6
JHO1
JHO1
4 5 6
(5)VCC
D411
GND
N.C
7 9 11
TS404
(0)AGND
FGND
(RED)
(WHT)
1 2 3
TS403
TS403
1 2 3
(RED)
(GRY)
(BLK)
(BLK)
CTP12
CTP12
TS403
(0)AGND
FGND
N.C
N.C
(GP1A73A)
N.C
2 4 6
N.C
VCC(FU1)
D409
GND
GND
(RED)
(WHT)
N.C
1 2 3
TS402
TS402
1 2 3
(GP1AQ36L)
N.C
1 2 3
(BLK)
7 8 9 10
(RED)
(GRY)
TS402
(0)AGND
FGND
(RED)
(WHT)
Dryer section exit sensor
(RED)
(GRY)
(BLK)
1 2 3
D407
D407
VCC(FU1)
D408
GND
1 3 5
(GP1A73A)
CTP17
CTP17
4 5 6
(RED)
(GRY)
(BLK)
TS401
(0)AGND
FGND
1 2 3
TS401
TS401
1 2 3
Cartridge box lower sensor
F
1 2 3
(RED)
(GRY)
(BLK)
VCC(FU1)
D407
GND
TS401
(GP1A73A)
E
1 2 3
(RED)
(GRY)
(BLK)
Cartridge box upper sensor
(RED)
(GRY)
(BLK)
(GP1A73A)
Cartridge setting sensor
19.3.5 CTP22 Circuit Board Wiring Diagram (1/3)

9
10
A
11
H
PDC22 Circuit Board
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
PWR1
PWR1
(RED)
(GRY)
PWR22 Circuit Board
CTP11
CTP11
1 3 2 4
1 4 2 7 3 8 6 9 5 10
PWR7
PWR7
CTP4
CTP4
CTP7
CTP7
1 2 3 4
1 2 3
LDA7
LDA7
LDA22
Circuit
Board
7 8
9 10 11
23 24 25
1 2
POSW
POSW
1 2
CTP23
CTP23
1 2 3 4 5
CTP24
CTP24
1 2 3 4 5
For SH3 debug

For H8S debug
26 27
(RED)
(GRY)
(BLK)
CTP5
CTP5
3 4 5
JSY2
JSY2
3 4 5
6 7 8
(RED)
(GRY)
(BLK)
N.C
1 2
(RED)
(GRY)
(BLK)
1 2
1 2
(RED)
(GRY)
(BLK)
N.C
3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4
CTP6
CTP6
CTP25
CTP25
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
For program download
(5 ) VCC (FU1)
D321
GND
GND
D317
1 2 3
VCC (FU1)
D305P
GND
GND
D304P
1 2
Processor entry sensor
D305L
D305P
1 2
D305L
D305L
1 2
3 2 1
D305P
D305P
3 2 1
D321
1 2 3
Exit section up/down belt home position sensor

GP1A73A)
Processor entry sensor LED
Power ON switch
(LB-15SKS 1 / AT-484-M)
Sub-scanning nip home position sensor

(GP1A73A)
D304L
1 2
(RED)
(GRY)
(RED)
(GRY)
(BLK)
Pre-exposure sensor
(PT501B)
D304P
(RED)
(GRY)
6 7 8
UL1007 26AWG
(GRY)
(BLK)
6 7 8
(RED)
(GRY)
(BLK)
(RED)
(WHT)
Pre-exposure sensor LED

(GL514A)
D304L
(5 ) VCC (RD305)
D305L
20 21 22
3 4 5
JHU3
JHU3
3 4 5
/ 5VRES
GND
NC
GND
H8MD0
GND
H8MD1
GND
H8P40
GND
H8P41
GND
H8P42
GND
H8Txd0
GND
H8Rxd0
VCC (FU1)
NC
VCC (FU1)
17 18 19
POONSW (D326)
POONSW
G (D326)
1 2
VCC (FU1)
D317
GND
1 2
14 15 16
GND
H8Txd0
H8Rxd0
NC
NC
14 15 16
11 12 13
(RED)
(WHT)
11 12 13
(RED)
(BLK)
D304P
GND
FGND
14 15 16
(RED)
(BLK)
8 9 10
JRE2
JRE2
8 9 10
D316
1 2 3
(5 ) VCC (RD304)
D304L
SW
D315
1 2 3
GND
TXD0
RXD0
NC
NC
3 4 5
Register nip home position sensor

(GP1A73A)
3 4 5
UL1007 26AWG
(RED)
(GRY)
(BLK)
Flex. 3
Flex. 3
UL1007 26AWG
(RED)
(GRY)
(BLK)
1 2 3
Flex.2
Flex.2
1 2 3
Width detecting home position sensor

(GP1A73A)
Width detecting sensor

(PT501B)
Width detecting sensor LED

(GL514A)
VCC (FU1)
D316
GND
12 13
(5 ) VCC (RD304LD)
D304 signal output
GND
GND
1 2
N.C
N.C
1 2
(RED)
(GRY)
(BLK)
1 2
Flex.1
Flex.1
1 2
(RED)
(GRY)
(BLK)
(RED)
(WHT)
(RED)
(GRY)
D314P
1 2
VCC (FU1)
D315
GND
4 5 6
(RED)
(WHT)
Flex.
D314P
D314L
1 2
N.C
CTP10
CTP10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
D314L
N.C
N.C
6 7
(RED)
(WHT)
6 7
3 4 5
D314P
GND
FGND
3 4 5
1 2
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
1 2
(RED)
(BLK)
Register sensor
(PT501B)
D320
D+5V
DGND
D+5V
DGND
28 1 2 3
(RED)
(BLK)
1 2 3
4 5
JHA4
JHA4
1 2 3
4 5
(RED)
(WHT)
D303P
1 2
(5 ) VCC (RD314)
D314L
7 8
(RED)
(WHT)
CTP _ RXD _ PCAGND

/ CTP _ RXD _ PC
N.C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60
PDC1
PDC1
D303P
D303L
1 2
(BLK)
(BLK)
CTP1
CTP1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60
D303L
N.C
4 5 6
D303P
GND
FGND
1 2 3
D320
D320
1 2 3
Register sensor LED

(GL514A)
Back printer set sensor

(VX-016-1A3)
70328-1Faston/172076-1 Cover
UL1007 24AWG
(RED)
(BLK)
(RED)
(BLK)
(GRY)
CTP3
CTP3
(RED)
(BLK)
(RED)
(BLK)
N.C
D319
1 2 3
N.C
N.C
1 2 3
(GRY)
(BLK)
Feed nip home position sensor

(GP1A73A)
Back printer entrance sensor

(OS-573533-710)
(GRY)
(GRY)
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
(BLK)
6 7 8
CTP2
CTP2
(GRY)
(BLK)
1 2 3
JHA3
JHA3
1 2 3
D320
GND
D302
3 2 1
(RED)
(GRY)
(BLK)
JDTM
JDTM
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
VCC (FU1)
D319
GND
DTM
DTM
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
VCC (FU1)
D302
GND
Magazine ID sensor 0 (GP1A53HR)

Magazine ID sensor 1,2,3 (GP1A53HR)
Magazine ID sensor 4 (GP1A53HR)
Paper end sensor

(GP1A73A)
DTM00 Circuit Board
***
CTP14 IN
(5 ) VCC (RD303)
D303L
3 4 5
VCC (FU1)
VCC (FU1)
D322
D323
D324
D325
D416
D410
PINSP1
PINSP2
24VON
PONSP1
PONSP2
PONSP3
GND
GND
1 2
(RED)
(GRY)
(BLK)
1 2 3
JCU3
JCU3
1 2 3
(RED)
(GRY)
(BLK)
3 4 5
(RED)
(GRY)
(BLK)
3 4 5
(RED)
(GRY)
(GRY)
(GRY)
(GRY)
(GRY)
(BLK)
D311
1 2 3
VCC (FU1)
D306
D307
D308
D309
D310
GND
N.C
3 2 1
D301P
D301P
3 2 1
(RED)
(GRY)
(GRY)
(GRY)
(GRY)
(GRY)
(BLK)
N.C
(RED)
(GRY)
(BLK)
Paper splice sensor
D301P
(RED)
(GRY)
(BLK)
Paper splice sensor LED
D301L
VCC (FU1)
D311
GND
D
(RED)
(GRY)
(BLK)
JCU2
JCU2
(RED)
(GRY)
(BLK)
(RED)
(GRY)
1 2
D301L
D301L
1 2
VCC (FU1)
D301P
GND
1 2
1 2
(RED)
(GRY)
D+5V1
GND-5D
D+5V2
D+5V2
D+5V3
D+5V3
D+5V1
GND-5D
GND-5D
GND-5D
N.C
F
(RED)
(RED)
(GRY)
(GRY)
(GRY)
(GRY)
(GRY)
E
(5 ) VCC (RD301)
D301L
Vcc (D+5V1)
Vcc (D+5V1)
D322
D323
D324A / D324B
D324A / D324B
D416A / D416B
D410
+24V2 _ on / off
+24V3 _ on / off
+24V4 _ on / off
N.C
GND (DGND)
GND (DGND)
CTP1 IN
GND
M301CLK
M302CLK
VCC (FU1)
M303CLK
M304CLK
M306CLK
M309CLK
GND
M310CLK
Spare 1 CLK
VCC (FU1)
M311CLK
M313CLK
M403CLK
M314CLK
GND
M315CLK
Spare 2 CLK
VCC (FU1)
M305CLK
M305PD
DOTSTB (301)
PIOD0
GND
PIOD1
PIOD2
VCC (FU1)
PIOD3
PIOD4
PIOD5
PIOD6
GND
PIOD7
PIOA0
VCC (FU1)
PIOA1
PIOA2
PIOA3
PIOWR
GND
PDCP+5V
PDCP+24V
VCC (FU1)
PDCPIO
D312
D313
INSP1
GND
N.C
ASC POF5
VCC (FU1)
GND
GND
GND
Rxd1
Txd1
VCC (FU1)
GND
CTPIN
GND
M301CLK
M302CLK
(5 ) VCC
M303CLK
M304CLK
M306CLK
M309CLK
GND
M310CLK
Spare 1 CLK
(5 ) VCC
M311CLK
M313CLK
M403CLK
M314CLK
GND
M315CLK
Spare 2 CLK
(5 ) VCC
M305CLK
M305PD
S301
PIO data
GND
PI1 data
PI2 data
(5 ) VCC
PI3 data
PI4 data
PI5 data
PI6 data
GND
PI7 data
PIOSEL0
(5 ) VCC
PIOSEL1
PIOSEL2
PIOSEL3
PIOWR
GND
PDCP+5V
PDCP+24V
(5 ) VCC
PDCP10
D312 Cutter home position sensor 1
D313 Cutter home position sensor 2
YOBBI _ OUT1
GND
N.C
YOBI _ IN1
(5 ) VCC
GND
GND
GND
Rxd1
Txd1
(5 ) VCC
CTP1OUT
CTP22 Circuit Board Wiring Diagram (2/3)

10
11
1 2
6 7 8
H
(BLK)
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
7
8
GIB22 Circuit Board
CTP22
CTP22
PC1
PC1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
To Image
Processing
Box 5
1 2 8 9 3 4 5 6 7
JPC1
JPC1
1 2 8 9 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3
TS408
TS408
1 2 3
1 3 2 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CTP20
CTP20
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
TS409
AGND
FGND
1 2 3 4 5
CTP8
CTP8
TS408
AGND
FGND
1 3 2 4 5
CTP9
CTP9
N.C
JGM2
JGM2
1 2 3 4
(GRY)
(BLK)
(GRY)
N.C
C
3
VCC(FU1)
READCLK
READCS
READODT
REOSP1
READIDT
READBU
REINSP1
REINSP2
GND
E
2
GND
CLK
RESET
RD
WE1
VCC(FU1)
WE3
PCMWAIT
CE2B
CSO
GND
GI DENB
NC
A25
A23
VCC(FU1)
A21
A19
A17
A15
GND
A13
A11
A9
3.3V(FU2)
A7
A5
A3
A1
GND
D15
D13
D11
D9
3.3V(FU2)
D7
D5
D3
D1
GND
GND
/G EN
BS
WE0
WE2
VCC(FU1)
PCMINT
PCMIOIS16
CS6
RW
GND
GI DDIR
N.C.
A24
A22
VCC(FU1)
A20
A18
A16
A14
GND
A12
A10
A8
3.3V(FU2)
A6
A4
A2
A0
GND
D14
D12
D10
D8
3.3V(FU2)
D6
D4
D2
D0
GND
(BLK)
(GRY)
N.C (GRY)
N.C
PC ON signal (Collector)
PC ON signal (Emitter)
PC OFF signal
GND
GND
GND
Txd2
Rxd2
NC
NC
CTP22 Circuit Board Wiring Diagram (3/3)

10
11
B
Main Control Unit
(Not used)
TS408
TS409
TS408
1 2
TS409
1 2
1 2 3
TS409
TS409
1 2 3
(Not used)
(Used for debugging only)
1 3 5
2 4 6
CTP14
CTP14
G
Image Processing Box
1 19 2 20 3 21 4 22 5 23 6 24 7 25 8 26 9 27 10 28 11 29 12 30 13 31 14 32 15 33 16 34 17 35 18 36
BOX4 (ROS)
BOX4 (ROS)
LDD15
LDD15
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011 1213141516 1718 19202122232425 26 27 282930
D
LDD16
LDD16
1 2 4 3 5 6
1 2 4 3 5 6
JHU4
JHU4
1 2 4 3 5 6
1 2 4 3 5 6
THA
THA
THA20
LDD14
LDD14
1 2 3 4 5 6
LDA22
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6
***
***
LDD22 Circuit Board
RPD+
RPDRMODE
R-5V
AGND
R+5V
RLDON
RHFM
AGND
RL+5V
AGND
MPX_TH
X_TrE
R-5V
X_TrB
A+13VP
AGND
RTH+
R_TrB
R_TrC
AGND
N.C
***
***
N.C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
N.C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
9
10
1 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12131415 16
***
***
1 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
***
***
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
***
***
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12131415 16
1 2 3 4 5 6
***
***
AGND
RTH+
R_TrB
R_TrC
AGND
N.C
A+5VP
AGND2
GRSCK
GRTXD
GRRXD
GRCS
N.C
***
***
RPD+
RPDRMODE
R-5V
AGND
R+5V
RLDON
RHFM
AGND
RL+5V
AGND
MPX_TH
X_TrE
R-5V
X_TrB
A+13VP
GTH+
AGND
GLD+
AGND
GPD+
AGND
A+13VP
AGND
A-13VP
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
A+5VP
AGND2
GRSCK
GRTXD
GRRXD
GRCS
N.C
GP+
GP-
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
N.C
N.C
1 2 3
***
***
1 2 3
GTH+
AGND
GLD+
AGND
GPD+
AGND
A+13VP
AGND
A-13VP
N.C
A+5VP
AGND2
BRSCK
BRTXD
BRRXD
BRCS
N.C
GP+
GP-
BTH+
ABND
BLD+
AGND
BPD+
AGND
A+13VP
AGND
A-13VP
BHFM
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11121314151617 1819 20212223242526

JROS
JROS
25 2623 2421221920 1718 151613141112 9 10 7 8 5 6 3 4 1 2
N.C
Laser unit cooling fan
N.C
A+5VP
AGND2
BRSCK
BRTXD
BRRXD
BRCS
N.C
BP+
N.C
B3P
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
1 2 3
F314
F314
1 2 3
BTH+
AGND
BLD+
AGND
BPD+
AGND
A+13VP
AGND
A-13VP
BHFM
(RED)
(BLK)
(GRY)
N.C
(ORG)
(BLK)
(GRY)
(GRY)
(ORG)
(BLK)
(RED)
(BLK)
(GRY)
N.C
(RED)
(BLK)
(GRY)
N.C
(RED)
(BLK)
(GRY)
N.C
(RED)
(BLK)
(GRY)
N.C
1 2 3 4 5 6
AOM1
AOM1
1 2 3 4 5 6
BP+
N.C
BP-
(ORG)
(BLK)
(GRY)
F314
A+5VP
AGND2
RRSCK
RRTXD
RRRXD
RRCS
THA
AGND
A+5VP
A-13VP
A+13VP
AGND
(ORG)
(BLK)
(RED)
(BLK)
(BLU)
(GRY)
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
AOM Driver
A+5VP
AGND2
RRSCK
RRTXD
RRRXD
RRCS
THA
AGND
A+5VP
A-13VP
A+13VP
AGND
A+5VP
AGND2
nSOS
N.C
+24VP
AGNDP
nPM_ON
PM_ST
S801
AGNDP
A+5VP
AGND2
S801_S
N.C
F801_2_3
AGNDP
F801_S
N.C
F801_2_3
AGNDP
F802_S
N.C
F801_2_3
AGNDP
F803_S
N.C
(ORG)
(BLK)
(RED)
(BLK)
(RED)
(BLK)
(RED)
(BLK)
(BLU)
(BLK)
N.C
N.C
N.C
A+13V3
A+24V2
GND-13A
A+8V2
A+24V2
A+13V1
GND-24A
A+13V3
A+24V1
A+8V1
A+24V1
GND-24A
A+8V1
GND-8A
A+8V2
GND-8A
A+13V2
GND-13A
A-13V
GND-13A
A+13V1
A+13V2
GND-13A
A-13V
The part is not necessary

(directly soldered to the circuit board).
LDA1
LDA1
1 19 2 20 3 21 4 22 5 23 6 24 7 25 8 26 9 27 10 28 11 29 12 30 13 31 14 32 15 33 16 34 17 35 18 36
F314
AGNDP
F314_ST
+24I
24GI
+13I
13GI
-13I
AOM_ST
+24I
24GI
B+8I
B8GI
G+81
G8GI
+13I
13GI
-13I
13GI
N.C
21 2 22 5 14 7 15 9 1316 1 3 4 6 1718 8 10121119202324

PWR11
PWR11
21 2 22 5 14 7 15 9 1316 1 3 4 6 1718 8 101211 19 202324
(RED)
(RED)
(BLU)
(BLK)
E
N.C
N.C
PWR22
(WHT)
SCK
RXD
DEN
PCS[0]
PCS[1]
PCS[2]
PCS[3]
PCS[4]
N.C
A+13V
A+13V
AGND
AGND
A-13V
A-13V
nRESET
TXD
AGND
AGND
N.C
AGND
AGND
nSOS
LDDERR
A+13V
A+13V
AGND
AGND
A-13V
A-13V
C
(RED)
N.C
(BLK)
N.C
(ORG)
N.C
(BLK)
B
2
(WHT)
SCK
RXD
DEN
PCS[0]
PCS[1]
PCS[2]
PCS[3]
PCS[4]
N.C
A+13V
A+13V
AGND
AGND
A-13V
A-13V
nRESET
TXD
AGND
AGND
N.C
AGND
AGND
nSOS
LDDERR
A+13V
A+13V
AGND
AGND
A-13V
A-13V
IL+13I
N.C
I13GI
N.C
IL+24I
N.C
I24GI
(RED)
(RED)
(BLU)
(BLK)
GND
GND
D0+
D0D1D1+
D2+
D2D3D3+
D4+
D4D5D5+
D6+
D6D7D7+
FENR+
FENRFENGFENG+
FENB+
FENBDVALDVAL+
TXCLK+
TXCLKLREQRLREQR+
LREQG+
LREQGLREQBLREQB+
GND
GND
19.3.6 LDD22 Circuit Board Wiring Diagram

11
Laser unit
1 2 3 4 5 6
***
***
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
LDD1
LDD1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
LDD2
LDD2
1 4 2 5 3 6
LDD3
LDD3
1 2 3
LDD4
LDD4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11121314151617 1819 20212223242526

LDD5
LDD5
1 2 3
LDD6
LDD6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
LDD7
LDD7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
LDD8
LDD8
1 2
LDD9
LDD9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
LDD10
LDD10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
LDD11
LDD11
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 121314 15 16
LDD12
LDD12
1 2 3 4 5 6
LDD13
LDD13
H
LTC1
LTC1
3 4
(GRY)
(BLK)
(GRY)
(BLK)
(GRY)
(BLK)
(GRY)
(BLK)
(GRY)
(BLK)
(RED)
(BLK)
(RED)
(WHT)
PWR12
PWR12
1 13 2 14 3 15 4 16 5 17 6 18 7 19 8 20 9 21 1022 1123 1224
PWR22 Circuit Board

CTC22 Circuit Board
D203A
GND(DGND)
D203B
GND(DGND)
D203C
GND(DGND)
D203D
GND(DGND)
LH201-(VCC)
LH201
5
6
Part A of the CT22 circuit

board wiring (3/3)
1 2 3
LTC2
LTC2
Part B of the CT22 circuit

board wiring (3/3)
1 2
LTC3
LTC3
LTC22 Circuit Board
D203A(+)
D203A(-)
D203B(+)
D203B(-)
D203C(+)
D203C(-)
D203D(+)
D203D(-)
LH201(+)
LH201(-)
1 2
(BLU)
(BLK)
Thermo module +
Thermo module -
E
3
Thermistor 1
Thermistor 2
GND (Shield)
(RED)
(BLK)
C
2
-13V
GND
+13V
GND
A+24V1
A+24V1
A+24V2
A+24V2
GND-24A
GND-24A
A+8V1
A+8V1
A+8V2
A+8V2
GND-8A
GND-8A
A-13V1
A+13V1
A+13V2
A+13V2
A+13V3
A+13V3
GND-13A
GND-13A
GND-13A
GND-13A
A-13V
A-13V
19.3.7 LTC22 Circuit Board Wiring Diagram

9
CTC11
CTC11
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
LTC4
LTC4
10
11
H
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
CTP21
CTP21
1 2
JPS1
JPS1
1 2
1 3
PWR5
12 14
PWR15
8 9
PWR13
To PWR22
To PWR22
To PWR22
CTP22 Circuit Board
1 4
PWR17
To PWR22
2 8
3 9
PAC22 Circuit Board
1 5
PAC12
PAC12
2 6
3 7
4 8
1 6
2 7
PAC13
PAC13
3 8
4 9
5 10
1 2 3 4
JPS2
JPS2
1 2 3 4
(BLK)
(WHT)
(BLK)
(WHT)
PAC4
PAC4
(BLK)
(WHT)
4 10
5 11
6 12
PAC11
PAC11
1 3
2 4
1 3
2 4
JF306
JF306
1 3
2 4
1 2
F306
F306
1 2
1 2
F307
F307
1 2
F306
F307
1 2
PAC2
PAC2
1 2
PAC1
PAC1
1 2
PAC18
PAC18
PAC19
100V (L)
100V (N)
1 2 3 4
PU406
PU406
1 2 3 4
100V (L)
100V (N)
1 2 3 4
PU405
PU405
1 2 3 4
AC100V
DC power supply relay ON (K5)
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
Dummy jumper connector for ON
PS1 circulation pump
(MD-10-NL)
(MD-10-NL)
(MD-10-NL)
(MD-10-NL)
10
Change the connection.
Dummy jumper connector for OFF
PU406
100 VAC input from the transformer output panel mount
(YE L / GRN) N.C
(YE L / GRN) N.C
(YE L / GRN) N.C
(YE L / GRN) N.C
PU405
100V (L)
100V (N)
PU406G
PU405G
PU404G
PU403G
(MD-10-NL)
P2 circulation pump
(MD-10-NL)
P1 circulation pump
(KBR-3XAU1M)
PSR replenisher pump
(KBR-3XAU1M)
(KBR-3XAU1M)
(KBR-3XAU1M)
P1R replenisher pump
100V (L)
100V (N)
PAC3
PAC3
1 2 3 4
PU404
PU404
1 2 3 4
PU406 (L)
PU406 (N)
(BLK)
(WHT)
1 7
1 2 3 4
PU403
PU403
1 2 3 4
PU405 (L)
PU405 (N)
(BLK)
(WHT)
4 8
1 2 3 4
PU402
PU402
1 2 3 4
PU404 (L)
PU404 (N)
(BLK)
(WHT)
3 7
N.C
(BLK)
(WHT)
2 6
(YE L / GRN) N.C
(BLK)
(WHT)
1 5
PU402G
(BLK)
(WHT)
N.C
1 2
PU411
PU411
1 2
K3 (+)
K3 (-)
(YE L / GRN) N.C
1 2
PU410
PU410
1 2
PU404
(ORG)
(BLK)
2 5
1 2
PU409
PU409
1 2
PU403
Power supply section exhaust fan 2
(ORG)
(BLK)
PAC16
PAC16
1 4
1 2
PU408
PU408
1 2
(BLK)
(WHT)
1 2 3
PAC8
PAC8
Power supply section exhaust fan 1
3 6
1 2
PAC7
PAC7
PU411
Solution heater 2 (K3)
4 5
PU403 (L)
PU403 (N)
3
PAC6
PAC6
PU410
PU402
K1 (+)
K1 (-)
1 2
Solution heater 1 (K1)
5 6
K4 (+)
K4 (-)
3 4
PAC5
PAC5
PU409
1 2 3 4
PU401
PU401
1 2 3 4
Dryer heater (K2)
1 2
PU402 (L)
PU402 (N)
7 14
K2 (+)
K2 (-)
6 13
PU408
PU401
Dryer heater 1 (K2)
5 12
CRT relay (K6)
PU401G
4 11
PAC14
PAC14
PU401 (L)
PU401 (N)
38
K6 (+ ) CRT Relay
K6 (- ) CRT Relay
2 9
PU411 (L)
PU411 (N)
1 2 3
H402
H402
1 2 3
Spare output (-)

Spare output (+)
1 2 3
H401
H401
1 2 3
Spare output
1 2 3
H404
H404
1 2 3
PU410 (L)
PU410 (N)
1 2 3
H403
H403
1 2 3
SSR1 (-)
SSR1 (+)
1 2
D404
D404
1 2
Dryer SSR B
1 2
D403
D403
1 2
SSR2 (-)
SSR2 (+)
1 2
D402
D402
1 2
PU409 (L)
PU409 (N)
1 2
D401
D401
1 2
SSR3 (-)
SSR3 (+)
(240 V / 360W)
P2 processing tank heater
(240 V / 360W)
P1 processing tank heater
(240 V / 360W)
PS3/4 processing tank heater
(240 V / 360W)
PS1/2 processing tank heater
(03EP-15A06B-090)
PS3/4 safety thermostat
D406
PU408 (L)
PU408 (N)
H402
Solution heater (2) 200 V input from (K3)
H401
Solution heater (1) 200 V input from (K1)
H404
N.C
(BLK)
(WHT)
H403
200V (L ) IN
N.C
200V (N) IN
N.C
D404
+24V30
PGND
(BLK)
(WHT)
D403
(ORG)
(BLK)
200V (L ) IN
200V (N) IN
(BLK)
(WHT)
D402
P+5V
PGND
N.C
N.C
1 10
N.C
(BLK)
(WHT)
C
D401
(RED)
(BLK)
H402 (L)
H402 (N)
N.C
(ORG)
(BLK)
(03EP-15A06B-090)
PS1/2 safety thermostat
Dryer SSR A
N.C
N.C
F
N.C
H401 (L)
H401 (N)
(ORG)
(BLK)
(03EP-15A06B-090)
P2 safety thermostat
(03EP-15A06B-090)
P1 safety thermostat
Dryer fan SSR
N.C
N.C
PAC15
PAC15
1 2
P+21V
PGND
IL24 V (+ ) IN
IL24 V (- ) IN
N.C
(ORG)
(BLK)
N.C
(ORG)
(BLK)
(03EP-15A06B-090)
Dryer section safety thermostat
(RED)
(BLK)
PAC17
PAC17
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
H404 (L)
H404 (N)
N.C
N.C
H403 (L)
H403 (N)
D404 (+)
D404 (-)
D403 (+)
D403 (-)
N.C
N.C
1 2
JD406
JD406
D402 (+)
D402 (-)
N.C
N.C
(RED)
(BLK)
1 2
D406
D406
1 2
D401 (+)
D401 (-)
D419 (+)
D419 (-)
D
(ORG)
(BLK)
(ORG)
(BLK)
(ORG)
(BLK)
E
D418 (+)
D418 (-)
D406 (+)
D406 (-)
PAC21 IN
(5 ) VCC
PU408
PU409
(0 ) GND
PU410
PU411
PU401
F405
(5 ) VCC
H401
H402
(0 ) GND
H403
H404
H406A
H406B
(5 ) VCC
Spare output
H407
(0 ) GND
REON
H408
D401
D402
(5 ) VCC
D403
D404
(0 ) GND
D406
Not used
+5V ON signal
GND
(5 ) VCC
P+5 V notification
P+24 V notification
(0 ) GND
PACSEL0
PACSEL1
CTP21 OUT
(ORG)
(BLK)
CTP21IN
VCC (FU1)
PU408
PU409
GND
PU410
PU411
PU401
F405
VCC (FU1)
H401
H402
GND
H403
H404
H406A
H406B
VCC (FU1)
Spare output 1
H407
GND
REON
H408
D401
D402
VCC (FU1)
D403
D404
GND
D406
D418
5VON signal
GND
VCC (FU1)
PACP+5V
PACP+24V
GND
PACSEL0
PACSEL1
GND
19.3.8 PAC22 Circuit Board Wiring Diagram

11
19.3.9 Main Control Unit Wiring Diagram

1
CTP22 circuit
board
Keyboard
Mouse
CTP8
CTP8
1 2 3 4 5
(WHT)
(BLK)
(YEL)
USB
1 2 3 4
(RED)
(WHT)
(GRN)
(BLK)
USB-B
USB
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
USB
USB
1 2 3 4
USB
USB
VCC
-DaTa
+DaTa
GND
VCC
-DaTa
+DaTa
GND
1 2 3 4 5 6
KEY
KEY
USB-B
(RED)
(WHT)
(GRN)
(BLK)
N.C
(RED)
(WHT)
(BLK)
(YEL)
(BLU)
(GRN)
1 2 3 4 5 6
MOUSE-A
MOUSE-A
PC0 +
PC0 -
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Dsub 9P
Dsub 9P
PC +
PC -
L
N
FG
1 6 2 7 3 8 10 13 5 14 4 11 9 12 15
CRT
CRT
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
(BLK)
(GRN)
(BLK)
(WHT)
(BLK)
N.C (RED)
N.C
N.C
Coaxial cable (BLU)
Coaxial cable (GRN)
Coaxial cable (RED)
N.C
1 2 3 4 5 6
JKEY1
JKEY1
1 2 3 4 5 6
MOUSE-B
MOUSE-B
1 2 3 4 5 6
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
1 2 8 9 3 4 5 6 7
JPC1
JPC1
1 2 8 9 3 4 5 6 7
N.C
N.C (RED) N.C
(GRY)
(BLK)
(GRY)
(BLK)
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
JCRT
JCRT
1 6 2 7 3 8 10 13 5 14 4 11 9 12 15
P1
P1
2 3 4 5 1
(WHT)
(BLK)
N.C (YEL)
4 5 6
CRT
CRT
N.C (RED)
1 2 3
CRT
CRT
PC signal
GND
PCOFF signal
GND
4 5 6
CRT
FG
N
L
L
N
FG
1 2 3
(BRN)
(LBL)
(YEL/GRN)
100V or
200V
(BRN)
(LBL)
(YEL/GRN)
200V
L
N
FG
Power supply
section
Main Control Unit
ETH
ETH
4 5 6 3 2 1 8 7
SIO
SIO
1 6 2 7 3 8 4 9 5 10
N.C
cut
N.C
PC 2
PC 2
1 35 2 36 3 37 4 38 5 39 6 40 7 41 8 42 9 43 10 4411 4512 46 13 47 14 48 1549 16 50 17 51 18 52 19 53 2054 21 55 22 56 23 57 24 58 2559 26 60 27 61 28 62 29 63 30 64 31653266336734 68
Image Processing Box
4 5 6 3 2 1 8 7
JETH
JETH
GND
SD12
GND
SD13
GND
SD14
GND
SD15
GND
SDP1
GND
SD0
GND
SD1
GND
SD2
GND
SD3
GND
SD4
GND
SD5
GND
SD6
GND
SD7
GND
SDP0
GND
GND
GND
GND
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
GND
GND
ATN
GND
GND
GND
BSY
GND
ACY
GND
RST
GND
MSG
GND
SEL
GND
C/D
GND
REQ
GND
I/O
GND
SD8
GND
SD9
GND
SD10
GND
SD11
1 35 2 36 3 37 4 38 5 39 6 40 7 41 8 42 9 43 10 4411 4512 46 13 47 14 48 1549 16 50 17 51 18 52 19 53 2054 21 55 22 56 23 57 24 58 2559 26 60 27 61 28 62 29 63 30 64 31653266336734 68

BOX3
BOX3
Panel
1 6 2 7 3 8 4 9 5 10
JSIO
JSIO
LBN ( ) BLK
LBN ( ) RED
YEL ( ) BLK
YEL ( ) RED
LGN ( ) BLK
LGN ( ) RED
GRY ( ) BLK
GRY ( ) RED
WHT ( ) BLK
WHT ( ) RED
cut
N.C
BLU
WHT(BLU)
ORG
WHT(ORG)
GRN
WHT(GRN)
BRN
WHT(BRN)
N.C
1 6 2 7 3 8 4 9 5 10
10
11
H
(Not used)
M401
5 4 9 10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
JS01
JS01
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
M404
BZ401
8
(ORG)
(BLK)
(ORG)
(BLK)
M402
1 2
S401
S401
1 2
S402
S402
1 2
S403
S403
1 2
S404
S404
1 2
S407
S407
1 2
S408
S408
1 2
S409
S409
1 2
S4010
S4010
S401
S402
S403
S404
S407
S408
S409
S4010
P2RB cartridge washing valve
1 2 3 4
BZ
BZ
1 2 3 4
(ORG)
(BLK)
PDC12
PDC12
P2RA cartridge washing valve

(B423-804A)
PDC6
PDC6
1 2 3
6 15
7 16
P+24V32
S410
P+24V32
S409
P+24V32
S408
P+24V32
S407
P1R stirring valve

(B423-804A)
PDC12
PDC12
5 14
(B423-804A)
4 13
(B423-804A)
P+24V31
S404
P+24V31
S403
P1R cartridge washing valve
(ORG)
(BLK)
3 12
(B423-804A)
2 11
PS3/4 rack auto washing valve
1 10
(ORG)
(BLK)
7 8 9
(B423-804A)
5 6
PS1/2 rack auto washing valve
1 2
F406
F406
1 2
P+24V31
S402
1 2
F403
F403
1 2
(ORG)
(BLK)
1 2
F402
F402
1 2
(B423-804A)
1 2
F401
F401
1 2
Processing tank exhaust tank

(109R1224H1071)
P2 rack auto washing valve
Processing tank heater cooling fan
F406
P+24V31
S401
PS processing tank heater cooling fan

(109R1224H1071)
F403
(109R1224H1071)
P1/P2 processing tank heater cooling fan

(109R1224H1071)
F402
(ORG)
(BLK)
(ORG)
(BLK)
N.C
(ORG)
(BLK)
(ORG)
(BLK)
(ORG)
(BLK)
3 4
P+24V11
F406
N.C
P+24V11
F403
P+24V11
F402
P+24V11
F401
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
Densitometer
F401
(B423-804A)
P+5V
GND
N,C
M404 OUT1
M404 OUT2
(ORG)
(BLK)
(ORG)
(ORG)
(BLK)
(ORG)
(BLK)
N.C
N.C
N.C
M402 OUT1
M402 OUT2
PU407
GND
P+24V33
GND
P+24V11
GND
TXD
RXD
GND
1 2
N.C
N.C
(RED)
(BLK)
N.C
N.C
(RED)
(BLK)
N.C
N.C
1 2 3 4 5
PDC5
PDC5
(BLK)
PU407
(BLK)
(RED)
(RED)
(BLK)
1 2
M404
M404
1 2
N.C
(ORG)
(BLK)
(ORG)
(BLK)
1 2
M402
M402
1 2
N.C
S411
1 3 2 4
PU407
PU407
(BLK)
S406
M403
PDC9
PDC9
1 6
N.C
S405
1 3 4 6 2 5
M403
M403
1 3 4 6 2 5
2 7 3 8
N.C
1 2 3
S411
S411
1 2 3
PDM
PDM
1 5 3 4 9 7 8 2 6
(ORG)
1 2
S406
S406
1 2
5 12 8 13 7 14
(TG-06E-BG-500C365,24V)
1 3 2 4
1 2
S405
S405
1 2
M403-A
M403-A
M403-B
M403-B
N.C
N.C
CTP22 Circuit Board
Sorter full buzzer

(HMB-06)
M401C
M401C
N.C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 11 10 12
M401B
M401B
PDC10
PDC10
3 4 10 11
Plenisher cartridge opening drive motor
F317
2 9
S411OUT1
GND
S411OUT2
N.C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60
PDC1
PDC1
(PDH-05)
1 4 2 5 6 3
M401
M401
1 4 2 5 6 3
P+24V31
S406
P+24V31
S405
CTP1
CTP1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60
Auto washing pump
N.C
N.C
1 8
N.C
N.C
N.C
PDC11
PDC11
1 4 6 3 2 5
N.C
M401DRIVER
N.C
(TG-26A-AM-60-A732)
DIR
P+24V42
GND
GND
M401 DIR
M401 ON / OFF
GND
Sorter drive motor
1 2
M401A
M401A
ON / OFF
1 2
F317
F317
1 2
(TL1117)
PDC8
PDC8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
171822-2
171825-2
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
E
(RED)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(ORG)
(ORG)
(BLK)
Processor drive motor
F
CTP IN
GND
M301CLK
M302CLK
VCC (FU1)
M303CLK
M304CLK
M306CLK
M309CLK
GND
M310CLK
Spare 1 CLK
VCC (FU1)
M311CLK
M313CLK
M403CLK
M314CLK
GND
M315CLK
Spare 2 CLK
VCC (FU1)
M305CLK
M305PD
DOTSTB (301)
PIOD0
GND
PIOD1
PIOD2
VCC (FU1)
PIOD3
PIOD4
PIOD5
PIOD6
GND
PIOD7
PIOA0
VCC (FU1)
PIOA1
PIOA2
PIOA3
PIOWR
GND
PDCP+5V
PDCP+24V
VCC (FU1)
PDCPIO
D312
D313
INSP1
GND
N.C
ASC POF5
VCC (FU1)
GND
GND
GND
Rxd1
Txd1
VCC (FU1)
GND
(ORG)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(ORG)
(ORG)
(BLK)
CTP1 IN
(0 ) GND
M301CLK
M302CLK
(5 ) VCC
M303CLK
M304CLK
M306CLK
M309CLK
(0 ) GND
M310CLK
Spare 1 CLK
(5 ) VCC
M311CLK
M313CLK
M403CLK
M314CLK
(0 ) GND
M315CLK
Spare 2 CLK
(5 ) VCC
M305CLK
M305PD
S301
PIOD0
(0 ) GND
PIOD1
PIOD2
(5 ) VCC
PIOD3
PIOD4
PIOD5
PIOD6
(0 ) GND
PIOD7
PIOSELO
(5 ) VCC
PIOSEL1
PIOSEL2
PIOSEL3
PIOWR
(0 ) GND
PDCP+5V
PDCP+24V
(5 ) VCC
PDCPIOON
D312
D313
YOBI OUT1
(0) GND
N.C
YOBI IN1
(5 ) VCC
GND
GND
(0 ) GND
Rxd1
Txd1
(5 ) VCC
CTP1OUT
19.3.10
24V
GND
(ORG)
(BLK)
P+24V11
F404
P+24V11
F407
P+24V11
GND
P+24V11
GND
Processor control section cooling fan

(109R1224H1071)
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
PDC22 Circuit Board Wiring Diagram (1/2)

10
8 17
11
C
PDC7
PDC7
PDC22 Circuit Board (1/2)
9 18
H
M305
1 2 3 4 5 6
M305
M305
1 2 3 4 5 6
M305 Driver
1 2 3
4 5 6
1 4 2 5 3 6
JHU1
JHU1
1 4 2 5 3 6
1 2 3
D312
D312
1 2 3
D313
D313
1 2
M307
M307
1 2
4 5 6
M307
(RED)
(YEL)
(BLU)
(ORG)
1 5 2 6
1 3 4 6 2 5
M306
M306
1 3 4 6 2 5
(RED)
(YEL)
(BLU)
(ORG)
1 5 2 6
1 5 2 6
N.C
N.C
JCU4
JCU4
M314 A
M314 / A
M314 B
M314 / B
M306 A
M306 / A
M306 B
M306 / B
Printer exhaust fan 2

(109R0824H202)
F311
F312
F313
1 2
F308
F308
1 2
1 2
F309
F309
1 2
1 2
F315
F315
1 2
1 2
F316
F316
1 2
1 2
F310
F310
1 2
1 2
F311
F311
1 2
1 2
F312
F312
1 2
1 2
F313
F313
1 2
(ORG)
(BLK)
(ORG)
(BLK)
(ORG)
(BLK)
(ORG)
(BLK)
1 2
3 4
5 6
7 8
1 2
3 4
PDC21
PDC21
M306
M314
(ORG)
(BLK)

(109R0824H202)
F310
5 6
7 8
P+24V02
(F313 ) GND

(109R0824H202)
F316
(ORG)
(BLK)
Printer function fan 3

(109R0824H202)
F315

(109R0824H202)

(109R0824H202)
F309
P+24V02
(F312 ) GND
P+24V02
F311 GND
P+24V02
F310 GND
P+24V02
(F316 ) GND
PDC20
PDC20
(103-564-5245)
1 2
JCU1
JCU1
1 2
1 3 5 10 8 9 2 4 6 7 11 12
DR1
DR1
PDC13
PDC13
1 2
UL1007 24AWG
(RED)
(YEL)
(BLU)
(ORG)
N.C
N.C
4 5 6
(ORG)
PDC2
PDC2
N.C
N.C
1 2 3
3 8 4 9
N.C
N.C
1 2 3
5 10
PDC18
PDC18
P+24V02
(F315 ) GND
1 6 2 7

(109R0824H202)
7 15 8 16
F308
(ORG)
(BLK)
5 13 6 14
P+24V02
F309 GND
7 15 8 16
M307OUT1
M307OUT2
5 13 6 14
(RED)
(YEL)
(BLU)
(ORG)
(BLK)
1 9 2 10 3 11 4 12

(109R0824H202)
N.C
N.C
1 5 2 6 3 4
M313
M313
1 5 2 6 3 4
N.C
N.C
Feed nip motor

(103-564-5245)
M313
(ORG)
(BLK)
(RED)
(YEL)
(BLU)
(ORG)
Feed drive motor 2

(103G770-2264)
M303
P+24V02
F308 GND
PDC4
PDC4
(RED)
(YEL)
(BLU)
(ORG)
N.C
N.C
Back printer drive solenoid 2

(125A8413422)
Exit drive motor

(103G770-2264)
(ORG)
(BLK)
DR2
DR2
1 2 3 4 5
1 3 4 6 2 5
M303
M303
1 3 4 6 2 5
N.C
N.C
5 12 3 11 2 9 4 6 7 8 1 10
S302
S302
5 12 3 11 2 9 4 6 7 8 1 10
M313 A
M313 / A
M313 B
M313 / B
JHA2
JHA2
(RED)
(YEL)
(BLU)
(ORG)
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
S302
P+5V
D313 sensor signal
GND
(RED)
(YEL)
(BLU)
(ORG)
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
Cutter drive motor
PDC3
PDC3
1 5 2 6 3 7 4 8
(RED)
(GRY)
(BLK)
6 16 7 17 8 18 9 19 10 20
M303 A
M303 / A
M303 B
M303 / B
1 9 2 10 3 11 4 12
(RED)
(GRY)
(BLK)
P+5V
D312 sensor signal
GND
1 8 2 9 3 10 4 11 5 12 6 13 7 14
JHA1
JHA1
1 8 2 9 3 10 4 11 5 12 6 13 7 14
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(ORG)
(ORG)
(ORG)
5 12 3 11 2 9 4 6 7 8 1 10
S301
S301
5 12 3 11 2 9 4 6 7 8 1 10
(RED)
(GRY)
(BLK)
5 10
N.C
N.C
S301
Cutter home position sensor 2

(GP1A71A)
1 8 2 9 3 10 4 11 5 12 6 13 7 14
PWR14
PWR14
(RED)
(GRY)
(BLK)
PDC25
PDC25
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(ORG)
(ORG)
1 11 2 12 3 13 4 14 5 15
S302 1
S302 2
S302 3
S302 4
S302 5
S302 6
S302 7
S302 8
P+24V21
P+24V21
N.C
N.C
1 2
F301
F301
1 2
P+24V23
GND
P+5V
GND
M305 CLK
M305 PD

(125A8413422)
F301
(BLK)
(RED)
(ORG)
(YEL)
(BLU)
N.C
PDC25
PDC25
1 2
5 10
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(ORG)
Sub-scanning nip motor cooling fan

(119C889854A)
M311
(ORG)
(BLK)
(ORG)
(BLK)
(ORG)
(BLK)
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(ORG)
(ORG)
Sub-scanning nip motor

(103-564-5245)
M310
S301 1
S301 2
S301 3
S301 4
S301 5
S301 6
S301 7
S301 8
P+24V21
P+24V21
N.C
N.C
Width detecting drive motor

(103-564-5245)
M309
TDI
GND
1 6 2 7 3 8 4 9
JHU2
JHU2
1 6 2 7 3 8 4 9
(ORG)
(BLK)
1 5 2 6 3 4
M311
M311
1 5 2 6 3 4
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
1 5 2 6 3 4
M310
M310
1 5 2 6 3 4
N.C
N.C
Register nip motor

(103-564-5245)
M304
24V
GND
5V
4/4.5 switch
CLK
PD
PLD IPS connector
(ORG)
(BLK)
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
PDC19
PDC19
P+24V02
(F301 ) GND
P+24V02
(F302 ) GND
P+24V02
(Spare) GND
P+24V02
(Spare) GND
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
(RED)
(YEL)
(BLU)
(ORG)
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
1 5 2 6 3 4
M309
M309
1 5 2 6 3 4
N.C
N.C
A
Register drive motor
(103-564-5245)
N.C
PWR22 Circuit Board

(RED)
(YEL)
(BLU)
(ORG)
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
1 5 2 6 3 4
M304
M304
1 5 2 6 3 4
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
(BLK)
(RED)
(ORG)
(YEL)
(BLU)
N.C
1 10 2 11 3 12 4 13 5 14 6 15 7 16 8 17 9 18
PWR18
PWR18
1 3 2 4
PDC15
PDC15
M311 A
M311 / A
M311 B
M311 / B
7 15 8 16
TCK
GND
TDO
VCC
TMS
5 13 6 14
P+5V
GND
M315 A
M315 / A
M315 B
M315 / B
PDC16
PDC16
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
PDC23
PDC23
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
(RED)
(BLK)
P+24V43
GND
N.C
5 11 6 12
N.C
PDC24
PDC24
3 2 4 5 6
N.C
(RED)
(YEL)
(BLU)
(ORG)
3 11 4 12
(RED)
(YEL)
(BLU)
(ORG)
1 9 2 10
(ORG)
(BLK)
1
P+24V41
GND
P+24V42
GND
(RED)
(YEL)
(BLU)
(ORG)
(RED)
(YEL)
(BLU)
(ORG)
3 9 4 10
N.C
(ORG)
(BLK)
(ORG)
(BLK)
M310 A
M310 / A
M310 B
M310 / B
M309 A
M309 / A
M309 B
M309 / B
(RED)
(YEL)
(BLU)
(ORG)
5 11 6 12
1 7 2 8
3 9 4 10
JRE1
JRE1
3 9 4 10
(RED)
(YEL)
(BLU)
(ORG)
1 3 2 4
JHK1
JHK1
1 3 2 4
1 7 2 8
GND-5P
N.C
P+24V32
GND
GND
N.C
N.C
5 6
N.C
N.C
P+24V31
7 8
N.C
N.C
(ORG)
(BLK)
(ORG)
(BLK)
M304 A
M304 / A
M304 B
M304 / B
N.C
N.C
Feed drive motor 1

(103G770-2264)
P+5V1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
PWR16
PWR16
N.C
N.C
P+24V23
GND
(RED)
(YEL)
(BLU)
(ORG)
1 2 3 4
M301
M301
1 2 3 4
(RED)
(YEL)
(BLU)
(ORG)
1 3 4 6 2 5
M302
M302
1 3 4 6 2 5
N.C
N.C
(ORG)
(BLK)
M302 A
M30 2 / A
M302 B
M30 2 / B
(XSH7126-347)
Paper supply motor
M302
+24V30
+24V30
+24V31
+24V31
+24V32
+24V32
GND-24V3
GND-24V3
+24V41
+24V41
+24V42
+24V42
+24V43
+24V43
GND-24V4
GND-24V4
GND-24V4
GND-24V4
N.C
PDC22
PDC22
3 4
P+24V02
GND
P+24V22
GND
M301
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
1 2
(ORG)
(BLK)
10
(BLK)
(BLK)
5 11 6 12
PDC16
PDC16
N.C
P+24V21
GND
(RED)
(YEL)
(BLU)
(ORG)
N.C
G
M301A
M301 / B
M301A
M301 / B

(GP1A71A)
Sub-scanning drive motor
F
9
(ORG)
(ORG)
P+24V01
1 7 2 8
N.C
E
GND
(BLK)
(ORG)
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
+24V01
+24V02
GND-24VO
+24V11
+24V12
GND-24V1
+24V21
+24V22
+24V23
GND-24V2
GND-24V2
+24V01
+24V02
GND-24V0
+24V11
+24V12
GND-24V1
+24V21
+24V22
+24V23
GND-24V2
GND-24V2
PDC22 Circuit Board Wiring Diagram (2/2)

10
11
PDC22 Circuit Board (2/2)
PDC17
PDC17
3 7 4 8
JSY1
JSY1
3 7 4 8
3 7 4 8
1 5 2 6 3 4
M314
M314
1 5 2 6 3 4
H
1 2 3
JNDL1
To the light
table
1 2
PZR1
PZR1
F
PZR22 Circuit Board
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 101112
PZR2
PZR2
1 2 3 4
N.C
(RED)
(BLK)
N.C
N.C
CTC13
CTC13
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011121314
N.C
N.C
N.C
PZ201
1 2 3 4 5
PZ201
PZ201
1 2 3 4 5
(AE203D16)
(AE203D16)
N.C
CTC22 Circuit Board

N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
X-axis output
NC
GND
(RED)
(BLK)
N.C
N.C
PWR13
PWR13
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1112 1314
X-axis output
NC
GND
NC
PWR22 Circuit Board
PZ201+
PZ201PZ202+
PZ202PZON+
PZONERR201
DGND
ERR202
DGND
ERRPZR
DGND
DGND
DGND
N.C
N.C
(RED)
(BLK) N.C
N.C
(RED)
(BLK) N.C
(GRY)
(BLK)
(GRY)
(BLK)
(GRY)
(BLK)
(GRY)
(BLK)
(GRY)
(BLK)
(GRY)
(BLK)
D
(BLK)
C
2
X-axis on +
X-axis on Y-axis on +
Y-axis on PWONon +
PWONon X-axis SNG
GND
Y-axis SNG
GND
Power supply NG
GND
+9V
GND
(ORG)
(BLK)
N.C
P+5V1
GND-5P
P+9V1
P+9V2
GND-9P
N.C
N.C
P+5V1
GND-5P
P+9V1
P+9V2
GND-9P
N.C
N.C
19.3.11
(RED)
(BLK)
(RED) N.C
PZR22 Circuit Board Wiring Diagram

8
9
PZ202
1 2 3 4
PZ202
PZ202
1 2 3 4
To CTC3
To PAC16
PZR3
PZR3
5 6 7
10
11
19.3.12
1
Exposure Section Wiring Diagram (Laser Unit)

2
(GRY)
B image data output

(GRY)
G image data output

(GRY)
R image data output
LDA22 Circuit Board
Power supply output voltages

for the AOM driver
C
R-LD drive system
D
R-LD EEPROM I/F
(ORG)
(BLK)
(RED)
(BLK)
(BLU)
(GRY)
(GRY)
(GRY)
(GRY)
(BLU)
(BLK)
(RED)
(GRY)
(RED)
(BLK)
(RED)
(GRY)
(RED)
(BLU)
(BLK)
(RED)
(RED)
(RED)
(BLK)
(RED)
(GRY)
(GRY)
(BLU)
(GRY)
(GRY)
(RED)
(RED)
(RED)
(RED)
(RED)
(RED)
(RED)
(BLK)
(GRY)
(GRY)
(GRY)
(GRY)
(RED)
(BLK)
(RED)
(RED)
(RED)
(RED)
(GRY)
APC22 Circuit
Board
(GRY)
R-LD temperature control system
G-SHG drive system
G-SHG temperature control system
G-SHG EEPROM I/F
B-SHG drive system
(RED)
(RED)
(RED)
(GRY)
(GRY)
(GRY)
(GRY)
(GRY)
(GRY)
(BLK)
(GRY)
(GRN)
(GRN)
(GRY)
(RED)
(BLK)
(BLU)
(RED)
(GRN)
(GRN)
(GRN)
(RED)
(BLK)
(RED)
(BLK)
(RED)
(BLK)
(RED)
(BLK)
(GRY)
(GRY)
(GRY)
(GRY)
(GRN)
(GRN)
(GRN)
(GRN)
(GRY)
(GRY)
(GRY)
(BLK)
(GRY)
(BLU)
(BLU)
(GRY)
(RED)
(BLK)
(BLU)
(BLU)
(BLU)
(BLU)
(BLU)
JMR22 Circuit
Board
JMG22 Circuit
Board
(RED)
B-SHG temperature control system
G-SHG EEPROM I/F
LDD22 Circuit Board
(RED)
(RED)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(RED)
(BLK)
(RED)
(BLK)
(GRY)
(GRY)
(GRY)
(GRY)
(BLU)
(BLU)
(BLU)
(BLU)
JML22 Circuit Board
JMB22 Circuit
Board
Laser Unit
10
11
19.3.13
1
Exposure Section Wiring Diagram (Sensors and Mechanical System)

2
10
SOS Detecting Circuit Board
(RED)
(BLK)
(GRY)
JND20 Circuit Board
DTA22 Circuit Board
B
(GRY)
(GRY)
(BLK)
(ORG)
Laser unit internal mechanical

system (I/O)
(RED)
(BLK)
(GRY)
(RED)
(BLK)
(GRY)
(ORG)
(BLK)
(GRY)
(BLK)
(ORG)
(BLK)
(RED)
(BLK)
(GRY)
(ORG)
(BLK)
(GRY)
(GRY)
(ORG)
(BLK)
(RED)
(BLK)
(GRY)
(RED)
(BLK)
(GRY)
(ORG)
(BLK)
(GRY)
(RED)
(BLK)
(GRY)
(ORG)
(BLK)
(GRY)
(RED)
(BLK)
(GRY)
(ORG)
(BLK)
(GRY)
Polygon Motor Circuit Board
JND20 Circuit Board
(RED)
(BLK)
Shutter solenoid
(SDC-1040)
Shutter sensor
(GP1A21)
(RED)
(BLK)
(YEL)
Dustproof fan 1
(RED)
(BLK)
(YEL)
Dustproof fan 2
(RED)
(BLK)
(YEL)
Dustproof fan 3
Laser Unit
(ORG)
(BLK)
(GRY)
(RED)
(BLK)
(YEL)
Frame (Printer Section)

Exposure section temperature
sensor circuit board
G
Exposure section temperature
sensor
(RED)
(BLK)
(BLU)
(BLK)
(RED)
(BLK)
(BLU)
(BLK)
THA20 Circuit Board
LDD22 Circuit Board
Sub-scanning Unit
11
19.3.14
1
Image Processing Circuit Board Wiring Diagram

2
PWR22 Circuit Board

Main Control Unit
ADC22 Circuit Board

D+3.3V1
GND-3.3V
D+3.3V1
GND-3.3V
D+3.3V1
GND-3.3V
D+3.3V1
GND-3.3V
D+3.3V1
GND-3.3V
D+3.3V1
GND-3.3V
PC2
PC2
1 35 2 36 3 37 4 38 5 39 6 40 7 41 8 42 9 43 10 4411 4512 46 13 47 14 48 1549 16 50 17 51 18 52 19 53 20 54 21 55 22 56 23 57 24 58 2559 26 60 27 61 28 62 29 63 30 643165 3266 336734 68
PWR6
PWR6
1 7 2 8 3 9 4 10 5 11 6 12
N.C
N.C
ADC4
ADC4
1 21 2 22 3 23 4 24 5 25 6 26 7 27 8 28 9 29 10 30 11 31 12 32 13 33 14 34 15 35 16 36 17 37 18 38 19 39 20 40
(RED)
(BLK)
(RED)
(BLK)
(RED)
(BLK)
(RED)
(BLK)
(RED)
(BLK)
1 35 2 36 3 37 4 38 5 39 6 40 7 41 8 42 9 43 10 4411 4512 46 13 47 14 48 1549 16 50 17 51 18 52 19 53 20 54 21 55 22 56 23 57 24 58 2559 26 60 27 61 28 62 29 63 30 643165 3266 336734 68

BOX3 (S CSI)
BOX3 (S CSI)
1 4 2 5 3 8 6 9 7 10
BOX2
BOX2
GND
SD12
GND
SD13
GND
SD14
GND
SD15
GND
SDP1
GND
SD0
GND
SD1
GND
SD2
GND
SD3
GND
SD4
GND
SD5
GND
SD6
GND
SD7
GND
SDP0
GND
GND
GND
GND
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
GND
GND
ATN
GND
GND
GND
BSY
GND
ACY
GND
RST
GND
MSG
GND
SEL
GND
C/D
GND
REQ
GND
I/O
GND
SD8
GND
SD9
GND
SD10
GND
SD11
3.3V
GND
3.3V
GND
3.3V
GND
3.3V
GND
3.3V
GND
GND
GND
DIN0(+)
DIN0(-)
DIN1(-)
DIN1(+)
DIN2(+)
DIN2(-)
DIN3(-)
DIN3(+)
DIN4(+)
DIN4(-)
DIN5(-)
DIN5(+)
DIN6(+)
DIN6(-)
DIN7(-)
DIN7(+)
DIN8(+)
DIN8(-)
DIN9(-)
DIN9(+)
DIN10(+)
DIN10(-)
DIN11(-)
DIN11(+)
DIN12(+)
DIN12(-)
CLK(-)
CLK(+)
/HD(+)
/HD(-)
SDTR(-)
SDTR(+)
SDTW(+)
SDTW(-)
SCK(-)
SCK(+)
GND
GND
1 21 2 22 3 23 4 24 5 25 6 26 7 27 8 28 9 29 10 30 11 31 12 32 13 33 14 34 15 35 16 36 17 37 18 38 19 39 20 40
BOX1 (S CANN ER)
BOX1 (S CANN ER)
CPL_VCCO
LDA_TXD
CPL_VCCI
LDA_RXD
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
GND
DBG_TXD
DBG_RXD
GND
CTP_TXD
CTP_RXD
GND
CTC_RXD
CTC_TXD
/CTC_IRQ
/CTC_INT
GND
IN PORT1
OUT PORT1
IN PORT2
OUT PORT2
BOX5
BOX5
22 2324 25
N.C
(GRY)
(BLK)
(GRY)
(BLK)
1 2 3 4
JGM2
JGM2
1 2 3 4
10 18192021
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
JGM1
JGM1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1415 16
(BLK)
(GRY)
(GRY)
1112 13
(BLK)
(GRY)
(GRY)
5 2 1 4 3 17 7 6 9 8
CTC22 Circuit
Board
CTP22 Circuit
Board
N.C
1 2 3 4 5
JGM4
JGM4
1 2 3 4 5
To DBG
(RED)
(GRY)
(RED)
(GRY)
N.C
1 3 2 4 5
CTP9
CTP9
1 2 3
JGM3
JGM3
1 2 3 4
LDA6
LDA6
GHT_RxD_PAC
GHT_RxD_PC
GHT_TxD_PAC
GHT_TxD_PC
LDA22 Circuit Board
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CTC1
CTC1
(BLK)
(GRY)
(GRY)
N.C
N.C
1 19 2 20 3 21 4 22 5 23 6 24 7 25 8 26 9 27 10 28 11 29 12 30 13 31 14 32 15 33 16 34 17 35 18 36
LDA1
LDA1
GND(DGND)
TxD
RxD
int out
int in
GND(DGND)
GMB_out1
GMB_in1
GMB_out2
GMB_in2
GND
RXD2
TXD2
N.C
N.C
(BLK)
(GRY)
(GRY)
(GRY)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(GRY)
(BLK)
(GRY)
(BLK)
N.C
BOX4 (ROS)
BOX4 (ROS)
1 19 2 20 3 21 4 22 5 23 6 24 7 25 8 26 9 27 10 28 11 29 12 30 13 31 14 32 15 33 16 34 17 35 18 36
(BLK)
(GRY)
(GRY)
(GRY)
(BLK)
(BLK)
(GRY)
(BLK)
(GRY)
(BLK)
GND
GND
DOUT0(+)
DOUT0(-)
DOUT1(-)
DOUT1(+)
DOUT2(+)
DOUT2(-)
DOUT3(-)
DOUT3(+)
DOUT4(+)
DOUT4(-)
DOUT5(-)
DOUT5(+)
DOUT6(+)
DOUT6(-)
DOUT7(-)
DOUT7(+)
Enable-R(+)
Enable-R(-)
Enable-G(-)
Enable-G(+)
Enable-B(-)
Enable-B(+)
Datavalid(-)
Datavalid(+)
CLOCK(+)
CLOCK(-)
R-REQ(-)
R-REQ(+)
G-REQ(+)
G-REQ(-)
B-REQ(-)
B-REQ(+)
GND
GND
Image Processing Box Circuit Board
LDA22 Circuit
Board
10
11
1
21
2
22
3
23
4
24
5
25
6
26
7
27
8
28
9
29
10
30
11
31
12
32
13
33
14
34
15
35
16
36
17
37
18
38
19
39
20
40
(M3_scr
ew) (M3_scr
ew)
(M3_scre
w)
CY1
QR/P4-40S-C(01)
LEF1
LEB22
ZHR-9
B2B-ZR
LEF22
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
CYS7
CYS53J
CYS53J
D104L
ZHR-2
B2B-ZR
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
CYS13
PHR-8
B20B-PHDSS
B4B-PH-K-S
CYS6
CYS6
PHR-7
51005-0400
51006-0400
B9B-ZR
D101L
ZHR-2
D107P
D107P
FSP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
MSB1
ZHR-3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
2
3
4
D120
ZHR-2
LED1
MSC1 ZHR-5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
LED101_G
GND
LED101_R
S4B-ZR
D117
ZHR-3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
2
3
4
B3B-ZR
D103P
ZHR-4
D107P_1
D107P_2
D107P_3
D107P_4
+12V
GND
-12V
1
2
3
4
S2B-ZR
D104P
ZHR-3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
B5B-ZR
1
2
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
S3B-ZR
E_D101L
R_D101L
E_D104L
R_D104L
D118
D119
GND
D120
GND
D124
D125
D126
D127
GND
VCC
D117
GND
B4B-ZR
135 frame sensor3 (D107P-3)

ZHR-4
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
S3B-ZR
B4B-ZR
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
D103P
VCC
D104P
VCC
1
2
3
4
5
DTE22
LED-Ar
DTE22
SSE22
DTE22
DT G22
LED22
MSB22
MSA22
Status indicator LED_G (LED101_G)
Status indicator LED_R (LED101_R)
135 lower mask F sensor (D119)
135 lower mask H sensor (D118)
Upper cover open/close sensor (D120)
Key4_> (D127)
Key3_>> (D126)
Key2_<< (D125)
Key1_< (D124)
Mask motor home position sensor (D117)
135 downstream perforation sensor (D103P)
IX240 TAP and leading end sensor (D104P)
IX240 TAP and leading end sensor (D104P)
IX240 rear unexposed frame sensor (D108P)
IX240 perforation sensor (D105P)
135 frame sensor (D107L)
135 leading end sensor (D101P)
LEB1
51005-0900
51006-0900
LEE22
B2B-ZR
D105L
ZHR-2
CYS52J
CYS52J
135 leading end sensor (D101L)
D103L
ZHR-2
B16B-PHDSS
LEE22
MWH20
CYS7
PHR-4
IX240 TAP and leading end sensor (D104L)
W-head C
MRH90
51005-0800
51006-0800
135 check tape sensor (D106L)
CYS51J
CYS51J
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
51006-0400
135 rear fogging sensor (D110L)
R-head C
CYS5
135 front fogging sensor (D111L)
ZHR-6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
B18B-PHDSS
E_D102L
R_D102L
E_D111L
R_D111L
E_D110L
R_D110L
E_D106L
R_D106L
S6B-ZR
CYS5
PHDR-20VS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
CYS8
E_D108L
R_D108L
E_D109L
R_D109L
MRH1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
CYS4
MSC22
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
F
B10B-PHDSS
1
2
3
4
51005-0400
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
CYS4
PHDR-18VS
CYS8
PHDR-16VS
E_D105L
R_D105L
B6B-PH-K-S
VCC
CMWR1(MG101_1)
CMEN1(MG101_2)
CMWR2(MG101_3)
CMEN2(MG101_4)
GND
CYS9
ZHR-5
1
2
M104
D108P
D109P
+12V
GND
-12V
DTB1
M-12V
MGND
M+12V
MGND
CMRD2(D116_2)
CMRD1(D116_1)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
B3B-PH-K-S
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
D105P
ZHR-4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
2
3
4
AR
E_D103L
R_D103L
51005-0400
D105P
D101P
ZHR-4
1
2
M102
VCC
1
2
3
ZHR-5
240MAG_write2 (MG101_3)
51006-0400
CYS9
PHDR-10VS
DTB22
240MAG_W/Enable2 (MG101_4)
S101
51005-0200
E_D107L
R_D107L-MY
R_D107L-MR
B5B-ZR
1
2
3
4
5
6
51006-0200
Door motor (M104)
CYS10
M104
B12B-PHDSS
1
2
3
B4B-ZR
135 upstream perforation sensor (D102L)
51006-0600
51005-0600
1
2
3
4
S3B-ZR
240MAG_W/Enable1 (MG101_2)
FGND
S101+
S101-
D101P
B4B-ZR
ZHR-3
IX240 rear unexposed frame sensor

(D108L)
IX240 front unexposed frame sensor
(D109L)
JMS1
JMS1
B5B-ZR
240MAG_read1(D116_1)
M103
51005-0400
LEE22
CY1
QR/P4-40P-C(01)
135 upstream perforation sensor (D102P)
240MAG_write1 (MG101_1)
1
2
3
4
5
6
51006-0400
M101
51005-0400
CYS10
PHR-3
1
2
3
4
51006-0400
1
2
3
CY1-11
CY1-31
CY1-12
CY1-32
CYS3
PHR-6
Supply motor (M102)
CYS11
M102
CYS3
VCC
DTF22
1
2
3
4
B14B-PHDSS
DTF1
135 check tape sensor (D106P)
CY1-9
CY1-29
CY1-10
CY1-30
B6B-PH-K-S
ZHR-6
Solenoid (S101)
S6B-ZR
S101
CYS11
PHDR-12VS
1
2
3
4
5
VCC
D102P
VCC
D106P
DTF2
135 front fogging sensor (D111P)
135 rear fogging sensor (D110P)
ZHR-4
Mask motor (M103)
1
2
3
4
5
6
D113
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
SSA22
1
2
M103
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
D110P
D111P
+12V
GND
-12V
CYS122J 51006-0600
CYS122J 51005-0600
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
5
6
IPI sensor (D113)
Cartridge sensor
(D115)
Door open/close sensor

(D112)
Supply motor home

position sensor
(D114)
240MAG_read2 (D116_2)
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
S4B-ZR
1
2
3
4
5
6
M103-A
M103-/A
M103-B
M103-/B
CYS2
PHR-6
ZHR-5
SIO2+
SIO2SCLK2+
SCLK2RST2+
RST2-
CYS2
Feed motor (M101)
CYS12
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
5
SSD22
SSB22
SIO2+
SIO2SCLK2+
SCLK2RST2+
RST2-
M101
B5B-EH
VCC
D113
GND
VCC
D112
D115
GND
SSB1
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
6
D114
ZHR-3
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
S5B-ZR
CY1-15
CY1-35
CY1-16
CY1-36
CY1-17
CY1-37
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
VCC
D114
GND
B3B-ZR
M101-A
M101-/A
M101-B
M101-/B
CY1-9
CY1-29
CY1-10
CY1-30
CY1-11
CY1-31
CY1-12
CY1-32
SIO+
SIOSCLK+
SCLKRST+
RST-
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
1
2
3
IX240 perforation sensor

(D105L)
H
FGND
1
2
3
4
5
6
CYS121J 51006-0300
CYS121J 51005-0300
1
2
3
4
5
6
CYS1
SIO+
SIOSCLK+
SCLKRST+
RST-
CYS12
PHDR-14VS
SW1
1
2
3
D123B
1
2
3
4
5
LEE22
CY1-15
CY1-35
CY1-16
CY1-36
CY1-17
CY1-37
G
D+5V
DGND
A+12V
AGND
A-12V
CYS1
EHR-5
1
2
3
4
5
19.3.15
135 downstream perforation sensor

(D103L)
1
21
2
22
3
23
4
24
5
25
6
26
7
27
8
28
9
29
10
30
11
31
12
32
13
33
14
34
15
35
16
36
17
37
18
38
19
39
20
40
E
D+5V
DGND
A+12V
AGND
A-12V
Auto Film Carrier NC100AC Wiring Diagram

10
11
ZHR-4
CYS123J 51006-0500
CYS123J 51005-0500
for debug
B7B-PH-K-S
CYS13
CYS22 Circuit Board
51005-0700
51006-0700
MWH1 IL-Y-6S-S15C3
IL-Y-6P-S15L2-EF
B8B-ZR
ZHR-8
B2B-ZR
FS-P
B8B-PH-K-S
19.4 Circuit Board Circuit Diagrams

19.4.1 PAC22 Circuit Board Circnit Diagram (1/4)
1
10
11
A
PAC01
1
HM20
2A
250V
5V power-up signal (+) 4
5
2
100 VAC input
K1
F1
TNR5V271K
VD1
5V power-up signal (-) 4
K
AQV253H
PAC19
2
1
DC power supply relay
ON 100 VAC
Jumper connector for

the dummy switch
(ON)
PAC02
2
PAC18
4
1
D+5V
D1
D2
1
P+24V
EC10DS1
2
A
P+24V
EC10DS1
2
A
K4
8
G3VM-V
K2
6
K3
1
R1
1
270
1/4W 5%
Processing tank circulation pump 4
PAC04
F2
4
2
P1 circulation pump
G2R-1A-E-DC24V
TN1
1
2
HM50
5A
250V
G2R-1A-DC24V
2
TN2
1
XE1201
P2 circulation pump
XE1201
F3
HM20
2A
250V
3
D+5V
ERZV07D471
2
VD2
1
4
10
U1
1
Jumper connector for

the dummy switch
(OFF)
11
+
G3M-202P-UTU-1-DC5V
P1 replenisher PU408 4
6
ERZV07D471
2
VD3
1
12
U2
1
+
G3M-202P-UTU-1-DC5V
ERZV07D471
2
P2RA replenisher PU409 4
VD4
1
PAC03
1
U3
1
~
+
~
-
P2RB replenisher PU410 4
G3M-202P-UTU-1-DC5V
ERZV07D471
2
2
VD5
1
U4
P1 replenisher pump
4
PSR replenisher pump
+
G3M-202P-UTU-1-DC5V
PSR replenisher PU411 4
PAC22 Circuit Board Circuit Diagram (2/4)

1
10
11
A
R2
3.9K
1/4W
5%
P+24V
R3
3.9K
1/4W
5%
A
2
D3
SML-310DT
PAC15
1
2
<24 V from PWR22>
R5
3.9K 1/4W 5%
R6
3.9K 1/4W 5%
P+5V
R4
330
1/4W
5%
PC1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
P+5V input check 4

P+24V input check 4
Dryer safety thermostat 4
Not used
TLP281-4(GB)
D5
EC10DS1
2
1
D4
EC10DS1
P+24V
P+24V
4
3
K5
G4W-2212P-VD-TV5-DC24V
1
6
2
7
3
8
4
9
5
10
CRT relay
Dryer heater relay (1)
Dryer heater relay (2)
Solution heater relay (1)

Solution heater relay (2)
K6
G4W-2212P-VD-TV5-DC24V
4
2
3
1
PAC13
1 D6
K
1 D7
K
1 D8
K
1 D9
K
2 EC10DS1
2 EC10DS1
2 EC10DS1
A
D10
2 EC10DS1
D+5V
1
A
K
EC10DS1
K7
R7270
A
1
1/4W 5%
5
4
REON
G3VM-V
PAC14
Dryer heater thermostat
Slit plate thermostat (1)
Slit plate thermostat (2)
P1 heater thermostat
P2 heater thermostat
PSA heater thermostat
PSB heater thermostat
1
8
2
9
3
10
4
11
5
12
6
13
7
14
P+24V
PC2
R8
3.9K
1/4W 5%
R9
3.9K
1/4W 5%
R10
3.9K
1/4W 5%
R11
3.9K
1/4W 5%
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
TLP281-4(GB)
P1 safety thermostat 4
PSA safety thermostat 4
SBP safety thermostat 4

1
10
11
D+5V
VD6
2
U5
F4
PAC08
Solution heater 200 Vin
HM32
3.2A 250V
ERZV07D471
1
PAC06
P1 solution heater H401

P1 solution heater H401 4
G3M-203P-UTU-1-DC5V
ERZV07D471
1
VD7
2
P2 solution heater H402

5
U6
F5
HM32
3.2A 250V
2
4
G3M-203P-UTU-1-DC5V
D+5V
VD8
2
E
PAC07
Solution heater 200 Vin
U7
F6
HM32
3.2A 250V
ERZV07D471
1
1
3
PAC05
PSA solution heater H403

PSA solution heater H403 4
G3M-203P-UTU-1-DC5V
ERZV07D471
1
VD9
2
U8
F7
2
HM32
3.2A 250V
1
3
PSA solution heater H404
2
4
G3M-203P-UTU-1-DC5V
PSB solution heater H404 4

1
10
11
P+5V
P+5V
PC3
R16 330 1/4W 5%
R17 330 1/4W 5%
D+5V
R18 330 1/4W 5%
R19
680
1/4W
5%
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
G EN
A1
Y1
A2
Y2
A3
Y3
A4
Y4
P+5V
PAC12
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
16
14
12
10
SN74LS244N
1
5
2
6
3
7
4
8
18
R20 330 1/4W 5%
4.7k 4.7k 4.7k 4.7k

1/4W 1/4W 1/4W 1/4W
5% 5% 5% 5%
VCC
D+5V
D+5V
TP1
U11-1
R12 R13 R14 R15
C1
0.1u
20
D11
SML-310VT
P2RB replenisher PU410 1

PSR replenisher PU411 1
Processing tank circulation pump 1
TP2 P+5V
P+5V
PSA solution heater H403 3

PSB solution heater H404 3
PAC16
P+5V input check 2

P+24V input check 2
TP5
DGND
Processor exhaust fan
1
3
2
4
+ C3
47u
50V
D12
SML-310DT
+ C2
47u
16V
R22
680
1/4W
5%
A
Dryer safety thermostat 2

Slit plate safety thermostat 2
5V power-up signal (+) 1
5V power-up signal (-) 1
R21
3.9k
1/4W
5%
PSA thermostat 2
PSB thermostat 2
+24V 30
P+24V input
REON 2
Slit plate heater (2) H408 3
Slit plate heater (1) H407 3
1
4
2
5
3
6
P+5V input
PAC11
TP3 P+24V
P+24V
PAC17
P1 replenisher PU408 1
P2RA replenisher PU409 1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
CTP22
communication
connector
D13
SML-310VT
TP4
PGND
<Electrical component section SSR>

Dryer fan SSR
Dryer SSR A
Dryer SSR B
Output reserved for future use
19.4.2 PDC22 Circuit Board Circuit Diagram (1/14)

1
10
11
VCC
CTP Connector
8
7
6
5
RA8
1K
1/16W
5%
RA9
1K
1/16W
5%
6
8
VCC
74LS244
G EN
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
RA7
1K
1/16W
5%
RA6
1K
1/16W
5%
1
2
3
4
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
RA5
330
1/16W
5%
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
RA4
330
1/16W
5%
RA3
330
1/16W
5%
1
2
3
4
RA2
330
1/16W
5%
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
D+5V
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
U1-1
RA1
330
1/16W
5%
A1
Y1
A2
Y2
A3
Y3
A4
Y4
18
16
14
12
PC1
1
R1
680
1/10W
5%
C1
0.1u
2
3
6
19
74LS244
G EN
TLP2630
U1-2
D1
SML-310LT
11
13
PC2
15
1
7
17
2
3
A1
Y1
A2
Y2
A3
Y3
A4
Y4
/STB
BD0 3
BD1 3
BD2 3
6
TP1
RCU00000C
TLP2630
PDC1
1 CTP18IN
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
PC3
DGND
1
M301CLK 2
M302CLK 2
D+5V
M303CLK
M304CLK
M306CLK
M309CLK
2
3
2
2
2
2
U2-1
TLP2630
2
M310CLK 2
YOBI1CLK 2
M311CLK
M313CLK
M403CLK
M314CLK
2
2
2
2
PC4
Y1
Y2
A3
Y3
A4
Y4
18
BD3 3
16
BD4 3
14
BD5 3
12
BD6 3
2
3
6
TLP2630
PIO0
PIO1
PIO2
VCC
PIO3
PIO4
PIO5
PIO6
C2
0.1u
PC5
1
PIO7
PIOSEL0
U2-2
2
3
19
74LS244
G EN
4
11
TLP2630
13
P+5V 2
P+24V 2
15
17
PIOON 2
D312 2
D313 2
YOBIOUT1 2
YOBIIN1
A1
Y1
A2
Y2
A3
Y3
A4
Y4
BD7 3
IA0
IA1
IA2
18
IA3
16
PIOWR 3
PC6
1
7
PIOSEL1
PIOSEL2
U3-1
2
3
74LS244
G EN
TLP2630
2
4
6
8
A1
Y1
A2
Y2
A3
Y3
A4
Y4
14
12
1
7
2
3
PIOSEL3
+ C3
47u
50V
C4
0.1u
VCC
6
C5
1u
C6
0.1u
VCC
TLP2630
U3-2
19
74LS244
C7
0.1u
G EN
U4
C8
1
3
4
5
11
10
12
9
1u
PC8
1
7
TP2
11
2
3
TXD1
RCU00000C
13
D+5V
15
VCC
TLP2630
17
A1
Y1
A2
Y2
A3
Y3
A4
Y4
9
7
5
C1+
C1C2+
C2T1IN
T2IN
R1OUT
R2OUT
VS+
VST1OUT
T2OUT
R1IN
R2IN
2
6
14
7
13
8
P+24V43
C9
1u
C10
1u
MAX232NS
TXD_232c
+ C11
47u
50V
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
RA10
2.2k
1/16W
5%
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
RA11
330
1/16W
5%
PC9
1
7
RXD1
2
3
6
D+5V
VCC
C12
0.1u
VCC
C13
0.1u
VCC
C14
0.1u
VCC
C15
0.1u
VCC
C16
0.1u
VCC
C17
0.1u
VCC
C18
0.1u
VCC
C19
0.1u
VCC
A1
A2
M315CLK 2
YOBI2CLK 2
M305CLK 2
M305PD 2
PC7
74LS244
G EN
C21
0.1u
C20
0.1u
TLP2630
RXD_232c
TP3
TP4
PDC5
1
2
3
4
5
PDC22 Circuit Board Circuit Diagram (2/14)

1
10
11
VCC
The PDC22 circuit board is used to communicate
with the CTP22 pulse motor clocks.
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
RA21
1K
1/16W
5%
VCC
VCC
C22
0.1u
1
2
3
4
RA20
2.2k
1/16W
5%
1
2
3
4
RA19
2.2k
1/16W
5%
1
2
3
4
RA18
2.2k
1/16W
5%
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
RA17
2.2k
1/16W
5%
1
2
3
4
RA16
330
1/16W
5%
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
RA15
330
1/16W
5%
1
2
3
4
RA14
330
1/16W
5%
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
RA13
330
1/16W
5%
1
2
3
4
RA12
330
1/16W
5%
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
D+5V
U5-1
1
C23
0.1u
74LS244
G EN
PC10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1 M301CLK
1 M302CLK
1 M303CLK
1 M304CLK
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
2
4
6
8
A1
Y1
A2
Y2
A3
Y3
A4
Y4
18
M301_CLK 4
16
M302_CLK 4
14
M303_CLK 4
12
U5-2
19
TLP281-4(GB)
M304_CLK 4
74LS244
G EN
PC11
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1 M306CLK
1 M309CLK
1 M310CLK
1 M311CLK
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
11
13
15
17
U6-1
1
TLP281-4(GB)
74LS244
A1
Y1
A2
Y2
A3
Y3
A4
Y4
M306_CLK 4
M309_CLK 4
M310_CLK 4
M311_CLK 4
G EN
PC12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1 M313CLK
1 M314CLK
1 M315CLK
1 M403CLK
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
2
4
6
8
A1
Y1
A2
Y2
A3
Y3
A4
Y4
18
M313_CLK 4
16
M314_CLK 4
14
M315_CLK 4
12
U6-2
19
TLP281-4(GB)
M403_CLK 4
74LS244
G EN
PC13
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1 YOBI1CLK
1 YOBI2CLK
1 YOBIIN1
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
11
13
15
17
A1
Y1
A2
Y2
A3
Y3
A4
Y4
YOBI1_CLK
Sub-scanning drive motor

(M305)
P+24V23
VCC
TLP281-4(GB)
PC14
R2
470
1/10W
5%
6
4
R3
10k
1/10W
5%
U7-1
TLP2630
1
VCC
74LS07
VCC
3
/RESET
3,4
TP5
MB3771PF
C27
1u
RCU00000C
TP6
RCU00000C
C26
0.1u
U9-1
74LS240
TP7
RA22
330
1/16W
5%
RCU00000C
G EN
1
2
3
4
8
7
6
5
VCC
8
7
6
4
8
7
6
5
CT
RESET
VSC
VSA
OUTC VSB/RESIN
GND
Reset time of 100 msec

2
3 PIOON_PDC
4
6
8
VCC
VCC
A1
Y1
A2
Y2
A3
Y3
A4
Y4
18
16
14
12
U10-1 74LS244
VCC
Cutter signal
R4
2.2k
1/10W
5%
R5
2.2k
1/10W
5%
VCC
P+24V21
P+24V23
P+24V31
P+24V41
P+24V43
2
4
R6
10
1/10W 5%
R7
10
1/10W 5%
6
8
C28
0.047u
RCU00000C
R9
6.8k
1/4W
5%
R10
6.8k
1/4W
5%
R11
6.8k
1/4W
5%
R12
6.8k
1/4W
5%
R13
6.8k
1/4W
5%
A1
Y1
A2
Y2
A3
Y3
A4
Y4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
18
16
14
D312PLD 4
12
D313PLD 4
C29
0.047u
C31
0.1u
TP10
RCU00000C
U10-2 74LS244
1 U11
2
3
4
19
11
13
U9-2
74LS30
19
11
R16
0.82k
1/4W
5%
R17
0.82k
1/4W
5%
R18
0.82k
1/4W
5%
R19
0.82k
1/4W
5%
R20
0.82k
1/4W
5%
R21
0.82k
1/4W
5%
13
15
17
This circuit detects whether or not the P+24 V is turned on.

(The input voltage to 74LS30 must be between 2.24 V and 2.58 V.)
G EN
VCC
8
5
6
11
12
74LS240
15
G EN
17
A1
Y1
A2
Y2
A3
Y3
A4
Y4
9
7
5
3
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
TLP281-4(GB)
C30
0.1u
PIOON 1
P+5V 1
YOBIOUT1 1
P+24V 1
H level when the sensor detects

the specified condition.
G EN
VCC
R8
6.8k
1/4W
5%
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
TLP281-4(GB)
RCU00000C
TP9
H level when an abnormal

condition is detected.
PC15
PC16
PDC2
1
2
3
4
5
6
RA23
330
1/16W
5%
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
TP8
P+24V01
4
74LS07
1
2
3
4
VCC
U8
PDC3
1
5
2
6
3
7
4
8
U7-2
C25
0.1u
1
2
3
+ C24
47u
50V
7
2
3
1 M305CLK
1 M305PD
A1
Y1
A2
Y2
A3
Y3
A4
Y4
9
D2
7
R14
1
K
5
SML-310MT
2 D3
R15
1
K
3
SML-310MT
680
1/10W
5%
680
1/10W
5%
VCC
D312 1
D313 1

1
10
11
Parallel I/O
U12-1 74LS240
1
M301PD_dum
M302PD_dum
M303PD_dum
M304PD_dum
U13-1 74LS240
1
G EN
A1
Y1
A2
Y2
A3
Y3
A4
Y4
18
M301PD 4,6
M313PD_dum
16
M302PD 4,6
M314PD_dum
14
M303PD 4,10
M315PD_dum
12
M304PD 4,8
M403PD_dum
U12-2 74LS240
19
8
7
6
5
M309PD_dum
13
M310PD_dum
15
M311PD_dum
17
A1
Y1
A2
Y2
A3
Y3
A4
Y4
18
M313PD 4,10
16
M314PD 4,11
14
M315PD 4,9
12
M403PD 4,7
U13-2 74LS240
19
G EN
A1
Y1
A2
Y2
A3
Y3
A4
Y4
M306PD 4,11
M402A_dum
11
M309PD 4,8
M402B_dum
13
M310PD 4,8
M404_dum
15
M311PD 4,9
PU407_dum
17
RA31
10k
1/16W
5%
VCC
G EN
A1
Y1
A2
Y2
A3
Y3
A4
Y4
M402A 7
M402B 7
M404 7
PU407 7
VCC
VCC
1
2
3
4
RA30
10k
1/16W
5%
1
2
3
4
RA29
10k
1/16W
5%
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
RA28
10k
1/16W
5%
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
RA27
10k
1/16W
5%
1
2
3
4
RA26
10k
1/16W
5%
1
2
3
4
RA25
10k
1/16W
5%
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
RA24
10k
1/16W
5%
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
M306PD_dum
11
G EN
VCC
C32
0.1u
R22
22k
1/10W
5%
C33
0.1u
R207
22k
1/10W
5%
U15-1
1
1
1
1
2,4
8
9
10
11
26
27
28
29
BD0
BD1
BD2
BD3
BD4
BD5
BD6
BD7
18
20
21
22
IA0
IA1
IA2
IA3
23
14
15
16
/RESET
1 PIOWR
VCC
VCC
VCC
C36
0.1u
C37
0.1u
19
D[0]
D[1]
D[2]
D[3]
D[4]
D[5]
D[6]
D[7]
P0[0]
P0[1]
P0[2]
P0[3]
P0[4]
P0[5]
P0[6]
P0[7]
P1[0]
ADR[0]
P1[1]
ADR[1]
P1[2]
ADR[2]
P1[3]
ADR[3]
P1[4]
P1[5]
L_SYSCLR P1[6]
L_CS
P1[7]
L_RD
P2[0]
L_WR
P2[1]
P2[2]
P2[3]
P2[4]
P2[5]
P2[6]
P2[7]
P3[0]
P3[1]
P3[2]
P3[3]
P3[4]
P3[5]
P3[6]
P3[7]
P4[0]
P4[1]
P4[2]
P4[3]
P4[4]
P4[5]
P4[6]
P4[7]
P5[0]
P5[1]
P5[2]
P5[3]
P5[4]
P5[5]
P5[6]
P5[7]
P6[0]
P6[1]
P6[2]
P6[3]
P6[4]
P6[5]
P6[6]
P6[7]
P7[0]
P7[1]
P7[2]
P7[3]
P7[4]
P7[5]
P7[6]
P7[7]
P8[0]
P8[1]
P8[2]
P8[3]
P8[4]
P8[5]
P8[6]
IC
P8[7]
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
M301PD_dum
M302PD_dum
M303PD_dum
M304PD_dum
M306PD_dum
M309PD_dum
M310PD_dum
M311PD_dum
M313PD_dum
M314PD_dum
M315PD_dum
M403PD_dum
PLDYOBI1A 4
PLDYOBI1B 6
U15-2
3
74LS06
VCC
PLDYOBI2 4
M301DIR
M304DIR
M310DIR
M314DIR
PLDYOBI3
M307A 4
M307B 4
M307C 4
Processor drive motor (M401)
4
4
4
4
C34
0.1u
DOT11
DOT12
DOT13
DOT14
DOT15
DOT16
DOT17
DOT18
DOT21
DOT22
DOT23
DOT24
DOT25
DOT26
DOT27
DOT28
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
74LS06
U15-4
VCC
8
74LS06
M401
M401DIR
13
13
13
13
13
13
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
RA41
10k
1/16W
5%
1
2
3
4
RA40
10k
1/16W
5%
1
2
3
4
RA39
10k
1/16W
5%
1
2
3
4
RA38
10k
1/16W
5%
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
RA37
10k
1/16W
5%
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
RA36
10k
1/16W
5%
1
2
3
4
RA35
10k
1/16W
5%
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
1
2
3
4
RA34
10k
1/16W
5%
10
PDC6
1
2
3
74LS06
Buzzer connector
VCC
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
R208
22k
1/10W
5%
U15-6
13
12
74LS06
PIOON_PDC 2
RA33
10k
1/16W
5%
R25
22k
1/10W
5%
U15-5
S409 12
S410 12
S411 12
S411DIR 12
RA32
10k
1/16W
5%
+ C35
47u
50V
S401
S402
S403
S404
S405
S406
S407
S408
R24
22k
1/10W
5%
U15-3
11
F401
F402
F403
F404
F406
F407
P+24V42
R23
22k
1/10W
5%
M402A_dum
M402B_dum
M404_dum
PU407_dum
TX180
2
74LS06
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
U14
PDC11
1
4
2
5
3
6

1
10
11
U17-1 74LS244
PLD circuitry
This circuitry is used to
reshape the pulse motor clocks.
2
4
6
8
G EN
A1
Y1
A2
Y2
A3
Y3
A4
Y4
18
U18-1 74LS244
16
14
12
CUTTER_OUT2 6
4
U17-2 74LS244
19
G EN
8
11
13
15
17
R26 33
A1
Y1
A2
Y2
A3
Y3
A4
Y4
M403A 7
M403B 7
M403/A 7
M403/B 7
11
1/10W 5%
R28 33
1/10W 5%
13
R29 33
1/10W 5%
R30 33
1/10W 5%
15
VCC
R32 33
TCK
2 D312PLD
2 D313PLD
3 M307C
1/10W 5%
R33 33
1/10W 5%
R35 33
1/10W 5%
R37 33
1/10W 5%
R39 33
1/10W 5%
R34 33
1/10W 5%
R36 33
1/10W 5%
R38 33
1/10W 5%
R40 33
1/10W 5%
R42 33
1/10W 5%
2
1/10W 5%
4
VCC
2,3
2
2
2
3
3
3,6
3
3,10
3,10
3,8
3
3,11
/RESET
M303_CLK
M302_CLK
M301_CLK
M307A
M307B
M301PD
M301DIR
M302PD
M303PD
M304PD
M304DIR
M306PD
U20
EPM7128SQC160-15
I/O
VCC/3.3V
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
VCC/3.3V
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
VCC/3.3V
TDI
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/ O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
TMS
I/O
I/O
I/O
VCC/3.3V
I/ O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
M310_CLK
M309_CLK
M306_CLK
M304_CLK
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
VCC/3.3V
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
INPUT/GCLK1
INPUT/OE1
INPUT/GCLRn
INPUT/OE2/GCLK2
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
2
2
2
2
122
123
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
139
140
141
142
144
145
146
147
149
150
151
152
153
158
159
160
I/O
TDO
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/ O
VCC/3.3V
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
TCK
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/ O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
121
112
111
110
109
108
107
106
105
104
103
102
101
100
99
98
97
96
94
93
92
91
90
89
88
PLDYOBI3
M403_CLK
M315_CLK
M314_CLK
M313_CLK
M311_CLK
19
80
79
78
73
72
71
70
69
68
67
65
64
63
62
59
58
57
56
55
54
53
52
51
50
49
48
43
41
R43 33
1/10W 5%
R44 33
1/10W 5%
R46 33
1/10W 5%
R48 33
1/10W 5%
R50 33
1/10W 5%
R52 33
1/10W 5%
R54 33
1/10W 5%
R56 33
1/10W 5%
R58 33
1/10W 5%
R61 33
1/10W 5%
R63 33
1/10W 5%
R65 33
R45 33
1/10W 5%
11
R47 33
1/10W 5%
13
R49 33
1/10W 5%
15
R51 33
1/10W 5%
17
R53 33
1/10W 5%
R55 33
1/10W 5%
R57 33
1/10W 5%
R59 33
1/10W 5%
R60 33
1/10W 5%
R62 33
1/10W 5%
R64 33
1/10W 5%
R66 33
1/10W 5%
VCC
11
VCC
VCC
VCC
13
15
C39
0.1u
C40
0.1u
C41
0.1u
17
M309PD
M310PD
M310DIR
M311PD
M313PD
M314PD
M314DIR
M315PD
M403PD
YOBI1_CLK
PLDYOBI1A
2
4
6
8
U23-2 74LS244
19
G EN
R68 33
R70 33
1/10W 5%
1/10W 5%
R69 33
11
13
1/10W 5%
1/10W 5%
15
17
A1
Y1
A2
Y2
A3
Y3
A4
Y4
9
7
M306B 11
11
M306/A 11
13
M306/B 11
15
U24-1 74LS244
1
VCC
R71 33
1/10W 5%
VCC
R72 33
1/10W 5%
8
7
6
5
R73 33
R74 33
4
1/10W 5%
1/10W 5%
6
8
G EN
A1
Y1
A2
Y2
A3
Y3
A4
Y4
18
M314A 11
16
M314B 11
14
M314/A 11
12
M314/B 11
VCC
1
2
3
4
PDC26
M304A 8
M304B 8
M304/A 8
M304/B 8
18
M309A 8
16
M309B 8
14
M309/A 8
12
M309/B 8
M310A 8
M310B 8
M310/A 8
M310/B 8
18
M311A 9
16
M311B 9
14
M311/A 9
12
M311/B 9
M313A 9
M313B 9
M313/A 9
M313/B 9
18
M315A 9
16
M315B 9
14
M315/A 9
12
M315/B 9
M302A 10
M302B 10
M302/A 10
M302/B 10
18
M303A 10
16
M303B 10
14
M303/A 10
12
M303/B 10
G EN
A1
Y1
A2
Y2
A3
Y3
A4
Y4
G EN
A1
Y1
A2
Y2
A3
A4
Y3
Y4
G EN
A1
Y1
A2
Y2
A3
Y3
A4
Y4
G EN
A1
Y1
A2
Y2
A3
Y3
A4
Y4
G EN
A1
Y1
A2
Y2
A3
Y3
A4
Y4
R75 33
1/10W 5%
R77 33
1/10W 5%
11
R76 33
1/10W 5%
13
15
1/10W 5%
17
G EN
VCC
C43
0.1u
A1
Y1
A2
Y2
A3
A4
G EN
A1
Y1
A2
Y2
A3
Y3
A4
Y4
G EN
A1
Y1
A2
Y2
A3
A4
Y3
Y4
U23-1 74LS244
VCC
VCC
VCC
VCC
VCC
U24-2 74LS244
19
R78 33
PLD_ISP function connector
M301/B 6
M306A 11
17
M301/A 6
12
U22-2 74LS244
19
R67 33
TMS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Y4
U22-1 74LS244
TDI
RA42
1K
1/16W
5%
A4
M301B 6
14
U21-2 74LS244
19
C38
0.1u
C42
0.1u
Y3
M301A 6
16
U21-1 74LS244
1/10W 5%
A3
18
U19-2 74LS244
VCC
3,8
3,8
3
3,9
3,9
3,11
3
3,9
3,7
2
3
Y2
U19-1 74LS244
1
VCC
3
2
2
2
2
2
Y1
A2
1/10W 5%
R41 33
TDO
3 PLDYOBI2
17
R31 33
A1
U18-2 74LS244
19
1/10W 5%
R27 33
G EN
CUTTER_OUT1 6
Y3
Y4
MYOBI1A 11
MYOBI1B 11
MYOBI1/A 11
MYOBI1/B 11
C44
0.1u
C45
0.1u
C46
0.1u
C47
0.1u
C48
0.1u
C49
0.1u
G EN
A1
Y1
A2
Y2
A3
Y3
A4
Y4

1
Back printer circuitry
10
11
VCC
P+24V21
R79
4.7k
1/10W
5%
U25-1 74HC244
G EN
1 /STB
Y2
A3
Y3
A4
Y4
R81 100 1/10W 5%
16
1
A
U1ZB36
A2
18
R82 100 1/10W 5%
14
R83 100 1/10W 5%
12
3 DOT14
Y1
3 DOT13
A1
3 DOT12
ZD1
3 DOT11
R80 100 1/10W 5%
QA1-1
SMA5106
2
3
4
4
3
2
1
ZD2
2
K
RA43
4.7K
1/16W
5%
QA1-2
SMA5106
9
10
11
5
6
7
8
12
U1ZB36
P+24V21
U25-2 74HC244
19
G EN
6
15
17
Y1
A2
Y2
A3
Y3
A4
Y4
R84 100 1/10W 5%
R85 100 1/10W 5%
P+24V21
U1ZB36
PDC4
A1
1
11
2
12
3
13
4
14
5
15
6
16
7
17
8
18
9
19
10
20
R86 100 1/10W 5%
R87 100 1/10W 5%
3 DOT18
13
3 DOT17
11
1
K
3 DOT16
Back printer
ZD3
3 DOT15
QA2-1
SMA5106
2
3
4
4
3
2
1
1
K
U1ZB36
5
6
7
8
12
ZD4
RA44
4.7K
1/16W
5%
QA2-2
SMA5106
9
10
11
VCC
P+24V21
C50
0.1u
G EN
6
3 DOT23
Y2
A3
Y3
A4
Y4
R89 100 1/10W 5%
16
+ C51
10000u
50V
1
K
U1ZB36
Y1
A2
R90 100 1/10W 5%
14
R91 100 1/10W 5%
12
3 DOT24
A1
ZD5
3 DOT21
3 DOT22
R88 100 1/10W 5%
18
QA3-1
SMA5106
2
3
4
U26-1 74HC244
P+24V21
4
3
2
1
1
K
U1ZB36
5
6
7
8
12
ZD6
RA45
4.7K
1/16W
5%
QA3-2
SMA5106
9
10
11
P+24V21
U26-2 74HC244
G EN
19
3 DOT27
17
A3
Y3
A4
Y4
R93 100 1/10W 5%
U1ZB36
R94 100 1/10W 5%
R95 100 1/10W 5%
5
6
7
8
12
C53
0.1u
C52
0.1u
QA4-2
SMA5106
9
10
11
ZD8
2
K
4
3
2
1
7
RA46
4.7K
1/16W
5%
VCC
VCC
1
A
Y2
3 DOT28
A2
15
Y1
13
3 DOT26
A1
ZD7
11
3 DOT25
R92 100 1/10W 5%
QA4-1
SMA5106
2
3
4
U1ZB36

1
10
11
VCC
P+24V02
Paper supply motor (M301)

Feed drive motor1 (M302)
Spare motor
C54
0.1u
+ C55
47u
50V
NF1
DSS306-55FZ103N100
3
1
G
U27
CVCC
13
14
12
4 M301A
4 M301/A
L SPLY
PHASE1
ENA1
RC1
OUT1A
OUT1B
E1
1
17
18
16
NF2
DSS306-55FZ103N100
3
1
G
SENSE1
11
2.4k
1/10W
1%
2.4k
1/10W
1%
C58
3300p
D15
EC31QS09
Q1
2
M301PD
D14
EC31QS09
B
DTC113ZKA E
3,4
R101
0.39
2W
2%
C59
3300p
R102
0.39
2W
2%
R103
1k
1/10W
1%
NF4
DSS306-55FZ103N100
3
1
G
R100
27k
1/10W
1%
C57
680p
Current values 1.28/0.64
D13
EC31QS09
R99
27k
1/10W
1%
C56
680p
D12
EC31QS09
R97
A2918SWV
R98
1k
1/10W
1%
R96
CGND
REF.
10
NF3
DSS306-55FZ103N100
3
1
G
SENSE2
15
2
4
3
VCC
OUT2A
OUT2B
E2
PHASE2
ENA2
RC2
8
7
9
4 M301B
4 M301/B
VCC
P+24V22
VCC
R146
910
1/10W
1%
C102
0.1u
+ C104
47u
50V
C103
0.1u
MTD2005
R150
13k
1/10W
1%
D46
EC31QS09
NF36
DSS306-55FZ103N100
3
1
G
D47
EC31QS09
R149
0.82
2W
2%
PGND
13
ALARM
LG A
LG B
NF35
DSS306-55FZ103N100
3
1
G
D45
EC31QS09
7
21
D44
EC31QS09
VCC
11
17
Phase A
Phase B
ENA A
ENA B
Decay
14
18
5
23
6
22
24
M302A
M302B
M302/A
M302/B
Rs A
Rs B
4
4
4
4
Out 3
Out 4
CR
Vs A
Vs B
1
27
NF34
DSS306-55FZ103N100
3
1
G
10
12
DTC113ZKA E
Out 1
Out 2
Vmm A
Vmm B
Vref A
Vref B
CVCC
2
26
8
20
3
B
25
M302PD
U38
R148
180
1/10W
1%
3,4
NF33
DSS306-55FZ103N100
3
1
G
C105
0.1u
Q9
2
R147
180
1/10W
1%
R151
0.82
2W
2%
C106
4700p
VCC
VCC
VCC
P+24V22
R170
1k
1/10W
1%
C122
0.1u
+ C124
47u
50V
C123
0.1u
R174
13k
1/10W
1%
C126
4700p
PGND
3
R173
0.82
2W
2%
13
MTD2005
R175
0.82
2W
2%
1
D62
EC31QS09
2
1
ALARM
NF51
DSS306-55FZ103N100
3
1
G
D61
EC31QS09
D60
EC31QS09
LG A
LG B
11
17
7
21
Rs A
Rs B
VCC
Phase A
Phase B
ENA A
ENA B
Decay
NF50
DSS306-55FZ103N100
3
1
G
14
18
5
23
6
22
24
MYOBI1A
MYOBI1B
MYOBI1/A
MYOBI1/B
Out 3
Out 4
4
4
4
4
Vs A
Vs B
CR
10
12
Out 1
Out 2
8
20
Vref A
Vref B
1
27
Vmm A
Vmm B
2
26
DTC113ZKA E
CVCC
25
3
B
NF49
DSS306-55FZ103N100
3
1
G
U42
R172
91
1/10W
1%
3 PLDYOBI1B
Q13
2
C125
0.1u
D63
EC31QS09
NF52
DSS306-55FZ103N100
3
1
G
R171
91
1/10W
1%
PDC16
1
7
2
8
3
9
4
10
5
11
6
12

1
Replenisher cartridge opening drive motor (M402)

Paper reverse feed motor (M403)
Sorter drive motor (M404)
VCC
P+24V32
C62
0.1u
+ C63
47u
50V
U29
11
12
10
VS
PTH8L18AR3R3M6B790
4
8
IN1
IN2
OUT1
OUT2
ST
PGND
P+24V31
6
1
3 M402A
3 M402B
RT1
CVCC
1
2
+ C64
47u
50V
TA8429H
U7-3
PDC9
1
6
2
7
3
8
4
9
5
10
3 PU407
VCC
P+24V31
74LS07
+ C66
47u
50V
NFB2
C65
0.1u
RXE075
0.75A
U30
11
1
2
3 M404
12
RT2
CVCC
VS
IN1
IN2
OUT1
OUT2
ST
PGND
10
PTH8L18AR3R3M6B790
4
8
6
U7-4
TA8429H
9
8
74LS07
U7-5
VCC
11
10
74LS07
C67
0.1u
U7-6
VCC
R104
1k
1/10W
1%
P+24V42
13
12
74LS07
+ C69
47u
50V
C68
0.1u
R108
13k
1/10W
1%
C71
4700p
LG A
LG B
ALARM
PGND
M403OUT/A 12
3
R107
0.82
2W
2%
13
MTD2005
R109
0.82
2W
2%
NF7
DSS306-55FZ103N100
1
3
G
D17
EC31QS09
M403OUTB 12
D16
EC31QS09
D18
EC31QS09
11
17
Rs A
Rs B
Phase A
Phase B
ENA A
ENA B
Decay
7
21
CR
14
18
VCC
Out 3
Out 4
10
12
5
23
6
22
24
M403A
M403B
M403/A
M403/B
Out 1
Out 2
M403OUTA 12
NF6
DSS306-55FZ103N100
1
3
G
4
4
4
4
4
Vs A
Vs B
8
20
1
27
Vmm A
Vmm B
Vref A
Vref B
DTC113ZKA E
CVCC
2
26
25
R106
150
1/10W
1%
Q2
2
NF5
DSS306-55FZ103N100
1
3
G
U31
M403PD
C70
0.1u
3,4
D19
EC31QS09
NF8
DSS306-55FZ103N100
1
3
G
2
R105
150
1/10W
1%
M403OUT/B 12
10
11

1
10
11
VCC
Register drive motor (M304)

Register nip motor (M309)
Width detecting drive motor (M310)
P+24V22
VCC
R110
1k
1/10W
1%
C72
0.1u
+ C74
47u
50V
C73
0.1u
R111
91
1/10W
1%
2
1
D21
EC31QS09
NF12
DSS306-55FZ103N100
3
1
G
D22
EC31QS09
D23
EC31QS09
R113
0.82
2W
2%
13
PGND
MTD2005
R114
13k
1/10W
1%
D20
EC31QS09
LG A
LG B
7
21
ALARM
NF11
DSS306-55FZ103N100
3
1
G
VCC
11
17
Rs A
Rs B
Phase A
Phase B
ENA A
ENA B
Decay
5
23
6
22
24
M304A
M304B
M304/A
M304/B
4
4
4
4
14
18
Out 3
Out 4
CR
Vs A
Vs B
NF10
DSS306-55FZ103N100
3
1
G
10
12
1
27
Vmm A
Vmm B
Out 1
Out 2
Vref A
Vref B
CVCC
2
26
DTC113ZKA E
8
20
25
R112
91
1/10W
1%
M304PD
NF9
DSS306-55FZ103N100
3
1
G
U32
Q3
2
3,4
C75
0.1u
R115
0.82
2W
2%
C76
4700p
VCC
C77
0.1u
P+24V22
VCC
R116
1k
1/10W
1%
+ C79
47u
50V
C78
0.1u
PDC14
R117
91
1/10W
1%
U33
LG A
LG B
2
R119
0.82
2W
2%
13
PGND
MTD2005
R120
13k
1/10W
1%
NF16
DSS306-55FZ103N100
3
1
G
ALARM
D25
EC31QS09
D24
EC31QS09
D26
EC31QS09
D27
EC31QS09
7
21
9
9
9
9
NF15
DSS306-55FZ103N100
3
1
G
VCC
11
17
Phase A
Phase B
ENA A
ENA B
Decay
5
23
6
22
24
M309A
M309B
M309/A
M309/B
Rs A
Rs B
4
4
4
4
NF14
DSS306-55FZ103N100
3
1
G
14
18
Out 3
Out 4
CR
Vs A
Vs B
1
27
8
20
10
12
DTC113ZKA E
Vmm A
Vmm B
Out 1
Out 2
Vref A
Vref B
CVCC
2
26
25
R118
91
1/10W
1%
Q4
2
M309PD
NF13
DSS306-55FZ103N100
3
1
G
3,4
C80
0.1u
R121
0.82
2W
2%
C81
4700p
VCC
C82
0.1u
P+24V22
VCC
R122
1k
1/10W
1%
+ C84
47u
50V
C83
0.1u
R126
13k
1/10W
1%
C86
4700p
PGND
3
R125
0.82
2W
2%
13
MTD2005
R127
0.82
2W
2%
1
D30
EC31QS09
2
1
ALARM
NF19
DSS306-55FZ103N100
3
1
G
D29
EC31QS09
D28
EC31QS09
LG A
LG B
11
17
7
21
Rs A
Rs B
VCC
Phase A
Phase B
ENA A
ENA B
Decay
NF18
DSS306-55FZ103N100
3
1
G
14
18
5
23
6
22
24
M310A
M310B
M310/A
M310/B
Out 3
Out 4
4
4
4
4
Vs A
Vs B
CR
10
12
Out 1
Out 2
8
20
Vref A
Vref B
1
27
Vmm A
Vmm B
2
26
DTC113ZKA E
CVCC
3
B
25
M310PD
NF17
DSS306-55FZ103N100
3
1
G
U34
R124
91
1/10W
1%
3,4
Q5
2
C85
0.1u
D31
EC31QS09
NF20
DSS306-55FZ103N100
3
1
G
R123
91
1/10W
1%
M315OUTA
M315OUT/A
M315OUTB
M315OUT/B
1
9
2
10
3
11
4
12
5
13
6
14
7
15
8
16

1
Sub-scanning nip motor (M311)

Pre-register drive motor (M315)
10
11
VCC
P+24V23
VCC
R128
1k
1/10W
1%
C87
0.1u
+ C89
47u
50V
C88
0.1u
R129
91
1/10W
1%
2
1
LG A
LG B
PGND
R131
0.82
2W
2%
13
MTD2005
R132
13k
1/10W
1%
NF24
DSS306-55FZ103N100
3
1
G
D33
EC31QS09
D32
EC31QS09
D34
EC31QS09
ALARM
NF23
DSS306-55FZ103N100
3
1
G
D35
EC31QS09
11
17
7
21
Rs A
Rs B
14
18
PDC15
1
3
2
4
VCC
Phase A
Phase B
ENA A
ENA B
Decay
NF22
DSS306-55FZ103N100
3
1
G
5
23
6
22
24
M311A
M311B
M311/A
M311/B
Out 3
Out 4
CR
4
4
4
4
Vs A
Vs B
Out 1
Out 2
8
20
10
12
1
27
Vmm A
Vmm B
DTC113ZKA E
CVCC
Vref A
Vref B
25
2
26
R130
91
1/10W
1%
Q6
2
M311PD
3,4
NF21
DSS306-55FZ103N100
3
1
G
U35
C90
0.1u
R133
0.82
2W
2%
C91
4700p
D
VCC
P+24V23
C97
0.1u
R140
1k
1/10W
1%
2
R144
13k
1/10W
1%
C101
4700p
PGND
M315OUT/A 8
R143
0.82
2W
2%
13
MTD2005
R145
0.82
2W
2%
D42
EC31QS09
M315OUTB 8
2
1
D41
EC31QS09
D40
EC31QS09
ALARM
NF31
DSS306-55FZ103N100
3
1
G
11
17
LG A
LG B
Rs A
Rs B
7
21
CR
Phase A
Phase B
ENA A
ENA B
Decay
M315OUTA 8
NF30
DSS306-55FZ103N100
3
1
G
14
18
VCC
Out 3
Out 4
10
12
5
23
6
22
24
M315A
M315B
M315/A
M315/B
Out 1
Out 2
4
4
4
4
Vs A
Vs B
1
27
Vmm A
Vmm B
DTC113ZKA E
CVCC
Vref A
Vref B
2
26
8
20
3
B
25
M315PD
NF29
DSS306-55FZ103N100
3
1
G
U37
R142
91
1/10W
1%
3,4
Q8
2
C100
0.1u
D43
EC31QS09
NF32
DSS306-55FZ103N100
3
1
G
R141
91
1/10W
1%
+ C99
47u
50V
C98
0.1u
VCC
M315OUT/B 8

2
Feed drive motor 2 (M311)

Feed nip motor (M313)
10
11
VCC
P+24V22
VCC
C107
0.1u
R152
910
1/10W
1%
+ C109
47u
50V
C108
0.1u
R153
180
1/10W
1%
2
1
PGND
3
R155
0.82
2W
2%
13
MTD2005
R156
13k
1/10W
1%
D49
EC31QS09
D48
EC31QS09
NF40
DSS306-55FZ103N100
3
1
G
ALARM
NF39
DSS306-55FZ103N100
3
1
G
D50
EC31QS09
D51
EC31QS09
LG A
LG B
11
17
7
21
14
18
VCC
Phase A
Phase B
ENA A
ENA B
Decay
Rs A
Rs B
NF38
DSS306-55FZ103N100
3
1
G
M303A
M303B
M303/A
M303/B
Out 3
Out 4
4
4
4
4
5
23
6
22
24
Vs A
Vs B
CR
10
12
Out 1
Out 2
8
20
1
27
Vmm A
Vmm B
DTC113ZKA E
CVCC
Vref A
Vref B
2
26
25
R154
180
1/10W
1%
Q10
2
M303PD
3,4
NF37
DSS306-55FZ103N100
3
1
G
U39
C110
0.1u
R157
0.82
2W
2%
C111
4700p
PDC18
1
6
2
7
3
8
4
9
5
10
VCC
P+24V23
R134
1k
1/10W
1%
2
R138
13k
1/10W
1%
C96
4700p
PGND
3
R137
0.82
2W
2%
13
MTD2005
R139
0.82
2W
2%
1
D38
EC31QS09
2
1
ALARM
NF27
DSS306-55FZ103N100
3
1
G
D37
EC31QS09
D36
EC31QS09
LG A
LG B
11
17
7
21
Rs A
Rs B
VCC
Phase A
Phase B
ENA A
ENA B
Decay
NF26
DSS306-55FZ103N100
3
1
G
14
18
5
23
6
22
24
M313A
M313B
M313/A
M313/B
Out 3
Out 4
4
4
4
4
Vs A
Vs B
CR
10
12
1
27
Vmm A
Vmm B
Out 1
Out 2
DTC113ZKA E
CVCC
Vref A
Vref B
2
26
8
20
3
B
25
M313PD
NF25
DSS306-55FZ103N100
3
1
G
U36
R136
91
1/10W
1%
3,4
Q7
2
C95
0.1u
D39
EC31QS09
NF28
DSS306-55FZ103N100
3
1
G
R135
91
1/10W
1%
+ C94
47u
50V
C93
0.1u
VCC
C92
0.1u

1
10
11
VCC
Exit drive motor (M306)

Exit section up/down belt motor (M314)
and the cutter drive motor (M307)
P+24V23
VCC
R158
910
1/10W
1%
C112
0.1u
+ C114
47u
50V
C113
0.1u
R159
180
1/10W
1%
13
NF44
DSS306-55FZ103N100
3
1
G
R161
0.82
2W
2%
K
D54
EC31QS09
D55
EC31QS09
PGND
NF43
DSS306-55FZ103N100
3
1
G
D53
EC31QS09
ALARM
LG A
LG B
MTD2005
R162
13k
1/10W
1%
D52
EC31QS09
7
21
11
17
VCC
Rs A
Rs B
Phase A
Phase B
ENA A
ENA B
Decay
NF42
DSS306-55FZ103N100
3
1
G
14
18
5
23
6
22
24
M306A
M306B
M306/A
M306/B
Out 3
Out 4
4
4
4
4
Vs A
Vs B
CR
10
12
1
27
Vmm A
Vmm B
Out 1
Out 2
DTC113ZKA E
CVCC
Vref A
Vref B
2
26
8
20
25
R160
180
1/10W
1%
M306PD
NF41
DSS306-55FZ103N100
3
1
G
U40
Q11
2
3,4
C115
0.1u
R163
0.82
2W
2%
C116
4700p
VCC
P+24V22
VCC
R164
1k
1/10W
1%
+ C119
47u
50V
C118
0.1u
C117
0.1u
PDC17
PGND
13
D57
EC31QS09
R167
0.82
2W
2%
MTD2005
R168
13k
1/10W
1%
D56
EC31QS09
D58
EC31QS09
ALARM
LG A
LG B
NF47
DSS306-55FZ103N100
3
1
G
7
21
11
17
VCC
Rs A
Rs B
Phase A
Phase B
ENA A
ENA B
Decay
R169
0.82
2W
2%
C121
4700p
P+24V02
VCC
C60
0.1u
+ C61
47u
50V
NFB1
U28
11
4 CUTTER_OUT1
4 CUTTER_OUT2
1
2
12
CVCC
VS
IN1
IN2
OUT1
OUT2
ST
PGND
TA8429H
10
4
8
6
NF46
DSS306-55FZ103N100
3
1
G
14
18
5
23
6
22
24
M314A
M314B
M314/A
M314/B
Out 3
Out 4
4
4
4
4
Vs A
Vs B
CR
1
27
10
12
Vmm A
Vmm B
Out 1
Out 2
DTC113ZKA E
CVCC
Vref A
Vref B
2
26
8
20
3
B
25
M314PD
NF45
DSS306-55FZ103N100
3
1
G
U41
R166
91
1/10W
1%
3,4
Q12
2
C120
0.1u
RXE090
0.90A
PDC13
1
2
D59
EC31QS09
NF48
DSS306-55FZ103N100
3
1
G
R165
91
1/10W
1%
1
5
2
6
3
7
4
8

1
VCC
10
11
P+24V31
VCC
VCC
C127
0.1u
3 S411DIR
C128
0.1u
C129
0.1u
+ C130
47u
50V
VCC
U43-1
1
2
Two-way solenoid
U44-1
&
A
B
3
14
15
3 S411
R176
33k
1/10W
1%
74HC123
CLR
Cext
Rext/Cext
1
7
Q
Q
U45
13
4
11
TC7W08F
R
CX
RX/CX
U46-1
1
2
U43-2
1
5
3
6
TC7W04F
IN1
IN2
ST
VS
OUT1
OUT2
PGND
10
4
8
S411OUT1
S411OUT2
TA8429H
TC7W08F
U46-2
C131
1u
VCC
P+24V31
3
C132
0.1u
5
TC7W04F
9
10
U46-3
6
2
P+24V31
TC7W04F
3 S405
11
6
7
U44-2
&
A
B
CLR
Cext
Rext/Cext
74HC123
Q
Q
R
CX
RX/CX
5
12
PDC10
1
8
2
9
3
10
4
11
5
12
6
13
7
14
R177
Solenoid valve
100
1/10W
5%
12
CVCC
QA5-1
SMA5106
2
3
4
7
7
7
7
M403OUTA
M403OUT/A
M403OUTB
M403OUT/B
5%
R180 100 1/10W
5%
R178 100 1/10W
3 S406
3 S401
G
D
R179
15
5W
5%
QA5-2
SMA5106
9
10
11
R181
3 S402
12
G
+ C133
47u
50V
100
1/10W
5%
P+24V32
+ C134
47u
50V
PDC12
R182
3 S403
100
1/10W
5%
G
D
1
10
2
11
3
12
4
13
5
14
6
15
7
16
8
17
9
18
QA6-1
SMA5106
2
3
4
5%
R184 100 1/10W
5%
R183 100 1/10W
3 S404
G
D
QA6-2
SMA5106
9
10
11
D
12
R185
100
1/10W
5%
P+24V32
3 S407
R186
G
D
100
1/10W
5%
QA7-1
SMA5106
2
3
4
R187 100 1/10W
5%
R188 100 1/10W
5%
3 S408
3 S409
G
D
S
D
R189
100
1/10W
5%
12
3 S410
QA7-2
SMA5106
9
10
11

1
10
11
Controlled fans
A
+ C135
47u
50V
Uncontrolled fans
P+24V41
P+24V41
QA8-1
SMA5106
2
3
4
R191100 1/10W 5%
P+24V01
+ C136
47u
50V
R192100 1/10W 5%
3 F403
3 F402
PDC7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
100
1/10W
5%
3 F401
R190
G
D
QA8-2
SMA5106
9
10
11
D
G
3 F406
12
PDC19
R194100 1/10W 5%
3 F404
R193100 1/10W 5%
G
D
QA9-1
SMA5106
2
3
4
3 F407
R195100 1/10W 5%
G
D
12
QA9-2
SMA5106
9
10
11
PDC8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
DF1EC-8P-2.5DSA
PDC21
PDC20
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
DF1EC-8P-2.5DSA

1
8
P+24V21
R196
NF53
NFM46P11C155
1
3
G
4.7k
1/4W
TP11
RCU00000C
TP12
RCU00000C
TP13
RCU00000C
TP14
RCU00000C
TP15
RCU00000C
TP21
RCU00000C
TP22
RCU00000C
TP23
RCU00000C
TP25
RCU00000C
TP26
RCU00000C
2
A
K
SML-310DT
5%
2
4
D64
P+24V22
R197
D65
4.7k
1/4W
A
K
SML-310DT
5%
2
4
NF54
NFM46P11C155
1
3
G
PDC22
1
P+24V23
R198
NF55
NFM46P11C155
1
3
G
4.7k
1/4W
A
K
SML-310DT
5%
2
4
D66
6
P+24V02
R199
D67
NF56
NFM46P11C155
3
G
4.7k
1/4W
A
K
SML-310DT
5%
2
4
10
P+24V01
R200
D68
NF57
NFM46P11C155
3
G
4.7k
1/4W
A
K
SML-310DT
5%
2
4
C
TP16
TP17
TP18
TP19
TP20
R201
RCU00000C
D69
4.7k
1/4W
5%
1/4W
5%
P+24V41
A
K
SML-310DT
2
4
NF58
NFM46P11C155
1
3
G
R202
D70
1
NF59
NFM46P11C155
1
3
G
PDC23
P+24V42
A
K
SML-310DT
2
4
4.7k
R203
D71
1
4
NF60
NFM46P11C155
1
3
G
4.7k
1/4W
5%
2
4
P+24V43
A
K
SML-310DT
F
P+24V31
R205
NF62
NFM46P11C155
3
G
4.7k
1/4W
A
K
SML-310DT
5%
2
4
D73
PDC24
P+24V32
1
R206
NF63
NFM46P11C155
1
3
G
D74
4.7k
1/4W
A
K
SML-310DT
5%
2
4
6
VCC
R204
D72
TP24
RCU00000C
+ C137
47u
50V
NF61
NFM46P11C155
1
3
G
2
4
PDC25
A
K
SML-310LT
680 1/10W 5%
C138
0.1u
10
11
19.5 List of LEDs, Fuses and Destinations for Each DC Power Supply Unit
19.5.1 DC Power System
1. Alpha 400 Power Supply Unit
Slot
Voltage
Fuse
LED
SLOT5
D+3.3V
FH16 (4A) to 20
PD17 to PD21
PWR6
GMB22 circuit board (Image processing)
SLOT4A
A+24V1
FH12(4A)
PD13
PWR11
LDD22 circuit board
A+24V2
FH13(4A)
PD14
PWR11
LDD22 circuit board
A+8V1
FH14(4A)
PD15
PWR11
LDD22 circuit board
A+8V2
FH15(4A)
PD16
PWR11
LDD22 circuit board
A+13V1
FH9(4A)
PD9
PWR12
LDD22 circuit board
A+13V2
FH10(4A)
PD10
PWR11
LDD22 circuit board
A+13V3
FH10(4A)
PD11
PWR11
LDD22 circuit board
SLOT3B
A-13V1
FH11(5A)
PD12
PWR11,12
LDD22 and LTC22 circuit boards
SLOT2A
A+20V
FH8(1.6A)
PD8
PWR9
CCD22 circuit board
SLOT2B
D+5V
FH5(5A)
PD5
PWR7
CCD22 circuit board
FH6(4A)
PD6
PWR8
CCD22 circuit board
FH7(4A)
PD7
PWR8
Manual carrier M69D
FH1(1.6A)
PD1
PWR9
ADC22 circuit board
FH2(1.6A)
PD2
PWR10
Manual carrier M69D
FH3(1.6A)
PD3
PWR9
CCD22 circuit board
FH4(1.6A)
PD4
PWR10
Manual carrier M69D
SLOT4B
SLOT3A
SLOT1A
SLOT1A
A+12V
A-12V
Connector Name
Destination
19.5List of LEDs, Fuses and Destinations for Each DC Power Supply Unit
2. Alpha 600 Power Supply Unit

Slot
Voltage
Fuse
LED
Connector Name
Destination
SLOT5A
A+5V
FH38(1.6A)
PD39
PWR9
CCD22 and ADC22 circuit boards
SLOT5B
A-5V
FH39(1.6A)
PD40
PWR9
CCD22 and ADC22 circuit boards
SLOT4A
P+5V1
FH35(5A)
PD36
PWR13,14
CTC22 and PDC22 circuit boards
SLOT4B
P+9V1
FH36(4A)
PD37
PWR13
CTC22 circuit board
P+9V2
FH37(1.6A)
PD38
PWR13
PZR22 circuit board
+24V01
FH30(4A)
PD31
PWR15,16
CTC22, PDC22, and PAC22 circuit boards
+24V02
FH31(4A)
PD32
PWR16
PDC22 circuit board
+24V11
FH32(4A)
PD33
PWR15
CTC22 circuit board
+24V12
FH33(4A)
PD34
PWR15
Manual carrier M69D
+24V13
FH34(1.6A)
PD35
PWR13
Light table
+24V21
FH27(4A)
PD28
PWR16
PDC22 circuit board
+24V22
FH28(4A)
PD29
PWR16
PDC22 circuit board
+24V23
FH29(4A)
PD30
PWR16
PDC22 circuit board
+24V30
FH21(4A)
PD22
PWR17
PAC22 circuit board
+24V31
FH22(4A)
PD23
PWR18
PDC22 circuit board
+24V32
FH23(4A)
PD24
PWR18
PDC22 circuit board
+24V41
FH24(4A)
PD25
PWR18
PDC22 circuit board
+24V42
FH25(4A)
PD27
PWR18
PDC22 circuit board
+24V43
FH26(4A)
PD26
PWR18
PDC22 circuit board
SLOT3A
SLOT3B
SLOT2
SLOT1A
SLOT1B
3. LED Colors
Color
Function
Green
AC power supplies (starts when the Start switch is pressed)
Yellow
Power supplies controlled by the CPU
Red
Power supplies linked to the interlock switches
4. Fuse Used
Type
AC Power Fuse
DC Power Fuse
Rated Current
Quantity
2A
3.2A
5A
0.5A
1A
1.6A
11
2A
3.2A
4A
28
5A
5. PWR22 Circuit Board Component Layout Drawing (1/2)
PWR22 Circuit Board Component Layout Drawing (2/2)
19.5.2 List of the LEDs and DC Voltages on the PAC22 Circuit Board
LED No.
Voltage
LED
coordinates
(on the circuit board)
D3
24V
4-G
Not lit:
1) The interlock cover is open.
2) The 24V is not supplied from the PWR22 circuit board.
D11
D+5V
7-G
Not lit: The D+5V is not supplied from the CTP22 circuit board.
D12
P+24V
5-G
Not lit: The P+24V is not supplied from the PWR22 circuit board.
D13
P+5V
5-G
Not lit: The P+5V is not supplied from the PWR22 circuit board.
Remarks
19.5.3 List of the LEDs and DC Voltages on the PDC22 Circuit Board
LED No.
Voltage
LED
coordinates
D1
5V
6-A
Used in the PDC22 circuit board.

Not lit:
When an error occurs in the CTP22 or PDC22 circuit board.
D64
24V
(24V21)
10-F
S301
S302

24V
(24V22)
10-F
M302
M303
M304
M309
M310
M314
Feed drive motor1

Feed drive motor2
Register drive motor
Register nip motor
Width sensor drive motor
24V
(24V23)
10-G
M311
M313
M306
Sub-scanning nip motor

Feed nip motor
Exit section drive motor
24V
(24V02)
10-G
M301
M307
Paper supply motor

Cutter drive motor
D65
D66
D67
Load
Number
Remarks
LED
coordinates
Load
Number
LED No.
Voltage
D68
24V
(24V01)
10-G
F301
F308
F309
F310
F311
F312
F313
F314
F315
F316
Sub-scanning nip motor cooling fan

Printer suction fan 1
24V
(24V41)
10-E
F317
F401
F402
F403
F406
Control section exhaust fan

P1/P2 processing tank heater cooling fan
PS processing tank heater cooling fan
Processing tank heater cooling fan
Processing tank exhaust fan
24V
(24V42)
10-E
M401
Processor drive motor
(24V43)
10-E
Densitometer power supply
5V
10-B
D312
D313

Sorter full sensor buzzer power supply
S401
S402
S403
S404

PS1/PS2 rack auto washing valve
PS3/PS4 rack auto washing valve
M404
Sorter drive motor
S407
S408
S409
S410
P1R cartridge washing valve

P2RA cartridge washing valve
P2RB cartridge washing valve
P1R stirring valve
M402
Replenisher cartridge opening drive motor
D69
D70
D71
D72
D73
D74
Remarks
24V
24V
(24V31)
24V
(24V32)
10-B
10-D
19.5.4 List of the LEDs and DC Voltages on the CTP22 Circuit Board
LED No.
Voltage
LED
coordinates
D2
3.3V
1-F
Lit: Abnormality (Refer to *1 below)
D3
3.3V
1-F
D4
3.3V
1-F
D5
3.3V
1-F
Lit: When the software starts.
D6
5V
9-B
H401
Lit: When the P1 processing tank heater is turned on.
D7
5V
9-B
H402
Lit: When the P2 processing tank heater is turned on.
D8
5V
9-B
H403
Lit: When the PS1/PS2 processing tank heater is turned on.
D9
5V
9-B
H404
Lit: When the PS3/PS4 processing tank heater is turned on.
D16
5V
9-B
H406A
Lit: When the Dryer heater A is turned on.
D17
9-B
Not used
D18
9-B
Not used
D19
5V
9-B
H406B
Lit: When the Dryer heater B is turned on.
D20
5V
8-B
RESET
Lit: When the circuit board is reset
D21
5V
8-B
REON
Lit: When the processing tank level is normal.
D22
5V
8-B
CN
Lit: When the contacts at the connectors CTP1, CTP4, CTP16, and
CTP21 are proper.
D31
5V
10-H
Lit: When the 5 V, which is output from the CTP22 circuit board to
an external load, is normal (D31 is not lit when FA1 is blown or
the power supply fails). (Refer to Note *2 below)
D33
A5V
11-H
A+5V
A+5V is used in the CTP22 circuit board.

Lit: When the power supply is normal.
Load
Number
Remarks
*1: Confirm that there are good contacts at the following connectors:
CTP1: PDC22 circuit board
CTP4: Sub-scanning unit sensor
CTP16: Replenisher solution level sensor
CTP21: PAC22 circuit board
*2: 1) Failure in the PDC22 circuit board
2) Check D31 when the temperature does not rise while D6 to D16 are lit.
3) Abnormality with one of the sensors: D302, D306 to D313, D315 to D319, D321, D407 to D409, and D411
19.5.5 List of the LEDs and DC Voltages on the CTC22 Circuit Board
LED No.
Voltage
LED
coordinates
D64
5V
1-A
Load
Number
-
Remarks
5V used in the internal circuitry
Not lit: The fuse is blown due to a problem in the CTC22
circuit board.
D65
5V
1-A
D211
D212
D213
D214
D215
Conjugate length variable home position sensor

D66
3.3V
2-G
Control voltage of the LED driver

circuit board.
D67
9V
1-G
Four LED light source power supplies

Not lit: Harness breakage or short circuit
D68
5V
3-F
Used in the internal circuitry.

circuit board.
D69
24V
7-J
F201/D204
F216/D216
F217/D217
F218/D218
Light source cooling fan

CCD cooling fan
D70
24V
7-H
M201
M202
M203
Conjugate length variable motor

Lens drive motor
Shutter drive motor
D71
24V
7-G
M101
M102
M103
M104
S101
Feed motor
Supply motor
Mask motor
Door motor
Solenoid
Meaning of the LED colors

Control system power supplies (5 V, 3.3 V, etc.):
Power system (12 V, 24 V, etc.):
Analog system (12 V and A5V, etc.):
Red
Orange
Yellow
19.5.6 List of the LEDs and DC Voltages on the CYS22 Circuit Board
LED No.
Voltage
LED
coordinates
D35
5V
6-A
Load
Number
Remarks
D101
D102
D103
D104
D105
D106
D108
D109
D112
D113
D114
D115
D117
135 leading end sensor

135 upstream perforation sensor
135 downstream perforation sensor
IX240 TAP & leading end sensor
IX240 perforation sensor
135 check tape sensor
IX240 rear unexposed frame sensor
IX240 front unexposed frame sensor
Door open/close sensor
IPU sensor
Supply motor home position sensor
Cartridge sensor
Mask motor home position sensor
L101
Indicator lamp
D36
12V
9-D
D107
D110
D111
D116
MG101
135 frame sensor

135 rear fogging sensor
135 front fogging sensor
Magnetic head (Read)
Magnetic head (Write)
D37
-12V
8-D
D107
D110
D111
D116
MG101
135 frame sensor

135 rear fogging sensor
135 front fogging sensor
Magnetic head (Read)
Magnetic head (Write)
19.6 DC Voltage Adjustment

19.6.1 DC Voltage Check List
Preparations before turning the system power on
Voltage/
Fuse
Circuit Board
Lit LED
- Short-circuit Pins 2 and 3 on the CTP22 circuit board.

- Turn the five interlock switches on.
- Press the Start switch to turn the system power on.
Test Pin
+Terminal
(GND)
Voltage Range
Remarks
D+5V
CTP22
TP10
TP16
5.0 0.1V
D+3.3V
CTP22
TP14
TP16
3.3 0.1V
FA1
CTP22
D31
RLED
FA2
CTP22
D1
RLED
A+5V
CTP22
D33
RLED
D+5V
PDC22
TP1
TP2
5.0 0.1V
P+5V
PDC22
TP24
TP20
5.0 0.25V
P+24V31
PDC22
TP25
TP20
24.0 1.2V
P+24V32
PDC22
TP26
TP20
24.0 1.2V
P+24V41
PDC22
TP21
TP20
24.0 1.2V
P+24V42
PDC22
TP22
TP20
24.0 1.2V
P+24V43
PDC22
TP23
TP20
24.0 1.2V
P+24V21
PDC22
TP11
TP20
24.0 1.2V
P+24V22
PDC22
TP12
TP20
24.0 1.2V
P+24V23
PDC22
TP13
TP20
24.0 1.2V
P+24V02
PDC22
TP14
TP20
24.0 1.2V
P+24V01
PDC22
TP15
TP20
24.0 1.2V
P+24V
PAC22
TP3
TP4
24.0 1.2V
P+5V
PAC22
TP2
TP4
5.0 0.1V
D+5V
PAC22
TP1
TP5
5.0 0.1V
P+24V0
PAC22
PAC15-1
PAC15-2
24.0 1.2V
Measure at the connector
P+24V0
PAC22
PAC16-3
PAC16-6
24.0 1.2V
PRREF2.5V
PRREF2.5V
D+5V
CTC22
TP41
TP43
5.0 0.1V
+3.3V
CTC22
TP50
TP52
3.3 0.1V
P+5V
CTC22
TP57
TP58
5.0 0.1V
P+9V1
CTC22
TP54
TP51
9.0 0.2V
P+24V01
CTC22
TP61
TP62
24 0.2V
19.6DC Voltage Adjustment
DC Voltage Check List

Test Pin
Voltage/
Fuse
Circuit Board
P+24V11
CTC22
FE2
CTC22
D65
RLED
FE7
CTC22
D71
OLED
P+9V1
PZR22
PZR1-1
PZR1-2
9.0 0.2V
Image processing
CN16-1
CN16-1
3.45 0.05V
A+20V
CCD22
JAS8-2
JAS8-1
20.0 1.0V
Measure at the relay connector
A-12V
CCD22
JAS8-4
JAS8-3
-12.0 1.0V
A+5V
CCD22
JAS8-5
JAS8-6
5.0 0.25V
A-5V
CCD22
JAS8-7
JAS8-6
-5.0 0.25V
A+12V
ADC22
JAS5-5
JAS5-6
12.0 1.0V
A+5V
ADC22
JAS5-7
JAS5-13
5.0 0.25V
A-5V
ADC22
JAS5-14
JAS5-13
-5.0 0.25V
A+13V
LTC22
LTC1-1
LTC1-2
13 0.6V
A-13V
LTC22
LTC1-3
LTC1-4
-13 0.6V
A+13V
LDD22
A+13V
AGND
13 0.6V
A-13V
LDD22
A-13V
AGND
-13 0.6V
A+8VG
LDD22
A+8VG
AGND
8.0 0.8V
A+8VB
LDD22
A+8VB
AGND
8.0 0.8V
+V24
LDD22
+V24
AGND
24.0 1.2V
IL+24V
LDD22
IL+24V
AGND
24.0 1.2V
IL+13V
LDD22
IL+13V
AGND
13 0.6V
L+5V
LDD22
L+5V
AGND
5.0 0.25V
A+5V
LDD22
A+5V
AGND
5.0 0.25V
A-5V
LDD22
A-5V
AGND
-5.0 0.25V
PR+5V
LDD22
PR+5V
AGND
5.0 0.25V
PRREF2.5V
LDD22
PRREF2.5V
AGND
2.5 0.05V
D+5V
LDA22
D+5V
GND
5.0 0.3V
+3.3V
LDA22
+3.3V
GND
3.3 0.2V
D+3.3V1
Lit LED
+Terminal
(GND)
TP65
TP62
Voltage Range
Remarks
24 0.2V
19.6DC Voltage Adjustment
19.6.2
Potentiometers Used to Adjust the DC Power

Supply Voltages
A+24V A+13V A+20V A+12V
D+3.3V
A+8V
A-13V
D+5V
A+12V
SLOT5 SLOT4 SLOT3 SLOT2 SLOT1
A+5V
A+5V
P+5V
+24V0
+24V4
P+9V +24V1 +24V2
+24V4
SLOT5 SLOT4 SLOT3 SLOT2 SLOT1

CD170
20. APPENDIX
20.1 Adjustment Jigs
20.2 Required Adjustments after Parts Replacement
20.2.1
20.2.2
20.2.3
20.2.4
20.2.5
Operation Section/Carrier Section

Scanner Section
Printer Section
Processor Section
Electrical Section
20.3 Index
20.1 Adjustment Jigs

No.
1
Name and Shape
Part Number
Carrier Extension Cable
Purpose
See
subsection
Connection between the carrier and

the scanner to enable input, output
and operation checks to be carried
out.
5.5.8
Focus calibration (Menu 432)
5.4.2
Optical axis adjustment (Menu 43E)
5.4.9

(Menu 43F)
5.4.10
Back printer head clearance

adjustment
11.3.6
Spectral calibration (Menu 43J)
5.4.13
Locating the exposure section frame
12.3.1
CD837
2
Focusing Chart Jig
CD833
3
Back Printer Head Clearance Adjusting Jig
340A8894950
EZ1814
4
Spectral Calibration Chart (for reversal and negative)
EZ1815
5
Exposure Section Frame Locating Jig
CD1026

20.2.1 Operation Section/Carrier Section
No.
Replacement Parts
Ref.
Adjustment Item
Menu
Ref.
Monitor
7.1.1
(1) Monitor Color Adjustment

(2) Monitor Adjustment
426
7.1.2
5.3.5
Feed Motor (M101)
8.2.27
(1) Belt Tension Adjustment
8.2.27
Feed Rollers/IX240 Drive Belt
8.2.28
(1) Belt Tension Adjustment
8.2.27
Film Carrier
(1) Focus Position Adjustment

(2) Mask Position Adjustment
433
441
5.4.3
5.5.1
Carrier Table
8.5.3
(1) Optical Axis Adjustment

(3) Mask Position Adjustment
43E
433
441
5.4.9
5.4.3
5.5.1
20.2.2 Scanner Section

No.
Replacement Parts
Ref.
Adjustment Item
Menu
Ref.
Light Source Unit
9.1.1
(1) LED Light Amount Adjustment

(2) Spectral Calibration
(3) LED Operation Time Clear
43L
43J
434
5.4.15
5.4.4
5.4.4
LED Circuit Board Assembly
9.1.5
(1) LED Light Amount Adjustment

(2) Spectral Calibration
(3) LED Operation Time Clear
43L
43J
434
5.4.15
5.4.4
5.4.4
CCD Unit
9.2.4
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
43E
43F
432
433
441
434
9.4.6
5.4.9
5.4.10
5.4.2
5.4.3
5.5.1
5.4.4
PZR22 Circuit Board
9.4.5
(1) Piezoelectric Voltage Adjustment
9.4.6
Lens Unit
9.3.2
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
Lens Registration
Carrier Inclination Display
Optical Axis Adjustment
Optical Magnification Calibration
Focus Calibration
Mask Position Adjustment
43D
43B
43E
43F
432
433
441
5.4.8
5.4.6
5.4.9
5.4.10
5.4.2
5.4.3
5.5.1
Lens Motor (M202)
9.3.3
(1) Optical Magnification Calibration

(2) Focus Calibration
43F
432
433
5.4.10
5.4.2
5.4.3
Lens Home Position Sensor (D214)
9.3.1
(1) Optical Magnification Calibration

43F
432
433
5.4.10
5.4.2
5.4.3
Conjugate Length Variable Motor

(M201)
9.4.2

432
433
5.4.2
5.4.3
Conjugate Length Drive Gear
9.4.3

432
433
5.4.2
5.4.3
10
Conjugate Length Variable Home

Position Sensor (D211)
9.4.1

432
433
5.4.2
5.4.3
CCD Data Setup

Piezoelectric Voltage Adjustment
Optical Axis Adjustment
Optical Magnification Calibration
Focus Calibration
Mask Position Adjustment
Pixel Correction
Piezoelectric Actuator Operating Time
Clear

No.
Replacement Parts
Ref.
Adjustment Item
Menu
Ref.
11
Conjugate Length Variable Upper Limit

Sensor (D212)
9.4.1

432
433
5.4.2
5.4.3
12
Conjugate Length Variable Lower Limit

Sensor (D213)
9.4.1

432
433
5.4.2
5.4.3
20.2.3 Printer Section

No.
Replacement Parts
Ref.
Adjustment Item
Menu
Ref.
Back Printer Head
11.3.5
(1) Back Printer Head Clearance Adjustment

(2) Back Printing Quantity Clear
45Q
11.3.6
5.6.22
Platen
11.3.7
(1) Back Printer Head Clearance Adjustment
11.3.6
Laser Unit Air Filter
2.3.1
(1) Filter Replacement History
45B
5.6.9
Laser Unit
12.2.1
(1) Main Scanning Position Adjustment/

Laser Beam Sync. Rough Adjustment
(2) Laser Beam Sync. Fine Adjustment Print
(3) G, B Laser (SHG)Optimal Temperature
Setup
(4) Print Condition Upkeep
45H
5.6.15
45J
454
5.6.16
5.6.4
16
Sub-scanning Unit
12.3.1
(1) Nip Roller Data Entry
45M
12.3.1
Subscanning Drive Motor (M305)
12.3.3
(1) Sub-scanning Motor Operation Clear
45Q
5.6.22
Printer Exit Unit
13.1.1
(1) Up/Down Belt Data Entry
45M
12.3.1
Exit Unit Up/Down Belt and Related

parts
(1) Up/Down Belt Height Adjustment
45M
13.1.16
Exit Unit Lower Belt/Pulleys
13.1.14
(1) Lower Belt Height Adjustment
13.1.15
20.2.4 Processor Section

No.
Replacement Parts
Ref.
Adjustment Item
Menu
Ref.
15.2.6
(1) Heater ON Time Clear
46D
5.7.12
PSR Replenisher Filter
16.2.3
(1) Pump Output Measurement/Setting
461
5.7.1
P1R/P2RA/P2RB Replenisher Pump/

Valves
16.2.4
(1) Pump ON Time Clear
46D
5.7.12
PSR Replenisher Pump/Valves
16.2.4
46D
5.7.12
(2) Pump Output Measurement/Setting
461
5.7.1
Auto Washing Pump (PU407)
16.3.1

(2) Auto Cleaning Output Measurement/
Setting
46D
462
5.7.12
5.7.2
Rack Auto Washing Valve
16.3.3
(1) Auto Cleaning Output Measurement/

Setting
462
5.7.2
Dryer Heater (H406)
17.3.3
(1) Heater ON Time Clear
46D
5.7.12
20.2.5 Electrical Section

No.
Replacement Parts
Ref.
Adjustment Item
Menu
Ref.
DC Power Supply
18.2.5
(1) DC Voltage Adjustment
18.2.6
19.6
GHT22 Circuit Board
18.3.5
(1) System Software Reinstallation
4.3
CTC22 Circuit Board
18.3.7
4.3
Main Control Unit
18.4.1
(1) System Software New Installation
4.4
CTP22 Circuit Board
18.5.2
(1) Reposition the jumper plug J2 from 1-2 to

2-3 (backup)
(2) If backup battery has been discharged,
proceed to Starting Up when Battery
Discharged
(3) Data Loading (select All)
18.5.2
18.5.3
45U
5.6.26
4.3
20.3 Index
135 Downstream Perforation Sensor (D103P) (DTE22
Circuit Board) Replacement .................................. 8.2.13
135 Downstream Perforation Sensor LED (D103L)
Replacement ........................................................... 8.1.3
135 Dust Removal Roller Replacement.................... 8.2.15
135 Entrance Pressure Guide Removal/Reinstallation.......
8.1.4
135 Entrance Pressure Guide Section Roller Replacement
8.1.7
135 Entrance Side Dust Removal Roller Replacement ......
8.1.8
135 Frame Sensor (D107P) Replacement................ 8.2.17
135 Frame Sensor LED (D107L) (FSP Circuit Board)
Replacement ........................................................... 8.1.5
135/IX240 Diffusion Box Sensor (D201/D202)
Replacement ........................................................... 9.1.2
135 Leading End Sensor (D101P) Replacement ..... 8.2.16
135 Leading End Sensor LED (D101L) Replacement .... 8.1.2
135 Lower Mask H/F Sensor (D118/D119) (MSB22 Circuit
Board) Replacement ............................................. 8.2.10
135 Upstream Perforation/Check Tape/Rear Fogging/Front
Fogging Sensor (DTF22 Circuit Board) Replacement.....
8.2.18
135 Upstream Perforation/Check Tape/Rear Fogging/Front
Fogging Sensor LED (LEF22 Circuit Board)
Replacement ........................................................... 8.1.6
AC Power Supply Wiring Diagram ............................ 19.3.1
ADC22 Circuit Board Replacement ............................ 9.4.4
Adjustment Jigs ........................................................... 20.1
Anti-Dust Fan 1/2/3 (FAN1/FAN2/FAN3) Replacement.......
12.2.2
AOM Driver Replacement......................................... 12.1.5
APPENDIX ..................................................................... 20
Auto Cleaning Output Measurement/Setting (462)..... 5.7.2
Auto Film Carrier NC100AC (Main Body Section) ......... 8.2
Auto Film Carrier NC100AC (Upper Cover Section)...... 8.1
Auto Film Carrier NC100AC Wiring Diagram.......... 19.3.15
Auto Washing/P1R Stirring System ............................. 16.3
Auto Washing Pump (PU407) Replacement............. 16.3.1
Back Printer Entrance Sensor (D302) Replacement .... 11.3.4

Back Printer Head Clearance Adjustment ................ 11.3.6
Back Printer Head/JNE20 Circuit Board Replacement.......
11.3.5
Back Printer Section .................................................... 11.3
Back Printer Section Feed Roller Replacement ....... 11.2.9
Back Printer Section Guide Plate Roller Replacement.......
11.2.8
Back Printer Set Sensor (D320) Replacement ......... 11.3.3
Back Printer Test (45N)............................................. 5.6.20
Back Printer Unit Removal/Reinstallation ................. 11.3.1
Ball Catch Replacement ............................................. 8.5.7
Belt Tension Adjustment ........................................... 17.2.4

B Laser (B-SHG) Data (45F) .................................... 5.6.13
Block Diagram ............................................................. 19.2
Blur along the periphery ........................................... 6.11.2
Bottom Cover Removal/Reinstallation ........................ 8.2.2
Bottom Inner Cover Removal/Reinstallation............... 8.2.4
Bottom Left Cover Removal/Reinstallation ................. 8.2.3
Brightness Correction (43G)..................................... 5.4.11
Built-in Circuit Breaker (NFB1) Replacement ........... 18.1.2
Calibration print density is too low to be measured .. 6.10.2
Cam Roller Replacement ......................................... 8.3.20
Carrier Adjustment/Maintenance (44) ........................... 5.5
Carrier Base Front Cover Removal/Reinstallation...... 8.5.1
Carrier Base Section ..................................................... 8.5
Carrier Inclination Display (43B)................................. 5.4.6
Carrier Sensor (D123) Replacement.......................... 8.5.4
Carrier Table Removal/Reinstallation ......................... 8.5.3
Carrier Upper Cover Removal/Reinstallation ............. 8.1.1
Cartridge Box Upper/Lower Sensor (D408/D409)
Replacement......................................................... 16.1.4
Cartridge Holder Replacement................................. 8.3.18
Cartridge Setting Sensor (D407) Replacement........ 16.1.6
Cartridge Washing /P1R Stirring Valve Replacement.........
16.3.2
CCD22/ADC22 Circuit Board Wiring Diagram.......... 19.3.3
CCD Data Display (43C) ............................................ 5.4.7
CCD Unit Removal/Reinstallation............................... 9.2.4
Circuit Board Bracket Opening/Closing .................... 15.3.2
Circuit Board Circuit Diagrams .................................... 19.4
Circuit Protector (CP11 to CP14) Replacement ....... 18.1.9
Circuit Protector (CP1 to CP10) Replacement ......... 18.1.5
Circulation Pump Inspection....................................... 2.3.9
Circulation Pump Replacement................................ 15.2.7
Circulation Pump Section Cover Removal/
Reinstallation ........................................................ 15.2.1
Clear Error Log (41E) ................................................. 5.2.7
Clearing All Operation Data (45R)............................ 5.6.23
Clearing Selected Operation Data (46D).................. 5.7.12
Clearing Selected Printer Operation Data (45Q)...... 5.6.22
Color Abnormalities ....................................................... 6.1
Color abnormality general .......................................... 6.1.6
Color becomes worse after calibration. Paper cannot be
fed in Densitometer ............................................... 6.10.3
Color Misalignment........................................................ 6.2
Command (49C)......................................................... 5.9.3
Conjugate Length Variable Gear Replacement .......... 9.4.3
Conjugate Length Variable Motor (M201) Replacement ....
9.4.2
Conjugate Length Variable Section/Circuit Board Section .
9.4
20.3 Index
Conjugate Length Variable Section Home Position Sensor
(D211)/Upper and Lower Limit Sensor (D212 and D213)
Replacement ........................................................... 9.4.1
Control Circuit Board Section ...................................... 18.5
Control Section Exhaust Fan (F317) Replacement .. 18.5.5
Control Strip Processing (423) ................................... 5.3.3
Cover and Electrical Parts ........................................... 12.1
Crossover Rack No.1 Disassembly/Reassembly...... 14.1.1
Crossover Rack No.6 Disassembly/Reassembly...... 14.1.3
Crossover Racks.......................................................... 14.1
Crossover Racks No.2 to No.5 Disassembly/Reassembly..
14.1.2
CTC22 Circuit Board Replacement .......................... 18.3.7
CTC22 Circuit Board Wiring Diagram ....................... 19.3.4
CTP22 Circuit Board Replacement........................... 18.5.2
CTP22 Circuit Board Wiring Diagram ....................... 19.3.5
CTS04 Circuit Board Replacement........................... 17.2.5
Custom Setting Regist/Delete (42M) ........................ 5.3.13
Cutter Drive Motor (M307) Replacement.................. 10.4.4
Cutter Home Position Sensor 1/2 (D312/D313)
Replacement ......................................................... 10.4.3
Cutter Inspection ........................................................ 2.3.2
Cutter Unit.................................................................... 10.4
Cutter Unit Replacement .......................................... 10.4.2
Cyan non-existent or too light ..................................... 6.1.2
CYS22 Circuit Board Removal/Reinstallation............. 8.2.8
D101P (135 leading end sensor) Replacement ....... 8.2.16
D101L (135 leading end sensor LED)
Replacement ........................................................... 8.1.2
D102P (135 upstream perforation sensor)
Replacement ......................................................... 8.2.18
D102L (135 upstream perforation sensor LED)
Replacement ........................................................... 8.1.6
D103P (135 downstream perforation sensor)
Replacement ......................................................... 8.2.13
D103L (135 downstream perforation sensor LED)
Replacement ........................................................... 8.1.3
D104P (IX240 TAP and leading end sensor)
Replacement ......................................................... 8.2.20
D104L (IX240 TAP and leading end sensor LED)
Replacement ........................................................... 8.1.9
D105P (IX240 perforation sensor) Replacement ..... 8.2.19
D105L (IX240 perforation sensor LED)
Replacement ......................................................... 8.1.10
D106P (135 check tape sensor) Replacement......... 8.2.18
D106L (135 check tape sensor LED) Replacement... 8.1.6
D107P (135 frame sensor) Replacement................. 8.2.17
D107L (135 frame sensor LED) Replacement........... 8.1.5
D108P (IX240 rear unexposed frame sensor)
Replacement ......................................................... 8.2.21
D108L (IX240 rear unexposed frame sensor LED)
Replacement ......................................................... 8.1.16
D109P (IX240 front unexposed frame sensor)

Replacement......................................................... 8.2.21
D109L (IX240 front unexposed frame sensor LED)
Replacement......................................................... 8.1.16
D110P (135 rear fogging sensor) Replacement....... 8.2.18
D110L (135 rear fogging sensor LED)
Replacement........................................................... 8.1.6
D111P (135 front fogging sensor) Replacement...... 8.2.18
D111L (135 front fogging sensor LED)
Replacement........................................................... 8.1.6
D112 (Door open/close sensor) Replacement ........ 8.3.3
D113 (IPI sensor) Replacement ............................ 8.3.10
D114 (Supply motor home position sensor)
Replacement......................................................... 8.3.13
D115 (Cartridge sensor) Replacement.................... 8.3.3
D116 (Magnetic reading head) Replacement ........ 8.1.13
D117 (Mask motor home position sensor)
Replacement......................................................... 8.2.12
D118 (135 lower mask H sensor) Replacement .... 8.2.10
D119 (135 lower mask F sensor) Replacement .... 8.2.10
D120 (Upper cover open/close sensor)
Replacement........................................................... 8.2.6
D124 (Input key 1 (<)) Replacement........................ 8.2.7
D125 (Input key 2 (<<)) Replacement ..................... 8.2.7
D126 (Input key 3 (>>)) Replacement ..................... 8.2.7
D127 (Input key 4 (>)) Replacement........................ 8.2.7
D121 (IX240 carrier position sensor)
Replacement........................................................... 8.5.2
D122 (135 carrier position sensor) Replacement .... 8.5.2
D123 (Carrier sensor) Replacement........................ 8.5.4
D201 (135 diffusion box sensor) Replacement........ 9.1.2
D202 (120 diffusion box sensor) Replacement........ 9.1.2
D211 (Conjugate length variable home position sensor)
Replacement........................................................... 9.4.1
D212 (Conjugate length variable upper limit sensor)
Replacement........................................................... 9.4.1
D213 (Conjugate length variable lower limit sensor)
Replacement........................................................... 9.4.1
D214 (Lens home position sensor) Replacement ... 9.3.1
D215 (Shutter home position sensor)
Replacement........................................................... 9.2.5
D301P (Paper splice sensor) Replacement ............. 10.4.1
D301L (Paper splice sensor LED) Replacement ..... 10.4.1
D302P (Back printer entrance sensor)
Replacement......................................................... 11.3.4
D302L (Back printer entrance sensor LED)
Replacement......................................................... 11.3.4
D303P (Register sensor) Replacement ................... 12.4.4
D303L (Register sensor LED) Replacement ........... 12.4.3
D304P (Pre-exposure sensor) Replacement ........... 12.3.6
D304L (Pre-exposure sensor LED) Replacement ... 12.3.7
D305P (Processor entry sensor) Replacement ....... 13.1.6
D305L (Processor entry sensor LED) Replacement 13.1.7
20.3 Index
D306 (Magazine ID sensor 0) Replacement.......... 10.1.6
D311 (Paper end sensor) Replacement................. 10.1.4
D312 (Cutter home position sensor 1)
Replacement ......................................................... 10.4.3
D313 (Cutter home position sensor 2)
Replacement ......................................................... 10.4.3
D314P (Width detecting sensor) Replacement ........ 12.4.5
D314L (Width detecting sensor LED)
Replacement ......................................................... 12.4.7
D315 (Width detecting home position sensor)
Replacement ......................................................... 12.4.2
D316 (Register nip home position sensor)
Replacement ....................................................... 12.4.10
D317 (Sub-scanning nip home position sensor)
Replacement ......................................................... 12.3.4
D319 (Feed nip home position sensor)
Replacement ......................................................... 11.2.3
D320 (Back printer set sensor) Replacement ........ 11.3.3
D321 (Exit section up/down belt home position sensor)
Replacement ......................................................... 13.1.2
D322 (Magazine door detecting interlock switch)
Replacement ......................................................... 10.1.7
D323 (Feed section lower door detecting interlock
switch) Replacement ............................................. 11.1.3
D324A/B(Feed section upper door detecting interlock
switch) Replacement ............................................. 11.1.2
D325A/B(Front upper cover detecting interlock switch)
Replacement ......................................................... 11.1.5
D401 (P1 safety thermostat) Replacement............ 15.2.5
D402 (P2 safety thermostat) Replacement............ 15.2.5
D403 (PS1/2 safety thermostat) Replacement ...... 15.2.5
D404 (PS3/4 safety thermostat) Replacement ...... 15.2.5
D407 (Cartridge setting sensor) Replacement ...... 16.1.6
D408 (Cartridge box upper sensor)
Replacement ......................................................... 16.1.4
D409 (Cartridge box lower sensor)
Replacement ......................................................... 16.1.4
D410 (Replenisher door detecting interlock switch)
Replacement ......................................................... 16.1.3
D411 (Dryer section exit sensor) Replacement ..... 17.1.3
D416A (Dryer unit detecting interlock switch A)
Replacement ....................................................... 17.1.11
D416B (Dryer unit detecting interlock switch B)
Replacement ....................................................... 17.1.12
Darkness Correction (43H)....................................... 5.4.12
Data Backup (417)...................................................... 5.2.6
Data Download (45U) ............................................... 5.6.26
Data Saving (45T)..................................................... 5.6.25
DC Offset Cancel (43K) ............................................ 5.4.14
DC Power Supply Bracket Removal/Reinstallation... 18.2.2

DC Power Supply Replacement ............................... 18.2.5
DC Power Supply Section ........................................... 18.2
DC Power System .................................................... 19.5.1
DC Voltage Adjustment ............................................ 18.2.6
DC Voltage Adjustment ............................................... 19.6
DC Voltage Check List.............................................. 19.6.1
Densitometer and Calibration Print Error .................... 6.10
DI Manager Administrative Setting (41I)................... 5.2.10
Door Drive Assembly Removal/Reinstallation ............ 8.3.5
Door Drive Gear Replacement ................................. 8.3.12
Door Motor (M104) Replacement............................. 8.3.11
Door Open/Close Sensor (D112)/Cartridge Sensor (D115)
(SSB22 Circuit Board) Replacement ...................... 8.3.3
Drive Sprocket/Gear Replacement........................... 14.3.5
Dryer Drive Gear Replacement ................................ 14.3.7
Dryer Fan (F405) Replacement................................ 17.3.2
Dryer Fan/Heater Section............................................ 17.3
Dryer Fan Section Cover Removal/Reinstallation .... 17.3.1
Dryer Heater (H406) Replacement........................... 17.3.3
Dryer Rack Drive Chain Lubrication ......................... 2.3.12
Dryer Rack Drive Chain Replacement...................... 17.1.7
Dryer Rack Drive Gear Replacement ....................... 17.1.5
Dryer Rack Exit Roller Replacement ........................ 17.1.8
Dryer Rack Removal/Reinstallation.......................... 17.1.6
Dryer Rack Roller Inspection/Cleaning ...................... 2.3.3
Dryer Section Cover Detecting Interlock Switch (D416A)
Replacement....................................................... 17.1.11
Dryer Section Cover Removal/Reinstallation ........... 17.1.1
Dryer Section Exit Sensor (D411) Replacement ...... 17.1.3
DRYER/SORTER SECTION .......................................... 17
Dryer Temperature Sensor (TS406) Replacement ... 17.1.4
Dryer Unit .................................................................... 17.1
Dryer Unit Open/Close Detecting Interlock Switch (D416B)
Replacement....................................................... 17.1.12
Dummy Head Opposite Roller Replacement ........... 8.2.24
Dummy Head Replacement ..................................... 8.1.19
Each color shifts (Increments of 0.1mm).................... 6.2.2
Each color shifts perpendicular to feeding direction
(Increments of 1 cm) ............................................... 6.2.1
ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS.............................. 19
Electrical Parts and Circuit Board Layout Diagrams.... 19.1
ELECTRICAL SECTION ................................................ 18
Electrical Section...................................................... 20.2.5
Entrance Feed Roller Replacement ....................... 12.4.17
Entrance Guide Plate Roller Replacement............... 11.2.6
Entrance Nip Roller Replacement .......................... 12.4.14
Entrance Side Feed Roller Replacement ................. 11.2.7
Entrance Side Roller Replacement ........................ 17.1.10
Error Indication Rule...................................................... 3.1
Error Information Check (415) .................................... 5.2.4
Evaporation Correction Rate Setting (465)................. 5.7.5
20.3 Index
Exit Drive Motor (M306)/Gear Replacement............. 13.1.4
Exit Feed Roller Replacement ................................ 11.2.11
Exit Feed Roller Replacement ................................ 12.4.18
Exit Guide Plate Roller Replacement ..................... 11.2.10
Exit Nip Roller Replacement................................... 12.4.15
Exit Pressure Guide Removal/Reinstallation ............ 8.1.20
Exit Pressure Guide Section Roller Replacement .... 8.1.21
Exit Section Up/Down Belt Home Position Sensor (D321)
Replacement ......................................................... 13.1.2
Exit Section Up/Down Belt Motor (M314) Replacement .....
13.1.3
Explorer (410B)........................................................... 5.9.2
Exposure Section Temperature Sensor (THA1)
Replacement ......................................................... 12.3.9
Exposure Section Wiring Diagram (Laser Unit) ...... 19.3.12
Exposure Section Wiring Diagram (Sensors and
Mechanical System) ............................................ 19.3.13
F201 (Light source cooling fan) Replacement ......... 9.1.9
F216 (Scanner cooling fan) Replacement ............... 9.2.3
F217 (Image processing section cooling fan 1)
Replacement ......................................................... 18.3.4
F218 (Image processing section cooling fan 2)
Replacement ......................................................... 18.3.4
F301 (Sub-scanning nip motor cooling fan)
Replacement ......................................................... 12.3.8
F306 (Power supply section exhaust fan 1)
Replacement ......................................................... 18.5.6
F307 (Power supply section exhaust fan 2)
Replacement ......................................................... 18.5.6
F308 (Printer suction fan 1) Replacement............. 11.1.7
F311 (Printer exhaust fan 1) Replacement............ 18.3.2
F314 (Laser unit cooling fan) Replacement........... 12.1.2
F317 (Control section exhaust fan)
Replacement ......................................................... 18.5.5
F401 (P1/2 processing tank heater cooling fan)
Replacement ......................................................... 15.2.4
F402 (PS processing tank heater cooling fan)
Replacement ......................................................... 15.2.4
F403 (Processing tank heater cooling fan)
Replacement ......................................................... 15.2.3
F405 (Dryer fan) Replacement .............................. 17.3.2
F406 (Processing tank exhaust fan)
Replacement ......................................................... 18.5.4
FAN1 (Anti-dust fan 1) Replacement...................... 12.2.2
FAN2 (Anti-dust fan 2) Replacement...................... 12.2.2
FAN3 (Anti-dust fan 3) Replacement ..................... 12.2.2
FS401 (P1 solution level sensor) Inspection ............. 2.3.4

FS401 (P1 solution level sensor) Replacement....... 15.1.2
FS402 (P2 solution level sensor) Inspection ............. 2.3.4
FS402 (P2 solution level sensor) Replacement....... 15.1.2
FS403 (PS1 solution level sensor) Inspection ........... 2.3.4
FS403 (PS1 solution level sensor) Replacement .... 15.1.2
FS404 (PS2 solution level sensor) Inspection .......... 2.3.4
FS404 (PS2 solution level sensor) Replacement ... 15.1.2
FS407 (P1R upper level sensor) Replacement ....... 16.2.8
FS408 (P2RA upper level sensor) Replacement ..... 16.2.9
FS409 (P2RB upper level sensor) Replacement ..... 16.2.9
FS410 (PSR upper level sensor) Replacement ..... 16.2.10
FS411 (P1R lower level sensor) Replacement ........ 16.2.8
FS412 (P2RA lower level sensor) Replacement...... 16.2.9
FS413 (P2RB lower level sensor) Replacement...... 16.2.9
FS414 (PSR lower level sensor) Replacement...... 16.2.10
FS415 (Waste solution level sensor) Inspection........ 2.3.5
FS415 (Waste solution level sensor)
Replacement......................................................... 15.3.3
Feed Belt/Pulley Replacement ................................. 17.1.2
Feed Drive Motor 1 (M302) Replacement ................ 11.2.5
Feed Drive Motor 2 (M303) Replacement ................ 11.2.4
Feed Motor Cover Removal/Reinstallation ............... 8.2.26
Feed Motor (M101) Replacement............................. 8.2.27
Feed Nip Cam Shaft Replacement......................... 11.2.12
Feed Nip Home Position Sensor (D319) Replacement ......
11.2.3
Feed Nip Motor (M313) Replacement ...................... 11.2.2
Feed Roller/IX240 Drive Belt Replacement.............. 8.2.28
Feed Section Cover ..................................................... 11.1
Feed Section Front Cover Removal/Reinstallation ... 11.1.4
Feed Section Lower Door Detecting Interlock Switch
(D323) Replacement............................................. 11.1.3
Feed Section Roller Replacement............................ 17.1.9
Feed Section Upper Door Detecting Interlock Switch
(D324) Replacement............................................. 11.1.2
Feed Unit ..................................................................... 11.2
Feed Unit Removal/Reinstallation ............................ 11.2.1
FILM CARRIER SECTION ............................................... 8
Film Guide Replacement............................................ 8.4.4
Film Lane Changing Linkage Disassembly/Reassembly....
8.5.9
Film Mask Replacement........................................... 8.1.22
Filter Replacement History (45B) ............................... 5.6.9
Fine Adjustment of the Print Mag.Setting (42D)......... 5.3.7
Focus Calibration (432) .............................................. 5.4.2
Focus Position Adjustment (433)................................ 5.4.3
Focus Problems........................................................... 6.11
Fogged magenta ........................................................ 6.1.4
20.3 Index
Frame Misalignment ...................................................... 6.5
Frame misalignment in both monitor and print ........... 6.5.1
Frame misalignment in prints, OK in monitor.............. 6.5.2
Front Feed Rubber Belt Replacement .................... 12.3.11
Front Lower Cover Removal/Reinstallation............... 18.1.1
Front Upper and Lower Connector Cover Removal/
Reinstallation......................................................... 15.2.2
Front Upper Cover Detecting Interlock Switch (D325A/B)
Replacement ......................................................... 11.1.5
G, B Laser (SHG) Optimal Temperature Setup (454) ..... 5.6.4

Gear Bracket Removal/Reinstallation ......................... 8.5.5
Gear Replacement ..................................................... 8.5.6
Ghost .......................................................................... 6.1.5
GHT22/GIA22/GPA22 Circuit Board Replacement... 18.3.5
G Laser (G-SHG) Data (45E) ................................... 5.6.12
GMB22 Circuit Board Replacement.......................... 18.3.6
Graininess and Jaggedness .......................................... 6.6
Guide Assembly Removal/Reinstallation .................. 8.3.17
Guide Plate Removal/Reinstallation ....................... 12.4.16
H401 (P1 processing tank heater) Inspection .......... 2.3.11
H401 (P1 processing tank heater) Replacement ..... 15.2.6
H402 (P2 processing tank heater) Inspection .......... 2.3.11
H402 (P2 processing tank heater) Replacement ..... 15.2.6
H403 (PS1/2 processing tank heater) Inspection .... 2.3.11
H403 (PS1/2 processing tank heater)
Replacement ......................................................... 15.2.6
H404 (PS3/4 processing tank heater) Inspection .... 2.3.11
H404 (PS3/4 processing tank heater)
Replacement ......................................................... 15.2.6
H406 (Dryer section heater) Replacement .............. 17.3.3
Help Update (492) ...................................................... 5.8.2
Holiday File Registration/Delete (42N) ..................... 5.3.14
Hose Connection ...................................................... 15.2.8
Image Abnormality Analyzer (493) ............................. 5.8.3
Image Correction Setup (42C).................................... 5.3.6
Image Processing Circuit Board Bracket Opening/Closing
18.3.1
Image Processing Circuit Board Section ..................... 18.3
Image Processing Circuit Board Wiring Diagram ... 19.3.14
Image Processing Section Cooling Fan 1/2 (F217/F218)
Replacement ......................................................... 18.3.4
Indicator Lamp (L101) Replacement .......................... 8.2.5
Ink Ribbon Drive Gear Replacement ........................ 11.3.2
Input Check (431) ....................................................... 5.4.1
Input Key 1 to 4 (D124 to D127) Replacement ........... 8.2.7
Input Power Supply Section...................................... 19.1.1
Installation (46F) ....................................................... 5.7.14
Installation Information Confirmation (416)................. 5.2.5
Installation Information Setup (41F)............................ 5.2.8
I/O Check (43A) .......................................................... 5.4.5
IPI Sensor (D113) (SSA22 Circuit Board) Replacement ....

8.3.10
IPI Unit Disassembly/Reassembly............................ 8.3.16
IX240/135 Carrier Position Sensor (D121/D122)
Replacement........................................................... 8.5.2
IX240 Dust Removal Roller Replacement ................ 8.2.22
IX240 Entrance Pressure Guide Removal/Reinstallation ...
8.1.15
IX240 Entrance Pressure Guide Section Roller
Replacement......................................................... 8.1.17
IX240 Entrance Side Dust Removal Roller Replacement ..
8.1.18
IX240 Guide Roller Replacement............................. 8.2.25
IX240 Perforation Sensor (D105P) Replacement..... 8.2.19
IX240 Perforation Sensor LED (D105L) Replacement .......
8.1.10
IX240 Rear/Front Unexposed Frame Sensor (D108P/
D109P) (DTB22 Circuit Board) Replacement ....... 8.2.21
IX240 Rear/Front Unexposed Frame Sensor LED (D108L/
D109L) (LEB22 Circuit Board) Replacement ........ 8.1.16
IX240 TAP & Leading End Sensor (D104P) (DTG22 Circuit
IX240 TAP & Leading End Sensor LED (D104L)
Replacement........................................................... 8.1.9
Jaggedness in large-size prints/Jaggedness of
straight line.............................................................. 6.6.2
JML22 Circuit Board Replacement........................... 12.1.4
Keyboard Replacement .............................................. 7.2.3
L101 (Indicator lamp) Replacement ......................... 8.2.5
LH201 (Peltier element) Replacement ........................ 9.1.6
Laser Beam Sync. Fine Adjustment Print (45J)........ 5.6.16
Laser Exposure Check (45C) ................................... 5.6.10
Laser History Display (45K)...................................... 5.6.17
Laser Unit .................................................................... 12.2
Laser Unit Air Filter Replacement .............................. 2.3.1
Laser Unit Cooling Fan (F314) Replacement ........... 12.1.2
Laser Unit Removal/Reinstallation ........................... 12.2.1
LDA22 Circuit Board Replacement........................... 18.3.9
LDD22 Circuit Board Replacement ........................ 18.3.10
LDD22 Circuit Board Wiring Diagram....................... 19.3.6
Leakage Breaker (NFB2 to NFB4) Replacement ..... 18.1.4
Leakage Breaker (NFB2 to NFB4) Test .................... 18.1.3
LED Circuit Board Assembly Replacement ................ 9.1.5
LED Circuit Board Replacement .............................. 18.2.3
LED Light Amount Adjustment (43L)........................ 5.4.15
Left Cover Removal/Reinstallation ........................... 11.1.1
Lens Drive Motor (M202) Replacement ..................... 9.3.3
Lens Home Position Sensor (D214) Replacement..... 9.3.1
Lens Registration (43D) ............................................. 5.4.8
Lens Unit ....................................................................... 9.3
20.3 Index
Lens Unit Removal/Reinstallation............................... 9.3.2
Light Source Assembly Removal/Reinstallation ......... 9.1.3
Light Source Cooling Fan (F201) Replacement ......... 9.1.9
Light Source Section ..................................................... 9.1
Light Source Section Cover Removal/Reinstallation .. 9.1.7
Light Source Unit Removal/Reinstallation .................. 9.1.1
Light Table (Optional) Replacement............................ 7.2.4
List of LEDs, Fuses and Destinations for Each DC
Power Supply Unit .................................................... 19.5
List of the LEDs and DC Voltages on the CTC22
Circuit Board.......................................................... 19.5.5
List of the LEDs and DC Voltages on the CTP22
Circuit Board.......................................................... 19.5.4
List of the LEDs and DC Voltages on the CYS22
Circuit Board.......................................................... 19.5.6
List of the LEDs and DC Voltages on the PAC22
Circuit Board.......................................................... 19.5.2
List of the LEDs and DC Voltages on the PDC22
Circuit Board.......................................................... 19.5.3
Lower Exit Belt Bracket Removal/Reinstallation ..... 13.1.11
Lower Exit Belt Height Adjustment ......................... 13.1.16
Lower Exit Belt/Pulley Replacement ....................... 13.1.15
Lower Pulley Drive Belt Replacement..................... 13.1.14
Low Volume Setup (466)............................................. 5.7.6
LTC22 Circuit Board Bracket Removal/Reinstallation ..... 9.1.8
LTC22 Circuit Board Replacement ........................... 9.1.10
LTC22 Circuit Board Wiring Diagram ........................ 19.3.7
M101 (Feed motor) Replacement............................ 8.2.27
M102 (Supply motor) Replacement........................... 8.3.9
M103 (Mask motor) Replacement ........................... 8.2.14
M104 (Door motor) Replacement ............................ 8.3.11
M201 (Conjugate length variable motor)
Replacement ........................................................... 9.4.2
M202 (Lens drive motor) Replacement ..................... 9.3.3
M203 (Shutter drive motor) Replacement ................. 9.2.6
M301 (Paper feed motor) Replacement................... 10.3.2
M302 (Feed drive motor 1) Replacement ................ 11.2.5
M303 (Feed drive motor 2) Replacement ................ 11.2.4
M304 (Register drive motor) Replacement............ 12.4.12
M305 (Sub-scanning drive motor) Replacement ..... 12.3.3
M306 (Exit drive motor) Replacement ..................... 13.1.4
M307 (Cutter drive motor) Replacement ................. 10.4.4
M309 (Register nip motor) Replacement............... 12.4.11
M310 (Width detecting drive motor)
Replacement ....................................................... 12.4.13
M311 (Sub-scanning drive motor) Replacement ... 12.3.10
M313 (Feed nip motor) Replacement ...................... 11.2.2
M314 (Exit section up/down belt motor)
Replacement ......................................................... 13.1.3
M401 (Processor drive motor) Replacement ........... 14.3.2
M402 (Replenisher cartridge opening drive motor)
Replacement ......................................................... 16.1.7
M404 (Sorter drive motor) Replacement ................. 17.2.1

MG101 (Magnetic writing head) Replacement ......... 8.1.14
Magazine Door Detecting Interlock Switch (D322)
Replacement......................................................... 10.1.7
Magazine Drive Gear Replacement ......................... 10.1.2
Magazine ID Sensor (D306 to 310) Replacement.... 10.1.6
Magazine ID Sensor Section Cover Removal/
Reinstallation ........................................................ 10.1.5
Magazine Setting Bevel Gear Replacement............. 10.2.3
Magazine Table Front Cover Removal/Reinstallation ... 10.2.1
Magazine Table Setting Gear Replacement ............. 10.2.2
Magazine Table Unit Removal/Reinstallation ........... 10.2.4
Main Control Unit Replacement ............................... 18.4.1
Main Control Unit Section............................................ 18.4
Main Control Unit Wiring Diagram ............................ 19.3.9
Main Scanning Position Adjustment/Laser Beam Sync.
Rough Adjustment (45H) ...................................... 5.6.15
MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION................................ 2
Maintenance and Inspection ......................................... 2.3
MAINTENANCE MENU.................................................... 5
Maintenance Schedule.................................................. 2.1
Manual Negative Carrier M69D (Optional) .................... 8.6
Mask Motor Home Position Sensor (D117) (SSE22 Circuit
Mask Motor (M103) Replacement ............................ 8.2.14
Mask Position Adjustment (441)................................. 5.5.1
MENU............................................................................... 1
Menu Table .................................................................... 1.1
Message Icon ............................................................. 3.1.2
Message Number ....................................................... 3.1.1
MESSAGES AND ACTIONS............................................ 3
Messages and Actions .................................................. 3.2
MNC Circuit Board Replacement ............................... 8.6.1
Monitor .......................................................................... 7.1
Monitor Adjustment (426) ........................................... 5.3.5
Monitor Frame Ratio Setup (448) ............................... 5.5.3
Monitor Replacement ................................................. 7.1.1
Monotone Correction Setting (42G) ........................... 5.3.9
Mouse/Keyboard ........................................................... 7.2
Mouse Replacement .................................................. 7.2.1
NC100AC Carrier Installation Information Display (44D) ...
5.5.6
NC100AC Carrier Installation Information Setup (44E) ......
5.5.7
NC100AC Fixed Feeding Setup (44R) ..................... 5.5.12
NC100AC Input Check (442)...................................... 5.5.2
NC100AC I/O Check (44F)......................................... 5.5.8
NC100AC Machine Data Setup (44K) ........................ 5.5.9
NC100AC Magnetic Information Reading (44M) ...... 5.5.10
NC100AC Magnetic Verify (44N) .............................. 5.5.11
NC100AC Sensor Calibration (44A) ........................... 5.5.4
NC100AC Sensor Calibration Information (44C)........ 5.5.5
20.3 Index
Negative Mask Adjustment ......................................... 8.6.4
Negative Mask Detection Pin Replacement ............... 8.6.3
Negative Press Solenoid (S10) Replacement ............ 8.6.2
Nest Section .................................................................. 8.3
Nest Section Cover Removal/Reinstallation ............... 8.3.1
Nest Unit Removal/Reinstallation ............................... 8.3.4
New Installation ............................................................. 4.4
Nip Belt Replacement ............................................. 12.3.13
Nip Roller Replacement............................................ 10.1.3
Nip Roller Replacement.......................................... 12.3.14
Noise Filter (NF1 to NF3)/Capacitor (C1 to C3)
Replacement ....................................................... 18.1.10
Non-existent image or too light/white print.................. 6.1.1
Operational Procedure................................................... 5.1
Operation Information Display (434) ........................... 5.4.4
OPERATION SECTION .................................................... 7
Operation Section/Carrier Section ............................ 20.2.1
Opposite Roller Replacement................................... 8.2.23
Optical Axis Adjustment (43E) .................................... 5.4.9
Optical Magnification Calibration (43F)..................... 5.4.10
Others .......................................................................... 6.13
Overall blur................................................................ 6.11.1
Overall graininess ....................................................... 6.6.1
PU401 (P1 circulation pump) Inspection .................... 2.3.9
PU401 (P1 circulation pump) Replacement ............ 15.2.7
PU402 (P2 circulation pump) Inspection .................... 2.3.9
PU402 (P2 circulation pump) Replacement ............. 15.2.7
PU403 (PS1 circulation pump) Inspection.................. 2.3.9
PU403 (PS1 circulation pump) Replacement........... 15.2.7
PU407 (Auto washing pump) Replacement ............. 16.3.1
PU408 (P1R replenisher pump) Replacement ......... 16.2.4
PU409 (P2RA replenisher pump) Replacement....... 16.2.4
PU410 (P2RB replenisher pump) Replacement....... 16.2.4
PU411 (PSR replenisher pump) Replacement......... 16.2.4
P1R Tank Replacement .......................................... 16.2.11
P1R Upper/Lower Level Sensor (FS407/FS411)
Replacement ......................................................... 16.2.8
P2RA/P2RB Tank Replacement ............................. 16.2.12
P2RA/P2RB Upper/Lower Level Sensor Replacement ......
16.2.9
PAC22 Circuit Board Circuit Diagram ....................... 19.4.1
PAC22 Circuit Board Replacement......................... 18.1.12
PAC22 Circuit Board Wiring Diagram ....................... 19.3.8
Paint (410A)................................................................ 5.9.1
Paper Condition Setup (421) ...................................... 5.3.1
Paper Condition Method Setup (42J) ....................... 5.3.10

Paper Condition Setup Table (LUT) Copy (45L) ....... 5.6.18
Paper End Sensor (D311) Replacement .................. 10.1.4
Paper End Sensor Plate Replacement..................... 10.1.1
Paper Feed (455) ....................................................... 5.6.5
Paper Feed Check (494) ............................................ 5.8.4
Paper Feed Length Adjustment (452) ........................ 5.6.2
PAPER FEED SECTION ................................................ 11
Paper Magazine .......................................................... 10.1
Paper Magazine Registration (451)............................ 5.6.1
Paper Magazine Table ................................................. 10.2
Paper scratch general ................................................ 6.3.3
Paper Splice Sensor (D301) Replacement............... 10.4.1
Paper Supply Drive Belt Replacement ..................... 10.3.3
Paper Supply Drive Section......................................... 10.3
Paper Supply Drive Unit Removal/Reinstallation...... 10.3.1
Paper Supply Motor (M301) Replacement ............... 10.3.2
PAPER SUPPLY SECTION ............................................ 10
PDC22 Circuit Board Circuit Diagram ...................... 19.4.2
PDC22 Circuit Board Replacement.......................... 18.5.1
PDC22 Circuit Board Wiring Diagram .................... 19.3.10
Peltier Element (LH201) Replacement ....................... 9.1.6
Periphery blur ........................................................... 6.11.3
Piezo Electric Voltage Adjustment .............................. 9.4.6
Platen Replacement ................................................. 11.3.7
Plug-in Connector (on Frame) Replacement............ 9.1.11
Plug-in Connector (on Light Source Unit) Replacement ....
9.1.4
Plug-in Connector Replacement .............................. 8.2.29
Plug-in Connector Replacement ................................ 8.5.8
Plug-in Connector Replacement ................................ 8.6.5
Plug-in Connector Section Cover Removal/Reinstallation..
8.2.1
Potentiometers Used to Adjust the DC Power
Supply Voltages .................................................... 19.6.2
Power Supply Input Section ........................................ 18.1
Power Supply Section Bracket Removal/Reinstallation......
18.1.6
Power Supply Section Exhaust Fan 1 (F306/F307)
Replacement......................................................... 18.5.6
Precut Length Setting (45V) ..................................... 5.6.27
Pre-exposure Sensor (D304P) Replacement ........... 12.3.6
Pre-exposure Sensor LED (D304L) Replacement ... 12.3.7
Preparing Processing Solutions (CP-48S) with 10L kit ......
15.4.5
Preparing Processing Solutions (CP-48S) with 4.2L kit .....
15.4.6
Print Condition Setup and Check (42)........................... 5.3
Printer Adjustment/Maintenance (45)............................ 5.6
Printer Exhaust Fan 1/2 (F311/F312) Replacement ..... 18.3.2
Printer Exhaust Fan 2 (F313) Replacement ............. 18.3.3
Printer Exhaust Fan 3/4 (F315/F316) Replacement ..... 12.1.3
PRINTER EXIT SECTION.............................................. 13
20.3 Index
Printer Exit Unit............................................................ 13.1
Printer Exit Unit Removal/Reinstallation ................... 13.1.1
Printer Input Check (457)............................................ 5.6.7
Printer I/O Check (45A) .............................................. 5.6.8
Printer Mechanical Fine Adjustment (45M) .............. 5.6.19
Printer Operation Data Display (45P) ....................... 5.6.21
Printer Rear Cover Removal/Reinstallation .............. 18.2.1
Printer Rear Section ................................................. 19.1.2
Printer Section .......................................................... 20.2.3
Printer Suction Fan 1/2 (F308/F309) Replacement .. 11.1.7
Printer Suction Fan 3 (F310) Replacement .............. 11.1.6
Printer Temperature Display (456) .............................. 5.6.6
Print Size Setup (424) ................................................ 5.3.4
Processing Chemical Handling Precautions............. 15.4.1
Processing Rack Drive Gear Lubrication.................... 2.3.6
Processing Rack Roller Inspection ........................... 2.3.10
Processing Racks ........................................................ 14.2
Processing Rack Washing and Processing Solution
Draining ................................................................. 15.4.2
PROCESSING SOLUTION CIRCULATION SYSTEM.... 15
Processing Solution Level Sensor Inspection............. 2.3.4
Processing Solution Replacement............................... 15.4
PROCESSING SOLUTION REPLENISHMENT
SYSTEM ..................................................................... 16
Processing Solution Replenishment System ............... 16.2
Processing Tank Exhaust Fan (F406) Replacement ..... 18.5.4
Processing Tank Heater/Circulation Pump Section ..... 15.2
Processing Tank Heater Cooling Fan (F401/F402)
Replacement ......................................................... 15.2.4
Processing Tank Heater Cooling Fan (F403) Replacement
15.2.3
Processing Tank Heater Inspection .......................... 2.3.11
Processing Tank Heater Replacement...................... 15.2.6
Processing Tank Temperature Sensor Replacement .... 15.1.1
Processing Tank Washing and Processing Rack
Reinstallation......................................................... 15.4.3
Processing Temperature Setting (463) ....................... 5.7.3
Processor Adjustment/Maintenance (46)....................... 5.7
Processor Drive Bracket Removal/Reinstallation ..... 14.3.4
Processor Drive Chain Lubrication ............................. 2.3.7
Processor Drive Chain Replacement........................ 14.3.8
Processor Drive Idler Sprocket Replacement ........... 14.3.6
Processor Drive Motor Bracket Removal/Reinstallation .....
14.3.1
Processor Drive Motor Driver Replacement ............. 14.3.3
Processor Drive Motor (M401) Replacement ........... 14.3.2
Processor Drive System .............................................. 14.3
Processor Entry Sensor (D305P) Replacement ....... 13.1.6
Processor Entry Sensor LED (D305L) Replacement.... 13.1.7
Processor Input Check (468) ...................................... 5.7.8
Processor I/O Check (46A)......................................... 5.7.9
Processor Operating Condition Setup (46B) ............ 5.7.10
Processor Operation Data Display 2 (46E)............... 5.7.13
Processor Operation Data Display (46C) ................. 5.7.11

Processor Rear Cover Removal/Reinstallation ........ 15.3.1
Processor Rear Section ........................................... 19.1.3
PROCESSOR SECTION ............................................... 14
Processor Section .................................................... 20.2.4
Processor Temperature Calibration (467)................... 5.7.7
Processor Temperature Check (422).......................... 5.3.2
Production Information 1 (411)................................... 5.2.1
Production Information 2 (412)................................... 5.2.2
PSR Tank Replacement ......................................... 16.2.13
PSR Upper/Lower Level Sensor (FS410/FS414)
Replacement....................................................... 16.2.10
Pulse Motor Driver Replacement ............................. 18.3.8
PWR22 Circuit Board Replacement ......................... 18.2.4
PWR22 Circuit Board Wiring Diagram...................... 19.3.2
PZR22 Circuit Board Wiring Diagram..................... 19.3.11
PZR22 (Piezo Power Supply) Circuit Board Replacement .
9.4.5
Rack Auto Washing Valve Replacement................... 16.3.3
Rack Center Guide Replacement............................. 14.2.4
Rack Drive Shaft Removal/Reinstallation ................. 14.2.3
Read Head Circuit Board Replacement ................... 8.1.12
Reading Magnetic Head (D116) Replacement......... 8.1.13
Rear Feed Rubber Belt Replacement .................... 12.3.12
Rear Lower Connector Cover Removal/Reinstallation .......
16.2.7
Rear Upper Connector Cover Removal/Reinstallation .......
16.2.6
Red paper scratches at the leading end of black print .... 6.3.1
Register Drive Motor (M304) Replacement ............ 12.4.12
Register Nip Home Position Sensor (D316) Replacement.
12.4.10
Register Nip Motor (M309) Replacement............... 12.4.11
Register Sensor (D303P) Replacement ................... 12.4.4
Register Sensor LED (D303L) Replacement ........... 12.4.3
REGISTRATION AND EXPOSURE SECTIONS ............ 12
Registration Unit.......................................................... 12.4
Registration Unit Removal/Reinstallation ................. 12.4.1
Regular Maintenance and Inspection Table .................. 2.2
Regular unevenness in feed direction (mm spacing) .... 6.12.2
Regular unevenness perpendicular to feeding
direction (mm spacing).......................................... 6.12.1
Reinstallation................................................................. 4.3
Relay (K1 to K6) Replacement ................................. 18.1.7
Repeated calibrations do not improve the result ...... 6.10.1
Replenisher Box Door Lock Manual Releasing ........ 16.1.2
Replenisher Cartridge Box Removal/Reinstallation...... 16.1.5
Replenisher Cartridge Opening Drive Motor (M402)
Replacement......................................................... 16.1.7
Replenisher Cartridge Opening Gear Replacement..... 16.1.8
Replenisher Cartridge Section .................................... 16.1
Replenisher Cartridge Washing Nozzle Cleaning ...... 2.3.8
20.3 Index
Replenisher Door Detecting Interlock Switch (D410)
Replacement ......................................................... 16.1.3
Replenisher Filter Replacement ............................... 16.2.3
Replenisher Pump Bracket Removal/Reinstallation...... 16.2.2
Replenisher Pump Output Measurement/Setting (461)......
5.7.1
Replenisher Pump Replacement .............................. 16.2.4
Replenisher Pump Section Cover Removal/Reinstallation .
16.2.1
Replenisher Pump Valve Replacement .................... 16.2.5
Replenisher Rate Setting (464) .................................. 5.7.4
Replenishing Section Cover Removal/Reinstallation .... 16.1.1
Required Adjustments after Parts Replacement.......... 20.2
Reversion....................................................................... 4.5
R Laser (R-LD) Data (45D)....................................... 5.6.11
Roller Nip Cam Arm Replacement ......................... 12.4.20
Roller Nip Cam Shaft Replacement........................ 12.4.19
Roller Replacement .................................................. 14.2.2
S101 (Pressure solenoid) Replacement .................... 8.2.9
S301 (Back printer drive solenoid 1) (Printer head 1)
Replacement ......................................................... 11.3.5
S302 (Back printer drive solenoid 2) (Printer head 2)
Replacement ......................................................... 11.3.5
S401 (P1 rack auto washing valve)
Replacement ......................................................... 16.3.3
S402 (P2 rack auto washing valve)
Replacement ......................................................... 16.3.3
S403 (PS1/2 rack auto washing valve)
Replacement ......................................................... 16.3.3
S404 (PS3/4 rack auto washing valve)
Replacement ......................................................... 16.3.3
S407 (P1R cartridge washing valve)
Replacement ......................................................... 16.3.2
S408 (P2RA cartridge washing valve)
Replacement ......................................................... 16.3.2
S409 (P2RB cartridge washing valve)
Replacement ......................................................... 16.3.2
S410 (P1R stirring valve) Replacement................... 16.3.2
SW (Start switch) Replacement .......................... 18.3.11
Safety Thermostat Replacement .............................. 15.2.5
Scanner Adjustment/Maintenance (43) ......................... 5.4
Scanner Cooling Fan (F216) Replacement ................ 9.2.3
Scanner Front Cover Unit Removal/Reinstallation...... 9.2.1
Scanner Rear Cover Removal/Reinstallation ............. 9.2.2
SCANNER SECTION ....................................................... 9
Scanner Section ............................................................ 9.2
Scanner Section ....................................................... 20.2.2
Scanner Section ....................................................... 19.1.4
Scanning Position/Scanning Home Position Parameter
Setup (45G)........................................................... 5.6.14
Scratches....................................................................... 6.3
Scratch restoration malfunction or image scratch

general .................................................................... 6.3.2
Self-Diagnostic (49)....................................................... 5.8
Sensor Cover Removal/Reinstallation ...................... 12.3.5
Set Lever Assembly Removal/Reinstallation .............. 8.3.6
Set Lever Stopper Replacement .............................. 8.3.19
Setup confirmation when developer degraded
(Developer Degradation) ....................................... 6.13.1
Shipping Information Reference (41G)....................... 5.2.9
Shop Logo Regist/Delete (42K)................................ 5.3.11
Shutter Drive Motor (M203) Replacement.................. 9.2.6
Shutter/Gear Replacement......................................... 9.2.7
Shutter Home Position Sensor (D215) Replacement ..... 9.2.5
Side Register Calibration (45S) ................................ 5.6.24
Simple Upgrade............................................................. 4.1
SOFTWARE INSTALLATION ........................................... 4
Solenoid (S101) Replacement ................................... 8.2.9
Solution Level Sensor Replacement ........................ 15.1.2
Solution Preparation Tools and Procedure ............... 15.4.4
Sorter .......................................................................... 17.2
Sorter Belt Replacement .......................................... 17.2.3
Sorter Drive Motor (M404) Replacement ................. 17.2.1
Sorter Full Sensor LED Replacement ...................... 17.2.6
Sorter Full Sensor Replacement .............................. 17.2.7
Sorter Removal/Reinstallation.................................. 17.2.2
Special Film CH Setting (42E).................................... 5.3.8
Special Operations (410)............................................... 5.9
Spectral Calibration (43J) ......................................... 5.4.13
Spool Assembly Removal/Reinstallation .................... 8.3.7
Spool Rack Replacement ......................................... 8.3.14
Spool Replacement .................................................. 8.3.15
Spots ............................................................................. 6.9
SSR (SSR1 to SSR3) Replacement......................... 18.1.8
Stainless Steel Exit Guide Plate Removal/Reinstallation ...
13.1.5
Start Switch Replacement ...................................... 18.3.11
Start Up Procedure When Battery on CTP22 Circuit Board
Discharged............................................................ 18.5.3
Step Down Transformer Replacement.................... 18.1.11
Straight continuous scratch in fixed image
position even if the film is exchanged...................... 6.3.2
(53mm spacing) ...................................................... 6.7.1
(60mm spacing) ...................................................... 6.7.2
Streak perpendicular to feed direction (Black blurred
streak at 13mm of leading end) .............................. 6.7.4
streak at 23mm of trailing end) ............................... 6.7.9
streak at 2mm of leading end) ................................ 6.7.3
Streak perpendicular to feed direction (Pitch streaks
at 48mm of trailing end) ........................................ 6.7.11
20.3 Index
at 52mm and 68mm of trailing end)....................... 6.7.12
at 72mm and 88mm of trailing end)....................... 6.7.13
within 0 to 25mm and at 33mm of trailing end) ..... 6.7.10
within 0 to 40mm of leading end) ............................ 6.7.5
Streak perpendicular to feed direction (White/black
blurred streak at 13mm of trailing end).................... 6.7.7
Streak perpendicular to feed direction (White clear
streak at 13mm of trailing end)................................ 6.7.8
Streak perpendicular to feed direction (White clear
streak at 4mm of trailing end).................................. 6.7.6
Streaks .......................................................................... 6.7
Strip Film Guide Removal/Reinstallation .................... 8.3.2
Sub-scanning Drive Motor (M305) Replacement...... 12.3.3
Sub-scanning Nip Home Position Sensor (D317)
Replacement ......................................................... 12.3.4
Sub-scanning Nip Motor Cooling Fan (F301) Replacement
12.3.8
Sub-scanning Nip Motor (M311) Replacement....... 12.3.10
Sub-scanning Steel Belt Replacement ..................... 12.3.2
Sub-scanning Unit ....................................................... 12.3
Sub-scanning Unit Removal/Reinstallation............... 12.3.1
Sub-tanks .................................................................... 15.1
Supply Motor Bracket Removal/Reinstallation............ 8.3.8
Supply Motor Home Position Sensor (D114) Replacement
8.3.13
Supply Motor (M102) /Gear Replacement .................. 8.3.9
System Operation Setup and Check (41) ...................... 5.2
THA1 (Exposure section temperature sensor)
Replacement ......................................................... 12.3.9
TS401 (P1 processing tank temperature sensor)
Replacement ......................................................... 15.1.1
TS402 (P2 processing tank temperature sensor)
Replacement ......................................................... 15.1.1
TS403 (PS1/2 processing tank temperature sensor)
Replacement ......................................................... 15.1.1
TS404 (PS3/4 processing tank temperature sensor)
Replacement ......................................................... 15.1.1
TS406 (Dryer temperature sensor)
Replacement ......................................................... 17.1.4
Table Top Cover Removal/Reinstallation..................... 7.2.2
Template Regist/Delete (42L) ................................... 5.3.12
Test Pattern Printing (453) .......................................... 5.6.3
Timer Setup (414)....................................................... 5.2.3
Timer Waiting Time Setup (41J) ............................... 5.2.11
Top Inner Cover Removal/Reinstallation................... 12.1.1
Trouble Help (491) ...................................................... 5.8.1
TROUBLESHOOTING FOR ABNORMAL IMAGES ......... 6
Unevenness................................................................. 6.12
Unexposed Frame Detect Level Set (43U) ............... 5.4.16
Update........................................................................... 4.2
Up/Down Arm Removal/Reinstallation ................... 13.1.10
Up/Down Belt Height Adjustment ........................... 13.1.17
Up/Down Belt Motor Bracket Removal/Reinstallation.........
13.1.8
Up/Down Gear Replacement ................................... 13.1.9
Upper Cover Open/Close Sensor (D120) (MSA22 Circuit
Board) Replacement ............................................... 8.2.6
Upper Exit Belt Bracket Removal/Reinstallation..... 13.1.12
Upper Exit Belt/Pulley Replacement ...................... 13.1.13
Upper Guide Disassembly/Reassembly ................... 14.2.1
UPS Battery (Optional) Replacement....................... 18.4.2
Variable Mask Removal/Reinstallation ..................... 8.2.11
Vignetting ...................................................................... 6.4
Vignetting (M69D/Negative) ....................................... 6.4.2
Vignetting (M69D/Reversal) ....................................... 6.4.3
Vignetting (NC100AC) ................................................ 6.4.1
Waste Solution Hose Replacement.......................... 15.3.5
Waste Solution Level Sensor (FS415) Replacement.... 15.3.3
Waste Solution Level Sensor Inspection .................... 2.3.5
Waste Solution System ............................................... 15.3
Waste Solution Tank Replacement........................... 15.3.4
White Border Imprecision .............................................. 6.8
White border imprecision (Inclination) ........................ 6.8.3
White border imprecision (Shifted in feed direction)... 6.8.1
White border imprecision (Shifted perpendicular to
feed direction) ......................................................... 6.8.2
Width Detecting Belt Replacement........................... 12.4.9
Width Detecting Bracket Removal/Reinstallation ..... 12.4.6
Width Detecting Drive Motor (M310) Replacement .... 12.4.13
Width Detecting Guide Shaft Replacement.............. 12.4.8
Width Detecting Home Position Sensor (D315)
Replacement......................................................... 12.4.2
Width Sensor (D314P) Replacement ....................... 12.4.5
Width Sensor LED (D314L) Replacement................ 12.4.7
Winding Gear Replacement ....................................... 8.4.2
Winding Section ............................................................ 8.4
Winding Shaft Disassembly/Reassembly ................... 8.4.3
Winding Unit Removal/Reinstallation ......................... 8.4.1
Wiring Diagrams.......................................................... 19.3
Write Head Circuit Board Replacement ................... 8.1.11
Writing Magnetic Head (MG101) Replacement........ 8.1.14
X-#### Actions ........................................................... 3.1.3
Yellow non-existent or too light ................................... 6.1.3
FUJI PHOTO FILM CO., LTD.

26-30, Nishiazabu 2-chome, Minato-ku, Tokyo 106-8620,Japan
Ref.No.PP3-C917E TD-01.11-F G (SR) Printed in Japan

FRONTIER MINILAB 330 Service Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

FRONTIER MINILAB 330 Service Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

FRONTIER MINILAB 330 Service Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

www.minilablaser.

System Disk Ver.1.0

MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION

MESSAGES AND ACTIONS

TROUBLESHOOTING FOR ABNORMAL IMAGES

FILM CARRIER SECTION

PAPER SUPPLY SECTION

PAPER FEED SECTION

REGISTRATION AND EXPOSURE SECTIONS

PRINTER EXIT SECTION

PROCESSING SOLUTION CIRCULATION SYSTEM

PROCESSING SOLUTION REPLENISHMENT SYSTEM

ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS

Service Manual Appropriations

1.1 Menu Table

P.SET Initial Setting

Special Film CH Select

Print Mode Selection

(3) Scanner Op.

P.Size in Mixed Process

Frame Display Switch

Sort Data Display/Setting

1.1 Menu Table

(4) Image Correction

(5) Printer Op.

Auto Correction ON/OFF

Custom Setting Number

412 Production Information 2

414 Timer Setup

415 Error log

416 Installation Information

417 Data Backup

411 Production Information 1

415 Error Information Check

41E Clear Error Log

41F Installation Information

41G Shipping Information

41J Timer Waiting Time Setup

421 Paper Condition Setup

422 Processor Temperature

423 Control Strip Processing

424 Print Size Setup

426 Monitor Adjustment

42C Image Correction Setup

42D Fine Adjustment of the

42E Special Film Channel

42G Monotone Correction

42J Paper Condition Method

1.1 Menu Table

42L Template Registration/

42M Custom Setting

42N Holiday File Registration/

431 Input Check

432 Focus Calibration

433 Focus Position

434 Operation Information

43A I/O Check

43B Carrier Inclination Display

43C CCD Data Display